BK0220800US.

book 1 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Table of contents
Overview 1
Quick index 2
General information 3
Seat and restraint systems 4
Features and controls 5
Driving safety 6
Comfort controls 7
For emergencies 8
Vehicle care and maintenance 9
Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects 10
Specifications 11
Alphabetical index 12
 [Link] 1 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Instruments and controls

1 Instruments and controls

N00100202560

Headlight leveling switch (if so equipped) P.5-125

Combination headlights and dimmer switch P.5-119

Turn signal lever P.5-125
Front fog light switch (if so equipped) P.5-126

Instrument cluster P.5-81

Active stability control (ASC) OFF switch Sportronic steering wheel paddle shifter
P.5-68, 5-89 (if so equipped) P.5-53

Wiper and washer switch P.5-126

Rear window wiper and washer
switch P.5-130

Engine switch (if so equipped) P.5-16

Steering wheel audio remote control

switches (if so equipped) P.7-37 Cruise control switch
(if so equipped) P.5-70
Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped) P.5-133
Ignition switch (if so equipped)
Tilt & Telescopic steering lever P.5-41 P.5-16, 5-44

Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - airbag (for driver’s seat) P.4-26, 4-32
Horn switch P.5-132 Supplemental restraint system - driver’s knee airbag P.4-33

1-1 Overview
[Link] 2 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Instruments and controls

Mitsubishi Multi-Communication System 1

(if so equipped)
DISPLAY AUDIO (if so equipped)
Refer to the separated owner’s manual.
Audio (if so equipped) P.7-25
Air conditioning P.7-4, 7-9, 7-14, 7-19 Center vents P.7-2

Multi-information meter switch

P.5-84
Key slot (if so equipped) P.5-21

Fuses P.9-24 Side vents P.7-2

Engine hood release lever

Glove compartment P.5-161
P.9-3
Hazard warning flasher switch P.5-126

Heated seat switch Rear window defogger switch P.5-131

(if so equipped)
P.4-6 12V power outlet P.5-157

Gearshift or selector lever P.5-47, 5-49

Fuel tank filler door release
lever P.3-3 Parking brake lever P.9-21
Drive mode-selector (if so equipped)
Cup holder P.5-163
P.5-56

Overview 1-2
 [Link] 3 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Interior

1 Interior
N00100302297

Sun visors P.5-156

Vanity mirror P.5-156
Dome light (rear) (if so equipped) P.5-159
Card holder P.5-156

Dome light (front)/Reading lights

Assist grips P.5-165 P.5-158
Coat hook P.5-165 Sunshade switch (if so equipped)
P.5-38
Bluetooth® 2.0 interface microphone
Cargo area cover (if so equipped) P.5-134
(if so equipped)
P.5-164
Supplemental restraint system
(SRS) - air bag (for front
passenger’s seat) P.4-26, 4-32

Bottle holder P.5-164

Arm rest (if so equipped) P.4-7 Arm rest (if so equipped) P.4-6
Cup holder (if so equipped) Floor console box P.5-162
P.5-164 12V power outlet P.5-157
Rear seat P.4-7 USB input terminal (if so equipped) P.5-153

1-3 Overview
[Link] 4 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Interior

1
Electric remote-controlled outside mirror switch P.5-43

Lock switch
P.5-37
Power door lock
switch P.5-30
Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - curtain airbags
P.4-37
Power window switch P.5-36

Sunshade illumination lamp

Seat belts P.4-11 dimming control switch
(if so equipped) P.5-160
Adjustable seat belt shoulder anchor P.4-16

Inside rearview mirror

P.5-41

Tether anchors for

child restraint system
P.4-21
Front seat P.4-2
Heated seat (if so equipped) P.4-6

Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - side airbag

(for front seats) P.4-37
Cargo room light
P.5-159 Head restraints P.4-7

Overview 1-4
 [Link] 5 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Luggage compartment

1 Luggage compartment
N00100501508

Spare tire P.8-6

Luggage hooks P.5-166

Luggage hooks P.5-166

Hook

Luggage hooks P.5-166

Tools P.8-5 Jack P. 8-5

1-5 Overview
[Link] 6 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Outside

Outside 1
N00100602551

Headlights, low beam

P.5-123, 9-29, 9-31
Power window P.5-36

Windshield wipers P.5-126

Engine hood P.9-3

Fuel tank filler P.3-3

Outside rearview mirrors P.5-42

Side turn-signal lights (if so equipped)
P.5-125, 9-29, 9-34
Front turn signal lights
P.5-125, 9-29, 9-34

Side turn signal lights

P.5-125, 9-29, 9-34

Headlights, high beam

P.5-123, 9-29, 9-32
Front side-marker lights
Parking lights (type 1) (if so equipped)
Front fog lights (if so equipped) P.5-119, 9-29, 9-33
P.5-126, 9-29, 9-35 Daytime running lights (if so equipped)
Parking lights (type 2) (if so equipped)
P.5-119, 9-29, 9-36

Overview 1-6
 [Link] 7 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Outside

1
Antenna P.7-58 Liftgate P.5-31

High-mounted stop light

P.9-29, 9-38 F.A.S.T.-key (Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter) (if
so equipped) P.5-11
Keyless entry system (if so equipped) P.5-24
Rear spoiler
Locking and unlocking P.5-28

Rear window wiper

P.5-130

Rear-view camera
(if so equipped) P.5-79
Tire pressure monitoring system
P.5-75
Changing tires P.8-5
Size of tires and wheels P.9-13
License plate light Tire inflation pressure P.9-17
P.5-119, 9-29, 9-37 Tire rotation P.9-19
Tire chains P.9-20
Back-up light P.9-29, 9-37

Turn signal lights P.5-119, 9-29, 9-36

Tail and stop light/Rear side-marker lights
P.5-119, 9-29, 9-36

1-7 Overview
[Link] 1 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

If this warning light comes on or flashes while you’re driving...

If this warning light comes on or flashes while you’re driving...

2
N00200702175

NOTE
 For information regarding warning displays in the multi-information display, refer to “Multi-information display” on page 5-83.
 These warning lights will come on for a few seconds for a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to “ON” or the operation mode is put in ON.

Warning lights Do this Ref. Page

 Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the engine.

Contact your Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice for assis- P. 5-117
tance.
Charging system warning light
 If this light comes on while driving, check to see that the parking brake is fully
released.
 If this light stays on after releasing the parking brake, immediately stop and check
or the brake fluid level. P. 5-116
 If the brake fluid level is correct, there may be a system malfunction. Avoid hard
Brake warning light braking and high speed, and contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
repair facility of your choice for assistance.

 Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, have the
or engine system checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility
of your choice as soon as possible. If the vehicle is not drivable, contact emergency
P. 5-116
roadside assistance at 1-888-648-7820 (for vehicles sold in U.S.A.) or 1-888-576-
Engine malfunction indicator 4878 (for vehicles sold in Canada), an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer, or local
(“SERVICE ENGINE SOON” or towing company for assistance.
“Check engine light”)

Quick index 2-1

 [Link] 2 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

If this warning light comes on or flashes while you’re driving...

Warning lights Do this Ref. Page
 When this light comes on, the anti-lock braking system is not functioning and only
2 the ordinary braking system is functioning.
 Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the engine.
Test the system as described on page 5-65. P. 5-65
 If the light does not go out after the test, or if it comes on again, we recommend that
Anti-lock braking system warning you have the system checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair
light facility of your choice as soon as possible.

 Immediately have the airbag and the pre-tensioner seat belt system checked at an
P. 4-32
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

SRS warning light

 If the warning light comes on, you should stop and adjust the tires to the proper
inflation pressure as soon as possible.
(See “Tire inflation pressures” on page 9-17.)
Once adjustments have been made, the warning light will go off after a few minutes
of driving.
P. 5-75

Tire pressure monitoring system warn-  If the warning light blinks for approximately 1 minute and then remains continu-
ing light ously illuminated, the system is not operating properly. If the system returns to nor-
mal, the warning light will go off. If the warning light does not go off, have the
vehicle inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

2-2 Quick index

[Link] 3 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

If this problem occurs...

If this problem occurs...

2
N00200900867

Problem Do this Ref. Page

Cannot turn the key.
(except for vehicles equipped
with the F.A.S.T.-key)
Will not turn from “ACC” to “OFF”.
Vehicles with continuously variable transmission (CVT):
P. 5-45
Check the position of the selector lever.
The key cannot be removed unless the selector lever is set to the “P” (PARK) position.

The engine does not start when

the engine switch is pressed.
(for vehicles equipped with the Make sure the F.A.S.T.-key is in the vehicle.
F.A.S.T.-key) Vehicles with manual transaxle:
Press and hold the clutch pedal all the way down, and then press the engine switch while
depressing the brake pedal. P. 5-19
Vehicles with continuously variable transmission (CVT):
Make sure the selector lever is in the “P” (PARK) position, and then press the engine switch
while depressing the brake pedal.

The F.A.S.T.-key does not oper-

Use the emergency key to lock and unlock the door.
ate.
Insert the F.A.S.T.-key into the key slot inside the glove compartment, and then start the P. 5-22
(for vehicles equipped with the
engine or change the operation mode.
F.A.S.T.-key)

Quick index 2-3

 [Link] 4 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

If this problem occurs...

Problem Do this Ref. Page
Cannot shift the selector lever
2 from the “P” (PARK) position. Shift the selector lever while pressing the brake pedal.
P. 5-49
(for vehicles with continuously Check that the ignition switch or the operation mode is in ON.
variable transmission (CVT))
The windows are fogged up.

1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ” or “ ” position. P. 7-8, 7-13,

2. Turn on the blower. 7-18, 7-23

The engine does not start.

The lights do not come on.
P. 8-2,
The lights are dim. Have the battery checked. Recharge or replace as needed.
P. 9-12
The horn does not honk.
The horn sound is weak.

2-4 Quick index

[Link] 5 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

If this problem occurs...

Problem Do this Ref. Page
The engine coolant temperature
display “ ” in the multi-infor-
2
mation display is flashing.
Steam comes out of the engine
compartment.

Type 1

The engine is overheated.

P. 8-4
Carefully stop the vehicle in a safe place.

Type 2

1. Slowly press down on the accelerator pedal to get your vehicle moving again. For an all-
wheel drive vehicle, set the drive mode-selector to the “4WD AUTO” or “4WD LOCK”
If your vehicle becomes stuck in
position and then slowly press down on the accelerator pedal to get your vehicle moving. P. 8-13
sand, mud or snow
2. If there is nothing to stop your tires from slipping, rock your vehicle back and forth to free
it.

WARNING
 When trying to rock your vehicle out of a stuck position, make sure that there are no people nearby. The rocking motion may cause the vehicle to
suddenly lurch forward or backward, possibly injuring bystanders.
 Avoid revving the engine or spinning the wheels. Prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle may result in overheating and transaxle failure.
If your vehicle is still stuck after several rocking attempts, call for help.

Quick index 2-5

 [Link] 6 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

If this problem occurs...

Problem Do this Ref. Page
The brakes are not functioning
2 properly after crossing a puddle Dry out the brakes by driving slowly while lightly pressing the brake pedal.
P. 5-60,
P. 6-5
or stream.
The continuously variable trans-
mission (CVT) makes no shift
change when accelerating. The There may be a problem in the CVT.
initial movement of the vehicle If the or warning lights on the multi-information display will not turn off, or if they P. 5-51
is slow when the vehicle starts come on frequently, please have the vehicle checked at your nearest Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
moving.
(for vehicles with CVT)
A tire is punctured.

1. Park the vehicle in a safe place where the surface is flat and level.
P. 8-5
2. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire.

2-6 Quick index

[Link] 1 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

General information

3
Fuel selection ...................................................................................3-2
Filling the fuel tank ..........................................................................3-3
Modifications to and racing of your vehicle ....................................3-5
Genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts ....................................................3-6
California Perchlorate Materials Requirements ...............................3-6
 [Link] 2 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Fuel selection
oline to minimize fuel-injector fouling and
Fuel selection minimize intake-valve deposits. Detergent
Methanol
N00301001919
gasoline helps keep your engine in tune and
Your vehicle is designed to use unleaded gas- your emission-control system working prop- Do not operate your vehicle on gasoline con-
3 oline only. It is equipped with a fuel tank erly. taining methanol (wood alcohol). Using this
filler pipe especially designed to accept only type of alcohol could adversely affect the
a small diameter unleaded gasoline dispens- vehicle’s performance and damage critical
ing nozzle.
Octane requirement parts of the vehicle’s fuel system.

Your vehicle is designed to operate on

WARNING unleaded gasoline having a minimum octane
Reformulated gasoline
 Gasoline is highly flammable and explo-
number of 87 [(MON+RON)/2] or 91 RON.
sive. You could be burned, seriously Many areas of the country require the use of
injured or killed when handling it. When-
cleaner burning fuel referred to as “Reformu-
ever you refuel your vehicle, stop the Oxygenated gasoline lated Gasoline”.
engine and keep flames, sparks, and
smoking materials away from the vehicle. Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates
Always handle fuel in well-ventilated out- Gasoline sold at some service stations con- and is specially blended to reduce vehicle
door areas. tains oxygenates such as ethanol, although emissions and improve air quality.
the oxygenates may not be identified by those Mitsubishi Motors Corporation strongly sup-
names. Oxygenates are required in some ports the use of reformulated gasoline. Prop-
CAUTION areas of the country. Such fuel can be used in erly blended reformulated gasoline has no
 Using leaded gasoline in your vehicle will your vehicle. adverse effect on vehicle performance or the
damage the engine, catalytic converter, and durability of engine and fuel system.
the oxygen sensors. Also, using leaded gaso- Ethanol (Gasohol)
line is illegal, and will void your warranty
coverage of the engine, catalytic converter,
MMT (methylcyclopentadienyl
and oxygen sensors. A mixture of up to 10% ethanol (grain alco- manganese tricarbonyl)
hol) and 90% unleaded gasoline may be used
in your vehicle, provided the octane number MMT is a manganese-containing metallic
Gasoline detergent additives is at least as high as that recommended for additive that is blended into some gasolines
unleaded gasoline. to increase the octane number. Mitsubishi
In the United States, fuel suppliers are Motors Corporation recommends using gaso-
required by law to add detergents to their gas- lines without MMT.

3-2 General information

[Link] 3 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Filling the fuel tank

Use of gasolines blended with MMT may
adversely affect performance, and cause the
NOTE Filling the fuel tank
 Poor-quality gasoline can cause problems
malfunction indicator on your instrument N00301101923
such as poor starting, stalling during idling,
panel to come on. If this happens, contact an
abnormal engine noise, and poor accelera- WARNING
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a tion. If you experience any of these prob-  Gasoline is highly flammable and explo-
3
repair facility of your choice for assistance. lems, try using a different brand of gasoline. sive. You could be burned, seriously
If the engine malfunction indicator (“SER- injured or killed when handling it. When
VICE ENGINE SOON” or “Check engine
Sulfur in gasoline light”) flashes, have the vehicle inspected as
refueling your vehicle, always turn the
engine off and keep away from flames,
soon as possible by the nearest authorized sparks, and smoking materials. Always
Your vehicle may have been designed to sat- Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility handle fuel in well-ventilated outdoor
isfy California’s low-emission regulations of your choice. areas.
based on clean-burning low-sulfur gasoline.  Repeatedly driving short distances at low  Before removing the fuel tank filler cap,
Gasoline sold in parts of the country other speeds can cause deposits to form in the fuel be sure to get rid of your body’s static
than California is allowed to have a higher system and engine, resulting in poor starting electricity by touching a metal part of the
sulfur content. Using such gasoline could and poor acceleration. If these problems car or fuel pump. Any static electricity on
occur, you are advised to add a detergent your body could create a spark that
adversely affect the vehicle’s catalytic con-
additive to the gasoline when you refuel the ignites fuel vapor.
verter and cause the engine malfunction indi-
vehicle. The additive will remove the depos-  Perform the whole refueling process
cator (“SERVICE ENGINE SOON” or its, thereby returning the engine to a normal
“Check engine light”) to come on. Illumina- (opening the fuel tank filler door, remov-
condition. Be sure to use a Mitsubishi ing the fuel cap, etc.) by yourself; do not
tion of this indicator while you are using Motors Genuine cleaning additive. Using an let any other person near the fuel tank
high-sulfur gasoline does not necessarily unsuitable additive could make the engine filler. If you allowed a person to help you
mean the vehicle’s emission-control system is malfunction. For details, please contact the and that person was carrying static elec-
malfunctioning. Your authorized Mitsubishi nearest authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. tricity, fuel vapor could be ignited.
Motors dealer may suggest you try using a  Do not move away from the fuel tank filler
different, lower-sulfur brand of unleaded gas- until refueling is finished. If you moved
oline to determine whether the problem is away and did something else (for example,
fuel-related. sitting on a seat) part-way through the
refueling process, you could pick up a
fresh charge of static electricity.
 Be careful not to inhale fuel vapor. Fuel
contains toxic substances.

General information 3-3

 [Link] 4 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Filling the fuel tank

3. Open the fuel tank filler pipe by slowly
WARNING turning the fuel tank filler cap counter-
WARNING
 Keep the doors and windows closed while  Since the fuel system may be under pres-
clockwise.
refueling the vehicle. If they were open, sure, remove the fuel tank filler cap
fuel vapor could get into the cabin. slowly. This relieves any pressure or vac-
3 uum that might have built up in the fuel
tank. If the cap is venting vapor or if you
Fuel tank capacity hear a hissing sound, wait until the sound
stops before removing the cap. Otherwise,
All-wheel drive vehicles: 15.8 gal (60 L) fuel may spray out, injuring you or others.
Front-wheel drive vehicles: 15.3 gal (58 L)
5. To fill with fuel correctly depends mainly
Refueling on correct handling of the fuel filler noz-
zle. Do not tilt the nozzle. Insert the noz-
1. Before filling with fuel, stop the engine. 1- Remove zle in the fuel tank filler port as far as it
2. The fuel tank filler is located on the rear 2- Close goes.
driver side of your vehicle.
The fuel tank filler door can be opened CAUTION
4. While filling with fuel, hang the fuel cap  Your vehicle can only be operated using
from inside the vehicle with the fuel tank
cord on the hook located on the inside of unleaded gasoline. Serious engine and cata-
filler door release lever located at the left
the fuel tank filler door. lytic converter damage will result if leaded
side of the driver’s seat.
gasoline is filled into these vehicles, and
consequently, this must never be attempted.

6. When the nozzle stops automatically, do

not try to add more fuel.

CAUTION
 To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not
“top-off” the fuel tank. Spilled fuel could
discolor, stain, or crack the vehicle’s paint-
work. If fuel spills on the paintwork, wipe it
off with a soft cloth.

3-4 General information

[Link] 5 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Modifications to and racing of your vehicle

7. To close, turn the fuel tank filler pipe cap  Modification of any onboard com-
slowly clockwise until you hear clicking Modifications to and racing puter/control module, including repro-
sounds, then gently push the fuel tank of your vehicle gramming, or replacing/adding chips to
filler door closed. N00301600149 any onboard computer/control module
This vehicle should not be modified with 3
WARNING non-Mitsubishi Motors genuine parts.
Review the Warranty and Maintenance Man-
 Make sure the fuel tank filler cap is ual for further details regarding warranty cov-
Mitsubishi Motors designs and manufactures
securely closed. If the fuel cap were loose, erage.
high quality vehicles with an emphasis on
fuel could leak, resulting in a fire.
safety and durability. Modifications using
non-Mitsubishi Motors genuine parts may Installation of accessories
affect the performance, safety and/or durabil-
CAUTION ity of your vehicle, and may violate applica-
N00301700166

 If you need to replace the fuel tank filler cap, ble state and/or federal regulations. CAUTION
use only the cap specified for your model
 Before any electrical or electronic accesso-
vehicle. DAMAGE OR PERFORMANCE PROB- ries are installed, consult an authorized
LEMS RESULTING FROM MODIFICA- Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
TIONS TO OR RACING OF YOUR
NOTE VEHICLE ARE NOT COVERED
 If the fuel tank filler cap is not tight while  The installation of accessories, optional
UNDER WARRANTY. parts, etc., should only be carried out
driving, the engine malfunction indicator
(“SERVICE ENGINE SOON” or “Check within the limits prescribed by law, and in
Examples of modifications to your vehicle
engine light”) may come on when the accordance with the guidelines and warn-
that can cause damage or performance prob-
onboard diagnostic (OBD) system performs ings contained within the documents
a self check. lems include the following:
accompanying this vehicle.
Always tighten the fuel tank filler cap until Only Mitsubishi Motors approved acces-
you hear at least 3 clicks.
 Failure to use Mitsubishi Motors genuine
parts sories should be fitted to your vehicle.
The indicator will go off after driving several
 Failure to use required fuel and fluids  Improper installation of electrical parts
times. If the indicator does not go off, con-
 Failure to use proper size tires and wheels could cause fire. Refer to the “Modifica-
tact your authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer or a repair facility of your choice as  Modification of the fuel, intake, exhaust, tion/alterations to the electrical or fuel
soon as possible. emission, suspension, engine, drive train systems” section within this owner’s man-
or electrical wiring systems ual.

General information 3-5

 [Link] 6 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts

 Using a cellular phone or radio set inside ine parts affects the driving safety of your able from your Mitsubishi Motors dealer are
the vehicle without an external antenna Mitsubishi-vehicle. a wide variety of accessories to personalize
may cause electrical system interference, your new vehicle. Each Mitsubishi Motors
which could lead to unsafe vehicle opera- vehicle has a selection of Mitsubishi Motors
Modification/alterations to the
3 tion.
electrical or fuel systems
authorized accessories to choose from to tai-
 Tires and wheels which do not meet spec- lor your new vehicle to your own personal
ifications must not be used. N00301800138
preference. Your Mitsubishi Motors dealer’s
Refer to the “Specifications” section for Mitsubishi Motors manufactures high quality Parts Manager has information on various
information regarding wheel and tire vehicles with an emphasis on safety. It is audio systems, protection items, as well as
sizes. important to consult an authorized Mitsubishi interior and exterior accessories available for
Motors dealer before installation of any your specific model.
accessory which may involve modification of
WARNING the electrical or fuel systems.
 While driving, do not use a cellular phone California Perchlorate
in a way that hinders safe driving. Any-
thing, including cellular phone usage, that CAUTION Materials Requirements
N00300100017
distracts you from the safe operation of  Please consult an authorized Mitsubishi
your vehicle increases your risk of an acci- Motors dealer concerning any such acces- Certain components of this vehicle, such as
dent. sory fitment or modification. airbag modules, seat belt pretensioners, and
Refer to and follow all state and local laws If the wires interfere with the vehicle body or button cell batteries, may contain perchlorate
in your area regarding cellular phone improper installation methods are used (pro- materials.
usage while driving. tective fuses not included, etc.), electronic Special handling may apply. For additional
devices may be adversely affected, resulting
information, see [Link]/hazardous-
in a fire, vehicle damage, or other accident.
waste/perchlorate.
Important point!

Due to the large number of accessory and Genuine Mitsubishi Motors

replacement parts provided by different man- parts
ufacturers in the market, it is not always pos- N00301400219
sible for an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer to check whether the attachment or Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Parts are
installation of non-Mitsubishi Motors genu- designed and manufactured to meet high stan-
dards of performance, and are recommended
for all of your maintenance needs. Also avail-
3-6 General information
[Link] 1 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Seat and restraint systems

Seats .................................................................................................4-2 4
Seats and restraint systems ..............................................................4-2
Front seats ........................................................................................4-3
Rear seats .........................................................................................4-7
Head restraints .................................................................................4-7
Extending a luggage compartment ..................................................4-9
Seat belts ........................................................................................4-11
Seat belt use during pregnancy ......................................................4-17
Seat belt pre-tensioner and force limiter systems ..........................4-17
Child restraint systems ...................................................................4-18
Maintenance and inspection of seat belts ......................................4-25
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag .............................4-26
 [Link] 2 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Seats

Seats
N00408401522

locks also are safety equipment, which must

1 - Front seat Seats and restraint systems be used correctly.
N00401600153
 To adjust the seat forward or backward  Always check the following before you drive:
Page 4-3 Your vehicle has seat belts and other features
 To adjust the seatbacks  Page 4-4 that help protect you and your passengers in
 That everyone in your vehicle is properly
 To adjust the seat height (Driver’s seat an accident.
wearing their seat belt.
only)  Page 4-5 Seat belts are the most important safety
 That infants and small children are prop-
 Arm rest (if so equipped)  Page 4-6 device. When worn properly, seat belts can
erly secured in appropriate child restraint
 Heated seat (if so equipped)  Page 4-6 reduce the chance of serious injury or death
systems in the rear seat.
in various types of crashes. For added protec-
 That all doors are fully closed and locked.
tion during a severe frontal collision, your
2 - Rear seats  That seatbacks are upright, with head
vehicle has a Supplemental Restraint System
restraints properly adjusted.
(SRS) with airbags for the driver and passen-
 Arm rest (if so equipped)  Page 4-7 gers. The seats, head restraints, and door

4-2 Seat and restraint systems

[Link] 3 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Front seats
Safety equipment cannot prevent injury or
death in all motor vehicle accidents. You can
WARNING To adjust the seat forward or
help reduce the risk of injury or death, how-  To reduce the risk to the driver of serious backward
injury or death during deployment of the
ever, by following the instructions in this N00401900228
driver’s airbag, always properly wear the
manual. seat belt and adjust the driver’s seat as far
Manual seat adjustment
back as possible while maintaining a posi-
4
Front seats tion that still enables you to fully apply the
pedals, easily control the steering wheel,
N00401800399
Pull the seat adjusting lever up and slide the
and safely operate the vehicle. seat forward or backward to the desired posi-
Position the driver’s seat as far back as possi-  To reduce the risk to the front passenger tion. Release the adjusting lever to lock the
ble while maintaining a position that still of serious injury or death during deploy- seat in place.
enables you to fully apply the pedals, easily ment of the passenger’s airbag, always
control the steering wheel and safely operate properly wear the seat belt and adjust the
the vehicle. front passenger’s seat as far back as possi-
ble.
 Always place children 12 years old and
Manual seat Power seat under in the rear seat and use appropriate
adjustment adjustment child restraint systems.

CAUTION
 Make sure that the seat is adjusted by an
adult. If it is adjusted by a child, an unex-
pected accident might occur.
 Do not place a cushion or the like between
your back and the seatback while driving. WARNING
The effectiveness of the head restraints will  To make sure that the seat is securely
be reduced in the event of an accident. locked, try to move it forward or back-
WARNING  When sliding the seats, be careful not to ward without using the adjusting lever.
 Do not attempt to adjust the seat while catch your hand or leg.
driving. This can cause loss of vehicle con-
 When sliding or reclining the seat rearward,
trol and result in an accident.
pay careful attention to the rear seat passen-
 After adjusting the seat, make sure that it gers.
is securely locked into position.

Seat and restraint systems 4-3

 [Link] 4 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Front seats

Power seat adjustment To adjust the seatbacks Power seat adjustment

N00402000268

Operate the switch forward or backward to Operate the switch in the direction of the
move the seat to the desired position. Release Manual seat adjustment arrows to adjust the seatback.
the switch to lock the seat in place.
4 To adjust the seatback, lean forward slightly,
gently pull the seatback lock lever up, then
lean backward to a comfortable position and
release the lever. The seatback will lock in
place.

1- Move forward
1- Forward (toward the front of the vehicle) 2- Move backward
2- Backward (toward the rear of the vehi-
cle)
NOTE
 To prevent the battery from going dead,
NOTE operate the power seat with the engine run-
 To prevent the battery from going dead, ning.
operate the power seat with the engine run-
CAUTION
ning.  The reclining mechanism used in the seat-
back is spring loaded, and will cause the
seatback to return quickly to the vertical
position when the lock lever is operated.
When pulling the lever, sit close to the seat-
back or hold the seatback with your hand to
control its return motion.

4-4 Seat and restraint systems

[Link] 5 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Front seats

WARNING
 To reduce the risk of serious injury or
death in the event of an accident or sud-
den stop, all seatbacks should be kept in
the upright position while the vehicle is in
motion.
Seat belt performance during an accident 4
can be adversely affected if the seatbacks
are reclined. The more a seatback is
reclined, the more likely seat belt perfor-
mance will be adversely affected. If the
seat belt is not properly positioned against 1- Raise 1- Raise or lower the front end of the seat
the body during an accident, there is 2- Lower
increased risk you will slide under the belt
and receive serious injury or death.
Power seat adjustment

To adjust the seat height Operate the switch in the direction of the
(Driver’s seat only) arrows to raise or lower the seat.
N00402100197

NOTE
Manual seat adjustment  To prevent the battery from going dead,
operate the power seat with the engine run-
Operate the lever repeatedly to raise or lower ning.
2- Raise or lower the back end of the seat
the seat.

Seat and restraint systems 4-5

 [Link] 6 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Front seats

Heated seat (if so equipped) WARNING

N00435601405  Persons who are unable to feel tempera-
The heated seats can be operated by pushing ture change or skin pain due to age, ill-
ness, injury, medication, alcohol use,
the switch when the ignition switch or the
fatigue or other physical conditions or
operation mode is in ON. The indicator light
4 (A) will illuminate while the heater is on.
who have sensitive skin may suffer burns
when using the heated seat even at low
temperatures. To reduce the risk of burns,
people with such conditions must use care
when using the heated seat.

3- Raise or lower the entire seat

CAUTION
 Switch off the heated seats when not in use.
Arm rest (if so equipped) Operate the heaters at the “HI” position for
N00402300069 quick heating. After the seat has become
warm, set the heater switch to the “LO” posi-
The lid on the floor console box can be tion to keep it warm. Slight variations in the
moved forward and backward and used as an seat temperature may be felt while using the
arm rest. heated seats. This is caused by the operation
of the heater’s internal thermostat and does
not indicate a malfunction.
 Do not place heavy objects on the seat or
1 (HI) - Heater high (for quick heating) stick pins, needles, or other pointed objects
2 - Heater off into the seat.
3 (LO) - Heater low (to keep the seat warm)  Do not place a blanket, cushion, or other
insulating material on the seat while using
the heater; doing so can cause the heater ele-
ment to overheat.
 When cleaning the seat, do not use benzine,
kerosene, gasoline, alcohol, or other organic
solvents; doing so can cause damage not
only to the surface of the seat, but also to the
heater.

4-6 Seat and restraint systems

[Link] 7 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Rear seats

CAUTION Rear seats Head restraints

 If water or any other liquid is spilled on the N00402500191 N00404300542
seat, allow it to dry thoroughly before
Padded head restraints for the seats can
attempting to use the heater. Turn the heater
off immediately if it appears to be malfunc-
Arm rest (if so equipped) reduce the risk of a whiplash injury if your
vehicle is hit from the rear.
tioning during use.
4
N00403000308

Tilt the arm rest down for use as shown. The head restraints are equipped in the illus-
The arm rest includes a cup holder. (Refer to trated position.
“Cup holder: For the rear seat” on page To maximize the effectiveness of your head
5-164.) restraint, adjust the front seatback to the
upright position, the rear seatback to the nor-
mal seating position, and the head restraint to
the proper position. Sit back against the seat-
back with your head close to the head
restraint.

NOTE
 Never sit on the arm rest.
Doing so could damage the arm rest.

Seat and restraint systems 4-7

 [Link] 8 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Head restraints
 To raise the restraint, pull it straight up.
WARNING  To lower the restraint, push down on it
 Driving without the head restraints in
while pressing the lock knob (A) in the
place can cause you and your passengers
direction shown by the arrow.
serious injury or death in an accident. To
reduce the risk of injury in an accident,  After adjusting the height, push down on
the restraint to make sure it is locked in
4 always make sure the head restraints are
installed and properly positioned when position.
the seat is occupied.
 In order to minimize the risk of a neck
injury due to a rear impact, the front seat-
back must be adjusted to the upright posi-
tion, the rear seatback to the normal
seating position, and the head restraint to WARNING
the proper position before vehicle opera-  To help minimize the risk of neck injury in
tion. The driver should never adjust the the event of an accident, the head
seat while the vehicle is in motion. restraints must be properly installed and
 Never place a cushion or similar device on positioned to proper height before vehicle
the seatback. This can adversely affect operation.
head restraint performance by increasing
the distance between your head and the
restraint.
To install
To remove
Adjustment of the head First check that the head restraint is facing in
Press the lock knob (A) in the direction the right direction as shown in the previous
restraint height shown by the arrows. Then pull the head illustration, and then insert it into the seat-
restraint up and out of the seatback. back. Push the head restraint down while
To reduce the risk of injury in an accident, pressing the lock knob (A) until the restraint
adjust the head restraint height so that the locks into place.
center of the restraint is at your eye level
when seated. Any person too tall for the
restraint to reach their eye level when seated
should raise the restraint to the highest locked
position.
4-8 Seat and restraint systems
[Link] 9 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Extending a luggage compartment

CAUTION WARNING
 Check that the lock knob (A) is extended out  The luggage compartment in the rear of
as shown in the illustration. Then pull the the vehicle should never be used as a play
head restraint up to make sure that it is area by children. All children should be
locked in place and will not come out of the properly restrained in a restraint device
seatback. that offers the maximum protection for
their size and age. Refer to “Child 4
restraint systems” on page 4-18.
 The front passenger seat is equipped with
weight sensors. Depending on the weight
detected, the front passenger airbag is dis-
abled or enabled. When folding the rear
seats forward for increased cargo capac-
Extending a luggage com- ity, the front passenger seat and seatback
must be adjusted to assure they are not
partment contacting the rear seat. In the event the
N00405500105 front seat or seatback is allowed to contact
the folded rear seat, proper operation of
WARNING the front passenger airbag system may be
 Never adjust the seats to extend a luggage affected.
CAUTION compartment while the vehicle is in
motion or on a slope.
 The shape and size of the head restraint dif-
fers according to the seat. Always use the
The seats could move suddenly and cause CAUTION
serious injury or an accident.  In the luggage compartment, do not load the
correct head restraint provided for the seat
 After returning a seatback to its normal luggage higher than the top of the seats and
and do not install the head restraint in the
position, make sure that the seatback is make sure that the luggage is firmly secured.
wrong direction.
firmly secured. If the seatback is not Restricted rear vision or unsecured objects
secured, it could move and cause a serious entering the passenger compartment from the
accident. luggage compartment during sudden brak-
 Do not allow anyone to ride in the luggage ing can cause serious injury or an accident.
compartment while the vehicle is in  Seatbacks should always be folded and put
motion. People who are not properly back into normal position by an adult. Seat
seated and restrained can be seriously adjustments by a child could lead to an unex-
injured or killed in an accident. pected accident.

Seat and restraint systems 4-9

 [Link] 10 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Extending a luggage compartment

CAUTION To fold the seatbacks To return the seatbacks

 When adjusting the seats, be careful not to
catch your hand or leg. Personal injury could 1. If the outboard seat belt has been sepa-
result. CAUTION rated from the seat belt guide (B), insert it
 Before folding the driver’s side rear seat- back into the seat belt guide.
2. Tilt the seatback up until it is locked prop-
4 NOTE
back, detach the center seat belt from the
detachable anchor and retract the center seat erly in position.
belt all the way to the rear trim to prevent
 When the seatback of a front seat is reclined,
return it to the upright position before driv-
damage to the seat belt caused by an object WARNING
in the luggage compartment. For details,
ing.  After returning the seatbacks to their
refer to page 4-14.
upright positions, make sure that the rear
seat belts are in front of the seatbacks, and
Folding the rear seatbacks for- Push the rear seat release button (A) to fold not caught behind the seatbacks.
the seatback forward.
ward The rear outboard seat belt can be separated
N00417801069
from the seat belt guide (B) to help prevent NOTE
The passenger and luggage compartments can damage to the seat belt while the seatback is  If the seat belt locks up and cannot be pulled
be joined by folding the seatback forward. folded. out, pull it once with force and let it retract
This is useful for carrying long objects. all the way. Then, pull the belt out slowly
The seatbacks can be folded with the rear seat once again.
release button.
3. Make sure the seatback is locked securely
NOTE in place and the seat belt is passed through
 You can separately fold the right and left side the seat belt guide (B).
of the seatback.
WARNING
 If the red part (C) on the back of the rear
seat release button can be seen, the seat-
back is not locked firmly in place. Push
and pull lightly on the seatback to lock it
firmly in place.

4-10 Seat and restraint systems

[Link] 11 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Seat belts
5. After making sure that the seat belt is not
twisted, insert the small latch plate (E) Seat belts
into the detachable anchor (F) aligning the N00406000442

marks (G) on the plate and buckle until a Seat belts are installed in your vehicle to help
“click” is heard. Make sure the detachable reduce the risk of injury to the driver and pas-
anchor is securely latched and seat belt is senger in the event of an accident. Always
not twisted. For details, refer to page use the provided seat belts. 4
4-14. Carefully review the following information
for proper seat belt usage.

WARNING
4. If the center seat belt is stored in the rear  To help reduce the risk of injury or death
trim, pull the seat belt out and pass it in an accident, seat belts and child
through the seat belt guide (D) near the restraint systems must always be used.
Refer to “Child restraint systems” on page
center of the rear seat backs.
4-18 for additional information.
 Never use one seat belt for more than one
person.
 Never carry more people in your vehicle
than there are seat belts.
WARNING  Always adjust the seat belt for a snug fit.
 Using the rear center seat belt with the  Always place the shoulder belt over your
detachable anchor unlatched increases the shoulder and across your chest. Never put
risk of serious injury or death in an acci- it behind you or under your arm.
dent. Make sure the detachable anchor is  Always wear the lap belt as low as possible
properly latched. across your hips, not around your waist.
 Never modify or alter the seat belts in
your vehicle.

Seat and restraint systems 4-11

 [Link] 12 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Seat belts
inside the belt retractor is designed to lock the
WARNING WARNING retractor in the event of a sudden change in
 To reduce the risk to the driver of serious  Children 12 years old and under should
the vehicle’s motion.
injury or death during deployment of the always ride in the rear seat and be prop-
driver’s airbag, always properly wear the erly restrained. This reduces their risk of
seat belt and adjust the driver’s seat as far serious injury or death in an accident, NOTE
4 back as possible while maintaining a posi-
tion that still enables you to fully apply the
especially due to a deploying front passen-
ger airbag. Refer to “Child restraint sys-
 For instructions on installing a child restraint
system using a seat belt, refer to “Installing a
pedals, easily control the steering wheel, tems” on page 4-18 for additional child restraint system using the seat belt” on
and safely operate the vehicle. information. page 4-23.
 To reduce the risk to a front seat passen-  Any child who is too small to properly
ger of serious injury or death from a wear a seat belt must be properly
1. Occupants should always sit back in their
deploying airbag, make sure the passenger restrained in an appropriate child
always wears the seat belt properly, restraint system. seats with their backs against the upright
remains seated all the way back and  Infants MUST be placed in a rear-facing seatback. To reduce the risk of serious
upright in their seat, and moves the seat as child safety seat and positioned in the rear injury or death during deployment of the
far back as possible. Refer to “Supplemen- seat. airbag, adjust the driver’s seat as far back
tal Restraint System (SRS) - airbag” on  In the event of an accident, all seat belt as possible while maintaining a position
page 4-26 for additional information. assemblies, including retractors and that still enables you to fully apply the
 Never hold an infant or child in your arms attachment hardware, should be inspected pedals, easily control the steering wheel,
or on your lap when riding in this vehicle by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors and safely operate the vehicle. The front
even when you are wearing your seat belt. dealer to determine whether replacement passenger seat should also be moved as
Never place any part of the seat belt you is necessary. far back as possible. Refer to “Supple-
are wearing around an infant or child.
mental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag”
Failure to follow these simple instructions
creates a risk of serious injury or death to Seat belt instructions on page 4-26. Also refer to “To adjust the
your child in the event of an accident or N00406201496 seat forward or backward” on page 4-3.
sudden stop. All seats are equipped with a seat belt which
uses one combined lap-and-shoulder belt with
an emergency locking retractor.

This system is designed to provide both com-

fort and safety. It permits full extension and
automatic retraction of the belts during nor-
mal vehicle operation. A sensing device

4-12 Seat and restraint systems

[Link] 13 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Seat belts
3. Grasp the latch plate and slide it up the
webbing so that it easily pulls across your
NOTE
 If the seat belt locks up and cannot be pulled
body.
out, pull it once with force and let it retract
all the way.
Then, pull the belt out slowly once again.

4
5. The lap part of the belt must always be
worn low and snug across the hips. Pull
up on the shoulder portion of the belt to
take up any slack in the lap belt.

WARNING
 To reduce the risk of serious injury or
death in the event of an accident or sud-
4. Pull the seat belt out slowly while holding
den stop, all seatbacks should be kept in
the upright position while the vehicle is in the latch plate. Push the latch plate into
motion. the buckle until you hear a “click”. Pull
Seat belt performance during an accident up on the belt to be sure the latch plate is
can be adversely affected if the seatbacks locked securely in the buckle.
are reclined. The more a seatback is
reclined, the more likely seat belt perfor-
mance will be adversely affected. If the
seat belt is not properly positioned against
the body during an accident, there is
increased risk you will slide under the belt
and receive serious injury or death.

2. Before using the rear center seat belt,

make sure that the detachable anchor is
securely latched and the seat belt is not
twisted. For details, refer to page 4-14.

Seat and restraint systems 4-13

 [Link] 14 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Seat belts

NOTE Detachable rear center seat belt To attach

 With the exception of the seat belt for the N00409700017

driver, the seat belts in all other seating posi- 1. Pull the seat belt out slowly and pass it
The rear center seat belt can be detached to
tions are equipped with an Automatic Lock- through the seat belt guide (A).
help avoid damage caused by an object in the
ing Retractor (ALR) function. If you pull the luggage compartment while the driver’s side
4 seat belt fully out of the retractor, the retrac-
tor will switch to its ALR child restraint
rear seat back is folded down.
installation function (see page 4-23).
When the ALR function has been activated, WARNING
the seat belt will only retract. If this happens,  Never detach the rear center seat belt
let the belt fully retract, then pull the seat except when the driver’s side rear seat
belt back out, repeating steps 1 through 5. back is folded down. Using the rear center
seat belt with the detachable anchor
unlatched increases the risk of serious
WARNING injury or death in an accident. Make sure
 Be sure the lap belt portion fits snugly and the detachable anchor is properly latched
before the center seat belt is used.
is worn as low as possible across the hips, NOTE
not around the waist. Failure to follow this
 If the seat belt locks up and cannot be pulled
instruction will increase the risk of serious
out, pull it once with force and let it retract
injury or death in the event of an accident.
all the way.
 Be sure the seat belt webbing is not Then, pull the belt out slowly once again.
twisted when worn. Twisted webbing may
adversely affect seat belt performance.
2. After making sure that the seat belt is not
twisted, insert the small latch plate (B)
6. To release the belt, press the button on the
into the detachable anchor (C) aligning
buckle and allow the belt to retract.
the marks (D) on the plate and buckle
If the belt does not retract smoothly, pull it
until a “click” is heard.
out and check for kinks or twists in the
webbing. Then make sure it remains
untwisted as it retracts.

4-14 Seat and restraint systems

[Link] 15 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Seat belts

Driver’s seat belt

reminder/warning light and
display
N00418400342

Warning light
4

Warning display type 1

3. After the seat belt is retracted completely,
To detach insert the latch plate (E) into the upper slit
(H) and the small latch plate (B) into the
1. Insert the latch plate (E) of the center seat
lower slit (I).
belt into the slit (G) on the detachable
anchor (C) and release the center seat belt
from the detachable anchor. Warning display type 2

A tone and warning light are used to remind

the driver to fasten the seat belt.
If the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position or the operation mode is put in ON
without the driver’s seat belt being fastened, a
warning light will come on and a tone will
2. Pass the seat belt through the seat belt sound for approximately 6 seconds to remind
guide (A) and retract it completely toward you to fasten your seat belt.
the rear trim.

Seat and restraint systems 4-15

 [Link] 16 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Seat belts
If you then drive with the seat belt unfastened
for longer than a minute from when the igni-
Front passenger seat belt warn- Adjustable seat belt shoulder
tion switch or the engine switch is operated, ing light anchor (front seats)
the warning light will come on and blink N00418300194 N00406300344

repeatedly and the tone will sound intermit- The front passenger seat belt warning light is To move the anchor (A), press the lock knob
tently. located in the instrument panel. (B) and slide the anchor to the desired posi-
4 The warning light and the tone will stop after tion.
approximately 90 seconds.
If you then repeatedly stop and start your Anchor down Anchor up
vehicle with the seat belt unfastened, the
warning light/display and tone will remind
you to fasten your seat belt every time the
vehicle starts moving. You will also be
reminded to fasten your seat belt in this way
when you remove your seat belt while driv-
ing. The warning light and the tone go off
when the seat belt is fastened.

WARNING When the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position or the operation mode is put in
 In order to reduce the risk of serious
ON, this indicator normally comes on and
WARNING
injury or death in an accident, always fas-
 Always adjust the shoulder belt anchor so
ten your own seat belt. Do not allow any- goes off a few seconds later.
that the shoulder belt is positioned across
one to ride in your vehicle unless he or she The light comes on when a person sits on the
the center of your shoulder without touch-
is also seated and fastening a seat belt. front passenger seat but does not fasten the ing your neck. The shoulder belt should
Children should additionally be restrained seat belt. It goes off when the seat belt is sub- not be able to fall off your shoulder. Fail-
in a secure child restraint system. sequently fastened. ure to follow this instruction can adversely
affect seat belt performance and increase
WARNING the risk of serious injury or death in the
NOTE event of an accident.
 Do not install any accessory or sticker that
 At the same time, “FASTEN SEAT BELT”  Adjust the shoulder belt anchor only when
makes the light difficult to see.
will be displayed on the information screen the vehicle is not in motion.
in the multi-information display.

4-16 Seat and restraint systems

[Link] 17 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Seat belt use during pregnancy

WARNING Seat belt use during preg- Pre-tensioner system

 Make sure the anchor is securely locked in
position after adjusting it.
nancy
N00406800134
The driver and front passenger seat belts are
equipped with a seat belt pre-tensioner sys-
Seat belts work for everyone, including preg-
Seat belt extender tem. In a moderate-to-severe frontal or side
N00406701228
nant women. Like all occupants, pregnant
women are more likely to be seriously injured
collision or when a rollover or overturning of 4
When your seat belt, even fully extended, is the vehicle is detected, the pre-tensioner sys-
or killed in an accident if they do not wear
not long enough, a seat belt extender must be tem operates simultaneously with the deploy-
seat belts.
obtained. The extender may be used for either ment of the front airbags, side airbags or
of the front seats. curtain airbags.
WARNING The seat belt pre-tensioners are located within
 To reduce the risk of serious injury or the seat belt retractors (A). When activated,
death to pregnant women and unborn the pre-tensioners quickly draw back seat belt
children in an accident, pregnant women webbing and increase seat belt performance.
should always wear a seat belt. The lap
portion of the seat belt should be worn
snug and low across the hips and below
the rounding. Consult your doctor if you
have any additional questions or concerns.

Seat belt pre-tensioner and

force limiter systems
WARNING N00417700641
 The extender should only be used if the
The driver’s and front passenger’s seats each
existing belt is not long enough. Anyone
who can use the standard seat belt should
have a seat belt equipped with a pre-tensioner
system. The seat belt pre-tensioner system includes
not use an extender. Unnecessary use of an
the following components:
extender can adversely affect seat belt
performance in an accident.
 When not required, the extender must be
removed and stowed.

Seat and restraint systems 4-17

 [Link] 18 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Child restraint systems

The seat belt pre-tensioners will operate
under the same conditions as the airbag con-
SRS warning
N00408700081
trol unit.
This warning light tells you if there is a prob-
When the seat belt pre-tensioners activate, lem involving the SRS airbags and the seat
some smoke is released and a loud noise will belt pre-tensioner system. Refer to “SRS
4 be heard. The smoke is not harmful, but care warning light/display” on page 4-32.
should be taken not to intentionally inhale it,
as it may cause some temporary irritation to
people with respiratory problems.
Force limiter system
N00408900126
Even in the event of a severe impact, the pre-
1- SRS warning light tensioners will not operate if the seat belts are In the event of an accident, the seat belt force
2- Front impact sensors not fastened. The seat belt pre-tensioners may limiter system will help reduce the force
3- Seat belt pre-tensioner not activate in certain collisions, even though applied to the driver and front seat passenger.
4- Airbag control unit the vehicle may appear to be severely dam-
5- Side impact sensors aged. Such non-activation does not mean that
6- Seat belt buckle switches
Child restraint systems
something is wrong with the seat belt pre-ten- N00407101724
sioner system, but rather that the collision
forces were not severe enough to activate the When transporting infants or small children
The airbag control unit monitors the readiness
system. in your vehicle, an appropriate child restraint
of the electronic parts of the system whenever
system must always be used. This is required
the ignition switch or the operation mode is
by law in the U.S. and Canada.
under the following conditions. These include WARNING Child restraint systems specifically designed
all of the items listed above and all related  The seat belt pre-tensioner system is for infants and small children are offered by
wiring. designed to work only once. After the seat several manufacturers. Choose only a child
[Except for vehicles equipped with the belt pre-tensioners have been activated,
restraint system with a label certifying that it
F.A.S.T.-key] they will not work again. They must
promptly be replaced and the entire seat
complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
The ignition switch is in the “ON” or
belt pre-tensioner system inspected by an Standard 213 (FMVSS 213) or Motor Vehicle
“START” position.
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Restraint Systems and Booster Seats Safety
[Vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key]
Regulations (RSSR). Look for the manufac-
The operation mode is in ON.
turer’s statement of compliance on the box
and child restraint system itself.

4-18 Seat and restraint systems

[Link] 19 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Child restraint systems

The child restraint system should be appropri-  Children who weigh more than 40 pounds
ate for your child’s weight and height, and (18 kg) or who are more than 40 inches
WARNING
 Never hold an infant or child in your arms
should properly fit your vehicle’s seat. (100 cm) tall, regardless of age, should
or on your lap when riding in this vehicle,
For detailed information, refer to the instruc- use a suitable child seat or a booster seat
even when you are wearing your seat belt.
tion manual accompanying the child restraint in the rear seat until the vehicle’s lap-and- Never place any part of the seat belt you
system. shoulder belt fits them properly. are wearing around an infant or child.
Failure to follow these simple instructions 4
creates a risk of serious injury or death to
Guidelines for child restraint WARNING your child in the event of an accident or
system selection  All children must be seated in the rear sudden stop.
seat, and properly restrained.
Accident statistics show that children of
All children should be properly restrained in all sizes and ages are safer when properly
a restraint device that offers the maximum restrained in the rear seat, rather than in
protection for their size and age. the front seat.
Be sure to check local, state, or provincial  Any child who is too large to use a child
requirements for child size and age that may restraint system should ride in the rear
vary from the recommendations listed below. seat and wear the lap-and-shoulder belt
properly. The shoulder belt must be posi-
 Children less than 1 year old and who tioned over the shoulder and across the
weigh 22 pounds (10 kg) or less MUST chest, not across their neck, and with the
ride in a rear-facing child safety seat that lap belt positioned low on the child’s hips,
MUST ONLY be used in the rear seat. not across their stomach. If necessary, a
booster seat should be used to help achieve
 Children older than 1 year of age and who
a proper seat belt fit. Follow the booster
weigh less than 40 pounds (18 kg) or who seat manufacturer’s instructions. Only use
are less than 40 inches (100 cm) tall a booster seat that is certified as comply-
MUST be in a forward-facing restraint ing with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
that MUST ONLY be used in the rear Standards or Motor Vehicle Restraint Sys-
seat. tems and Booster Seats Safety Regula-
tions.

Seat and restraint systems 4-19

 [Link] 20 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Child restraint systems

WARNING WARNING WARNING

 Your vehicle is also equipped with a front  FRONT-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT  When installing a child restraint system,
passenger airbag. SYSTEMS should be used in the rear seat follow the instructions provided by the
Never put REAR-FACING CHILD whenever possible. If one must be used in manufacturer and follow the directions in
RESTRAINT SYSTEMS or INFANT the front passenger seat, move the seat to this manual. Failure to do so can result in

4 RESTRAINT SYSTEMS in the front pas-

senger seat. This places the infant too
the most rearward position and make sure
the child stays in the child restraint sys-
serious injury or death to your child in an
accident or sudden stop.
close to the passenger airbag. During tem, properly restrained. Failure to follow  After installation, push and pull the child
deployment of that airbag, the infant can these instructions could result in serious restraint system back and forth, and side
be seriously injured or killed. Rear-facing injury or death to the child. to side, to see that it is firmly secured. If
child restraint systems or infant restraint the child restraint system is not installed
systems must only be used in the rear seat. securely, it may cause injury to the child
or other occupants in the event of an acci-
dent or sudden stop.
Airbag  When not in use, keep your child restraint
system secured with the seat belt, or
remove it from the vehicle, in order to pre-
vent it from being thrown around inside
the vehicle during an accident.

WARNING
 It is important to use an approved rear-
facing infant restraint until the infant is
one year old (unless the infant outgrows
the seat sooner). This allows the infant’s
neck and spine to develop enough to sup-
port the weight of their head in the event
of an accident.

4-20 Seat and restraint systems

[Link] 21 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Child restraint systems

NOTE Installing a child restraint sys- Tether anchor locations

 Before purchasing a child restraint system, tem using the LATCH (Lower N00418901214

try installing it in the rear seat to make sure Your vehicle has 3 attachment points on the
there is a good fit. Because of the location of Anchors and Tethers for chil- backside of the rear seats. These are for
the seat belt buckles and the shape of the seat dren) system securing a child restraint system tether strap
cushion, it may be difficult to securely install
some manufacturer’s child restraint systems.
N00418800128 to each of the 3 rear seating positions in your
vehicle.
4
If the child restraint system can be pulled
forward or to either side easily on the seat
Lower anchor locations
cushion after the seat belt has been tightened,
choose another manufacturer’s child restraint The outboard seating positions in the rear seat
system. of your vehicle are equipped with lower
Depending on the seating position in the anchors for attaching child restraint systems
vehicle and the child restraint system that compatible with the LATCH system.
you have, the child restraint system can be
attached using one of the following 2 meth-
ods:
• Attach to the lower anchorage in the rear
seat ONLY if the child restraint system is
compatible with the LATCH system (See
page 4-21).
• Attach to the seat belt (See page 4-23).

NOTE
 The symbols on the seatback show the loca-
tion of the lower anchor points.

Seat and restraint systems 4-21

 [Link] 22 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Child restraint systems

Examples of child restraint sys- NOTE

tems compatible with the LATCH  In order to secure a child restraint system
system compatible with the LATCH system, use the
N00419001209
lower anchor points in the outboard positions
of the rear seat. It is not necessary to use the

4 vehicle’s seat belt. The vehicle’s seat belt,

however, MUST be used to secure a child
restraint system in the center position of the
rear seat.

A- Vehicle seat C- Lower anchor

WARNING
cushion
 If there is any foreign material in or
B- Vehicle seatback D- Connector around the lower anchors, remove it
before installing the child restraint sys-
3. Push the anchor connectors (D) on the tem. Also, make sure the seat belt is away
A- Rear-facing child restraint system from, not looped through or otherwise
child restraint system into the lower
B- Front-facing child restraint system interfering with, the child restraint sys-
anchors (C) in accordance with the
C- Child restraint system lower anchor tem. If foreign matter is not removed
instructions provided by the child restraint
connectors and/or the seat belt interferes with the
system’s manufacturer.
D- Tether strap child restraint system, the child restraint
Remember, the lower anchors provided system will not be secured properly, could
(These are only examples.)
with your vehicle are designed to secure detach and move forward in the event of
suitable child restraint systems compati- sudden braking or an accident, and could
Using the LATCH system ble with the LATCH system in the out- result in injury to the child or other vehi-
N00419101268
board positions of the rear seats only. The cle occupants.
1. In order to securely fasten the tether strap, anchor connectors are NOT designed to  When the vehicle is moving, do not adjust
secure a suitable child restraint system in the seat where the child restraint system is
remove the head restraint from the loca- installed.
tion where you wish to install the child the center position of the rear seat.
restraint system.
2. Open a small gap between the seat cush- 4. Remove the cargo area cover from the
ion (A) and the seatback (B) with your vehicle. (Refer to “Cargo area cover” on
hand to locate the lower anchors (C). page 5-164.)

4-22 Seat and restraint systems

[Link] 23 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Child restraint systems

5. Latch the tether strap hook (E) of the child
restraint system to the tether anchor bar
Installing a child restraint sys- WARNING
(F) and tighten the tether strap so it is tem using the seat belt (with  When you install a child restraint system
using the seat belt, always make sure the
securely fastened. emergency/automatic locking retractor has been switched to the ALR
mechanism) child restraint installation function. The
N00407301524 ALR function will keep the child restraint
system tightly secured to the seat. 4
With the exception of the driver’s seat, the
Failure to convert the retractor to the
seat belt in all other seating positions can be ALR function may allow the child
converted from normal Emergency Locking restraint system to move forward during
Retractor (ELR) mode to Automatic Locking sudden braking or an accident, resulting
Retractor (ALR) mode. This means that when in serious injury or death to the child or
you pull the seat belt fully out of the retractor, other occupants.
the retractor will switch to its ALR child  When you install a child restraint system
restraint installation function. Always use the using the 3-point type seat belt with 2
ALR child restraint installation function buckles in the rear center seating position,
6. Push and pull the child restraint system in always make sure both latch plates are
when you install a child restraint system
all directions to be sure it is firmly secured. Do not use the seat belt with only
using the seat belt.
secured. one of the latch plates attached. This could
Children 12 years old and under should result in a serious injury or death in the
WARNING always be restrained in the rear seat whenever
event of an accident or sudden stop.
 Child restraint system tether anchors are possible, although the front passenger seat
designed only to withstand loads from cor- belt can also be converted to ALR mode.
rectly fitted child restraint systems. Under Installation
no circumstances are they to be used for
adult seat belts, or harnesses, or for 1. Place the child restraint system on the seat
attaching other items or equipment to the where you wish to install it.
vehicle. To help assure proper fitting of the child
restraint system, always remove the head
restraint.

Seat and restraint systems 4-23

 [Link] 24 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Child restraint systems

2. Route the seat belt through the child
restraint system’s according to the instruc-
tions provided by the child restraint sys-
tem’s manufacturer. Then insert the seat
belt latch plate into the buckle. Make sure
you hear a “click” when you insert the
4 latch plate into the buckle.

4. After the belt has retracted, tug on it. If your child restraint system requires the use
If the belt is in the ALR function, you will of a tether strap, fasten the tether strap in
not be able to pull it out. If the webbing accordance with the following procedures.
can be pulled out from retractor, the ALR
function has not been activated and you 6. Remove the cargo area cover from the
will need to repeat steps 3 and 4. vehicle. (Refer to “Cargo area cover” on
5. After confirming that the belt is locked, page 5-164.)
3. To activate the ALR child restraint instal- grab the shoulder part of the belt near the 7. Latch the tether strap hook (A) of the
lation function, slowly pull the shoulder buckle and pull up to remove any slack child restraint system to the tether anchor
part of the belt all the way out of the from the lap part of the belt, allowing the bar (B) and tighten the tether strap so it is
retractor until it stops. Then let the belt slack to feed into the retractor. Remember, securely fastened.
feed back into the retractor. if the lap belt portion is not tight, the child
restraint system will not be secure. It may
help to put your weight on the child
restraint system and/or push on its seat-
back while pulling up on the belt (See
illustration).

4-24 Seat and restraint systems

[Link] 25 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Maintenance and inspection of seat belts

their stomach, a commercially available
WARNING booster seat must be used to raise the child so Maintenance and inspection
 Child restraint system tether anchors are
designed only to withstand loads from cor-
that the shoulder belt crosses their shoulder of seat belts
and the lap belt remains positioned low N00407000221
rectly fitted child restraint systems. Under
no circumstances are they to be used for across their hips. The booster seat should fit The seat belt webbing may be cleaned with
the vehicle seat and have a label certifying
adult seat belts, or harnesses, or for
attaching other items or equipment to the compliance with Federal Motor Vehicle
mild soap or detergent solution. Do not use an
organic solvent. Allow the belts to dry in the
4
vehicle. Safety Standards or Motor Vehicle Restraint shade. Do not allow them to retract until com-
Systems and Booster Seats Safety Regula- pletely dry. Do not attempt to bleach or re-
8. Before putting your child in the restraint, tions. dye the belts. The color may rub off and the
push and pull the restraint in all directions webbing strength may be affected.
to be sure it is firmly secure. Do this WARNING
before each use. If the child restraint sys-  Any child who is too small to properly Regularly check your seat belt buckles and
tem is not firmly secure, repeat steps 1 wear a seat belt must be properly their release mechanisms for positive engage-
through 7. restrained in an appropriate child ment and release of the latch plate. Check the
9. To remove a child restraint system from restraint system, to reduce their risk of retractors for automatic locking when in the
the vehicle and deactivate the ALR mode, serious injury or death in an accident. Automatic Locking Retractor function.
remove the child from the restraint.  A child should never be left unattended in,
or unsupervised around, your vehicle. The entire seat belt assembly should be
Unlatch the buckle. Then remove the belt
When you leave the vehicle, always take replaced if the webbing shows any obvious
from the restraint and let the belt fully
the child out as well. cuts, tears, increase in thickness in any sec-
retract.
 Children can die from heat stroke if left or tion of the webbing from broken fibers, or
10. Reinstall the head restraint. trapped inside the vehicle, especially on severe fading from sunlight. All of these con-
Refer to “Head restraints” on page 4-7. hot days. ditions indicate a weakening of the belt,
 Keep your vehicle locked when not in use. which may adversely affect seat belt perfor-
Children who have outgrown Keep your vehicle keys away from chil-
mance in an accident.
dren.
child restraint systems
N00407601673

Children who have outgrown a child restraint

system should be seated in the rear seat and
wear the seat belt. If the shoulder belt crosses
their face or neck, and/or the lap belt crosses

Seat and restraint systems 4-25

 [Link] 26 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag

and provide increased overall body protection
WARNING in certain moderate to severe frontal colli-
WARNING
 Do not attempt to repair or replace any  IT IS VERY IMPORTANT TO ALWAYS
sions.
part of the seat belt assemblies. This work WEAR YOUR SEAT BELT PROPERLY
should be done by an authorized The SRS side airbags and the curtain airbags EVEN WITH AN AIRBAG.
Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Failure to have • Seat belts help keep the driver and pas-
are also designed to supplement the seat belts.
4 an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer
perform the work could reduce the effec-
The SRS side airbags provide the driver and
sengers properly positioned. This
reduces the risk of injury in all collisions,
tiveness of the belts and could result in a front passenger with protection against chest and reduces the risk of serious injuries or
serious injury or death in an accident. injuries by deploying the bag on the side death when the airbags inflate.
impacted in moderate to severe side impact During sudden braking just before a col-
collisions. The SRS curtain airbags provide lision, an unrestrained or improperly
the driver and the passengers on the front seat restrained driver or passengers can move
Supplemental Restraint Sys- and the rear outboard seats with protection forward into direct contact with, or
tem (SRS) - airbag against head injuries by deploying the curtain within close proximity to, the airbag
N00407701762 airbag on the side impacted in moderate to when it begins to inflate.
severe side impact collisions and by deploy- The beginning stage of airbag inflation is
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental
the most forceful and can cause serious
Restraint System (SRS), which includes air- ing both curtain airbags when a rollover is
injuries or death if the occupant comes in
bags for the driver and passengers. detected. The curtain airbags are also contact with the airbag at this time.
designed to help reduce the risk of complete • Seat belts reduce the risk of injury in
The SRS front airbags are designed to supple- and partial ejection from the vehicle through rear impact collisions, and in lower-
ment the primary protection of the driver and side windows in both side impact and roll- speed frontal collisions because the air-
front passenger seat belt systems by provid- over type accidents. bags are not designed to inflate in those
ing those occupants with protection against situations.
head and chest injuries in certain moderate to The SRS airbags are NOT a substitute for use • Seat belts reduce the risk of being
severe frontal collisions. The SRS front air- of the seat belts. For maximum protection in thrown from your vehicle in a collision or
bags, together with sensors at the front of the all types of accidents, seat belts must rollover.
vehicle and sensors attached to the front ALWAYS be worn by everyone who drives or  IT IS VERY IMPORTANT TO BE PROP-
seats, form an advanced airbag system. rides in this vehicle (with infants and small ERLY SEATED.
children in an appropriate child restraint sys- • A driver or front passenger sitting too
The SRS driver’s knee airbag is designed to tem in the rear seat, and older children buck- close to the steering wheel or instrument
supplement the primary protection of the led in the rear seat). Refer to “Child restraint panel during airbag deployment can be
driver’s seat belt system. It can reduce the systems” on page 4-18. seriously injured or killed.
forward movement of the driver’s lower legs

4-26 Seat and restraint systems

[Link] 27 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag

WARNING
• Airbags inflate very quickly and with
great force. If the driver and front pas-
senger are not properly seated and
restrained, the airbag may not provide
the proper protection, and can cause
serious injuries or death when it inflates. 4
• To reduce the risk to the driver of serious
injury or death due to a deploying
driver’s airbag, always properly wear
your seat belt and adjust the driver’s seat
as far back as possible, maintaining a
position that still allows the driver to WARNING WARNING
have good control of the steering wheel,  Infants and small children should never  NEVER put REAR-FACING CHILD
brake, accelerator, and other vehicle con- ride unrestrained, or lean against the RESTRAINT SYSTEMS or INFANT
trols. instrument panel. They should never ride RESTRAINT SYSTEMS in the front pas-
• To reduce the risk to the front passenger held in your arms or on your lap. They senger seat. This places the infant too
of serious injury or death from a deploy- can be seriously injured or killed in an close to the passenger airbag. During
ing passenger’s airbag, make sure the accident, especially when the airbags deployment of that airbag, the infant can
passenger always wears the seat belt inflate. Seat all infants and children in the be seriously injured or killed.
properly, remains seated upright and all rear seat, properly restrained in an appro- Rear-facing child restraint systems or
the way back in the seat, and positions priate child restraint system. Refer to infant restraint systems must only be used
the seat as far back as possible. “Child restraint systems” on page 4-18. in the rear seat.
• Seat all infants and children in the rear
seat, properly restrained in an appropri-
ate child restraint system.
 Airbags inflate very quickly and with
great force. Do not sit on the edge of the
seat or sit with your lower legs too close to
the instrument panel, or lean your head or
chest close to the steering wheel or the
instrument panel.
 Do not put your feet or legs on or against
the instrument panel.

Seat and restraint systems 4-27

 [Link] 28 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag

Airbag How the Supplemental

Restraint System works
N00407800450

The SRS includes the following components:

WARNING WARNING
 FRONT-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT  Older children should be seated in the
SYSTEMS should be used in the rear seat rear seat with their seat belt properly
whenever possible. If they must be used in worn, and with an appropriate booster
the front passenger seat, move the seat to seat if needed.
the most rearward position and make sure Refer to “Children who have outgrown 1- Airbag module (Driver)
the child stays in the child restraint sys- child restraint systems” on page 4-25. 2- SRS warning light
tem, properly restrained. Failure to follow 3- Passenger’s airbag off indicator
these instructions could result in serious 4- Airbag module (Passenger)
injury or death to the child. 5- Front impact sensors
6- Airbag module (Driver’s knee)
7- Driver’s seat position sensor
8- Passenger’s seat weight sensors
9- Weight control unit
10- Airbag control unit

4-28 Seat and restraint systems

[Link] 29 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag

When the impact sensors detect a sufficient The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
front or side impact to deploy the airbag(s), certain crash or near crash-like situations,
the appropriate airbag(s) will be deployed. such as an airbag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle, data that will assist in under-
When the airbag control unit detects rollover standing how a vehicle’s systems performed.
of the vehicle, curtain airbags will be The EDR is designed to record data related to
deployed. vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a 4
short period of time, typically 30 seconds or
When airbags deploy, some smoke is released
less.
accompanied by a loud noise. The smoke is
not harmful, but do not intentionally inhale The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
11- Side airbag modules the smoke as it may cause temporary irrita- such data as:
12- Curtain airbag modules tion to people with respiratory problems.
13- Side impact sensors  How various systems in your vehicle were
An inflated airbag will deflate quickly, so you operating;
may not even notice that the airbag was  Whether or not the driver and passenger
The airbag control unit monitors the readiness inflated. safety belts were buckled/fastened;
of the electronic parts of the system whenever Airbag inflation does not prevent the driver  How far (if at all) the driver was depress-
the ignition switch or the operation mode is from seeing or being able to steer the vehicle, ing the accelerator and/or brake pedal;
under the following conditions. These include and does not prevent people from leaving the and,
all of the items listed above and all related vehicle.  How fast the vehicle was traveling.
wiring.
[Except for vehicles equipped with the
F.A.S.T.-key] CAUTION These data can help provide a better under-
 Airbags inflate very quickly and with great standing of the circumstances in which
The ignition switch is in the “ON” or
force. In certain situations, contact with an crashes and injuries occur.
“START” position.
inflating airbag may cause small cuts, abra-
[Vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key]
sions, and bruises.
The operation mode is in ON.

The airbags will operate under the same con-

ditions as the airbag control unit. Event Data Recording
N00418600243

This vehicle is equipped with an event data

recorder (EDR).
Seat and restraint systems 4-29
 [Link] 30 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag

“SRS warning light/display” on page 4-32. The passenger’s front airbag will not deploy
NOTE in an impact when the weight on the seat is
 EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only
WARNING sensed to be less than approximately 66
if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data
 If the SRS warning light or warning dis-
pounds (30 kg). In this case, the passenger
are recorded by the EDR under normal driv-
ing conditions and no personal data (e.g., play comes on, have the vehicle inspected airbag off indicator will come on.
Refer to “Passenger’s airbag off indicator” on
4 name, gender, age, and crash location) are
recorded. However, other parties, such as
by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer as soon as possible. page 4-31.
law enforcement, could combine the EDR  Please observe the following instructions If there is a problem involving the passenger
data with the type of personally identifying to ensure that the driver’s seat position seat weight sensors, the SRS warning light in
data routinely acquired during a crash inves- sensor can operate correctly. the instrument panel will come on. Refer to
tigation. • Adjust the seat to the correct position, “SRS warning light/display” on page 4-32.
and sit well back against the seatback.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special Refer to “Front seats” on page 4-3.
• Do not recline the seatback more than
WARNING
equipment is required, and access to the vehi-  If any of the following conditions occur,
necessary when driving.
cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the you should have your vehicle inspected by
• Do not place metallic objects or luggage
vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as
under the front seat.
law enforcement, that have the special equip- soon as possible:
 If the vehicle is involved in a severe
ment, can read the information if they have • The SRS warning light does not initially
impact, have the SRS sensors inspected by
access to the vehicle or the EDR. an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as
come on when the ignition switch or the
operation mode is under the following
soon as possible.
conditions.
Driver’s seat position sensor • [Except for vehicles equipped with the
N00417900177
F.A.S.T.-key]
The driver’s seat position sensor is attached Passenger’s seat weight sensors The ignition switch is in the “ON” or
to the seat rail and provides the airbag control N00418000322 “START” position.
unit with information on the seat’s fore-aft The passenger’s seat weight sensors are [Vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key]
attached to the seat rails and provide the air- The operation mode is in ON.
position. The airbag control unit controls
bag control unit with information regarding • The SRS warning light does not go out
deployment of the driver’s front airbag in
after several seconds.
accordance with the information it receives the weight on the front passenger seat. The
• The SRS warning light comes on while
from this sensor. airbag control unit controls deployment of the
you are driving.
If there is a problem involving the driver’s passenger’s front airbag in accordance with
seat position sensor, the SRS warning light in the information it receives from this sensor.
the instrument panel will come on. Refer to
4-30 Seat and restraint systems
[Link] 31 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag

WARNING WARNING
 To ensure that the passenger’s seat weight • Do not expose the sensors to liquids or
sensors can correctly sense the weight vapors.
being applied to the seat, observe the fol- • Do not subject the sensors to shock.
lowing instructions. Failure to follow these • Do not allow rear-seat occupants to push
instructions can adversely affect the per-
formance of the passenger’s airbag sys-
the front passenger seat with their feet or
force the front passenger seat upward.
4
tem. • Do not allow rear-seat occupants to grasp
• Adjust the seat to the correct position, the front passenger’s seatback or put
and sit well back against the seatback. their arms around it.
Refer to “Front seats” on page 4-3. • When attaching a child restraint system
• Do not recline the seatback more than in the rear seat, make sure it does not The indicator normally comes on when the
necessary. interfere with the front seat. ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position
• Never have more than one person (adult  If the vehicle is involved in a severe or the operation mode is put in ON, and goes
or child) sitting on the seat. impact, have the SRS sensors inspected by out a few seconds later. In the following situ-
• Do not place anything between the seat an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as
ations, the indicator will stay on to show that
and the floor console. soon as possible.
the passenger front airbag is not operational.
• Do not hang anything on the front pas-
senger’s seatback.
• Do not remove the head restraints.
Passenger’s airbag off indicator  The passenger’s seat weight sensors sense
N00418100280 a weight of less than approximately 66
• When attaching a child restraint system,
pounds (30 kg) on the front passenger
secure it firmly. The passenger airbag off indicator is located
seat.
• Do not place luggage or other objects on in the instrument panel.
the seat.
 The front passenger’s seat is not occupied.
• Do not use a seat cover or a cushion.
When the weight applied to the front passen-
• Do not remove the seats and seat belts.
ger seat is sensed to be approximately 66
• Do not modify or replace the seat and
seat belt.
pounds (30 kg) or greater, the indicator goes
• Do not place luggage or other objects
out to show that the passenger’s front airbag
under the seat. is operational.
• Do not place the floor mat on the seat
rails.

Seat and restraint systems 4-31

 [Link] 32 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag

Warning display type 1
WARNING WARNING
 If any of the following conditions occur,  If any of the following conditions occur,
you should have the airbag system in your there may be a problem with the SRS air-
vehicle inspected by an authorized bags and/or seat belt pre-tensioners, and
Mitsubishi Motors dealer as soon as possi- they may not function properly in a colli-

4 ble:
• The passenger’s airbag off indicator
sion or may suddenly activate without a
collision:
Warning display type 2
comes on when an adult is sitting on the • Even when the ignition switch or the
front passenger seat. operation mode is in ON, the SRS warn-
• The passenger’s airbag off indicator does ing light does not come on or it remains
not come on when the front passenger on.
seat is not occupied. • The SRS warning light and/or the warn-
• The passenger’s airbag off indicator does ing display comes on while driving.
not come on when the ignition switch is The SRS airbags and seat belt pre-ten-
The system checks itself every time the igni-
turned to the “ON” position or the oper- sioners are designed to help reduce the
tion switch is turned to the “ON” position or
ation mode is put in ON. risk of serious injury or death in certain
the operation mode is put in ON. The SRS collisions. If either of the above conditions
• The passenger’s airbag off indicator
comes on and goes out repeatedly. warning light will come on for several sec- occurs, immediately have your vehicle
 Do not attach any accessory to your vehi- onds and then go out. This is normal and checked by an authorized Mitsubishi
cle that makes the passenger’s airbag off means the system is working properly. Motors dealer.
indicator difficult or impossible to see. If there is a problem involving one or more of
You must be able to see the passenger’s the SRS components, the warning light will
airbag off indicator and verify the status come on and stay on. At the same time, the Driver’s and passenger’s front
of the passenger’s airbag system. warning display will appear on the informa-
tion screen in the multi information display.
airbag system
N00407900291
The SRS warning light/display is shared by
SRS warning light/display the SRS airbag and the seat belt pre-tensioner The driver’s airbag is located under the pad-
N00408301592 system. ded cover in the middle of the steering wheel.
Warning light The front passenger’s airbag is contained in
the instrument panel above the glove com-
partment. The driver’s airbag and the front
passenger’s airbag are designed to deploy at
the same time. However, the front passen-

4-32 Seat and restraint systems

[Link] 33 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag

ger’s airbag does not deploy when the front
passenger seat is not occupied or when the
weight sensor in the front passenger seat
senses a weight on the seat of less than
approximately 66 pounds (30 kg).

Driver

Front passenger

Driver’s knee airbag system

N00404500010

The driver’s knee airbag is located under the

steering wheel. The driver’s knee airbag is
designed to deploy at the same time as the
driver’s front airbag.

Seat and restraint systems 4-33

 [Link] 34 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag

Deployment of front airbags

N00408000592

The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag ARE DESIGNED TO DEPLOY when …

4 Head-on collision with a solid wall at speeds of approx. Moderate to severe frontal impact within the shaded
15 mph (25 km/h) or higher area between the arrows

The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag are structure is above a specific threshold level. The beginning stage of airbag inflation is the
designed to deploy when the vehicle suffers a The threshold level is approximately 15 mph most forceful and can cause serious injury or
moderate to severe frontal impact. Typical (25 km/h) for a frontal collision straight into a death if you are close to the deploying airbag.
situations are shown in the illustration above. solid flat wall that does not bend or deform. If Accordingly, it is important that you always
the impact to the vehicle’s main structure is wear the available seat belt.
The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag are below this threshold level, the front airbags
designed to deploy only in certain moderate and driver’s knee airbag may not deploy. This
to severe frontal collisions within the shaded threshold level may also be higher if the vehi-
area between the arrows in the illustration to cle hits something that absorbs the impact,
the right. either by bending or moving (for example,
The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag another stationary vehicle, a pole or a guard
will deploy if the impact to the vehicle’s main rail).

4-34 Seat and restraint systems

[Link] 35 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag

they cannot provide protection to the occu-
The front airbags and driver’s Collision with a utility pole, tree or other nar- pants.
knee airbag MAY NOT DEPLOY row object
Typical situations are shown in the illustra-
when … tion.

In certain types of front collisions, the front Because the front airbags and driver’s knee
airbags and driver’s knee airbag may not airbag do not protect the occupants in all 4
deploy, even if the deformation of the body Collision where the vehicle slides under the
types of collisions, be sure to always wear the
seems to be large, because the vehicle’s body rear body of a truck seat belts properly.
structure is designed to absorb the impact and
deform in order to help protect the occupants. Rear end collision to your vehicle
Some typical situations where the front air-
bags and driver’s knee airbag may not deploy
are shown in the illustrations.
Oblique frontal impact
Because the front airbags and driver’s knee Side collision to your vehicle
airbag do not protect the occupant in all types
of frontal collisions, be sure to always wear
your seat belts properly.

The front airbags and driver’s Vehicle rolls onto its side or roof
knee airbag ARE NOT
DESIGNED TO DEPLOY when
…

The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag are

not designed to deploy in situations where

Seat and restraint systems 4-35

 [Link] 36 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag

The front airbags and driver’s Collision with an elevated median/island or curb
knee airbag MAY DEPLOY when
…

The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag

4 may deploy if the underside of the vehicle
suffers a moderate to severe impact (under- Vehicle travels over a deep hole/pothole
carriage impact). Typical situations are
shown in the illustration.

Because the front airbags and driver’s knee

airbag may deploy in certain types of unex- WARNING
pected impacts, as shown in the illustrations, Vehicle drives down a steep slope and hits the  Do not attach accessories to, or put them
and these unexpected impacts can move you ground in front of, the windshield. They could
out of position, it is important to always wear restrict the airbag inflation, or strike and
the seat belts properly. When worn properly, injure an occupant, when the airbag
seat belts can help maintain your distance inflates.
from the airbags when they begin to inflate.  Do not attach additional keys or accesso-
ries (hard, pointed or heavy objects) to the
The beginning stage of airbag inflation is the
ignition key. Such objects could prevent
most forceful and can cause serious injury or the driver’s knee airbag from inflating
death if you are close to the deploying airbag. normally or could be propelled to cause
serious injury if the airbag inflates.
WARNING  Do not attach accessories to the lower por-
 Do not attach anything to the steering tion of the driver’s side instrument panel.
wheel’s padded cover, such as trim mate- Such objects could prevent the driver’s
rial, badges, etc. These could strike and knee airbag from inflating normally or
injure an occupant if the airbag inflates. could be propelled to cause serious injury
 Do not set anything on, or attach anything if the airbag inflates.
to, the instrument panel above the glove
compartment. Such items could strike and
injure an occupant if the airbag inflates.

4-36 Seat and restraint systems

[Link] 37 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag

Side airbag system Curtain airbag system

N00408100391 N00419201269

The side airbags (A) are contained in the Your vehicle is equipped with a curtain airbag
driver and front passenger seatbacks. in the front pillar, the rear pillar and the side
The side airbag is designed to inflate only on sections of the roof.
the side of the vehicle that is impacted, even The curtain airbag is designed to inflate only 4
with no passenger in the front seat. on the side of the vehicle that is impacted,
even with no passenger in the seat.
Also, when the airbag control unit detects
rollover of the vehicle, the curtain airbags
will deploy.
WARNING
 Do not attempt to remove, install, disas-
semble or repair the SRS airbags.
 Do not place objects, such as packages or
pets, between the airbags and the driver
or the front passenger. Such objects can
adversely affect airbag performance, or
cause serious injury or death when the
airbag deploys. A label is attached to the seatbacks in vehi-
 Immediately after airbag inflation, some cles equipped with side airbags.
parts of the airbag system will be hot. Do
not touch them. You could otherwise be
burned.
 The airbag system is designed to work
only once. After the airbags deploy, they
will not work again. They must promptly
be replaced and the entire airbag system
must be inspected by an authorized
Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

Seat and restraint systems 4-37

 [Link] 38 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag

WARNING WARNING WARNING

 Side airbags and curtain airbags can  Do not place any objects around the area  Do not put a hanger or any heavy or
cause serious injury or death to anyone where the side airbags deploy. Such pointed object on the coat hook. If the cur-
too close to the airbag when it deploys. To objects can interfere with proper side air- tain airbag was activated, any such item
reduce the risk of injury from a deploying bag deployment, and cause injury during could be propelled away with great force

4 side airbag or curtain airbag, driver and

front passenger must be properly
deployment of the side airbag.
 Do not place stickers, labels or additional
and could prevent the curtain airbag from
inflating correctly. Hang clothes directly
restrained and seated well back, upright, trim on the back of either front seat. They on the coat hook (without using a hanger).
and in the middle of the seat. Do not lean can interfere with proper side airbag Make sure there are no heavy or sharp
against the door. deployment. objects in the pockets of clothes that you
 Do not attach a microphone (A) or any hang on the coat hook.
other object around the part where the  Do not install seat covers or re-cover seats
curtain airbag (B) deploys, such as on the that have side airbags. Covers can inter-
windshield, side door glass or front and fere with proper side airbag deployment
rear pillars and roof side rail. When the and adversely affect side airbag perfor-
curtain airbag inflates, the microphone or mance.
other object may be hurled with great  Never install a rear-facing child restraint
force or the curtain airbag may not inflate system in the front passenger seat. Rear-
correctly, resulting in death or serious facing child restraint systems MUST
injury. ONLY be used in the rear seat.
 Front-facing child restraint systems
should also be used ONLY in the rear seat.
If a front-facing child restraint system
must be used in the front passenger seat,
WARNING move the seat as far back as possible, and
 In order to reduce the risk of injury from make sure that the child stays in the child
a deploying side airbag, do not allow any restraint system, properly restrained and
rear seat passengers to hold onto the back away from the door.
of either front seat. Special care should be
taken with children.

4-38 Seat and restraint systems

[Link] 39 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag

The seat belts in your vehicle are your pri-
WARNING Deployment of side airbag and mary means of protection in an accident. The
 Do not allow a child to lean against or sit curtain airbag SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) side
close to the passenger door, even if the N00408200493 airbags and curtain airbags are designed to
child is seated in a child restraint system.
The child’s head should also not lean provide additional protection. Therefore, for
The side airbag and curtain airbag your safety and the safety of all occupants, be
against or be close to the section of the
seatback where the side airbag and cur- ARE DESIGNED TO DEPLOY sure to always wear your seat belts properly. 4
tain airbag are located. It is dangerous if when...
the side airbag or curtain airbag deploys. The side airbag and curtain airbag
Failure to follow all of these instructions
could lead to serious injury or death to the The side airbag and curtain airbag are MAY NOT DEPLOY when...
child. designed to deploy when the vehicle suffers a
 Work done on or in the vicinity of the side moderate to severe side impact to the middle In certain types of side collisions, the side air-
airbag or curtain airbag components of the passenger compartment. bag and curtain airbag may not deploy, even
should be done only by an authorized The typical situation is shown in the illustra- if the deformation of the body seems to be
Mitsubishi Motors dealer. There is a risk tion. large, because the vehicle’s body structure is
of a serious injury or death. Improper
designed to absorb the impact and to deform
work methods can cause accidental side
airbag or curtain airbag deployment, or
Moderate to severe impact to the middle of the in order to help protect the occupants. There
vehicle body’s side structure are also cases where the side airbag and cur-
render a side airbag or curtain airbag
inoperable. Either of these situations tain airbag may not deploy at the same time,
could result in serious injury or death. depending on the location of the impact.
 Do not place luggage heavier than the Some typical situations where the side air-
specified on the roof carrier. bags and curtain airbags may not deploy are
Such luggage may cause the curtain air- shown in the illustrations.
bags to inflate accidentally, which could
result in serious injury or death. When the vehicle detects rollover of the vehicle Because the side airbags and curtain airbags
(Curtain airbag only) do not protect the occupant in all types of side
collisions, be sure to always wear the seat
belts properly.

Seat and restraint systems 4-39

 [Link] 40 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag

Side impact in an area away from the passenger Oblique side impact Head-on collision
compartment

4
Rear end collision to your vehicle
Motorcycle or other similar small vehicle
collision with the side of vehicle Vehicle rolls onto its side or roof (Side airbag
only)

Pitch end over end

Collision with a utility pole, tree or other

narrow object
The side airbag and curtain airbag
ARE NOT DESIGNED TO
DEPLOY when...

The side airbag and curtain airbag are not

designed to deploy in situations where they
cannot provide protection to the occupants.
Typical situations are shown in the illustra-
tion.

Because the side airbags and curtain airbags

do not protect the occupant in all types of col-
lisions, be sure to always wear your seat belts
properly.

4-40 Seat and restraint systems

[Link] 41 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag

SRS servicing WARNING NOTE

N00408500698  Do not modify your front seats, center pil- • Steering wheel
lar or center console. Such modifications • Instrument panel
WARNING can adversely affect SRS performance and
 Any maintenance performed on or near may lead to injury. [For vehicles sold in U.S.A.]
To contact Mitsubishi Motors North
the components of the SRS should be per-
formed only by an authorized Mitsubishi
Also, if you discover any tear or open
seam in the seat fabric near the side air- America, Inc. 4
Motors dealer. Do not permit anyone else bag, have the seat inspected by an autho- call 1-888-648-7820 or write to:
to do any service, inspection, maintenance rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Mitsubishi Motors North America, Inc.
or repair on any SRS components or wir-  If you have found any scratch, crack or Customer Relations Department
ing. Similarly, no part of the SRS should damage to the portion of the front and P.O. Box 6400
ever be handled, removed or disposed by rear pillars and roof side rail, you should
Cypress, CA 90630-0064
anyone except an authorized Mitsubishi have the SRS inspected by an authorized
Motors dealer. Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
[For vehicles sold in Canada]
Improper work methods on the SRS com-
To contact Mitsubishi Motor Sales of
ponents or wiring could result in an acci-
Canada, Inc.
dental airbag deployment or could make NOTE call 1-888-576-4878 or write to:
the SRS inoperable. Either of these situa-  When you transfer ownership of the vehicle
tions could result in serious injury or Mitsubishi Motor Sales of Canada, Inc.
to another person, we urge you to alert the
death. new owner that it is equipped with the SRS
Customer Relations Department
 Do not modify your steering wheel or any and refer that owner to the applicable sec- P.O. Box 41009
other SRS component or related vehicle tions in this owner’s manual. 4141 Dixie Road
part. For example, replacement of the  If you decide to junk or scrap your vehicle, Mississauga, ON L4W 5C9
steering wheel, or modifications to the we urge you to first take it to an authorized
front bumper or body structure can Mitsubishi Motors dealer so that the SRS can [For vehicles sold in Puerto Rico]
adversely affect SRS performance and be made safe for disposal. To contact Mitsubishi Motor Sales of
may lead to injury. Caribbean, Inc.
 If any of the following parts needs to be
 If your vehicle has received any damage, modified for use by a handicapped person, call 1-787-251-8715 or write to:
you should have the SRS inspected by an the advanced airbag system will be greatly Mitsubishi Motor Sales of Caribbean,
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer to affected. Please consult an authorized Inc.
make sure it is in proper working order. Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Customer Service Department
• Driver’s seat P.O. Box 192216
• Front passenger seat SAN JUAN PR 00919-2216
• Front seat belt

Seat and restraint systems 4-41

 [Link] 42 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag

[For vehicles sold in Guam]
To contact Triple J Enterprises Inc.
Warning label
N00408600354
call (671) 649-3673 or write to:
Occupant restraint warning labels for the SRS
Triple J Enterprises, Inc.
are located in the vehicle as shown in the
P.O. Box 6066
illustration.
TAMUNING
4 GUAM 96931

[For vehicles sold in Saipan]

To contact Triple J Motors
call (670) 234-7133 or write to:
Triple J Motors
P.O. Box 500487
SAIPAN, MP96950-0487

[For vehicles sold in American Samoa]

To contact Pacific Marketing Inc.
call 684 (699) 9140 or write to:
Pacific Marketing, Inc.
P.O. Box 698
PAGO PAGO,
AMERICAN SAMOA AS, 96799

* - Located in the passenger’s side as well.

4-42 Seat and restraint systems

[Link] 1 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Features and controls

Break-in recommendations ..............................................................5-3 Brake assist system ........................................................................5-64

Keys .................................................................................................5-3 Anti-lock braking system ..............................................................5-64
Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system) ........................5-4 Electric power steering system (EPS) ...........................................5-67 5
Keyless entry system (if so equipped) .............................................5-7 Active stability control (ASC) .......................................................5-68
Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) Cruise control (if so equipped) ......................................................5-70
(if so equipped) .........................................................................5-11 Tire pressure monitoring system ...................................................5-75
Door locks ......................................................................................5-28 Rear-view camera (if so equipped) ................................................5-79
Power door locks ...........................................................................5-30 Instrument cluster ..........................................................................5-81
Child safety locks for rear door .....................................................5-31 Multi-information display .............................................................5-83
Liftgate ...........................................................................................5-31 Indicator light, warning light, and
Inside liftgate release .....................................................................5-33 information screen display list .................................................5-103
Theft-alarm system ........................................................................5-33 Indicators ..................................................................................... 5-115
Power window control ...................................................................5-36 Warning lights .............................................................................. 5-116
Sunshade (if so equipped)..............................................................5-38 Information screen display .......................................................... 5-117
Parking brake .................................................................................5-39 Combination headlights and dimmer switch ............................... 5-119
Steering wheel height and reach adjustment ..................................5-41 Headlight leveling switch (if so equipped)..................................5-125
Inside rearview mirror ...................................................................5-41 Turn signal lever ..........................................................................5-125
Outside rearview mirrors ...............................................................5-42 Hazard warning flasher switch ....................................................5-126
Ignition switch ...............................................................................5-44 Front fog light switch (if so equipped) ........................................5-126
Starting the engine .........................................................................5-45 Wiper and washer switch .............................................................5-126
Manual transaxle (if so equipped) .................................................5-47 Electric rear window defogger switch .........................................5-131
Continuously variable transmission (CVT) (if so equipped).........5-49 Horn switch .................................................................................5-132
Electronically controlled 4WD system (if so equipped)................5-56 Link System (if so equipped) ......................................................5-132
4-wheel drive operation .................................................................5-58 Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped) ....................................5-133
Inspection and maintenance following rough road operation ........5-60 USB input terminal (if so equipped) ...........................................5-153
Cautions on the handling of 4-wheel drive vehicles ......................5-61 Sun visors ....................................................................................5-156
Service brake .................................................................................5-62 12 V power outlets .......................................................................5-157
Hill start assist ................................................................................5-63 Interior lights ...............................................................................5-157
 [Link] 2 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Features and controls

Storage spaces ............................................................................. 5-161

Cup holders ................................................................................. 5-163
5 Bottle holders .............................................................................. 5-164
Cargo area cover (if so equipped) ............................................... 5-164
Assist grips .................................................................................. 5-165
Coat hook .................................................................................... 5-165
Luggage hooks ............................................................................ 5-166
[Link] 3 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Break-in recommendations

Break-in recommendations Keys

N00508700330 N00508800562

Advanced automobile manufacturing tech-

niques permit you to operate your new vehi- Type 1
cle without requiring a long break-in period
of low-speed driving. Two keys are provided. The keys fit all locks.
However, you can add to the future perfor-
mance and economy of your vehicle by
Keep one in a safe place as a spare key. 5
observing the following precautions during
the first 300 miles (500 km).
Drive your vehicle at moderate speeds during 1- F.A.S.T.-key
the break-in period. (with electronic immobilizer and keyless
entry system function)
 Avoid revving the engine. 2- Emergency key
 Avoid rough driving such as sudden starts, 3- Key number plate
sudden acceleration, prolonged high-
speed driving and sudden braking. These
would have a detrimental effect on the NOTE
engine and also cause increased fuel and  The key is a precision electronic device with
oil consumption, which could result in 1- Key for the electronic immobilizer and a built-in signal transmitter. Please observe
malfunction of the engine components. Be keyless entry system the following in order to prevent damage.
particularly careful to avoid full accelera- 2- Key number plate • Do not leave where it may be exposed to
heat caused by direct sunlight, such as on
tion while in low shift position (low
top of the dashboard.
gears).
• Do not take the remote control transmitter
 Do not overload the vehicle. Stay within Type 2 apart.
the seating capacity. (Refer to “Cargo load • Do not excessively bend the key or subject
precautions” on page 6-10.) Two F.A.S.T.-keys and two emergency keys it to strong impacts.
 Do not use this vehicle for trailer towing. are provided. • Keep the remote control transmitter dry.
Keep one F.A.S.T.-key and one emergency • Keep away from magnetic objects such as
key in a safe place together as a set of spare key rings.
keys.

Features and controls 5-3

 [Link] 4 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system)

attempted. A valid start attempt can only be
NOTE NOTE achieved (subject to certain conditions) using
• Keep away from devices that produce mag-  When the theft-alarm is in the system opera-
a key “registered” to the immobilizer system.
netism, such as audio systems, computers tional status, the alarm operates if a door or
All of the keys provided with your new vehi-
and televisions. liftgate is opened after using the key, the
door lock knob or the power door lock cle have been programmed to the vehicle’s
• Keep away from devices that emit strong
electromagnetic waves, such as cellular switch to unlock the vehicle. electronics.
phones, wireless devices and high fre-  The system does not enter the preparation
5 quency equipment (including medical
devices).
status if the keyless entry system or the
F.A.S.T.-key was not used to lock the vehi-
NOTE
 In the following cases, the vehicle may not
• Do not clean with ultrasonic cleaners. cle. be able to recognize the registered ID code
• Do not leave the key where it may be from the key. This means the engine will not
exposed to high temperature or high humid-
ity.
Electronic immobilizer start even when the key is turned to the
“START” position.
 If you lose your key, to prevent the theft of (Anti-theft starting system) • When the key contacts a key ring or other
the vehicle immediately contact an autho- N00509101859 metallic or magnetic object
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
[For vehicles equipped with the Free-hand
If you notify an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer of the key number, they can Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-
make a new key. The key number is stamped key)]
on the key number plate. Keep the key num- For information on operations for vehicles
ber plate in a safe place separate from the equipped with the Free-hand Advanced Secu-
key itself. rity Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key), refer to
 No keys other than those registered in “Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter
advance can be used to start the engine. (F.A.S.T.-key): Electronic immobilizer (Anti-
Refer to “Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft theft starting system)” on page 5-23.
starting system)” on page 5-4.
Refer to “Free-hand Advanced Security [Except for vehicles equipped with the Free-
Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key): “Electronic hand Advanced Security Transmitter
immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system)” on (F.A.S.T.-key)]
page 5-23.
The electronic immobilizer is designed to sig-
nificantly reduce the possibility of vehicle
theft. The purpose of the system is to immo-
bilize the vehicle if an invalid start is

5-4 Features and controls

[Link] 5 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system)

Take your vehicle and all remaining keys to
NOTE NOTE your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer to
• When the key grip contacts metal of  Electronic immobilizer is not compatible
have your ID code changed.
another key with commercially available remote starting
systems. Use of commercially available
remote starting systems may result in vehicle Additional keys
starting problems and a loss of security pro-
tection.
To add a key, you must already have 2 regis-
 A system failure is suspected when the igni-
tion switch is turned to the “START” posi- tered keys. You need to register the ID code 5
tion, and the engine does not start. In such a to the vehicle.
case, contact an authorized Mitsubishi Registering the ID code can be done by your-
Motors dealer. self (except for vehicles sold in Canada), or
• When the key contacts or is close to other by your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
immobilizer keys (including keys of other For you to register the ID code yourself, fol-
vehicles) CAUTION low the “Customer key programming” proce-
 Do not make any alterations or additions to dure below.
the immobilizer system. Alterations or addi- If you choose to have your authorized
tions could cause failure of the immobilizer. Mitsubishi Motors dealer register the ID
code, take your vehicle and all remaining
keys to your authorized Mitsubishi Motors
Replacement keys dealer.

Only keys that have been programmed to the NOTE

 In cases like the above, move the offending
vehicle’s electronics can be used to start the  You are provided with 2 keys, but you may
object(s) away from the key and turn the key
vehicle. register up to 8 keys.
back to the “ACC” or “OFF” position. Then
try to start the engine again. If the engine
If you lose the key, you can order a key from
does not start, contact an authorized
Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer by
 The key may not operate properly when it is
referring to the key number.
near an object or facility that emits strong To prevent vehicle theft, the ID code for the
electromagnetic waves. vehicle keys must be changed.

Features and controls 5-5

 [Link] 6 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system)

4. When the immobilizer display starts
Customer key programming blinking, turn the second valid key to the
NOTE
(Except for vehicles sold in “OFF” position and remove it. Within 30  Perform the operation when the interrupt dis-
play screen is not showing. The interrupt dis-
Canada) seconds after doing so, insert a blank
play screen may prevent you from seeing the
N00562200126 immobilizer key into the ignition switch immobilizer display.
You can program new keys to the system if and turn it to the “ON” position. Perform  It is not possible to register a key if:
you have two valid (already registered) keys this operation no more than 30 seconds • the immobilizer display goes off during the
after the immobilizer display starts blink-
5 and blank immobilizer key (specially cut for
ing. When registration of the ID code is
procedure
your vehicle at your Mitsubishi Motors • the immobilizer display does not come on
dealer) by doing the following: complete, the immobilizer display will within 30 seconds after step 4.
come on for 3 seconds then go off. If an  The procedure will be terminated automati-
1. Insert the first valid key into the ignition error occurs, the immobilizer display will cally if:
switch and turn the key to the “ON” posi- go off during the procedure. • a period of 30 seconds or longer elapses
tion for 5 seconds. from the moment when the first key is
2. Turn the key to the “OFF” position and turned to the “OFF” position to the moment
remove the first key. when the second key is turned to the “ON”
position
3. Within 30 seconds of removing the first
• a period of 30 seconds or longer elapses
key, insert the second valid key into the
from the moment when the second key is
ignition and turn it to the “ON” position.
About 10 seconds later, the immobilizer NOTE turned to the “OFF” position to the moment
when the blank immobilizer key is turned
display will start to blink.  When the key registration is completed, the
to the “ON” position
immobilizer display will come on within 30
seconds of turning the ignition switch to the  To use the new remote control transmitters, it
“ON” position with the blank immobilizer is necessary to register the key with both the
key (specially cut for your vehicle at your electronic immobilizer and keyless entry sys-
Mitsubishi Motors dealer). tem.
Also refer to “Keyless entry system: Cus-
tomer remote control transmitter program-
5. If you wish to register another key, per- ming” on page 5-9.
form the process again from step 1.

5-6 Features and controls

[Link] 7 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Keyless entry system (if so equipped)

It can also help you signal for attention by
General information setting off the panic alarm.
To unlock
N00562301111

Your electronic immobilizer operates on a Press the UNLOCK button (2) to unlock the
radio frequency subject to Federal Communi- driver’s door only.
cations Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehi- Within about 2 seconds, press the UNLOCK
cles sold in U.S.A.) and Industry Canada button one more time to unlock all the doors
Rules (For vehicles sold in Canada). This and liftgate.
device complies with part 15 of FCC Rules The dome light will turn on for 30 seconds. 5
and Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS The turn signal lights will also blink twice.
standard(s). The front side-marker and parking lights will
Operation is subject to the following two con- also turn on for about 30 seconds. Refer to
ditions. “Welcome light” on page 5-123.

 This device may not cause harmful inter- 1- LOCK ( ) button

ference.
NOTE
2- UNLOCK ( ) button  The door and liftgate unlock function can be
 This device must accept any interference
3- PANIC button set so that all doors and liftgate unlock when
received, including interference that may
4- Indicator light the UNLOCK button (2) is pressed once.
cause undesired operation. Refer to “Setting the door and liftgate unlock
function” on page 5-8.
CAUTION To lock
 Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the manufacturer for compli- Press the LOCK button (1) to lock all the Answerback function
ance could void the user’s authority to oper-
doors and the liftgate.
ate the equipment.
The turn signal lights will also blink once. The horn and turn signal lights of the keyless
entry system answerback function can be
changed as required. This is done with the
Keyless entry system (if so NOTE
key removed from the ignition switch.
 If you press the LOCK button (1) twice the
equipped) horn will sound once.
N00509001933 NOTE
Press the remote control transmitter buttons  The answerback function will not operate if
to lock or unlock the doors and the liftgate. any of the doors are open.

Features and controls 5-7

 [Link] 8 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Keyless entry system (if so equipped)

Horn deactivation/reactivation Turn signal lights deactiva- Setting the door and liftgate
tion/reactivation unlock function
The answerback function can be set in the N00543601128
following three ways. The answerback function can be turned ON The door and liftgate unlock function can be
Each time the answerback function is set, a or OFF separately. set to the following two conditions.
chime will sound to tell you the condition of
Each time the door and liftgate unlock func-
the answerback function. 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch.
5 2. Open the driver’s door and turn the com-
tion is set, a chime will sound to tell you the
condition of the door and liftgate unlock
One The horn will not sound. bination headlights and dimmer switch to
function.
chime: the “OFF” position.
Two The horn will sound. 3. Press and hold the UNLOCK button (2)
Number
chimes: for 4 to 10 seconds and then press and Condition
of chimes
Four The horn will sound if the LOCK hold the LOCK button (1) during this
chimes: button is pressed twice within 1 time. All doors and the liftgate
One chime
second. 4. Within 10 seconds of pressing the LOCK unlock
button in step 3, release the UNLOCK Two
button first, and then release the LOCK Driver’s door unlock only
chimes
1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. button.
2. Open the driver’s door and turn the com-
bination headlights and dimmer switch to Number of 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch.
To lock To unlock 2. Open the driver’s door and turn the com-
the “OFF” position. chimes
3. Press and hold the LOCK button (1) for 4 bination headlights and dimmer switch to
One chime One flash Two flashes the “OFF” position.
to 10 seconds and then press and hold the
UNLOCK button (2) during this time. Two chimes One flash No flash 3. Press and hold the LOCK button (1) for 4
4. Within 10 seconds of pressing the Three chimes No flash Two flashes to 10 seconds and then press and hold the
UNLOCK button in step 3, release the UNLOCK button (2) during this time.
Four chimes Two flashes One flash 4. Within 10 seconds of pressing the
UNLOCK button first, and then release
the LOCK button. Five chimes No flash One flash UNLOCK button in step 3, release the
Six chimes Two flashes No flash LOCK button first, and then release the
UNLOCK button.
Seven
No flash No flash
chimes

5-8 Features and controls

[Link] 9 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Keyless entry system (if so equipped)

1. Have available all (current and new)
Using the panic alarm Additional remote control remote control transmitters you wish to
N00543700034
transmitters register.
If you are near your vehicle and feel threat- N00543900049 2. With a valid (already registered) remote
ened, you may acti-vate the alarm to call To add a remote control transmitter, you must control transmitter, press and hold the
attention as follows: already have 1 registered remote control UNLOCK button (2) for 4 to 10 seconds.
transmitter. Then press and hold the LOCK button (1)
1. Press the PANIC button (3) for more than during this time.
1 second.
Registering the ID code can be done by your-
self or by your authorized Mitsubishi Motors 3. Within 10 seconds of pressing the LOCK
5
2. The headlights will blink on and off and button, release the LOCK button first, and
dealer. For you to register the ID code your-
the horn will sound intermittently for then release the UNLOCK button.
self, follow the “Customer remote control
about 3 minutes. At this time, ID codes for all remote con-
transmitter programming” procedure below.
3. To turn off the alarm, press any button on trol transmitters except for the transmitter
If you choose to have your authorized
the remote control transmitter. used in steps 2 and 3 are erased and the
Mitsubishi Motors dealer register the ID
code, take your vehicle and any remaining answerback function (door is locked and
Replacement remote control keys to your authorized Mitsubishi Motors unlocked) informs you that the registra-
transmitters dealer. tion mode has been activated.
N00543800051
4. Within 60 seconds after step 3, complete
the following ID code registration opera-
Only remote control transmitters pro- NOTE
tion using the next remote control trans-
grammed with the vehicle’s electronics can  You are provided with 2 remote control
transmitters, but you may register up to 8
mitter you wish to register within 4
lock or unlock all doors and the liftgate. seconds.
remote control transmitters.
If you lose the remote control transmitter, you i) Press and hold both the LOCK and
can order a remote control transmitter from UNLOCK buttons for 2 seconds.
ii) Release both the LOCK and UNLOCK
your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer by Customer remote control trans- buttons simultaneously for 1 second.
referring to the key number. mitter programming
To prevent vehicle theft, the ID code for the iii) Press the UNLOCK button. The
remote control transmitter must be changed.
N00544001116
answerback function informs you that the
Take your vehicle and all remote control You can program new remote control trans- ID code registration of the transmitter is
transmitters to your authorized Mitsubishi mitters to the system if you have one valid completed.
Motors dealer to have your ID code changed. (already registered) remote control transmit-
ter by doing the following:

Features and controls 5-9

 [Link] 10 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Keyless entry system (if so equipped)

5. To register the ID codes of additional Operation is subject to the following two con-
remote control transmitters, repeat step 4
NOTE ditions.
• The doors and the liftgate cannot be locked
within 60 seconds after step 4.
or unlocked.  This device may not cause harmful inter-
6. If no ID code of a remote control trans-
• The panic alarm cannot be operated. ference.
mitter is registered within 60 seconds
• The indicator light (4) is dim or does not  This device must accept any interference
after step 4, the registration mode is can-
come on. received, including interference that may
celed and the normal mode returns.
 If you lose your remote control transmitter, cause undesired operation.
5 please contact an authorized Mitsubishi
NOTE Motors dealer for a replacement.
 For verification purposes, try to lock and  If you wish to obtain an additional remote CAUTION
unlock the doors with the re-coded remote control transmitter, please contact an autho-  Changes or modifications not expressly
control transmitters after the registration is rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. A maximum approved by the manufacturer for compli-
completed. of 8 remote control transmitters can be pro- ance could void the user’s authority to oper-
grammed for your vehicle. ate the equipment.
 The indicator light (4) comes on each time a
button is pressed.  To use the new remote control transmitters, it
is necessary to register the key with both the
 The keyless entry system does not work if
electronic immobilizer and keyless entry sys-
the key is in the ignition switch.
tem.
Procedure for replacing the
 The remote control transmitter can be used
from about 40 feet (12 m) away. However,
Also refer to “Electronic immobilizer (Anti- remote control transmitter bat-
this distance may change if your vehicle is
theft starting system): Customer key pro- tery
gramming” on page 5-6.
near a TV transmitting tower, a power sta- N00544100080

tion, or a radio station. 1. Before replacing the battery, remove static

 If the UNLOCK button (2) is pressed when General information electricity from your body by touching a
all doors and the liftgate are locked and no N00546101137 metal grounded object.
doors or the liftgate are opened within about 2. With the Mitsubishi mark facing you,
30 seconds, the doors and the liftgate will
Your keyless entry system operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communica- insert the cloth-cov-ered tip of a flat blade
automatically re-lock.
tions Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehicles screwdriver into the notch in the remote
 If the following conditions are observed after
sold in U.S.A.) and Industry Canada Rules control transmitter case and use it to open
pressing the LOCK (1) or UNLOCK (2) but-
(For vehicles sold in Canada). This device the case.
ton on the remote control transmitter, the
battery in the remote control transmitter may complies with part 15 of FCC Rules and
need to be replaced. Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS stan-
dard(s).

5-10 Features and controls

[Link] 11 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped)

8. Check the keyless entry system to see that
it works.

NOTE
 You may purchase a replacement battery at
an electric appliance store.
 An authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer can
replace the battery for you if you prefer. 5

CAUTION
4. Remove the old battery.  When the remote control transmitter case is
NOTE 5. Install a new battery with the + side (A) opened, be careful to keep water, dust, etc.
 Be sure to perform the procedure with the
down. out. Also, do not touch the internal compo-
Mitsubishi mark facing you. If the
nents.
Mitsubishi mark is not facing you when you
open the remote control transmitter case, the + side
buttons may come out.
Free-hand Advanced Secu-
3. Remove the remote control transmitter rity Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-
from the remote control transmitter case. - side
Then, open the remote control transmitter
key) (if so equipped)
N00503100111
using the method described in step 2.
Coin type battery
CR1620 The Free-hand Advanced Security Transmit-
ter (F.A.S.T.-key) enables the doors and the
liftgate to be locked and unlocked, the engine
6. Close the remote control transmitter
to be started and the operation mode to be
firmly.
changed simply by carrying it.
7. Place the remote control transmitter in the
The F.A.S.T.-key can also be used as the
remote control transmitter case, then
remote control transmitter of the keyless
securely close the remote control trans-
entry system.
mitter case.
Refer to “Free-hand Advanced Security
Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key): Keyless entry
Features and controls 5-11
 [Link] 12 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped)

system” on page 5-24. The operations possible with the F.A.S.T.-
key can be modified as stated below.
The F.A.S.T.-key must be carried by the (Keyless entry operations are possible.)
driver. The F.A.S.T.-key is required for For details, contact an authorized
vehicle operations such as locking and Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
unlocking the doors and the liftgate, • Enabling only the locking and unlocking
starting the engine, and changing the of the doors and the liftgate
• Enabling only the starting of the engine
5 operation mode. When leaving the vehi-
cle, make sure you are carrying the • Deactivating the F.A.S.T.-key
F.A.S.T.-key and then lock the vehicle.
NOTE
WARNING  The F.A.S.T.-key uses weak electromagnetic
waves.
 Individuals who use implantable pace-
In cases such as the following, operation
makers or implantable cardiovascular- A- External transmitter may be improper or unstable.
defibrillators should keep away from the
B- Internal transmitter • The vehicle is near a facility that emits
external and internal transmitters. The
strong electromagnetic waves, such as a TV
electromagnetic waves used in the
transmitting tower, a power station, a radio
F.A.S.T.-key may affect the operation of
implantable pacemakers and implantable WARNING station or an airport
cardiovascular-defibrillators.  Individuals using other electro-medical • The key is carried together with other com-
apparatus besides implantable pacemak- munication devices such as cellular phones
ers and implantable cardiovascular-defi- or radios, or electrical appliances such as
brillators should check with the computers
manufacturer of the apparatus to confirm • The F.A.S.T.-key touches or is covered by a
the effect of the electromagnetic waves metal object
used by the F.A.S.T.-key. The electromag- • A keyless entry system is being used
netic waves may affect the operations of nearby
the electro-medical apparatus. • The battery of the F.A.S.T.-key is run down
• The vehicle is in a location with strong
electromagnetic waves or noise

5-12 Features and controls

[Link] 13 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped)

when the ID codes of the vehicle and
NOTE F.A.S.T.-key match.
Use the emergency key in such circum-
stances.
Refer to “To operate without using the
F.A.S.T.-key” on page 5-22.
 The F.A.S.T.-key is constantly performing
reception operations in its communication
with the vehicle. This means that the battery
is always running down, regardless of how
5
often the F.A.S.T.-key is used. The battery
life is about 1 to 3 years, depending on the
usage conditions. *: Front of the vehicle
 Since the F.A.S.T.-key is constantly perform- : Operating range
ing reception operations, the reception of
strong electromagnetic waves can accelerate
the running down of the battery. Do not place NOTE NOTE
near to electrical appliances such as televi-  When the battery of the F.A.S.T.-key has run  Only the doors and the liftgate that detect the
sions or computers. down or there are strong electromagnetic F.A.S.T.-key can be locked and unlocked.
waves or noise in the area, the operating  The system may not operate if the F.A.S.T.-
range could decrease or operations could
Operating range of the become unstable.
key is too close to the windshield, door win-
dows or liftgate.
F.A.S.T.-key  Even if the F.A.S.T.-key is within about 2.3
N00503200125
feet (70 cm) of the driver’s or front passen-
When a person enters the operating range of Operating range for locking and ger’s door lock/unlock switch, the liftgate
the F.A.S.T.-key while carrying the F.A.S.T.- unlocking the doors and the lift- LOCK switch or the liftgate OPEN switch,
key and presses the driver’s or front passen- the system may not operate if the key is close
gate to the ground or in a high position.
ger’s door lock/unlock switch, the liftgate
LOCK switch or the liftgate OPEN switch,  If the F.A.S.T.-key is within the operating
The operating range is within about 2.3 feet range, even a person not carrying the
verification of the ID code is performed.
(70 cm) of the driver’s and front passenger’s F.A.S.T.-key can lock and unlock the doors
The doors and the liftgate can only be locked
door lock/unlock switches, the liftgate LOCK or the liftgate by pressing the driver’s or
and unlocked, the engine can only be started front passenger’s door lock/unlock switch,
switch and the liftgate OPEN switch.
and the operation mode can only be changed the liftgate LOCK switch or the liftgate
OPEN switch.

Features and controls 5-13

 [Link] 14 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped)

Operating range for starting the NOTE Driver’s and front passenger’s door lock/unlock
engine and changing the opera-  Even if the F.A.S.T.-key is inside the vehicle, switches
tion mode it may not be possible to start the engine and
N00503300067
change the operation mode if the key is too
close to a door or door window.
The operating range is the interior of the
vehicle.
To operate using the F.A.S.T.-
5 key
N00503401270

To lock
Liftgate switches

While carrying the F.A.S.T.-key, press the

driver’s or front passenger’s door lock/unlock
switch (A), or the liftgate LOCK switch (B)
within the operating range to lock all the
doors and the liftgate.
*: Front of the vehicle The turn signal lights will blink once and the
: Operating range buzzer will sound once.

Also refer to “Doors locks”, “Power door

NOTE locks” and “Liftgate” on pages 5-28, 5-30 and
5-31 respectively. NOTE
 Even if the F.A.S.T.-key is within the operat-
 In cases such as the following, the F.A.S.T.-
ing range, it may not be possible to start the
key does not operate.
engine and change the operation mode if the
• There is a F.A.S.T.-key in the passenger
key is in a storage space such as the glove
compartment
compartment, on top of the instrument panel,
or in the door pocket or luggage compart- • A door or the liftgate is open or ajar
ment. • The operation mode is not in OFF.

5-14 Features and controls

[Link] 15 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped)

NOTE Driver’s door lock/unlock switch Front passenger’s door lock/unlock switch
 The liftgate OPEN switch (C) can be used to
confirm that the vehicle is locked properly.
Press the liftgate OPEN switch within about
3 seconds of locking.
 If the liftgate OPEN switch is pressed 3 sec-
onds or more after the vehicle is locked, the
doors and the liftgate are unlocked.
 The time within which locking confirmation
5
is possible can be adjusted. See an autho-
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for details.

NOTE Liftgate OPEN switch

To unlock
 Settings can be changed so that all doors and
the liftgate are unlocked automatically by
While carrying the F.A.S.T.-key within the pressing the driver’s door lock/unlock switch
operating range, you can unlock the doors once.
and the liftgate by using the F.A.S.T.-key. Refer to “Setting the door and liftgate unlock
The dome light will turn on for 30 seconds. function” on page 5-26.
The turn signal lights will blink twice and the
buzzer will sound twice. Press the front passenger’s door lock/unlock
switch (B) or the liftgate OPEN switch (C) to
Also refer to “Door locks”, “Power door
unlock all the doors and the liftgate.
locks” and “Liftgate” on pages 5-28, 5-30 and
5-31 respectively. NOTE
 If the doors and the liftgate are unlocked
Press the driver’s door lock/unlock switch using the driver’s or front passenger’s door
(A) to unlock only the driver’s door. lock/unlock switch when all doors and the
Within about 2 seconds, press the driver’s liftgate are locked and no doors or the lift-
gate are opened within about 30 seconds, the
door lock/unlock switch one more time to
doors and the liftgate will automatically re-
unlock all the doors and the liftgate. lock.

Features and controls 5-15

 [Link] 16 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped)

NOTE Engine switch CAUTION

 The amount of time after unlocking until the N00513500075  If the engine switch operation is not smooth
vehicle relocks automatically can be To prevent vehicle theft, no F.A.S.T.-keys and feels like it is sticking, do not operate the
adjusted. See an authorized Mitsubishi switch.
other than those registered in advance can be
Motors dealer for details. Immediately contact an authorized
used to start the engine. (Electronic immobi-
 The doors and the liftgate cannot be Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
lizer function)
unlocked by using the liftgate OPEN switch
While carrying the F.A.S.T.-key, the engine
5 for about 3 seconds after locking.
 The time within which locking confirmation switch can be used to start the engine. NOTE
is possible can be adjusted. See an autho-  When operating the engine switch, press the
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for details. switch all the way in. If the switch is not
 In cases such as the following, the F.A.S.T.- fully pressed, the engine may not start or the
key does not operate. operation mode may not change. If the
• A door or the liftgate is open or ajar engine switch is pressed correctly, there is no
• The operation mode is not in OFF. need to hold the engine switch down.
 Functions settings can be modified as stated
below.
See an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer Operation mode of the engine
for details.
switch and its function
• Activating the operation confirmation func-
tion (blinking of the turn signal lights) only
during locking, or only during unlocking. OFF
• Deactivating the operation confirmation CAUTION
function (blinking of the turn signal lights)  The indicator light (A) will flash orange The indicator light on the engine switch turns
and buzzer. when there is a problem or malfunction in off.
• Modifying the number of blinks in the Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter. On vehicles equipped with continuously vari-
operation confirmation function (blinking Never drive if the indicator light on the able transmission (CVT), the operation mode
of the turn signal lights). engine switch is flashing orange. Immedi- cannot be put in OFF when the selector lever
• Making the buzzer sound when the ately contact your authorized Mitsubishi is in any position other than the “P” (PARK)
F.A.S.T.-key is removed from the passenger Motors dealer.
position.
compartment when all the doors and the
liftgate are closed.

5-16 Features and controls

[Link] 17 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped)

ACC ACC power auto-cutout function

N00568101036
Allows operation of electrical accessories.
After approximately 30 minutes has elapsed
The indicator light on the engine switch illu-
with the operation mode in ACC, the function
minates orange.
automatically cuts out the power for the audio
system and other electric devices that can be
ON operated with that mode.
All electrical accessories can be used.
When the engine switch is pressed while the 5
operation mode is in ACC, the power is sup-
The indicator light on the engine switch illu-
plied again to those devices.
minates green.
The indicator light turns off when the engine
is running. CAUTION NOTE
 When the engine is not running, put the oper-  It is possible to modify functions as follows:
ation mode in OFF. Leaving the operation • The time until the power cuts out can be
NOTE mode in ON or ACC for a long time when changed to approximately 60 minutes.
 Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic the engine is not running may cause the bat-
• The ACC power auto-cutout function can
immobilizer. To start the engine, the ID code tery to be discharged, making it impossible
be deactivated.
which the F.A.S.T.-key sends must match the to start the engine.
For details, we recommend you to consult an
one registered to the immobilizer computer.  When the battery is disconnected, the current
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
(Refer to “Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft operation mode is memorized. After recon-
starting system)” on page 5-23) necting the battery, the memorized mode is
selected automatically. Before disconnect-
ing the battery for repair or replacement, Warning activation
Changing the operation mode make sure to put the operation mode in OFF. N00503500173
Be careful if you are not sure which opera-
N00568000025 With the F.A.S.T.-key, warnings are given
tion mode the vehicle is in when the battery
If you press the engine switch without press- through buzzers and displays on the informa-
is run down.
ing the brake pedal {continuously variable tion screen in the multi-information display
 The operation mode cannot be changed from
transmission (CVT)} or the clutch pedal OFF to ACC or ON if the F.A.S.T.-key is not in order to prevent mistaken operations or
(manual transaxle) while the vehicle is sta- detected to be in the vehicle. Refer to “Oper- vehicle theft.
tionary, you can change the operation mode ating range for starting the engine and When a warning operates, be sure to check
in the order of OFF, ACC, ON, OFF. changing the operation mode” on page 5-14. the vehicle and the F.A.S.T.-key. A warning is

Features and controls 5-17

 [Link] 18 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped)

also displayed if there is a problem in the the warning display is displayed and the
The battery of the F.A.S.T.-key
F.A.S.T.-key. buzzer sounds 4 times as a warning since it’s
is run down
impossible to verify the ID codes of the
If the following warning displays, contact an F.A.S.T.-key and vehicle.
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.  A door or the liftgate cannot be locked
even when the driver’s or front passen-
ger’s door lock/unlock switch, or the lift- NOTE
There is a problem in the  The F.A.S.T.-key take-out monitoring system
gate LOCK switch is pressed.
5 F.A.S.T.-key does not function if the F.A.S.T.-key is
removed through a window without opening
Put the operation mode in OFF
Refer to “Key lock-in preven- a door.
and then start the engine again. This setting can be changed.
tion system” on page 5-18.
If the warning is not cancelled, See an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer
there is a fault in the electronic Refer to “Door ajar prevention for details.
immobilizer (Anti-theft start- system” on page 5-19.  The warning may display even if the
ing system). F.A.S.T.-key is in the operating range for
Please contact an authorized Refer to “Operation mode OFF starting the engine and changing the opera-
Mitsubishi Motors dealer. reminder system” on page tion mode. The surrounding environment or
5-19. electromagnetic waves may make it impossi-
ble to verify the ID codes of the F.A.S.T.-key
If the following warnings display, the display
and vehicle.
goes off if the correct action is taken. F.A.S.T.-key take-out monitoring
 The ID codes of the F.A.S.T.-key and the system
vehicle cannot be verified N00559801183 Key lock-in prevention system
N00559900116

Someone may be carrying a

F.A.S.T.-key with a different
ID code, or the F.A.S.T.-key
may not be within the operat-
ing range
When the operation mode in any mode other
Refer to “F.A.S.T.-key take-out than OFF, if the door(s) are opened, the When the operation mode is in OFF, the
monitoring system” on page F.A.S.T.-key is removed from the passenger F.A.S.T.-key is left in the passenger compart-
5-18. compartment, and then the door(s) are closed, ment, all the doors and the liftgate are closed,

5-18 Features and controls

[Link] 19 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped)

and someone tries to lock the vehicle by  The starter motor will be turning for up to
Operation mode OFF reminder
pressing the driver’s or front passenger’s door approximately 15 seconds if the engine
lock/unlock switch, or the liftgate LOCK system switch is released at once. Pressing the
N00560100118
switch, the warning display is displayed and engine switch again while the starter
the buzzer sounds for about 3 seconds as a motor is still turning will stop the starter
warning, and the doors and the liftgate cannot motor. The starter motor will be turning
be locked. for up to approximately 30 seconds while
the engine switch is pressed.
If the engine does not start, wait for a
5
Door ajar prevention system
while and then attempt to start the engine
N00560000117 When the operation mode is in any mode
again. Trying repeatedly with the starter
other than OFF, all the doors and the liftgate
motor still turning will damage the starter
are closed, and someone tries to lock the
mechanism.
vehicle by pressing the driver’s or front pas-
 If the engine will not start because the bat-
senger’s door lock/unlock switch, or the lift-
tery is weak or discharged, refer to
gate LOCK switch, the warning display is
“Jump-starting the engine” on page 8-2
displayed and the buzzer sounds for about 3
When the operation mode is in OFF, and for instructions.
seconds as a warning, and the doors and the
someone tries to lock the vehicle by pressing  A longer warm up period will only con-
liftgate cannot be locked.
the driver’s or front passenger’s door sume extra fuel.
lock/unlock switch, or the liftgate LOCK The engine is warmed up enough for driv-
switch while one of the doors or the liftgate is Starting and stopping the ing when the bar graph of engine coolant
not fully closed, the warning display is dis- engine temperature display starts to move. Refer
played and the buzzer sounds for about 3 sec- N00514601360 to “Interrupt display screen (With ignition
onds as a warning, and the doors and the switch or operation mode in ON)” on
liftgate cannot be locked. Tips for starting page 5-92.

 The operation mode can be in any mode

to start the engine.

Features and controls 5-19

 [Link] 20 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped)

WARNING NOTE NOTE

 Never run the engine in a closed or poorly  After the engine has not started for a while,  Minor noises may be heard on engine start-
ventilated area any longer than is needed the brake pedal effort needed to start the up. These will disappear as the engine warms
to move your vehicle out of the area. Car- engine may become greater. If this occurs, up.
bon monoxide gas, which is odorless and depress the brake pedal more firmly than
extremely poisonous, could build up and usual. When the engine is hard to start
cause serious injury or death.
5 4. Press and hold the clutch pedal all the way After several attempts, you may experience
down (manual transaxle). that the engine still does not start.
CAUTION 5. On vehicles equipped with manual trans-
 Do not push-start the vehicle. 1. Make sure that all electric devices, such
axle, place the gearshift lever in the “N”
 Do not run the engine at high rpms or drive as lights, air conditioning blower and rear
(Neutral) position.
at high speeds until the engine has had a window defogger, are turned off.
On vehicles equipped with continuously
chance to warm up. 2. While depressing the brake pedal {contin-
variable transmission (CVT), make sure
uously variable transmission (CVT)} or
the selector lever is in the “P” (PARK)
the clutch pedal (manual transaxle), press
position.
Starting the engine the accelerator pedal halfway and hold it
there, then crank the engine. Release the
NOTE accelerator pedal, immediately after the
Your vehicle is equipped with an electroni-  On vehicles equipped with continuously
cally controlled fuel injection system. This is engine starts.
variable transmission (CVT), the engine can
a system that automatically controls fuel only be started when the selector lever is in
3. If the engine still will not start, the engine
injection. There is usually no need to depress the “P” (PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL) posi- could be flooded with too much gasoline.
the accelerator pedal when starting the tion. While depressing the brake pedal (CVT)
engine. For safety reasons, the engine should be or the clutch pedal (manual transaxle),
To prevent battery drain, wait a few seconds started when the selector lever is in the “P” push the accelerator pedal all the way
between attempts to restart the engine. (PARK) position in which the driving wheels down and hold it there, then press the
lock. engine switch to crank the engine. If the
1. Make sure all occupants are properly engine does not start after 5 to 6 seconds,
seated with seat belts fastened. 6. Press the engine switch. push the engine switch to stop cranking
2. Make sure the parking brake is applied. 7. Confirm that all warning lights and warn- the engine, and release the accelerator
3. Press and hold the brake pedal down ing displays are functioning properly. pedal. Put the operation mode in OFF.
firmly with your right foot.

5-20 Features and controls

[Link] 21 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped)

Wait a few seconds, and then press the 2. Fully engage the parking brake while
Stopping the engine
engine switch to crank the engine again depressing the brake pedal.
N00568200014
while depressing the brake pedal (CVT) 3. On vehicles with a manual transaxle,
or the clutch pedal (manual transaxle), but WARNING press the engine switch to stop the engine,
do not push the accelerator pedal. If the  Do not operate the engine switch while and then move the gearshift lever to the
engine fails to start, repeat these proce- driving except in an emergency. If the 1st (on a uphill) or “R” (Reverse) (on a
dures. If the engine still will not start, con- engine is stopped while driving, the brake downhill) position.
tact your local Mitsubishi Motors dealer On vehicles equipped with continuously
or a repair facility of your choice for
servomechanism will cease to function and
braking efficiency will deteriorate. Also, variable transmission (CVT), move the
5
assistance. the power steering system will not func- selector lever to the “P” (PARK) position,
tion and it will require greater manual and then press the engine switch to stop
Startability of continuously variable trans- effort to operate the steering. This could the engine.
mission (CVT) vehicles with an ambient result in a serious accident.
temperature of -22 °F (-30 °C) or lower
When the ambient temperature is -22 °F (-30
If the F.A.S.T.-key is not operat-
°C) or lower, it may not be possible to start NOTE ing properly
from a standstill even with the selector lever  If you have to bring the engine to an emer- N00568301067

in the “D” (DRIVE) or “R” (REVERSE) gency stop while driving, press and hold the
Insert the F.A.S.T.-key into the key slot in the
engine switch for 3 seconds or more, or press
position. glove box. Starting the engine and changing
it quickly 3 times or more. The engine will
This phenomenon occurs because the trans- stop and the operation mode will go to ACC. the operation mode should be now possible.
axle has not warmed up sufficiently; it does  On vehicles equipped with continuously Remove the F.A.S.T.-key from the key slot
not indicate a problem. If this occurs, place variable transmission (CVT), do not stop the after starting the engine or changing the oper-
the selector lever in the “P” (PARK) position engine with the selector lever in any position ation mode.
and let the engine idle for at least 10 minutes. other than the “P” (PARK) position. If the
The transaxle will warm up, and you will be engine is stopped with the selector lever in
able to start normally. any position other than the “P” (PARK) posi-
Do not leave the vehicle during warm-up tion, the operation mode will go to ACC
operation. rather than OFF.
Put the operation mode in OFF after placing
the selector lever in the “P” (PARK) posi-
tion.

1. Stop the vehicle.

Features and controls 5-21
 [Link] 22 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped)

F.A.S.T.-key reminder

5
If the operation mode is in OFF and the
driver’s door is opened with the F.A.S.T.-key
in the key slot, a warning is issued with the
warning display and the buzzer buzzing for
NOTE approximately 3 seconds to remind you to
NOTE
 Do not insert into the key slot anything other  Only use the emergency key in an emer-
remove the key.
than the F.A.S.T.-key. This could cause dam- gency. When the battery of the F.A.S.T.-key
age or a malfunction. has run down, replace the battery as soon as
 Remove the object or additional key from the To operate without using the possible and use it as a F.A.S.T.-key again.
F.A.S.T.-key before inserting the key into the  After using the emergency key, be sure to
key slot. The vehicle may not be able to
F.A.S.T.-key reinsert it into the F.A.S.T.-key.
N00514800017
receive the registered ID code from the regis-
tered key. Therefore, the engine may not start Locking and unlocking the driver’s door
and the operation mode may not change. Emergency key
 The F.A.S.T.-key is fixed in the key slot N00515200106 Turn the emergency key toward the front of
when inserted in the illustrated direction. The emergency key is built into the F.A.S.T.- the vehicle to lock the door. After checking
Simply pull out the key to remove it from the that the door is locked, turn the emergency
key.
key slot. key back to the center and remove it.
When the F.A.S.T.-key cannot be used, such
as when the battery of the F.A.S.T.-key or the
vehicle has run down, the emergency key can
be used to lock and unlock the driver’s door.

To use the emergency key (A), unlock the

lock knob (B) and remove it from the
F.A.S.T.-key (C).

5-22 Features and controls

[Link] 23 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped)

Replacement F.A.S.T.-keys NOTE

N00561000042  You are provided with 2 F.A.S.T.-keys, but
Only the F.A.S.T.-keys that have been pro- you may register up to 4 F.A.S.T.-keys.
grammed to the vehicle’s electronics can be You can obtain blank F.A.S.T.-keys specially
used to start the vehicle. cut for your vehicle from your Mitsubishi
Motors dealer.
If you lose the F.A.S.T.-key, you can order a
F.A.S.T.-key from your authorized Mitsubishi 5
Motors dealer by referring to the key number. Customer F.A.S.T.-key program-
To prevent vehicle theft, take your vehicle ming (Except for vehicles sold in
1- Insert or remove the emergency key and the remaining F.A.S.T.-keys to an autho- Canada)
2- Lock rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer to have the ID N00561201184
3- Unlock codes reprogrammed.
You can program new F.A.S.T.-keys to the
system if you have two valid (already regis-
Additional F.A.S.T.-keys tered) F.A.S.T.-keys and blank (not regis-
Electronic immobilizer (Anti- N00561100014 tered) F.A.S.T.-key.
theft starting system) To add a F.A.S.T.-key, you must already have
N00529600055 2 registered F.A.S.T.-keys. You need to regis- For F.A.S.T.-key programming, follow the
ter the ID code to the vehicle. procedures below.
The electronic immobilizer is designed to sig-
nificantly reduce the possibility of vehicle Registering the ID code can be done by your
1. Open the driver’s door.
theft. The purpose of the system is to immo- authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Or it
bilize the vehicle if an invalid start is can be done by yourself (except for vehicles
NOTE
attempted. A valid start attempt can only be sold in Canada).
 Keep the driver’s door open until F.A.S.T.-
achieved (subject to certain conditions) using For you to register the ID code yourself, fol-
key programming is finished. Do not open or
a F.A.S.T.-Key “registered” to the immobi- low the “Customer F.A.S.T.-key program- close other doors.
lizer system. ming” procedure below.
All of the keys provided with your new vehi- If you choose to have your authorized
cle have been programmed to the vehicle’s Mitsubishi Motors dealer register the ID 2. While carrying the first valid F.A.S.T.-
electronics. code, take your vehicle and all remaining key, put the operation mode in ON. (Per-
F.A.S.T.-keys to your authorized Mitsubishi form the following procedure within 30
Motors dealer. seconds.)

Features and controls 5-23

 [Link] 24 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped)

3. Insert the new F.A.S.T.-key into the key
slot.
NOTE
 It is not possible to register a F.A.S.T.-key if
the immobilizer display goes off during the
procedure.

When registration of ID code is complete, Keyless entry system

the buzzer will sound 3 times and the
5
N00515501223
immobilizer display will come on for 30
Press the remote control transmitter buttons
seconds.
to lock or unlock the doors and the liftgate.
If an error occurs, F.A.S.T.-key program-
It can also help you signal for attention by
ming will be terminated and the buzzer
setting off the panic alarm.
will sound for 3 seconds.
4. With the first valid F.A.S.T.-key, press NOTE
and hold the UNLOCK button for 4 to 10
 F.A.S.T.-key programming will be termi-
seconds and then press and hold the nated if the operation mode is put in OFF
LOCK button during this time. before the immobilizer display starts blink-
5. Within 10 seconds of pressing the LOCK ing.
button in step 4, release the LOCK button
first, and then release the UNLOCK but-
ton. (Perform the following procedure 8. If you wish to register another F.A.S.T.-
within 30 seconds.) key, repeat the process from step 1 after
6. With the second valid F.A.S.T.-key, press the operation mode is put in OFF.
and hold the UNLOCK button for 4 to 10
seconds and then press and hold the NOTE 1- LOCK ( ) button
LOCK button during this time.  The immobilizer display will go off immedi- 2- UNLOCK ( ) button
7. Within 10 seconds of pressing the LOCK ately if the operation mode is put in OFF. 3- PANIC button
button in step 6, release the LOCK button  Perform the operation when the interrupt dis- 4- Operation indicator light
play screen is not showing. The interrupt dis-
first, and then release the UNLOCK but-
play screen may prevent you from seeing the
ton. The immobilizer display on the infor- immobilizer display.
mation screen in the multi-information
display will blink.

5-24 Features and controls

[Link] 25 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped)

To lock Answerback function Turn signal light deactivation/reactiva-

tion
Press the LOCK button (1) to lock all the The horn and turn signal lights of the keyless
The answerback function from the turn signal
doors and the liftgate. entry system answerback function can be
lights can be turned ON or OFF separately.
The turn signal lights will also blink once. changed as required.
1. Put the operation mode in OFF.
NOTE Horn deactivation/reactivation 2. Open the driver’s door and turn the com-
 If you press the LOCK button (1) twice, the bination headlights and dimmer switch to 5
horn will sound once. The answerback function can be set in the the “OFF” position.
following three ways. 3. Press and hold the UNLOCK button (2)
for 4 to 10 seconds and then press and
One The horn will not sound.
To unlock chime:
hold the LOCK button (1) during this
time.
Two The horn will sound.
Press the UNLOCK button (2) to unlock the 4. Within 10 seconds of pressing the LOCK
chimes:
driver’s door only. button in step 3, release the UNLOCK
Four The horn will sound if the LOCK
To unlock all doors and the liftgate, press the button first, and then release the LOCK
chimes: button is pressed twice within 1 sec-
UNLOCK button two times within a 2 second button.
ond.
time period. Number of
The dome light will turn on for 30 seconds. To lock To unlock
chimes
The turn signal lights will also blink twice. 1. Put the operation mode in OFF.
The front side-marker and parking lights will 2. Open the driver’s door and turn the com- One chime One flash Two flashes
also turn on for about 30 seconds. Refer to bination headlights and dimmer switch to Two chimes One flash No flash
“Welcome light” on page 5-123. the “OFF” position. Three chimes No flash Two flashes
3. Press and hold the LOCK button (1) for 4
Four chimes Two flashes One flash
NOTE to 10 seconds and then press and hold the
 The door and liftgate unlock function can be UNLOCK button (2) during this time. Five chimes No flash One flash
set so that all doors and the liftgate unlock 4. Within 10 seconds of pressing the Six chimes Two flashes No flash
when the UNLOCK button (2) is pressed UNLOCK button in step 3, release the
UNLOCK button first, and then release Seven
once. No flash No flash
Refer to “Setting the door and liftgate unlock the LOCK button. chimes
function” on page 5-26.

Features and controls 5-25

 [Link] 26 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped)

4. Within 10 seconds of pressing the
Buzzer deactivation/reactivation
UNLOCK button in step 3, release the
NOTE
 If the following conditions are observed after
The buzzer answerback function can be LOCK button first, and then release the
pressing the LOCK (1) or UNLOCK (2) but-
turned ON or OFF as required. UNLOCK button.
ton on the remote control transmitter, the
buttery in the F.A.S.T.-key may need to be
Setting the door and liftgate Using the panic alarm replaced.
• The doors and the liftgate cannot be locked
unlock function N00544701070

5 N00544601109 If you are near your vehicle and feel threat-

or unlocked.
• The panic alarm cannot be operated.
The door and liftgate unlock function can be ened, you can acti-vate the alarm to call atten-
• The indicator light (4) is dim or does not
set to the following two conditions. tion as follows:
come on.
Each time the door and liftgate unlock func-  If you lose your F.A.S.T.-key, please contact
1. Press the PANIC button (3) for more than
tion is set, a chime will sound to tell you the an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for a
1 second.
condition of the door and liftgate unlock replacement.
2. The headlights will blink on and off and
function.  If you wish to obtain an additional F.A.S.T.-
the horn will sound intermittently for
key, please contact an authorized Mitsubishi
about 3 minutes. Motors dealer. A maximum of four F.A.S.T.-
Number 3. To turn off the alarm, press any button on
Condition key can be programmed for your vehicle.
of chimes the remote control transmitter.  To use the new remote control transmitters, it
All doors and the liftgate is necessary to register the key with the elec-
One chime
unlock tronic immobilizer and keyless entry system.
NOTE Refer to “Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft
Two  The indicator light (4) comes on each time a
Driver’s door unlock only starting system): Customer F.A.S.T.-key pro-
chimes button is pressed. gramming” on page 5-23.
 The F.A.S.T.-key can be used from about 40
1. Put the operation mode in OFF. feet (12 m) away. However, this distance
2. Open the driver’s door and turn the com- may change if your vehicle is near a TV
transmitting tower, a power station, or a
bination headlights and dimmer switch to
radio station.
the “OFF” position.
 If the UNLOCK button (2) is pressed when
3. Press and hold the LOCK button (1) for 4
all doors and the liftgate are locked and no
to 10 seconds and then press and hold the doors or the liftgate are opened within about
UNLOCK button (2) during this time. 30 seconds, the doors and the liftgate will
automatically re-lock.

5-26 Features and controls

[Link] 27 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped)

4. Install a new battery with the + side (A)
General information Procedure for replacing the up.
N00562001088
remote control transmitter bat-
+ side
Your F.A.S.T.-key operates on a radio fre- tery
quency subject to Federal Communications N00562100066
Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehicles sold 1. Before replacing the battery, remove static
in U.S.A.) and Industry Canada Rules (For electricity from your body by touching a - side
vehicles sold in Canada). This device com-
plies with part 15 of FCC Rules and Industry
metal grounded object.
2. With the Mitsubishi mark facing you,
5
Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Coin type
insert the cloth-cov-ered tip of a flat blade
Operation is subject to the following two con- battery
screwdriver into the notch in the case and CR2032
ditions. use it to open the case.
•This device may not cause harmful inter-
ference. 5. Close the case firmly.
•This device must accept any interference 6. Check the keyless entry system to see that
received, including interference that may it works.
cause undesired operation.

NOTE
CAUTION  You may purchase a replacement battery at
an electric appliance store.
 Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the manufacturer for compli-  An authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer can
ance could void the user’s authority to oper- replace the battery for you if you prefer.
ate the equipment.
NOTE
 Be sure to perform the procedure with the
CAUTION
Mitsubishi mark facing you. If the  When the remote control transmitter case is
Mitsubishi mark is not facing you when you opened, be careful to keep water, dust, etc.
open the case, the transmitter may come out. out. Also, do not touch the internal compo-
nents.

3. Remove the old battery.

Features and controls 5-27

 [Link] 28 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Door locks

Door locks To lock and unlock with the key NOTE

N00509200488 (driver’s door)  When locking or unlocking with the key,
only the driver’s door will be locked or
WARNING unlocked.
Turn the key toward the front of the vehicle to To lock or unlock all doors and the liftgate,
 Make sure all doors are tightly closed and
locked while driving.
lock the door. After checking that the door is use the power door lock switches, the key-
• Locked doors, in combination with the
locked, turn the key back to the center and less entry system or the F.A.S.T-key opera-
5 use of seat belts, can help reduce the risk remove it. tion.
Refer to “Power door locks” on page 5-30,
of ejection in an accident.
“Keyless entry system” on pages 5-7 and
• Locked doors can help keep passengers,
5-24, and “To operate using the F.A.S.T.-
especially small children, from opening
key” on page 5-14.
doors and falling out of moving vehicles.
 In vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key,
• Locked doors can help prevent outsiders
the driver’s door can be locked and unlocked
from gaining access to your vehicle when
using the emergency key.
you slow or come to a stop.
Refer to “Emergency key” on page 5-22.
 Lock your vehicle whenever you leave it.
Children who get into unlocked vehicles
may not be able to get out. Children
trapped inside vehicles can quickly be To lock or unlock the door from
overcome by heat and suffer serious the inside
injury or death due to heat stroke. 1- Insert or remove the key
 Never leave a child alone in the vehicle. In 2- Lock
addition to the risk of heat stroke, chil- 3- Unlock Move the lock knob to the lock position to
dren can activate switches and controls, lock the door.
resulting in an injury or fatal accident. All doors should be kept locked while driv-
 When closing a door, make sure that the ing.
door is fully closed and the door-ajar
warning display goes out on the informa-
tion screen on the multi-information dis-
play. If the door is ajar it could open while
driving and cause an accident.

5-28 Features and controls

[Link] 29 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Door locks
ignition switch, the key reminder buzzer will
sound intermittently to remind you to remove
the key.
The warning display will be displayed on the
information screen in the multi-information
display.

Lock out protection 5

N00517300042

If the key is in the ignition switch or the oper-

1- Lock ation mode is in any mode other than OFF
2- Unlock when you push the lock knob forward with
Key reminder system (except the driver’s door or passenger’s door open,
The driver’s door can be unlocked without for vehicles equipped with the the lock knob will automatically return to the
unlocked position.
using the lock knob by pulling on the inside F.A.S.T.-key)
door handle. N00549600224

Type 1 Operation mode ON reminder

To lock the door without using system (vehicles equipped with
the key the F.A.S.T.-key)
N00503800105
1. Move the inside lock knob to the locked
position.
2. Be sure the keys are not inside the vehi- Type 2
cle. Close the door.

If the driver’s door is opened while the engine

is stopped and the operation mode is in any
position other than OFF, the operation mode
If the ignition switch is turned off and the ON buzzer will sound intermittently to
driver’s door is opened with the key in the remind you to put the operation mode in OFF.

Features and controls 5-29

 [Link] 30 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Power door locks

The warning display will be displayed on the
information screen in the multi-information
To lock and unlock the doors To unlock the doors and liftgate
display. and liftgate N00563401122

You can select the functions to unlock the

doors and liftgate either using the ignition
Power door locks Using the power door lock switch switch or the engine switch, or using the
N00509300551
selector lever position {continuously vari-
5 NOTE able transmission (CVT)}.
These functions are not activated when the
 When locking or unlocking with the key on
the driver’s door, only the driver’s door will vehicle is shipped from the factory. To acti-
lock or unlock. vate or deactivate these functions, please
 Repeated continuous operation between lock contact your authorized Mitsubishi Motors
and unlock could activate the power door dealer.
locking system’s built-in protection circuit,
and prevent the system from operating. If
this occurs, wait about 1 minute before oper- Using the ignition switch or the
ating the power door lock switch. engine switch
1- Lock
2- Unlock All doors and the liftgate will unlock when
the ignition switch is turned to the “OFF”
position or the operation mode is put in OFF.
All of the doors and the liftgate can be locked
or unlocked by pressing the power door lock
switch on the driver’s or the front passenger Using the selector lever position
door. {continuously variable transmis-
sion (CVT)}

All doors and the liftgate will unlock when

the selector lever is moved to the “P” (PARK)
position with the ignition switch or the opera-
tion mode in ON.

5-30 Features and controls

[Link] 31 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Child safety locks for rear door

Child safety locks help prevent rear passen-
gers, especially children, from opening the Liftgate
rear door using the inside door handle. N00510101279

A lock lever for the child safety lock is pro-

vided on each rear door.
WARNING
 It is dangerous to drive with the liftgate
When the lever is in the lock position (1), the
open since carbon monoxide (CO) gas con-
rear door cannot be opened using the inside tained in engine exhaust gases can enter
door handle.
To open the rear door when the child safety
the passenger compartment.
CO is an invisible, odorless gas that can
5
lock lever is in the lock position, pull the out- cause unconsciousness and even death.
side door handle.  When opening and closing the liftgate,
When the lever is in the release position (2), make sure that there are no people nearby
the child safety lock is released and the rear and be careful not to hit your head or
Child safety locks for rear door can be opened using the inside door han- pinch your hands, neck, etc.
door dle.  If snow or ice has accumulated on the lift-
gate, remove it before opening the liftgate.
N00509400262
Otherwise the liftgate may abruptly close
WARNING due to the weight of the snow or ice.
 Always keep the doors tightly closed and  When opening the liftgate, always fully
locked when driving. An unlocked door open it. A partially opened liftgate can
may be accidentally opened by a passen- unexpectedly close due to its own weight.
ger, especially by a child who could fall  When the vehicle is parked on a slope, the
out. Also, if the doors are not locked, there effort required to open or close the liftgate
is a greater risk of someone being thrown may be greater or less than expected. The
from the vehicle in an accident. liftgate may also open or close more
quickly.

1- To lock CAUTION
2- To release  Do not stand behind the exhaust pipe when
loading and unloading luggage. Heat from
the exhaust could lead to burns.

Features and controls 5-31

 [Link] 32 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Liftgate

CAUTION CAUTION
 To avoid damage to the liftgate, make sure  Make sure there is no one standing nearby
the area above and behind the liftgate is clear when opening the liftgate.
before opening it.

NOTE
NOTE  The liftgate cannot be opened if it is not
5  Locking and unlocking the doors by using raised immediately after pressing the liftgate
power door locks (driver and front passenger OPEN switch.
side), keyless entry system or the F.A.S.T.- If this happens, press the liftgate OPEN
key operation (vehicles equipped with the switch again and raise the liftgate.
F.A.S.T.-key) also locks and unlocks the lift-  It is not possible to open the liftgate while
gate. the battery is disconnected. If necessary, use
CAUTION
the inside liftgate release.  To avoid injuring your hand or arm, do not
 When the battery is reconnected, all doors attempt to close the liftgate without releasing
the liftgate grip (A).
To open and the liftgate will be locked. Unlock them
 Before starting the vehicle, be sure to con-
before trying to open the liftgate.
firm that the liftgate is locked. If the liftgate
After unlocking, press the liftgate OPEN
opens while driving the vehicle, objects
switch (A) and raise the liftgate.
stored in the luggage compartment could fall
To close out into the road.

Pull the liftgate grip (A) downward as illus-

trated and release it before the liftgate closes
completely. Gently slam the liftgate from the
outside so that it is completely closed.

5-32 Features and controls

[Link] 33 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Inside liftgate release

NOTE
 Gas struts (B) are installed in the locations
illustrated in order to support the liftgate.
Please observe the following in order to pre-
vent damage or faulty operation:
• Do not touch, push or pull the gas struts
when closing the liftgate.
• Do not attach any plastic material, tape,
etc., to the gas struts.
5
• Do not tie string, etc., around the gas struts.
• Do not hang objects on the gas struts.
You and your family should familiarize your- 3. Push out on the liftgate to open it.
selves with the location and operation of the
liftgate release lever.
CAUTION
 Always keep the release lever lid on the lift-
To open gate closed when driving so that your lug-
gage cannot accidentally bump the lever and
1. Open the lid (A) inside of the liftgate. open the liftgate.

Theft-alarm system
N00510201283

The theft-alarm system is designed to provide

protection from unauthorized entry into the
Inside liftgate release vehicle. This system is operated in three
N00523100074
stages: the first is the “armed” stage, the sec-
The inside liftgate release is designed to pro- ond is the “alarm” stage, and third is the “dis-
vide a way to open the liftgate if the battery is armed” stage. If triggered, the system
dead or disconnected. provides both audible and visual alarm sig-
The liftgate release lever (see illustration) is 2. Move the lever (B) to open the liftgate. nals.
mounted on the liftgate.

Features and controls 5-33

 [Link] 34 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Theft-alarm system
At this time, the theft-alarm indicator (A)
CAUTION on the audio panel flashes for confirma-
NOTE
 Do not modify or add parts to the theft-alarm  The system will be disarmed if, while the
tion.
system. Doing so could cause the theft-alarm theft-alarm indicator is illuminated, the fol-
to malfunction. lowing operation is performed.
• Except for vehicles equipped with the
F.A.S.T.-key, if the ignition switch is turned
Armed stage to the “ON” position.
5 • For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-
key, if the operation mode is put in ON.
Park the vehicle and stop the engine. Arm the  The system will not be armed if a door, the
system as described below. liftgate or the engine hood is not completely
closed. If this happens, rearm the system as
1. Except for vehicles equipped with the described above.
F.A.S.T.-key, remove the key from the  The theft-alarm system can be activated
ignition switch. when people are riding inside the vehicle or
4. The system has entered the armed stage
For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.- when the windows are open. To prevent acci-
after about 20 seconds, when the theft-
key, put the operation mode in OFF. dental activation of the alarm, do not set the
alarm indicator (A) flashing becomes system to the system armed mode while peo-
2. Make sure that the engine hood is closed.
slower. ple are riding in the vehicle.
3. Lock all doors and the liftgate by using
The theft-alarm indicator (A) continues to
the keyless entry system or the F.A.S.T.-
flash while the system is in the armed
key operation.
stage. Alarm stage
Arm the system and leave
NOTE The alarm will be activated if any of the fol-
 If the engine hood is open, the theft-alarm lowing occur while the vehicle is parked and
indicator (A) illuminates and the system can- the system is armed.
not enter the armed stage.
The system enters the armed stage about 20  One of the doors and the liftgate is opened
seconds after the engine hood is closed. without using the keyless entry system or
 The system will be disarmed if, while the the F.A.S.T.-key operation.
theft-alarm indicator (A) is illuminated, all  The engine hood is opened.
doors and the liftgate are unlocked by using
the keyless entry system or the F.A.S.T.-key
operation.

5-34 Features and controls

[Link] 35 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Theft-alarm system

Type of alarm NOTE Disarmed stage

 While the alarm is operating, a warning is
When the alarm is activated: displayed on the information screen in the The system will be disarmed if the following
multi-information display.
operation is performed.
1. The headlights blink on and off for 3 min-
Type 1
utes.  Except for vehicles equipped with the
After 3 minutes the headlights automati- F.A.S.T.-key, if the ignition switch is
cally shut off. turned to the “ON” position. 5
2. The horn will sound intermittently for 3  For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-
minutes. key, if the operation mode is put in ON.
 All doors and the liftgate are unlocked by
Horn sounds! Type 2 using the keyless entry system or the
Headlights blink on and off! F.A.S.T.-key operation.
Disarm...by the keyless entry system or the
F.A.S.T.-key operation

Alarm deactivation

The alarm can be deactivated in the following

ways.
NOTE
 By using the keyless entry system or the
 The alarm will continue to operate for 3 min-
F.A.S.T.-key operation to lock or unlock
utes. At the end of that period, the alarm will
the doors and the liftgate. NOTE
automatically shut off to save battery power.
 Except for vehicles equipped with the  If the UNLOCK button on the remote control
The system will then be rearmed until the
transmitter, or the driver’s or front passen-
proper disarming step is taken. F.A.S.T.-key, by turning the ignition
ger’s door lock/unlock switch is pressed
 The alarm will resume if unauthorized switch to the “ON” position.
when all doors and the liftgate are closed and
actions are taken again, even if the alarm has  For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.- no door is opened within approximately 30
stopped. key, by putting the operation mode in ON. seconds, re-arming will automatically occur.

Features and controls 5-35

 [Link] 36 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Power window control

NOTE Power window control WARNING

 The amount of time after unlocking until the N00510800370  Never leave the vehicle without carrying
vehicle relocks automatically can be the key.
adjusted. See an authorized Mitsubishi  Never leave children or unreliable adults
Motors dealer for details. unattended inside the vehicle.
 Once the system has been disarmed, it can-
not be rearmed except by repeating the arm-
Main switch
5 ing procedure.
N00548700097

The main switch located on the driver’s door

Testing the theft-alarm system can be used to operate all the windows.
A window can be opened or closed by operat-
Use the following procedure to test the sys- ing the corresponding switch.
tem: 1- Open (down) Press the switch down to open the window,
2- Close (up) and pull up the switch to close it.
1. Lower the driver’s window.
If the driver’s door window switch is fully
2. Arm the system as explained in “Armed
pressed down/pulled up, the driver’s door
stage”.
3. Make sure that the theft-alarm indicator
NOTE window automatically opens/closes com-
 Never try to operate the main switch and pletely.
comes on and flashes for approximately
sub-switch in different directions at the same If you want to stop the window movement,
20 seconds.
time. This will freeze the window in posi- operate the switch lightly in the reverse direc-
4. Wait a few seconds and then unlock the tion. tion.
driver’s side door by using the inside door  Operating the power windows repeatedly
lock knob and open the door. with the engine stopped will run down the
5. Make sure that the horn sounds intermit- battery. Use the window switches only while
tently and the headlights blink when a the engine is running.
door is opened.
6. Disarm the system by unlocking all doors
and the liftgate by using the keyless entry WARNING
system or the F.A.S.T.-key operation.  Before operating the power windows,
make sure that nothing can be trapped
(head, hands, fingers, etc.) in the window.

5-36 Features and controls

[Link] 37 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Power window control

stopped. However, once the driver’s door or
Sub switch the front passenger’s door is opened, the
N00548800098
power windows cannot be operated.

Lock switch
N00549000130

When this switch is in the lock mode, the pas-

senger door switches cannot be used to open 5
or close the door windows, and the main
switch will open or close only the driver’s
1- Driver’s door window switch door window. To unlock the switch, press it
2- Front passenger door window switch again.
3- Left rear door window switch
1- Close
4- Right rear door window switch
2- Open
5- Lock switch

Each sub-switch can be used for it’s own pas-

senger door window, unless the driver’s win-
dow lock switch is activated.

NOTE
 The rear door windows open only half-way.

1- Lock
Power window timer function 2- Unlock
N00548900132

The power windows can be run up or down

when the ignition switch or the operation
mode is in ON.
The door windows can be opened or closed
for a 30-second period after the engine is

Features and controls 5-37

 [Link] 38 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Sunshade (if so equipped)

WARNING CAUTION What to do if you hear wind

 Before driving with a child in the vehicle,  The safety mechanism is deactivated while buffeting when driving
be sure to lock the window switch to make the switch is pulled up. Therefore be espe- N00551400043
it inoperative. Children tampering with cially careful that fingers are not trapped in
the switch could easily trap their hands or the door window opening. Wind buffeting can be described as the per-
heads in the window.  Do not deliberately trap your hands or head ception of pressure on the ears or a booming
in order to activate the safety mechanism. or rumbling sound. Your vehicle may exhibit
5 Your hand or head could be trapped and per-
sonal injury could result.
wind buffeting when driving with one or both
rear door windows down or partially opened.
Safety mechanism (Driver’s
This is a normal occurrence that can be mini-
door window only) mized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
N00528801132
NOTE door windows open, open the front door win-
If a hand or head is trapped, for safety the  The safety mechanism can be activated if the dows as well as the rear door windows to
door window is automatically lowered a little. driving conditions or other circumstances minimize the condition.
After the door window is lowered, pull up the cause the door window to be subjected to a
switch again to close the door window. physical shock similar to that caused by
trapped hand or head. Sunshade (if so equipped)
 If the battery terminals are disconnected or
WARNING the fuse for the power window is replaced,
N00511000614

 If the battery terminals are disconnected the safety mechanism will be cancelled and
or the fuse for power window is replaced, the door window will not automatically
WARNING
the safety mechanism will be cancelled. open/close completely.  Before operating the sunshade, make sure
If a hand or head got trapped, a serious If the window is open, repeatedly raise the that nothing can be trapped (head, hands,
injury could result. driver’s door window switch until the win- fingers, etc.).
dow has been fully closed.  Never leave a child (or other person who is
Following this, release the switch, raise the incapable of safely operating the sunshade
CAUTION switch once again and hold it in this condi- switch) alone in the vehicle.
tion for at least 1 second, then release it. You  Do not bring your head, hand, finger, etc.
 The safety mechanism is deactivated just
should now be able to operate the driver’s near the opening edge of the sunshade
before the door window closes. This allows
door window in the normal fashion. receptacle while the vehicle is in motion.
the door window to close completely. There-
It may cause injury to your head, hand,
fore be especially careful that fingers are not
finger, etc. in the event of a sudden brak-
trapped in the door window opening.
ing.

5-38 Features and controls

[Link] 39 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Parking brake
The sunshade can be opened and closed with To stop the moving sunshade, press the
CAUTION the ignition switch or the operation mode in switch (1), (2) or (3).
 Do not place heavy luggage on the pan-
ON.
oramic glass roof. Doing so could damage
the glass roof. Safety mechanism
 Do not hang heavy luggage from, allow a
person to hang onto, or apply any other
If a hand or head is trapped in the closing
strong force to the opening of the sunshade
sunshade opening, the safety mechanism will
receptacle or the parts between the ceiling
and the sunshade opening on either side. cause the sunshade to re-open automatically. 5
Doing so could damage the sunshade. The opened sunshade will become opera-
tional again after a few seconds.

NOTE NOTE
 Release the switch when the sunshade has  The safety mechanism can be activated if the
reached a completely open or completely driving conditions or other circumstances
closed position. cause the sunshade to be subjected to a phys-
 If the sunshade does not operate when the ical shock similar to that caused by a trapped
sunshade switch is operated, release the To open hand or head.
switch and check whether something is
trapped by the sunshade. If nothing is Press the switch (1), the sunshade opens.
trapped, have the sunshade checked at an Press and hold the switch (1), the sunshade CAUTION
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. automatically opens. Release the switch once  Do not deliberately trap your hands or head
 Operating the sunshade repeatedly with the the sunshade starts moving automatically. in order to activate the safety mechanism.
engine turned off will run down the battery.
To stop the moving sunshade, press the Personal injury and malfunction of the sun-
Operate the sunshade only while the engine shade could result.
switch (1), (2) or (3).
is running.
 Close the sunshade when parking the vehicle
for a long time. Parking in the hot sun with To close
the sunshade open will make the vehicle Parking brake
inside extremely hot. N00511400373
Press the switch (2), the sunshade closes.
Press and hold the switch (2), the sunshade To park the vehicle, first bring it to a com-
automatically closes. Release the switch once plete stop, fully engage the parking brake,
the sunshade starts moving automatically. and then move the gearshift lever to 1st (on a

Features and controls 5-39

 [Link] 40 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Parking brake
uphill) or “R” (Reverse) (on a downhill) posi-
tion for vehicles equipped with a manual
To deactivate CAUTION
 Before driving, be sure that the parking
transaxle, set the selector lever to “P”
brake is fully released and brake warning
(PARK) position for vehicles equipped with a
light is off.
continuously variable transmission (CVT). If you drive without the parking brake fully
released, the warning display will appear on
To apply the information screen in the multi-informa-
5 tion display.
If a vehicle is driven without releasing the
parking brake, the brakes will be overheated,
resulting in ineffective braking and possible
brake failure.

Warning light
1- Pull the lever up slightly.
2- Press and hold the button at the end of
the hand grip.
3- Push the lever downward.
Warning display type 1

When parking on a hill, set the parking brake,

1- Pull the lever up without pushing the but-
and turn the front wheels toward the curb on a
ton at the end of hand grip.
downhill, or away from the curb on an uphill.
When the parking brake is set and the
ignition switch are in the “ON” position, Warning display type 2
the brake warning light in the instrument
cluster will come on.

Before driving, be sure to release the

parking brake.

5-40 Features and controls

[Link] 41 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Steering wheel height and reach adjustment

Steering wheel height and WARNING Type 1

reach adjustment  When releasing the lever (moving it to the
position (B)), be sure to hold the steering
N00511500228
wheel firmly. Otherwise, the steering
To adjust the steering wheel to the desired wheel may slip down too suddenly.
position, move the lever upward or down-
ward while moving the steering wheel to the
Inside rearview mirror
desired level.
N00511601330 Type 2 5
Adjust the inside rearview mirror only after
making any seat adjustments so as to have a
clear view to the rear of the vehicle.

WARNING
 Do not attempt to adjust the inside rear- Adjust the inside mirror to maximize the
view mirror while driving. This can be view through the rear window.
dangerous.
Be sure to adjust the mirror before driv-
ing. To adjust the vertical mirror
A- Wheel lock position
B- Release
It is possible to move the mirror up and down
to adjust its position.
WARNING
 After adjusting, make sure the lever is
secured in the locked (A) position.
 Do not attempt to adjust the steering
wheel while driving. This can be danger-
ous.

Features and controls 5-41

 [Link] 42 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Outside rearview mirrors

To reduce the glare

Type 1

The day/night knob (A) at the bottom of the

mirror can be used to adjust the mirror to
5 reduce the glare from the headlights of vehi-
cles behind you during night driving.

Normally, use the automatic mode. When the

ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position
To adjust the mirror position or the operation mode is put in ON, the
reflection factor of the mirror is automatically
It is possible to move the mirror up/down and changed.
left/right to adjust its position.
NOTE
 Do not hang items on, or spray glass cleaner
on the sensor (1), as reduced sensitivity
could result.
1- Daytime position
2- Night position
Outside rearview mirrors
N00512200206
Type 2
Adjust the outside rearview mirrors only after
making any seat adjustments so as to have a
When the headlights of the vehicles behind
clear view to the rear of the vehicle.
you are very bright, the reflection factor of
the rearview mirror is automatically changed
to reduce the glare.

5-42 Features and controls

[Link] 43 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Outside rearview mirrors

WARNING To adjust the mirror position NOTE

 Do not attempt to adjust the outside rear- N00549100131  After adjusting, return the lever to the “•”
view mirrors while driving. This can be The outside rearview mirrors can be adjusted (OFF) position (C).
dangerous. when the ignition switch or the operation
Be sure to adjust the mirrors before driv- mode is in ON or ACC.
ing. Move the lever (A) to the same side as the To fold the mirror
 Your passenger’s side mirror is convex. mirror you wish to adjust.
5
N00549200086
The objects you see in the mirror will look
smaller and farther away than they
The outside mirror can be folded in towards
appear in a regular flat mirror. the side window to prevent damage when
Do not use this mirror to estimate the dis- parking in tight locations.
tance of vehicles following you when
changing lanes.

L- Left outside mirror adjustment

R- Right outside mirror adjustment

Press the switch (B) to adjust the mirror posi-

tion. Door mirror heater
N00549300191
1-Up
2-Down When the rear window defogger switch is
3-Right pressed with the engine running, the outside
4-Left rearview mirrors are defogged or defrosted.
Current will flow through the heater element
inside the mirrors, thus clearing away frost or
condensation.

Features and controls 5-43

 [Link] 44 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Ignition switch
The indicator light (A) will illuminate while [Except for vehicles equipped with the
the defogger is on. Free-hand Advanced Security Transmit-
START
The heater will be turned off automatically in ter (F.A.S.T.-key)]
about 20 minutes. Engages the starter. Release the key when the
engine [Link] will automatically back to the
“ON” position.

5 NOTE
 Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic
immobilizer. To start the engine, the ID code
which the transponder inside the key sends
must match the one registered to the immobi-
lizer computer. (Refer to “Electronic immo-
bilizer” on page 5-23.)

OFF ACC power auto-cutout func-

Ignition switch tion
N00512400673
The engine is off. The key can be inserted and N00539601084

removed only when the switch is in this posi- After about 30 minutes has elapsed with the
[For vehicles equipped with the Free-hand tion.
Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.- ignition switch in the “ACC” position, the
key)] function automatically cuts out the power for
For information on operations for vehicles ACC the audio system and other electric devices
equipped with the Free-hand Advanced Secu- that can be operated with that position.
rity Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key), refer to When the ignition switch is turned from the
Allows operation of electrical accessories
“Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter “ACC” position, the power is supplied again
with the engine off.
(F.A.S.T.-key): to those devices.
Engine switch”on page 5-16.
ON NOTE
 It is possible to modify functions as follows:
The engine runs and all accessories can be
used.
5-44 Features and controls
[Link] 45 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Starting the engine

NOTE CAUTION Tips for starting

• The time until the power cuts out can be  If the engine is stopped while driving, the
changed to about 60 minutes. brake servomechanism will cease to function  Do not operate the starter motor continu-
• The ACC power auto-cutout function can and braking efficiency will deteriorate. Also, ously for longer than 15 seconds as this
be deactivated. the power steering system will not function could run the battery down or damage the
and it will require greater manual effort to starter motor. If the engine does not start,
For details, we recommend you to consult an operate the steering. turn the ignition switch back to the “OFF”
authorized MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.  Do not leave the key in the “ON” position for
a long time when the engine is not running,
position, wait a few seconds, and then try 5
again. Trying repeatedly with the engine
doing so will cause the battery to be dis-
To remove the key or starter motor still turning will damage
charged.
the starter mechanism.
N00550900197  Do not turn the key to the “START” position
1. Set the selector lever to the “P” (PARK)  If the engine will not start because the bat-
when the engine is running, doing so could
position {continuously variable transmis- damage the starter motor. tery is weak or discharged, refer to
sion (CVT)}. “Jump-starting the engine” (on page 8-2)
2. Turn the key to the “OFF” position and for instructions.
 A longer warm up period will only con-
remove it. Starting the engine sume extra fuel. The engine is warmed up
N00512601829
enough for driving when the bar graph of
[For vehicles equipped with the Free-hand engine coolant temperature display starts
Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.- to move. Refer to “Interrupt display
key)] screen (With ignition switch or operation
For information on operation for vehicles mode in ON)” on page 5-92.
equipped with the Free-hand Advanced Secu-
rity Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key), refer to
“Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter
WARNING
 Never run the engine in a closed or poorly
(F.A.S.T.-key): Starting and stopping the
ventilated area any longer than is needed
engine” on page 5-19.
to move your vehicle out of the area. Car-
bon monoxide gas, which is odorless and
[Except for vehicles equipped with the
extremely poisonous, could build up and
Free-hand Advanced Security Transmit- cause serious injury or death.
ter (F.A.S.T.-key)]

Features and controls 5-45

 [Link] 46 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Starting the engine

6. On vehicles equipped with manual trans-
CAUTION When the engine is hard to start
axle, place the gearshift lever in the “N”
 Do not push-start the vehicle.
(Neutral) position.
 Do not run the engine at high rpms or drive
On vehicles equipped with continuously After several attempts, you may experience
at high speeds until the engine has had a that the engine still does not start.
variable transmission (CVT), make sure
chance to warm up.
the selector lever is in the “P” (PARK)
 Release the ignition switch as soon as the 1. Make sure that all electric devices, such
engine starts. Otherwise, the starter motor position.
as lights, air conditioning blower and rear
5 will be damaged.
NOTE
window defogger, are turned off.
2. While depressing the brake pedal {contin-
 On vehicles equipped with CVT, the starter
uously variable transmission (CVT)} or
will not operate unless the selector lever is in
Starting the engine the “P” (PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL) posi-
the clutch pedal (manual transaxle), press
tion. the accelerator pedal halfway and hold it
This model is equipped with an electronically For safety reasons, start the engine in the “P” there, then crank the engine. Release the
controlled fuel injection system. This is a sys- (PARK) position so that the wheels are accelerator pedal, immediately after the
tem that automatically controls fuel injection. locked. engine starts.
There is usually no need to depress the accel-
erator pedal when starting the engine. 7. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” posi-
The starter should not be run for more than 15 tion and make certain that all warning
seconds at a time. lights are functioning properly before
To prevent battery drain, wait a few seconds starting the engine.
between attempts to restart the engine. 8. Turn the ignition switch to the “START”
position without pressing the accelerator
1. Make sure all occupants are properly
pedal. Release the key when the engine
seated with seat belts fastened.
starts.
2. Insert the ignition key.
3. Make sure the parking brake is applied.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal down with
NOTE
 Minor noises may be heard on engine start-
your right foot.
up. These will disappear as the engine warms
5. Press and hold the clutch pedal all the way
up.
down (manual transaxle).

5-46 Features and controls

[Link] 47 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Manual transaxle (if so equipped)

3. If the engine still will not start, the engine This occurs because the transaxle has not
could be flooded with too much gasoline. warmed up sufficiently; it does not indicate a
NOTE
 During cold weather, shifting may be diffi-
While depressing the brake pedal (CVT) problem. If this occurs, place the selector
cult until the transaxle lubricant has warmed
or the clutch pedal (manual transaxle), lever in the “P” (PARK) position and let the
up. This is normal and not harmful to the
push the accelerator pedal all the way engine idle for at least 10 minutes. transaxle.
down and hold it there, then crank the The transaxle will warm up, and you will be
engine for 5 to 6 seconds. Return the igni- able to start normally.
tion switch to the “OFF” position and Do not leave the vehicle during warm-up
release the accelerator pedal. Wait a few operation.
To start 5
seconds, and then crank the engine again
for 5 to 6 seconds while depressing the Press the clutch pedal all the way down and
brake pedal (CVT) or the clutch pedal
Manual transaxle (if so shift into 1st or “R” (Reverse) position. Then
(manual transaxle), but do not push the equipped) gradually release the clutch pedal while
accelerator pedal. Release the ignition key N00512701152
depressing the accelerator pedal.
if the engine starts. If the engine fails to
The shift pattern below is shown on the gear-
start, repeat these procedures. If the CAUTION
engine still will not start, contact your shift lever. Press the clutch pedal all the way
 Do not move the gearshift lever into reverse
local Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair down while shifting gears.
while the vehicle is moving forward; doing
facility of your choice for assistance. so will damage the transaxle.
 Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal
because this will cause premature clutch
Startability of automatic transaxle wear or damage.
vehicle and CVT vehicle with  Do not coast in the “N” (Neutral) position
ambient temperature of -22 °F (-30 (illegal in many states).
°C) or lower  Do not use the gearshift lever as a handrest,
because this can result in premature wear of
the transaxle shift forks.
When the ambient temperature is -22 °F (-30
°C) or lower, it may not be possible to start
from a standstill even with the selector lever NOTE
in the “D” (DRIVE) or “R” (REVERSE)
 If it is hard to shift into 1st, depress the
position. clutch pedal a second time; the shift will then
be easier.

Features and controls 5-47

 [Link] 48 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Manual transaxle (if so equipped)

NOTE Upshifting Downshifting

 To shift into reverse from 5th gear, move the N00512901154 N00513000096

gearshift lever to the “N” (Neutral) position, For the best fuel economy and performance in It is recommended that you downshift to a
and then shift it into reverse.
using your manual transaxle, upshift as listed lower gear when needed to maintain the
 The gearshift indicator shows recommended
below. desired speed, according to the table.
gearshift points for fuel-efficient driving. It
Avoid downshifting at too high a speed. The
shows a “ ” when an upshift is recom- At low altitude locations, upshift as listed engine may suffer damage.
5 mended, and it shows a “ ” when a down- below. To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake
shift is recommended. life, shift down to 2nd or 1st when descend-
Shift point Upshift speeds ing a steep hill.
1st gear to 2nd gear 15 mph (24 km/h) Downshifting is also important to avoid “lug-
ging” the engine at too low a speed, such as
2nd gear to 3rd gear 25 mph (40 km/h)
when turning a corner or when driving up a
3rd gear to 4th gear 40 mph (64 km/h) steep hill.
4th gear to 5th gear 45 mph (72 km/h)
Recommended downshifting speed
At high altitude locations, upshift as listed
below.
Downshifting speed Shift point
Proper shift points Under 20 mph Shift down from cur-
N00537400052
Shift point Upshift speeds
(32 km/h) rent gear to 2nd gear.
Always use care to change the gear with the 1st gear to 2nd gear 15 mph (24 km/h)
20 to 30 mph (32 to Shift down from cur-
vehicle speed matched to the engine speed. 2nd gear to 3rd gear 25 mph (40 km/h)
48 km/h) rent gear to 3rd gear.
Proper shifting will improve fuel economy
3rd gear to 4th gear 40 mph (64 km/h)
and prolong engine life.
4th gear to 5th gear 45 mph (72 km/h)
Driving precautions
CAUTION N00513100228

 Avoid downshifting that may cause the  Do not use the gearshift lever as a han-
tachometer pointer to enter the red zone. drest. This can result in premature wear of
This puts the engine at risk of being dam- the transaxle shift forks.
aged.

5-48 Features and controls

[Link] 49 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Continuously variable transmission (CVT) (if so equipped)

mode” on page 5-53.
Maximum possible driving speed NOTE
 The selector lever cannot be moved from “P”
Shift Maximum possible driving
DRIVING UPHILL (PARK) to another position if the ignition
switch is set to the “OFF” or “ACC” posi-
points speed
tion, or if the key has been removed, or if the
The transmission prevents unnecessary
1st brake pedal is not pressed and held down.
28 mph (45 km/h) upshifts even when the accelerator pedal is
gear
released and ensures smooth driving.
2nd
59 mph (95 km/h) The CVT selects an optimum ratio automati- 5
gear cally when the selector lever is in the “D”
DRIVING DOWNHILL
3rd (DRIVE) position, depending on the speed of
86 mph (140 km/h) the vehicle and the position of the accelerator
gear
According to the conditions, the transmission pedal.
4th will automatically shift to a lower gear ratio
111 mph (180 km/h) The selector lever (A) has 2 gates; the main
gear to achieve stronger engine braking. This may gate (B) and the manual gate (C).
help reduce your need to use the service
 The table above shows the maximum rec- brake.
ommended driving speed for in each gear.
Do not drive near or at these speeds for Selector lever operation
prolonged periods of time.
N00560300048

As an additional safety precaution, models

Continuously variable equipped with a continuously variable trans-
transmission (CVT) (if so mission have a shift-lock device that holds
the selector lever in the “P” (PARK) position.
equipped) To move the selector lever from the “P”
N00560200047 (PARK) position to another position, follow
The CVT will automatically and continuously the steps below.
change its gear ratio depending on road and NOTE
1. Press and hold the brake pedal down.  There are 4 selector lever positions in the
driving conditions. This helps achieve 2. Move the selector lever to the desired
smooth driving and excellent fuel efficiency. main gate.
position.  For information on manual gate operation,
Also you can manually shift up and shift
please refer to “Sports mode” on page 5-53.
down the transmission. Refer to “Sports

Features and controls 5-49

 [Link] 50 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Continuously variable transmission (CVT) (if so equipped)

If you need to move the vehicle, shift the
NOTE selector lever as follows.
 To prevent mistakes in operating the lever,
make sure you stop briefly at each position. 1. Make sure the parking brake is fully
After operating, check the position in the applied.
multi-information display.
2. Stop the engine if it is running.
 If the brake pedal is not depressed and held,
3. Insert a screwdriver with a cloth over its
the shift-lock device activates to prevent the
tip into the notch (A) of the cover. Pry
5 selector lever from being moved from the
“P” (PARK) position. gently as shown to remove the cover.

 For a shift indicated by in the illustra-

tion, depress the brake pedal before moving
Set the selector lever in the gate to the selector lever. If you attempt to move the
operate while the brake pedal is selector lever before depressing the brake
depressed. pedal, the selector lever may be immovable.
Set the selector lever in the gate to
operate.
When the selector lever cannot be
shifted from the “P” (PARK) posi-
WARNING tion
 Always press the brake pedal when shift- N00563300036 4. Depress the brake pedal with the right
ing the selector lever into a selector posi-
When the selector lever cannot be shifted foot.
tion from the “N” (NEUTRAL) position.
from the “P” (PARK) position to another 5. Insert a screwdriver in the shift-lock
When beginning to drive, do not shift the
selector lever from the “N” (NEUTRAL) position while the brake pedal is pressed and release hole (B). Shift the selector lever to
position while pressing the accelerator held down with the ignition switch or the the “N” (NEUTRAL) position while
pedal. This will cause the vehicle to operation mode in ON, the battery may be flat pressing the screwdriver down.
“jump” forward or backward. or the shift-lock mechanism may be malfunc-
tioning.
Immediately have your vehicle checked by an
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
repair facility of your choice.

5-50 Features and controls

[Link] 51 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Continuously variable transmission (CVT) (if so equipped)

2. Keep depressing the brake pedal and then
When the selector lever position
place the selector lever in the “D”
display blinks (DRIVE) or “R” (REVERSE) position. If
N00582900028
the selector lever position display stops
blinking, the warm up is completed and
WARNING
the transmission will function normally.
 To avoid unintended vehicle movement,
keep brake pedal applied with your right
3. If the display is still blinking, repeat steps
1 and 2 above.
foot and do not depress the accelerator
pedal, while the selector lever position dis-
5
play is blinking. NOTE
 While the selector lever position display is
If the ambient temperature is low, the selector blinking, a buzzer will sound intermittently.
Selector lever position display lever position display on the multi-informa-
N00560401091
tion display may blink when the selector
When the ignition switch is turned to the
lever is placed in the “D” (DRIVE) or “R” Warning display
(REVERSE) position immediately after the
“ON” position or the operation mode is put in N00560501063
engine has been started. This indicates that Type 1
ON, the position of the selector lever is indi-
the transmission requires warming up. While
cated in the multi-information display.
the display is blinking, the vehicle will not or
move, because the transmission keeps disen-
Type 1 Type 2 gaging until the warm up is completed even if
the selector lever is placed in the “D” or “R” Type 2
position.
or
When the selector lever position display is
blinking, perform the following procedure:
When the warning display or the warn-
1. Depress the brake pedal with your right
ing display appears on the information screen
foot and place the selector lever in the
in the multi-information display while you
“N” (NEUTRAL) position for several
are driving, there could be a malfunction in
seconds.
the CVT.

Features and controls 5-51

 [Link] 52 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Continuously variable transmission (CVT) (if so equipped)

CAUTION CAUTION “R” REVERSE

 If a malfunction occurs in the CVT while After a while, confirm that the warning
driving, the warning display or the display is no longer showing. It is safe to Move the lever to this position only after the
warning display will appear on the informa- continue driving if the display is no longer vehicle has come to a complete stop.
tion screen in the multi-information display. showing. If the warning display remains or
In this case, follow these procedures: flashes frequently, have your vehicle CAUTION
[When warning display is showing] inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi
5 The continuously variable transmission
Motors dealer or a repair facility of your
 Never shift into the “P” (PARK) or “R”
(REVERSE) position while the vehicle is in
choice.
(CVT) fluid is overheating. The engine con- motion. If the lever is shifted into the “P”
trol may activate to lower the CVT fluid tem- [When warning display is showing] (PARK) or “R” (REVERSE) position while
perature, causing the engine revolutions and It may be that there is something unusual the vehicle is in motion, the transmission
vehicle speed to decrease, In this case, take happening in the CVT, causing a safety may be damaged.
one of the following procedures. device to activate. Have your vehicle
• Slow down your vehicle. inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer or a repair facility of your
• Stop your vehicle in a safe place, put the “N” NEUTRAL
selector lever in the “P” (PARK) position, choice as soon as possible.
and open the engine hood with the engine
running to allow the engine to cool down. At this position, the transmission is disen-
Selector lever positions (Main gaged. It is the same as the neutral position on
gate) a manual transaxle and should be used when
N00560600054 the vehicle is not moving for an extended
length of time during driving, such as in a
“P” PARK traffic jam.

This position locks the transmission to pre- WARNING

vent the vehicle from moving. The engine can  Never move the selector lever to the “N”
be started from the “P” (PARK) position. (NEUTRAL) position while driving since
you could accidentally slip it into the “P”
(PARK) or “R” (REVERSE) position,
damaging the transmission.

5-52 Features and controls

[Link] 53 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Continuously variable transmission (CVT) (if so equipped)

“D” (DRIVE) operation, push the selector
WARNING lever back into the main gate (B).
 To prevent the vehicle from rolling when
In sports mode, rapid shifting is possible sim- SHIFT
stopped on a slope, the engine should be
ply by operating the selector lever or spor- UP SHIFT
started in the “P” (PARK) position, not in
“N” (NEUTRAL) position. tronic steering wheel paddle shifter. DOWN
 To prevent rolling, always keep your foot Unlike the manual transaxle, sports mode
on the brake pedal when the vehicle is in allows shifting with the accelerator pedal
depressed.
“N” (NEUTRAL) position, or when shift-
ing into or out of “N” (NEUTRAL) posi-
5
tion. NOTE
 For vehicles equipped with the sportronic
“D” DRIVE steering wheel paddle shifter, sports mode
can be operated even when the selector lever
is in the main gate (B). Also, you can return SHIFT
This position is used for most city and high-
to the “D” operation in any of following UP
way driving. The transmission will automati- ways. When returning to “D” operation, the
cally and continuously change its gear ratio SHIFT
selector lever position display will change to
depending on road and driving conditions. DOWN
“D” (DRIVE) position.
• Pull the + (SHIFT UP) side sportronic
CAUTION steering wheel paddle shifter forward
(toward the driver) for over 2 seconds.
 To prevent transmission damage, never shift
into the “D” (DRIVE) position from the “R” • Stop the vehicle + (SHIFT UP)
(REVERSE) position while the vehicle is in • Push the selector lever from the “D” Transmission shifts up once by each opera-
motion. (DRIVE) position into the manual gate (A) tion.
and push the selector lever back into the
main gate (B). - (SHIFT DOWN)
Sports mode Transmission shifts down once by each oper-
N00560701078
ation.
Whether the vehicle is stationary or in
motion, sports mode is selected by pushing
the selector lever from the “D” (DRIVE)
position into the manual gate (A). To return to

Features and controls 5-53

 [Link] 54 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Continuously variable transmission (CVT) (if so equipped)

CAUTION NOTE Type 1 Type 2

 In sports mode, the driver must execute  To maintain good running performance, the
upward shifts in accordance with prevailing transmission may refuse to perform an
road conditions, taking care to keep the upshift when the selector lever or sportronic
engine speed below the red zone. steering wheel paddle shifter is moved to the
 Repeated continuous operation of the selec- “+ (SHIFT UP)” position at certain vehicle
tor lever or the sportronic steering wheel speeds. Also, to prevent over-revving of the
5 paddle shifter will continuously switch shift
position.
engine, the transmission may refuse to per-
form a downshift when the shift lever or
 On vehicles with a sportronic steering wheel sportronic steering wheel paddle shifter is
paddle shifter, shift ranges may not change moved to the “- (SHIFT DOWN)” position at
when the lateral paddle shifters are operated certain vehicle speeds. When this happens, a
at the same time. buzzer sounds to indicate that a downshift is
not going to take place. Operation of the CVT
 In sports mode, downward shifts are made N00560800027

NOTE automatically when the vehicle slows down.

 The upward shift may be made automatically
When the vehicle stops, 1st position is auto- CAUTION
matically selected.  Before selecting a position with the engine
in sports mode when the engine revolutions
rises and approaches the tachometer’s red running and the vehicle stationary, firmly
zone (the red-colored part of the tachometer Sports mode display depress the brake pedal to prevent the vehi-
dial). N00560900057
cle from creeping.
 Shift ranges can only be selected in a for- The vehicle will begin to move as soon as the
In sports mode, the currently selected shift CVT is engaged, especially when the engine
ward direction from 1st to 6th. To reverse or
range is displayed on the information screen speed or idle speed is high, or with the air
park the vehicle, move the selector lever to
the “R” or “P” position.
in the multi-information display. conditioning operating.
Do not release the brake pedal until you are
ready to drive away.
 Depress the brake pedal with the right foot at
all times.
Using the left foot could cause driver move-
ment delay in case of an emergency.
 To prevent sudden acceleration, never run
the engine at high rpms when shifting from
the “P” (PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL).

5-54 Features and controls

[Link] 55 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Continuously variable transmission (CVT) (if so equipped)

CAUTION NOTE Parking

 Operating the accelerator pedal while the  In sports mode, downshifts do not take place
other foot is resting on the brake pedal will when the accelerator is depressed all the way To park the vehicle, first bring it to a com-
affect braking efficiency and may cause pre- to the floor. plete stop, fully engage the parking brake,
mature wear of brake pads. and then move the selector lever to the “P”
 Use the selector lever in the correct shift (PARK) position.
position in accordance with driving condi- Waiting
tions.
Never coast downhill backward in the driv- When the CVT makes no speed 5
For short waiting periods, such as at traffic
ing shift position {“D” (DRIVE) or sport change
mode} or coast forward in the “R” lights, the vehicle can be left in selector lever
(REVERSE) position. position and held stationary with the service
Engine stopping and increased brake pedal brake. If the CVT does not shift while driving, or
and steering effort could lead to an accident. For longer waiting periods with the engine your vehicle does not pick up enough speed
 Do not rev the engine with the brake pedal running, place the selector lever in the “N” when starting on an uphill slope, it may be
pressed when the vehicle is stationary. (NEUTRAL) position and apply the parking that there is something unusual happening in
This can damage the CVT. brake, while holding the vehicle stationary the transmission, causing a safety device to
Also, when you depress the accelerator pedal activate. Have your vehicle checked at an
with the service brake.
while holding down the brake pedal with the authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
Prior to moving off after having stopped the
selector lever in the “D” (DRIVE) position, repair facility of your choice as soon as possi-
the engine revolutions may not rise as high vehicle, make sure that the selector lever is in
“D” (DRIVE) position or Sports mode posi- ble.
as when performing the same operation with
the selector lever in the “N” (NEUTRAL) tion.
position. NOTE
CAUTION  When the warning display and “SLOW
Passing acceleration  To avoid transmission overheating, never try
DOWN” or the warning display and
to keep your vehicle stationary on a hill by
“SERVICE REQUIRED” appear on the
using the accelerator pedal. Always apply
To gain extra acceleration in “D” (DRIVE) information screen in the multi-information
the parking brake and/or service brake.
position (when passing another vehicle) push display, there could be a malfunction in the
 Do not rev the engine unnecessarily while
the accelerator to the floor. The CVT will CVT. Refer to “Continuously variable trans-
the vehicle is stationary. Unexpected acceler-
automatically downshift. mission (CVT): Warning display” on page
ation may occur if the selector lever is in a
5-51.
position other than “P” (PARK) or “N”
(NEUTRAL).

Features and controls 5-55

 [Link] 56 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Electronically controlled 4WD system (if so equipped)

Electronically controlled Drive mode Function

This mode is for
4WD system (if so equipped) driving in slippery
N00517201178
conditions such as on
The electronically controlled 4WD system is snow-covered roads
an all-wheel drive system that allows one of or sand.
three drive modes to be selected with a The large amount of
5 switch, in accordance with the driving condi- 4WD LOCK driving torque that is
tions. applied to the rear
tires enables getting
The following drive modes are available. out of slippery areas
and powerful driv- By pressing the drive mode-selector, the drive
Drive mode Function ing is possible across mode can be changed in order of “2WD”,
all ranges. “4WD AUTO” and “4WD LOCK”.
This mode is for eco-
nomical driving on The drive mode is displayed as an interrupt
normal dry roads and 4-wheel drive operation requires special driv- display on the information screen in the
2WD ing skills.
freeways. multi-information display when the drive
Driving in front- Carefully read the “4-wheel drive operation” mode is changed.
wheel drive. section on page 5-58 and take care to drive After a few seconds, the information screen
safely. will then return to its prior display.
The default mode.
This mode is for
automatically con- Drive mode-selector Drive Display
trolling the distribu- mode Type 1 Type 2
4WD AUTO
tion of driving torque The drive mode can be changed by pressing
to all four wheels the drive mode-selector while the ignition 2WD
according to the switch or the operation mode is in ON.
driving conditions.
4WD
AUTO

5-56 Features and controls

[Link] 57 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Electronically controlled 4WD system (if so equipped)

Display Type 2
Drive CAUTION
mode Type 1 Type 2  If the selected drive mode indicator is blink-
ing, the vehicle switches automatically to
4WD front-wheel drive in order to protect the
LOCK drive-system components, and drive mode
Normally the indicator illuminates when the selection is no longer possible with the drive
ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position mode-selector.
CAUTION
 Do not operate the drive mode-selector with
or the operation mode is put in ON, and then The warning display is also displayed in the
information screen in the multi-information
5
the drive mode is displayed a few seconds
the front wheels spinning on a snowy road or display.
after the engine is started.
in similar conditions. The vehicle could Reduce speed, and if the indicator goes out
lunge in an unexpected direction. after driving a while, resume driving as
 Driving on dry, paved roads in “4WD Drive mode before. If the indicator continues blinking for
LOCK” mode causes increased fuel con- Drive indicator more than about 5 minutes, have the vehicle
sumption, noise, and premature tire wear. Mode “4WD” indi- “LOCK” inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
 Do not drive with the tires spinning in dealer or a repair facility of your choice as
cator indicator
“2WD” mode. soon as possible.
Doing so could generate heat in the drive- 2WD OFF OFF
system components. 4WD AUTO ON OFF Type 1 Type 2
4WD LOCK ON ON
NOTE
 The drive mode can be switched while driv-
ing or stopped.

Drive mode indicator

Type 1

Features and controls 5-57

 [Link] 58 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

4-wheel drive operation

CAUTION 4-wheel drive operation WARNING

 The warning display on the information N00530600156  Do not over-rely on the 4-wheel drive vehi-
screen in the multi-information display, a cles. Even 4-wheel drive vehicles have lim-
Your vehicle has been designed primarily for
problem has occurred with the electronically its to the system and ability to maintain
controlled 4WD system and the safety device
use on pavement. control and traction. Reckless driving may
has activated. Have an inspection made by But its unique 4 -wheel drive system allows lead to accidents. Always drive carefully,
an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a you to occasionally travel on unpaved roads, taking account of the road conditions.
to campgrounds, picnic sites, and similar
5 repair facility of your choice as soon as pos-
sible. locations.
 Improperly operating this vehicle on or
off-pavement can cause an accident or
Not only does this ensure better handling on rollover in which you and your passengers
Type 1 Type 2 dry, paved roads but also permits better trac- could be seriously injured or killed.
tion when driving on slippery, wet or snow- • Follow all instructions and guidelines in
covered roads and when moving out of mud. the owner’s manual.
But it is not suitable for heavy off road use or • Keep your speed low and do not drive
towing in rough conditions. faster than conditions.
It is particularly important to note that 4-
wheel drive may not give sufficient hill
climbing ability and engine braking on steep NOTE
slopes. You should try to avoid driving on  Driving on rough roads can be hard on a
steep slopes. vehicle. Before you leave the pavement, be
CAUTION Also, you must exercise caution when driving sure all scheduled maintenance and service
 Always use tires of the same size, type, and has been done, and that you have inspected
on sand and mud and when driving through
brand that have no wear differences. Using your vehicle. Pay special attention to the
water because sufficient traction may not be condition of the tires, and check the tire pres-
tires that differ in size, type, brand, or wear
available in certain circumstances. sures.
amount may activate the protection of the
drive-system components, causing the drive Please avoid driving the vehicle through areas  Mitsubishi Motors is not responsible to the
mode in “4WD AUTO” mode to lock or the where the tires may get stuck in deep sand or operator for any damage or injury caused or
“4WD” and “LOCK” indicators to blink mud. liability incurred by improper and negligent
alternately. operation of a vehicle. All techniques of
vehicle operation depend on the skill and
experience of the operator and other partici-
pating parties. Any deviation from the rec-
ommended operating instructions above is at
their own risk.

5-58 Features and controls

[Link] 59 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

4-wheel drive operation

applied. This is called tight corner braking
NOTE and results from each of the four tires being at
Driving on sandy or muddy
 Note that the stopping distance required of
a different distance from the corner. The phe- roads
the 4-wheel drive vehicle differs very little
nomenon is typical of 4-wheel drive vehicles.
from that of the front-wheel drive vehicle.
When driving on a snow-covered road or a If this occurs, either straighten out the steer- Set the drive mode-selector to “4WD LOCK”
slippery, muddy surface, make sure that you ing wheel or change to another mode. or “LOCK” and then gradually depress the
keep a sufficient distance between your vehi- accelerator pedal for a smooth start. Keep the
cle and the one ahead of you.
 The driving posture should be more upright;
On snowy or icy roads pressure on the accelerator pedal as constant
as possible, and drive at low speed.
5
adjust the seat to a good position for easy
steering and pedal operation. Be sure to wear Set the drive mode-selector to “4WD
the seat belt. AUTO”, “4WD LOCK” or “SNOW” in CAUTION
 After driving on rough roads, check each accordance with the road conditions, and then  Do not force the vehicle or drive recklessly
part of the vehicle and wash it thoroughly gradually depress the accelerator pedal for a on sandy surfaces. In comparison with nor-
with water. Refer to the “Inspection and mal road surfaces, the engine and other
smooth start.
maintenance following rough road opera- drive-system components are put under
tion” section and “Vehicle care and Mainte- excessive strain when driving on such a sur-
nance” sections. NOTE face. This could lead to accidents.
 The use of snow tires is recommended.  If any of the following conditions occur
 Maintain a safe distance between vehicles, while the vehicle is being driven, immedi-
ately park your vehicle in a safe place and
CAUTION avoid sudden braking, and use engine brak-
follow these procedures:
ing (downshifting).
 Setting the drive mode-selector to “4WD
• If the engine coolant temperature display
LOCK” or “LOCK” position to drive on dry
paved road will increase fuel consumption, flashes on the information screen in the
with possible noise generation. CAUTION multi-information display or the engine
 Avoid sudden braking, sudden acceleration power drops suddenly.
and sharp turning. Skidding occurs and con- Refer to “Engine overheating” on page 8-4.
trol of the vehicle could be lost.
Turning sharp corners • If the “ ” warning display and “SLOW
DOWN” or the “ ” warning display and
When turning a sharp corner in “4WD “SERVICE REQUIRED” appear on the
LOCK” or “LOCK” position at low speed, a information screen in the multi-information
slight difference in steering may be experi- display.
enced similar to feeling as if the brakes were Refer to “Warning display” on page 5-51.

Features and controls 5-59

 [Link] 60 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Inspection and maintenance following rough road operation

though the vehicle is an 4-wheel drive vehi-
WARNING cle.
CAUTION
 When attempting to rock your vehicle out  After driving through water, apply the brakes
of a stuck position, be sure that the area to be sure they are functioning properly. If
around the vehicle is clear of people and Driving through water the brakes are wet and not functioning prop-
physical objects. The rocking motion may N00537800098 erly, dry them out by driving slowly while
cause the vehicle to suddenly launch for- lightly depressing the brake pedal. Inspect
If the electrical circuits become wet, further
ward/backward, causing injury or dam- each part of the vehicle carefully.
operation of the vehicle will be impossible;
5 age to nearby people or objects.
therefore, avoid driving through water unless
absolutely necessary. If driving through water Inspection and maintenance
NOTE is unavoidable, use the following procedure: following rough road opera-
 Avoid sudden braking, sudden acceleration Check the depth of the water and the terrain tion
and sharp turning; such operations could
before attempting to drive through it. Drive N00530700098
result in the vehicle becoming stuck.
slowly to avoid creating excessive water After operating the vehicle in rough road con-
 If the vehicle becomes stuck in sandy or
muddy roads, it can often be moved with a
splashing. ditions, be sure to perform the following
rocking motion. Move the gearshift lever inspection and maintenance procedures:
alternately between the 1st and “R” CAUTION
(Reverse) positions (M/T), the “D” (DRIVE)  Never drive through water that is deep
 Check that the vehicle has not been dam-
and “R” (REVERSE) positions (CVT), while enough to cover wheel hubs, axles or exhaust aged by rocks, gravel, etc.
pressing lightly on the accelerator pedal. pipe. Do not change the gearshift lever posi-  Carefully wash the vehicle with water.
 Driving on rough road can cause rust on the tion (M/T) or the selector lever position Drive the vehicle slowly while lightly
vehicle; wash the vehicle thoroughly as soon (CVT) while driving through water. depressing the brake pedal in order to dry
as possible after such use. Frequent driving through water can out the brakes. If the brakes still do not
adversely affect the life span of the vehicle; function properly, contact an authorized
consult an authorized Mitsubishi Motors Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facil-
Climbing/descending sharp dealer or a repair facility of your choice and ity of your choice as soon as possible to
take the necessary measures to prepare,
grades inspect, and repair the vehicle.
have the brakes checked.
 Remove the insects, dried grass, etc. clog-
ging the radiator core.
Your vehicle may not provide sufficient hill
climbing ability and engine braking on steep
slope. Avoid driving on steep slopes even

5-60 Features and controls

[Link] 61 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Cautions on the handling of 4-wheel drive vehicles

 After driving through water, check the  Be sure all four tires and wheels are the
engine, transaxle and differential oil. If same size and type.
Towing
the oil or grease is milky or cloudy When it is necessary to replace any of the
because of water contamination, it must tires or wheels, replace all four.
be replaced with new oil.  All tires should be rotated before the wear
 Check the inside of the vehicle. If water difference between the front and rear tires
entry is found, dry the carpet etc. is recognizable.
 Inspect the headlights. If water is in the
headlight housing, have it drained at an Good vehicle performance cannot be 5
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a expected if there is a difference in wear
repair facility of your choice. between tires. Refer to “Tire rotation” on
 Have an authorized Mitsubishi Motors page 9-19.
dealer replace grease in the wheel bear-
ings.  Check the tire inflation pressure regularly.

Cautions on the handling of CAUTION

 Always use tires of the same size, type, and
4-wheel drive vehicles brand that have no wear differences. Using
N00530800187 tires of different size, type, brands or degree CAUTION
of wear, will increase the differential oil tem-  Do not tow 4-wheel drive vehicles with the
perature and result in possible damage to the front or rear wheels on the ground (Type A
Tires and wheels driving system. Further, the drive train will or Type B) as illustrated. This could result in
be subject to excessive loading, possibly damage to the drivetrain, or unstable towing.
Since the driving torque can be applied to the leading to oil leakage, component seizure, or If you tow 4-wheel drive vehicles, use Type
four wheels, the driving performance of the other serious failures. C or Type D equipment.
vehicle when operating in 4-wheel drive is  Even in “2WD” mode, the vehicle cannot be
greatly affected by the condition of the tires. towed with the front or the rear wheels on
the ground.
Pay close attention to the tires.

 Install only the specified tires on all

wheels. Refer to “Tires and wheels” on
page 11-5.

Features and controls 5-61

 [Link] 62 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Service brake
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
Jacking up a 4-wheel drive CAUTION repair facility of your choice immediately.
vehicle  It is important not to drive the vehicle with
your foot resting on the brake pedal when
braking is not required. This practice can WARNING
WARNING result in very high brake temperatures, pre-  Never coast downhill with the engine OFF.
mature lining wear, and possible damage to Keep the engine running whenever your
 Do not crank the engine while jacking up
the brakes. vehicle is in motion. If you turn off the
the vehicle.
5 The tire on the ground may turn and the
engine while driving, the power brake
booster will stop working and your brakes
vehicle may roll off the jack.
will not work as well.
Power brakes
 If the power assist is lost or if either brake
N00517600436
hydraulic system stops working properly,
Service brake Your vehicle is equipped with power brakes take your vehicle to an authorized
N00517500275 for more braking force with less brake pedal Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facil-
effort. ity of your choice immediately.
Your brakes are designed to operate at full
Brake pedal
capacity, even if the power assist is not being
used. Brake pad wear alarm
Overuse of the brake can cause weakening, If the power assist is not being used, the effort N00550700124
resulting in poor brake response and prema- needed to press the brake pedal is greater.
ture wear of the brake pads. The disc brakes have an alarm that makes a
If you should lose the power assist for some
When driving down a long or steep hill, use metallic squeal when the brake pads have
reason, the brakes will still work.
engine braking by downshifting. worn down enough to need service.
If the power brake unit or either of the two
If you hear this sound, have the brake pads
brake hydraulic systems stops working prop-
replaced at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
WARNING erly, the rest of the brake system will still
dealer or a repair facility of your choice.
 Do not leave any objects near the brake work, but the vehicle will not slow down as
pedal or let a floor mat slide under it; quickly.
doing so could prevent the full pedal You will know this has happened if you find WARNING
stroke that would be necessary in an you need to press the brake down farther, or  Driving with worn brake pads will make it
emergency. Make sure that the pedal can harder when slowing down or stopping, or if harder to stop, and can cause an accident.
be operated freely at all times. Make sure
the brake warning light and the warning dis-
the floor mat is securely held in place.
play in the multi-information display come
on. Have the brake system repaired at an

5-62 Features and controls

[Link] 63 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Hill start assist

4. Depress the accelerator pedal and the hill
Hill start assist CAUTION start assist gradually will decrease the
 Do not perform the following operation
N00562600074
braking force as the vehicle starts moving.
while the hill start assist is operating.
The hill start assist makes it easy to start off
[Except for vehicles equipped with the
on a steep uphill slope by preventing the F.A.S.T.-key] NOTE
vehicle from moving backwards. It keeps the Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF” or  The hill start assist is activated when all of
braking force for about 2 second when you “ACC” position. the following conditions are met.
move your foot from the brake pedal to the
accelerator pedal.
[Vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key]
Put the operation mode in OFF or ACC. The
• The engine is running.
(The hill start assist will not be activated 5
hill start assist could stop operating, which while the engine is starting or immediately
could result in an accident. after the engine is started.)
CAUTION • On vehicles equipped with manual trans-
 Do not overly rely on the hill start assist to axle, the gearshift lever is in the following
prevent backwards movement of the vehicle. To operate position.
Under certain circumstances, even when hill N00562700059 [When starting an uphill slope forwards.]
start assist is activated, the vehicle may 1. Stop the vehicle completely using the The gearshift lever is in any position other
move backwards if the brake pedal is not suf- brake pedal. than “R”.
ficiently depressed, if the vehicle is heavily 2. On vehicles equipped with manual trans- (The hill start assist will operate, even if the
loaded, or if the road is very steep or slip- gearshift lever is in the “N” position.)
axle, place the gearshift lever into the 1st
pery. [When starting an uphill slope backwards.]
positon.
 The hill start assist is not designed to keep The gearshift lever is in the “R” position.
the vehicle stopped in place on uphill slopes
On vehicles equipped with a continuously
(The hill start assist will not operate when
for more than 2 seconds. variable transmission (CVT), place the
the gearshift lever is in the “N” position.)
 When facing uphill, do not rely on using the selector lever into the “D” position.
• On vehicles equipped with CVT, the selec-
hill start assist to maintain a stopped position tor lever is in any position other than “P” or
as an alternative to depressing the brake NOTE “N”.
pedal.  When reversing on an uphill slope, place the • The vehicle is completely stationary, with
Doing so could cause an accident. gearshift lever or the selector lever into the the brake pedal depressed.
“R” position. • The parking brake is released.
 The hill start assist will not operate if the
3. Release the brake pedal and the hill start accelerator pedal is depressed before the
assist will maintain the braking force brake pedal is released.
applied while stopping for approximately  The hill start assist also operates when
reversing on an uphill slope.
2 seconds.

Features and controls 5-63

 [Link] 64 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Brake assist system

Warning display CAUTION NOTE

N00562800050  Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the  Once the brake assist system is operational,
If an abnormal condition occurs in the sys- engine. it maintains great braking force even if the
Restart the engine and check whether the brake pedal is lightly released.
tem, the following display/indicator will turn
indicator/display goes out, in which case the To stop its operation, completely remove
on.
hill start assist is again working normally. your foot from the brake pedal.
If they remain displayed or reappear fre-  When the brake assist system is in use while
5 - ASC indicator quently, it is not necessary to stop the vehicle
immediately, but the vehicle should be
driving, you may feel as if the depressed
brake pedal is soft, the pedal moves in small
inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi motions in conjunction with the operation
Motors dealer or a repair facility of your noise, or the vehicle body and the steering
Warning display type 1
choice as soon as possible. wheel vibrate. This occurs when the brake
assist system is operating normally and does
not indicate faulty operation. Continue to
Brake assist system depress the brake pedal.
N00567301103
 You may hear an operation noise when the
The brake assist system is a device assisting brake pedal is suddenly or fully depressed
drivers who cannot depress the brake pedal while stationary. This does not indicate a
Warning display type 2 malfunction and the brake assist system is
firmly such as in emergency stop situations
operating normally.
and provides greater braking force.
 When the anti-lock brake system warning
If the brake pedal is depressed suddenly, the light/display or only ASC warning display
brakes will be applied with more force than illuminate, the brake assist system in not
functioning.
usual.

NOTE
 The combination of items shown on the dis-
CAUTION Anti-lock braking system
play varies depending on the vehicle model.  The brake assist system is not a device
N00517900240
designed to exercise braking force greater
than its capacity. Make sure to always keep a The anti-lock braking system helps prevent
sufficient distance between vehicles in front the wheels from locking up when braking.
CAUTION of you without relying too much on the brake This helps maintain vehicle drivability and
 If the warning is displayed, the hill start assist system. steering wheel handling.
assist will not operate. Start off carefully.

5-64 Features and controls

[Link] 65 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Anti-lock braking system

Warning display type 1
Driving hints CAUTION
 The anti-lock braking system cannot prevent
 When using the anti-lock brakes (sudden accidents. It is your responsibility to take
braking), steering is slightly different safety precautions and to drive carefully.
from normal driving conditions. Use the  To prevent failure of the anti-lock braking
steering wheel carefully. system, be sure all 4 wheels and tires are the
 Always keep a safe distance from the same size and the same type. Warning display type 2
vehicle in front of you. Even if your vehi- 5
cle is equipped with the anti-lock braking
system, leave a greater braking distance NOTE
when:  A whining sound is emitted from the engine
• Driving on gravel or snow-covered compartment when driving immediately
roads. after starting the engine. These are the nor-
• Driving on uneven road surfaces. mal sounds the anti-lock braking system If there is a malfunction in the system, the
makes when performing a self-check. It does anti-lock braking system warning light will
 Operation of anti-lock braking system is
not indicate a malfunction. come on and the warning display will appear
not restricted situations where brakes are
 The anti-lock braking system can be used on the information screen in the multi-infor-
applied suddenly. This system may also
after the vehicle has reached a speed over
prevent the wheels from locking when mation display.
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). It stops
you drive over manholes, steel roadwork Under normal conditions, the ABS warning
working when the vehicle slows below 3
plates, road markings, or any uneven road mph (5 km/h). light only comes on when the ignition switch
surface. is turned to the “ON” position or the opera-
 When the anti-lock braking system is in tion mode is put in ON and goes off a few
use, you may feel the brake pedal vibrat- seconds later.
Anti-lock braking system warn-
ing and hear a unique sound. It may also
ing light/display
feel as if the pedal resists being pressed.
N00531600645
CAUTION
In this situation, simply hold the brake  Any of the following indicates that the anti-
Warning light
pedal down firmly. Do not pump the lock braking system is not functioning and
brake, which will result in reduced only the standard brake system is working.
braking performance. (The standard brake system is functioning
normally.) If this happens, take your vehicle
to an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or
a repair facility of your choice.

Features and controls 5-65

 [Link] 66 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Anti-lock braking system

The anti-lock braking system and brake force
CAUTION If the anti-lock braking system
distribution function may not work, so hard
• When the ignition switch is turned to the warning light/display and brake braking could make the vehicle unstable.
“ON” position or the operation mode is put warning light/display illuminate at Avoid hard braking and high-speed driving.
in ON, the warning light does not come on
or it remains on and does not go off.
the same time Stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact an
• The warning light comes on while driving authorized MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer or
Warning light repair facility of your choice.
• The warning display appears while driving
5
If the warning light/display illu- NOTE
 The anti-lock braking system warning light
minate while driving and brake warning light illuminate at the
Warning display type 1
N00531700574 same time and the warning displays appear
alternately on the information screen in the
If only the anti-lock braking sys- multi-information display.
tem warning light/display illumi-
nate
After driving on icy roads
 Avoid hard braking and high-speed driv- N00529200077

ing. Stop the vehicle in a safe place. After driving on snow or icy roads, remove
Test the system by restarting the engine any snow and ice which may have be left
and driving at a speed of about 12 mph around the wheels. On vehicles that have an
(20 km/h) or higher. anti-lock braking system, be careful not to
If the warning light/display then remains Warning display type 2
damage the wheel speed sensors (A) or the
off during driving, there is no abnormal cables located at each wheel.
condition.
However, if the warning light/display do
not disappear, or if they come on again
when the vehicle is driven, have the vehi-
cle checked by an authorized
MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer or repair
facility of your choice as soon as possible.

5-66 Features and controls

[Link] 67 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Electric power steering system (EPS)

lost. If the power assist is lost for some rea-
Front
son, you will still be able to steer your vehi-
Electric power steering system
cle, but you will notice it takes much more warning display
effort to steer. If this happens, have your vehi-
cle inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi Type 1
Motors dealer or a repair facility of your
choice.
5
WARNING
 Do not stop the engine while the vehicle is
moving. Stopping the engine would make Type 2
the steering wheel extremely hard to turn,
Rear possibly resulting in an accident.

NOTE
 During repeated full-lock turning of the
steering wheel (for example, while you are If there is a malfunction in the system, the
manoeuvring the vehicle into a parking warning display will appear on the informa-
space), a protection function may be acti- tion screen in the multi-information display.
vated to prevent overheating of the power
steering system. This function will make the
steering wheel gradually harder to turn. In
CAUTION
this event, limit your turning of the steering  If the warning display appears while the
wheel for a while. When the system has engine is running, have the vehicle inspected
Electric power steering sys- cooled down, the steering effort will return by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or
tem (EPS) to normal. a repair facility of your choice as soon as
possible. It may become harder to turn the
N00568400061  If you turn the steering wheel while the vehi-
steering wheel.
cle is stationary with the headlights on, the
The power steering system operates while the
headlights may become dim. This behavior
engine is running. It helps reduce the effort is not abnormal. The headlights will return to
needed to turn the steering wheel. their original brightness after a short while.
The power steering system has mechanical
steering capability in case the power assist is

Features and controls 5-67

 [Link] 68 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Active stability control (ASC)

start moving from a stopped condition. It also
Active stability control CAUTION provides sufficient driving force and steering
(ASC)  Do not install any aftermarket limited slip
differential (LSD) on your vehicle. The ASC
performance as the vehicle turns while press-
N00559100134 ing the acceleration pedal.
may stop functioning properly.
The Active stability control (ASC) takes
overall control of the anti-lock braking sys- CAUTION
tem, traction control function and skid control NOTE  When driving a vehicle on a snowy or icy
5 function to help maintain the vehicle’s control  An operation noise may be emitted from the road, be sure to install snow tires and drive
the vehicle at moderate speeds.
and traction. Please read this section in con- engine compartment in the following situa-
junction with the page on the anti-lock brak- tions. The sound is associated with checking
ing system, traction control function and skid the operations of the ASC. At this time, you
control function. may feel a shock from the brake pedal if you Skid control function
depress it. These do not indicate a malfunc-
N00559300051
Anti-lock braking system  P.5-64 tion.
• When the ignition switch is turned to the The skid control function is designed to help
Traction control function  P.5-68
“ON” position or the operation mode is put the driver maintain control of the vehicle on
Skid control function  P.5-68
in ON. slippery roads or during rapid steering
• When the vehicle is driven for a while after maneuvers. It works by controlling the engine
CAUTION the engine is turned on. output and the brake on each wheel.
 Do not over-rely on the ASC. Even the ASC  When the ASC is activated, you may feel a
cannot prevent the natural laws of physics vibration in the vehicle body or hear a whin-
from acting on the vehicle. This system, like ing sound from the engine compartment.
NOTE
any other system, has limits and cannot help This indicates that the system is operating  The skid control function operates at speeds
you to maintain traction and control of the normally. It does not indicate a malfunction. of about 9 mph (15 km/h) or higher.
vehicle in all circumstances. Reckless driv-  When the anti-lock braking system warning
ing can lead to accidents. It is the driver’s light is illuminated, the ASC is not active.
responsibillty to drive carefully, This means ASC OFF switch
taking into account the traffic, road and envi-
N00559400241
ronmental conditions.
 Be sure to use the same specified type and
Traction control function The ASC is automatically activated when the
size of tire on all four wheels. Otherwise, the N00559200076 ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position
ASC may not work properly. On slippery surfaces, the traction control or the operation mode is put in ON. You can
function prevents the drive wheels from spin- deactivate the system by pressing down the
ning excessive, thus helping the vehicle to “ASC OFF” switch for 3 seconds or longer.

5-68 Features and controls

[Link] 69 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Active stability control (ASC)

When the ASC is deactivated, the dis- NOTE CAUTION
play/indicator will turn on. To reactivate the  When moving out of mud, sand or fresh  When display/indicator blinks, ASC is
ASC, momentarily press the “ASC OFF” snow, pressing the accelerator pedal may not
operating, which means that the road is slip-
switch ; the display/indicator is turned off. allow the engine speed to increase. In such
pery or that your vehicle’s wheels are begin-
situations, temporarily turning off ASC with
ning to slip. If this happens, drive slower
the “ASC OFF” switch will make it easier to
with less accelerator input.
move out your vehicle.
 If the temperature in the braking system con-
 If you continue to press the “ASC OFF”
switch after the ASC is turned off, the “mis-
tinues to increase due to continuous brake 5
taken operation protection function” will control on a slippery road surface, the
activate and the ASC will turn back on. display/indicator will blink. To prevent the
brake system from overheating, the brake
control of the traction control function will
ASC operation display or ASC be temporarily suspended.
OFF display The engine control of the traction control
N00546500075
function and normal brake operation will not
be affected. Park your vehicle in a safe place.
ASC operation display/ASC indicator When the temperature in the braking system
-
CAUTION The display/indicator will blink when
has come down, the display/indicator
 For safety reasons, the “ASC OFF” switch the ASC is operating.
will be turned off and the traction control
should be operated when your vehicle is ASC OFF display/ASC OFF indicator
- function will start operating again.
stopped. This display/incicator will turn on
 Be sure to keep the ASC on while driving in when the ASC is turned off with the
normal circumstances. “ASC OFF” switch. NOTE
 The display/indicator may turn on when
NOTE NOTE you start the engine. This means that the bat-
tery voltage momentarily dropped when the
 Using the “ASC OFF” switch turns off both  The combination of items shown on the dis-
engine was started. It does not indicate a
the stability control function and the traction play varies depending on the vehicle model.
malfunction, provided that the display goes
control function.
out immediately.

Features and controls 5-69

 [Link] 70 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Cruise control (if so equipped)

NOTE NOTE Towing

 When a compact spare tire has been put on  The combination of items shown on the dis- N00546300031

your vehicle, the gripping ability of the tire play varies depending on the vehicle model.
will be lower, making it more likely that the CAUTION
display/indicator will blink.  When towing the vehicle with only the front
CAUTION wheels or only the rear wheels raised off the
 The system may be malfunctioning. ground, do not place the ignition switch in
5 ASC warning display Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the the “ON” position or do not put the operation
mode in ON. Placing the ignition switch in
N00546600076 engine.
Restart the engine and check whether the dis- the “ON” position or putting the operation
If an abnormal condition occurs in the sys-
play/indicator goes out. If they go out, there mode in ON could cause the ASC to operate,
tem, the following display/indicator will turn resulting in an accident.
on. is no abnormal condition. If they do not go
out or appear frequently, it is not necessary Note that the correct towing method depends
to stop the vehicle immediately, but you on the transmission type and the vehicle’s
- ASC indicator should have your vehicle inspected by an drive configuration.
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a For details, refer to “Towing” on page 8-12.
- ASC OFF display/ASC OFF indicator repair facility of your choice as soon as pos-
sible.
Cruise control (if so
Warning display type 1 equipped)
N00518301600

Cruise control is an automatic speed control

system that keeps a set speed. It can be acti-
vated at speeds from about 25 mph
(40 km/h). Cruise control does not work at
Warning display type 2 speeds below about 25 mph (40 km/h).

CAUTION
 When you do not wish to drive at a set speed,
turn off the cruise control for safety.

5-70 Features and controls

[Link] 71 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Cruise control (if so equipped)

CAUTION Cruise control switches To activate

 Do not use cruise control when driving con- N00518401409

ditions will not allow you to stay at the same 1. With the ignition switch in “ON” position
speed, such as in heavy traffic or on roads or the operation mode is in ON, press the
that are winding, icy, snow-covered, wet, CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF switch (A)
slippery, on a steep downhill slope. to turn on the cruise control. The
 On vehicles equipped with manual transaxle, “CRUISE” indicator light in the meter
do not move the gearshift lever to the “N”
(Neutral) position while driving at a set
cluster will come on. 5
speed without depressing the clutch pedal.
The engine will run too fast and might be
damaged.

NOTE A- CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF switch

 Cruise control may not be able to keep your Used to turn on and off the cruise control.
speed on uphills or downhills. B- SET - switch
 Your speed may decrease on a steep uphill. Used to reduce the set speed and to set the
You may use the accelerator pedal if you desired speed.
want to stay at your set speed. C- RES + switch
 Your speed may increase to more than the set Used to increase the set speed and to
speed on a steep downhill. You have to use return to the original set speed.
the brake to control your speed. As a result, D- CANCEL switch
the set speed driving is deactivated.
Used to deactivate the set speed driving.

NOTE
 When operating the cruise control switches,
press the cruise control switches correctly.
The set speed driving may be deactivated
automatically if two or more switches of the
cruise control are pressed at the same time.

Features and controls 5-71

 [Link] 72 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Cruise control (if so equipped)

NOTE
 If the cruise control is on when the following
operation is performed, cruise control will be
on automatically the next time you start the
engine. The “CRUISE” indicator light will
also be on.
[Except for vehicles equipped with the
5 F.A.S.T.-key]
Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF” or
“ACC” position.
[Vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key]
Put the operation mode in OFF or ACC.
To increase your speed in small amounts,
 If the battery voltage is insufficient, the NOTE push up the RES + switch for less than about
memory data for the cruise control may be  When you release the SET - switch, the vehi-
erased. 1 second and release it.
cle speed will be set.
As a result, the “CRUISE” indicator light Each time you push up the RES + switch,
may not come on when you restart the your vehicle will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h)
engine. faster.
If this happens, press the CRUISE CON- To increase the set speed
TROL ON/OFF switch once again to turn on N00518501367

the cruise control.

Accelerator pedal
There are 2 ways to increase the set speed.
While driving at the set speed, use the accel-
2. Accelerate or decelerate to your desired RES + switch erator pedal to reach your desired speed and
speed, then push down and release the
then push down the SET - switch (B) and
SET - switch (B) when the “CRUISE”
Push up and hold the RES + switch (C) while release the switch momentarily to set a new
indicator light is illuminated. The vehicle
driving at the set speed, and your speed will desired cruising speed.
will then maintain the desired speed.
then gradually increase.
When you reach your desired speed, release
the switch. Your new cruising speed is now
set.

5-72 Features and controls

[Link] 73 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Cruise control (if so equipped)

To slow down your speed in small amounts,

push down the SET - switch for less than
To decrease the set speed about 1 second and release it.
To temporarily increase or
N00518601296
Each time you push down the SET - switch, decrease the speed
There are 2 ways to decrease the set speed. your vehicle will slow down by about 1 mph N00541701079

(1.6 km/h).
SET - switch To temporarily increase the speed
Brake pedal
Push down and hold the SET - switch (B) Depress the accelerator pedal as you would
while driving at the set speed, and your speed normally. When you release the pedal, you
While driving at the set speed, use the brake
will slow down gradually. will return to your set speed.
pedal, which disengages the cruise control,
When you reach your desired speed, release then push down the SET - switch (B) and
the switch. Your new cruising speed is now release the switch momentarily to set a new
set. desired cruising speed.

Features and controls 5-73

 [Link] 74 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Cruise control (if so equipped)

 When the active stability control (ASC)
To deactivate starts operating.
N00518801591
Refer to “Active stability control (ASC)”
The set speed driving can be deactivated as on page 5-68.
follows:

 Press the CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF WARNING

switch (A). (Cruise control will be turned  On vehicles equipped with continuously
5 off.) variable transmission (CVT), although the
 Press the CANCEL switch (D). set speed driving will be deactivated when
 Depress the brake pedal. shifting to the “N” (NEUTRAL) position,
never move the selector lever to the “N”
(NEUTRAL) position while driving.
You would have no engine braking and
To temporarily decrease the speed could cause a serious accident.

Depress the brake pedal to decrease the Also, the set speed driving may be deacti-
speed. To return to the previously set speed, vated as follows:
push up the RES + switch (C).
Refer to “To resume the set speed” on page  When the engine speed rises and
5-75. approaches the tachometer’s red zone (the
red-colored part of the tachometer dial).

The set speed driving is deactivated automati- CAUTION

cally in any of the following ways.  When the set speed driving is deactivated
automatically in any situation other than
 When you depress the clutch pedal (on those listed above, there may be a system
vehicles equipped with manual transaxle). malfunction.
 When your speed slows to about 10 mph Press the CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF
(15 km/h) or more below the set speed switch to turn off the cruise control and have
your vehicle inspected by an authorized Mit-
because of a hill, etc.
subishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of
 When your speed slows to about 25 mph your choice.
(40 km/h) or less.

5-74 Features and controls

[Link] 75 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Tire pressure monitoring system

Put the operation mode in OFF or ACC.
To resume the set speed  “CRUISE” indicator light is turned OFF.
WARNING
N00518901329  The compact spare wheel does not have a
If the set speed driving is deactivated by any tire inflation pressure sensor.
condition described in “To deactivate” on Tire pressure monitoring When the spare tire is used, the tire pres-
sure monitoring system will not work
page 5-74, you can resume the previously set system properly.
speed by pushing up the RES + switch (C) N00530201524 See an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
while driving at a speed of about 25 mph (40
km/h) or higher.
The tire pressure monitoring system uses tire dealer as soon as possible to replace or
repair the original tire.
5
inflation pressure sensors (A) on the wheels
to monitor the tire inflation pressures. The
system only indicates when a tire is signifi-
cantly under-inflated. NOTE
 The tire pressure monitoring system is not a
substitute for regularly checking tire infla-
tion pressures.
Be sure to check the tire inflation pressures
as described in “Tires” on page 9-13.
 The tire inflation pressure sensor (A) is
installed in the illustrated location.
• On vehicles with Type 1 sensor which has
the metallic air valve (B), replace grommet
and washer (C) with a new one when the
Under either of the following conditions,
tire is replaced.
however, using the switch does not allow you
• On vehicles with Type 2 sensor which has
to resume the previously set speed. In these
the rubber air valve (D), replace rubber air
situations, repeat the speed setting procedure: valve (D) with a new one when the tire is
replaced.
 The CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF
switch is pressed.
 [Except for vehicles equipped with the
F.A.S.T.-key]
Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF” or
“ACC” position.
[Vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key]

Features and controls 5-75

 [Link] 76 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Tire pressure monitoring system

warning light normally illuminates and goes
NOTE off a few seconds later.
CAUTION
For details, please contact your authorized  If the tire pressure monitoring system warn-
Mitsubishi Motors dealer. If one or more of the vehicle tires (except for ing light does not illuminate when the igni-
the spare tire) is significantly under-inflated, tion switch is turned to the “ON” position or
Type 1 the operation mode is put in ON, it means
the warning light will remain illuminated
that the tire pressure monitoring system is
while the ignition switch or the operation not working properly. Have the system
mode is in ON.
5 Refer to “If the warning light / display illumi-
inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer.
nates while driving” on page 5-77 and take In such situations, a malfunctioning of the
the necessary measures. system may be preventing the monitoring of
the tire pressure. Avoid sudden braking,
sharp turning and high-speed driving.
NOTE  If a malfunction is detected in the tire pres-
Type 2  In addition, the warning display is displayed
sure monitoring system, the tire pressure
on the information screen in the multi-infor-
monitoring system warning light will blink
mation display.
for approximately 1 minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. The warning light
Type 1 will issue further warnings each time the
engine is restarted as long as the malfunction
exists.
Check to see whether the warning light goes
off after few minutes driving.
If it then goes off during driving, there is no
The tire pressure monitoring problem.
system warning light / display Type 2 However, if the warning light does not go
N00532700281 off, or if it blinks again when the engine is
restarted, have the vehicle inspected by an
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
In such situations, a malfunctioning of the
system may be preventing the monitoring of
When the ignition switch is turned to the the tire pressure. For safety reasons, when
“ON” position or the operation mode is put in the warning light appears while driving,
ON, the tire pressure monitoring system avoid sudden braking, sharp turning and
high-speed driving.

5-76 Features and controls

[Link] 77 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Tire pressure monitoring system

pressure telltale when one or more of your TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
NOTE tires is significantly under-inflated. of reasons, including the installation of
 In addition, the warning display is displayed
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure tell- replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
on the information screen in the multi-infor-
tale illuminates, you should stop and check vehicle that prevent the TPMS from function-
mation display.
your tires as soon as possible, and inflate ing properly. Always check the TPMS mal-
Type 1 them to the proper pressure. Driving on a sig- function telltale after replacing one or more
nificantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that
overheat and can lead to tire failure. the replacement or alternate tires and wheels
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency allow the TPMS to continue to function prop-
5
and tire tread life, and may affect the vehi- erly.
cle’s handling and stopping ability. Please
note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
Type 2 proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
If the warning light/display illu-
responsibility to maintain correct tire pres- minates while driving
sure, even if under-inflation has not reached N00532801524

the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS 1. If the tire pressure monitoring system
low tire pressure telltale. warning light illuminates, avoiding hard
braking, sharp steering maneuvers and
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a high speeds. You should stop and adjust
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the tires to the proper inflation pressure as
should be checked monthly when cold and the system is not operating properly. The soon as possible. Adjust the spare tire at
inflated to the inflation pressure recom- TPMS malfunction indicator is combined the same time. Refer to “Tires” on page
mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the with the low tire pressure telltale. 9-13.
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. When the system detects a malfunction, the
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size telltale will flash for approximately one min- NOTE
than the size indicated on the vehicle placard ute and then remain continuously illuminated.  In addition, the warning display is displayed
or tire inflation pressure label, you should This sequence will continue upon subsequent on the information screen in the multi-infor-
determine the proper tire inflation pressure vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction mation display.
for those tires.) exists.  When inspecting or adjusting the tire pres-
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has When the malfunction indicator is illumi- sure, do not apply excessive force to the
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring nated, the system may not be able to detect or valve stem to avoid breakage.
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire signal low tire pressure as intended.

Features and controls 5-77

 [Link] 78 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Tire pressure monitoring system

 Wheels other than Mitsubishi genuine
NOTE CAUTION wheels are being used.
 After inspecting or adjusting the tire pres-  If a tire has a puncture, replace that tire with
 Wheels that are not fitted with tire infla-
sure, always reinstall the valve cap on the the spare tire. Driving on a punctured tire
tion pressure sensors are being used.
valve stem. could lead to an accident.
Without the valve cap, dirt or moisture could  Wheels whose ID codes are not memo-
 The warning light/display may not illuminate
get into the valve, resulting in damage to the immediately in the event of a tire blowout or rized by the vehicle are used.
tire inflation pressure sensor. rapid leak.  Compact spare tire is fitted on a road
wheel.
5  Do not use metal valve caps, which may
cause a metal reaction, resulting in corrosion  A window tint that affects the radio wave
and damage of the tire inflation pressure sen- NOTE signals is installed.
sors.
 To avoid the risk of damage to the tire infla-
 Once adjustments have been made, the warn-
ing light will go off after a few minutes of
tion pressure sensors, have any punctured NOTE
tire repaired by an authorized Mitsubishi
driving.  Tire inflation pressures vary with the ambi-
Motors dealer. If the tire repair is not done by
ent temperature. If the vehicle is subjected to
2. If the tire pressure monitoring system an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer, it is
large variations in ambient temperature, the
not covered by your warranty.
warning light remains illuminated after tire inflation pressures may be under-inflated
 Do not use an aerosol puncture-repair spray
you have been driving for about 20 min- (causing the warning light/display to come
on any tire. on) when the ambient temperature is rela-
utes after you adjust the tire inflation pres-
Such a spray could damage the tire inflation tively low. If the warning light/display
sure, one or more of the tires may have a pressure sensors.
puncture. Inspect the tire and if it has a comes on, adjust the tire inflation pressure.
Have any puncture repaired by an authorized
puncture, have it repaired by an autho- Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as soon as
possible. Whenever the tires and wheels
The tire pressure monitoring system may not
are replaced with new ones
work normally in the following circum-
WARNING stances:
N00532901192

 If the warning light/display illuminates If new wheels with new tire inflation pressure
while you are driving, avoid hard braking,  A wireless facility or device using the sensors are installed, their ID codes must be
sharp steering maneuvers and high same frequency is near the vehicle. programmed into the tire pressure monitoring
speeds.  Snow or ice is stuck inside the fenders system. Have the tire and wheel replacement
Driving with an under-inflated tire and/or on the wheels. performed by an authorized Mitsubishi
adversely affects vehicle performance and  The tire inflation pressure sensor’s battery Motors dealer to avoid the risk of damaging
can result in an accident.
is dead. the tire inflation pressure sensors. If the

5-78 Features and controls

[Link] 79 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Rear-view camera (if so equipped)

wheel replacement is not done by an autho-
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer, it is not cov-
CAUTION WARNING
 Changes or modifications not expressly  The view on the screen is limited, and
ered by your warranty.
approved by the manufacturer for compli- objects outside the view, such as under the
ance could void the user’s authority to oper- bumper or around either corner of the
CAUTION ate the equipment. bumper end, cannot be seen on the screen.
 The use of non-genuine wheels will prevent
the proper fit of the tire inflation pressure
Location of rear-view camera
sensors, resulting air leakage or damage of
the sensors.
Rear-view camera (if so 5
equipped) The rear-view camera (A) is in the liftgate, at
N00546201183 the left side of the liftgate handle.
General information When the gearshift lever or the selector lever
N00533001246 is in the “R” position with the ignition switch
Your tire pressure monitoring system oper- or the operation mode is in ON, the rear-view
ates on a radio frequency subject to Federal image will be displayed on the screen of the
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules Mitsubishi Multi-Communication System or
(For vehicles sold in U.S.A.) and Industry the DISPLAY AUDIO in the center panel.
Canada Rules (For vehicles sold in Canada). When the gearshift lever or the selector lever
This device complies with part 15 of FCC is shifted out of the “R” position, the rear-
Rules and Industry Canada licence-exempt view image will go off.
RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two con- WARNING
ditions.  Never rely solely on the rear-view camera
to clear the area behind your vehicle. CAUTION
 This device may not cause harmful inter- Always check visually behind and all  If the camera lens gets dirty, a clear image
ference. around your vehicle for persons, animals, cannot be obtained. As necessary, rinse the
 This device must accept any interference obstructions or other vehicles. Failure to lens with clean water and gently wipe with a
received, including interference that may do so can result in vehicle damage, serious clean, soft cloth.
cause undesired operation. injury or death.  To avoid damaging the camera;
 The rear-view camera is an aid system for • Do not rub the cover excessively or polish
backing up, but it is not a substitute for it by using an abrasive compound.
your visual confirmation. • Do not disassemble the camera.

Features and controls 5-79

 [Link] 80 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Rear-view camera (if so equipped)

CAUTION CAUTION
• Do not splash hot water directly on the lens. • When there is an upward slope at the back.
• Do not spray the camera and its surround- (Case 2)
ings with high-pressure water.
• Make sure that the liftgate is securely Case 1
closed when backing up.

5 Reference lines on the screen

Reference lines and upper surface of the rear

1: Approximately at the rear edge of the
bumper (A) are displayed on the screen.
rear bumper A- Actual objects
 Red line (B) indicates approximately 20 2: Approximately 39 inches (100 cm) B- Objects shown on the screen
inches (50 cm) behind the rear bumper. 3: Approximately 79 inches (200 cm)
 Two Green lines (C) indicate approxi-
mately 8 inches (20 cm) outside of the Case 2
vehicle body.
CAUTION
 Short transverse lines (1 to 3) indicate dis-  The rear-view camera uses a wide-angle
lens. As a result, images and distances shown
tance from the rear bumper.
on the screen are not exact.
 Actual distance may be different from dis-
tance indicated by the lines on the screen,
depending on the loading condition of the
vehicle and road surface condition. A- Actual objects
The reference lines for distance and vehicle B- Objects shown on the screen
width are based on a level, flat road surface.
In the following cases, objects shown on the
screen will appear to be farther off than they
actually are.
• When the rear of the vehicle is weighed
down with the weight of passengers and
luggage in the vehicle. (Case 1)

5-80 Features and controls

[Link] 81 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Instrument cluster
3- Speedometer  P.5-81
CAUTION NOTE 4- Rheostat meter illumination button 
 The reference lines for distance and vehicle  On vehicles equipped with Mitsubishi Multi-
P.5-82
width are intended to indicate the distance to Communication System, it is possible to
a flat object such as a level, flat road surface. change the display language of the screen.
They may not indicate correct distance For details, please refer to the separated Speedometer
depending on the shape of an obstacle. owner’s manual. N00519100259
For example, when there is an object behind  Under certain circumstances, it may become
The speedometer shows the vehicle speed in
the vehicle that has upper sections projecting
in the direction of the vehicle, the reference
difficult to see an image on the screen, even
when the system is functioning correctly. miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per hour 5
lines on the screen will indicate that point A • In a dark area, such as at night. (km/h).
is the farthest point and point B is the closest • When water drops or condensation are on
point to the vehicle. In reality, point A and B the lens.
are actually the same distance from the vehi- Type A
• When sun light or headlights shine directly
cle, and point C is farther off than point A
into the lens.
and B.

Instrument cluster
N00519000388

Type B

NOTE
1- Tachometer  P.5-82
 Mirror image is displayed on the screen.
2- Multi-information display  P.5-83
 Monitor brightness is adjusted automatically
by sensors.
Information screen display list 
P.5-104

Features and controls 5-81

 [Link] 82 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Instrument cluster

Tachometer Rheostat meter illumination

N00519200289
button
The tachometer shows engine revolutions per N00554901235

minute. This allows the driver to determine Each time you press this button, there is a
the most efficient selector position and engine sound and the brightness of the instruments
speed combinations. changes.
This gauge also assists in evaluating engine
5 performance.
NOTE
 You can adjust to 8 different levels respec-
tively for when the front side-marker lights 1- Brightness display
are illuminated and when they are not. 2- Rheostat illumination button
 If the vehicle is equipped with the automatic
light control, when the light switch is in a
position other than the “OFF” position, the
meter illumination switches automatically to
the adjusted brightness, depending on the
brightness outside the vehicle.
 The brightness level of the instruments is
stored when the ignition switch is turned to
the “OFF” position or the operation mode is
put in OFF.
CAUTION  If you press and hold the button for longer
 The red zone indicates an engine speed than about 1 second when the front side-
beyond the range of safe operation. marker lights are illuminated, the brightness
Select the correct shift position (manual level changes to the maximum level. Press-
transaxle) or selector position (CVT) to con- ing and holding the button for longer than
trol the engine speed so that the tachometer about 1 second again returns the brightness
indicator does not enter the red zone. level to the previous level.

5-82 Features and controls

[Link] 83 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Multi-information display

Multi-information display
N00555000265

The multi-information display displays warnings, the odometer, trip odometer, service reminder, engine coolant temperature, fuel remaining, out-
side temperature, selector lever position, all-wheel drive operation status, average and momentary fuel consumption, driving range, average
speed, instrument brightness, etc.
It is also possible to change elements such as the language and units used on the multi-information display.
5
With ignition switch or opera- With ignition switch or operation mode is in With ignition switch or operation mode is in
tion mode is in OFF ON (CVT) ON (Manual transaxle)

Type 1 Type 2 Type 1 Type 2 Type 1 Type 2

1- 3- Door ajar warning display screen (With 6- Active stability control (ASC) OFF
Warning display screen (With igni-
ignition switch or operation mode in display screen (if so equipped) 
tion switch or operation mode in OFF)
OFF)  P.5-87 P.5-89
 P.5-84
4- Drive mode indicator display screen (if 7- Information screen (With ignition
2- Information screen (With ignition
so equipped) switch or operation mode in ON) 
switch or operation mode in OFF) 
 P.5-88 P.5-89
P.5-85
5- Warning display screen (With igni- Interrupt display screen (With ignition
Interrupt display screen (With ignition
tion switch or operation mode in ON) switch or operation mode in ON) 
switch or operation mode in OFF) 
 P.5-88 P.5-92
P.5-86

Features and controls 5-83

 [Link] 84 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Multi-information display
8- Selector lever position display screen momentary fuel consumption, driving range,
(if so equipped)  P.5-93
NOTE and average speed.
 The display screen is different depending on
9- Outside temperature display screen  It is also possible to change elements such as
whether the ignition switch or the operation
P.5-93 the language and units used on the multi-
mode in OFF or ON.
10- Fuel remaining display screen  Refer to “Information screen (With ignition information display by operating the multi-
P.5-94 switch or operation mode in OFF)” on page information meter switch.
11- Engine coolant temperature display (if 5-85.
5 so equipped)
 P.5-89
Refer to “Warning display list (With ignition
switch or operation mode in OFF)” on page
12- ECO mode indicator (if so equipped) 5-105.
 P.5-93 Refer to “Information screen (With ignition
switch turned from the “OFF” position to the
13- Gearshift indicator display screen (if so
“ON” position or operation mode changed
equipped)
from OFF to ON)” on page 5-87.
 P.5-47 Refer to “Information screen (With ignition
switch or operation mode in ON)” on page
NOTE 5-89.
 The fuel units, temperature units, display Refer to “Warning display list (With ignition
language, and other settings can be changed. switch or operation mode in ON)” on page
Refer to “Changing the function settings 5-107.
(With ignition switch or operation mode in Warning display screen
ON)” on page 5-96.
(With ignition switch or opera-
Multi-information meter switch
N00555100149
tion mode in OFF)
N00555200179
The multi-information meter switch is a but-
ton marked “INFO” on the left side of the If you press the multi-information meter
dash. switch and return from the warning display
Each time the multi-information meter switch screen to the previous screen, the warning
is operated, a sound is emitted and the multi- is displayed.
information display changes between infor- Refer to “Returning to the display screen
mation such as warnings, Odometer (Type1), from before the warning display” on page
trip odometer, service reminder, engine cool- 5-86.
ant temperature (Type 1), average and

5-84 Features and controls

[Link] 85 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Multi-information display
This mark is also displayed if there is another
Type 1 Odometer/Trip odometer
warning other than the one displayed. When
N00555400113
the cause of the warning display is elimi-
Each time you lightly press the multi-infor-
nated, the warning goes out automatically. When there is no mation meter switch, the display screen
warning display switches.
NOTE
Odometer/trip odometer  Odome-
 When the warning is displayed, the warn-
ing display screen can be redisplayed on the ter/trip odometer  Service reminder  5
When there is a Redisplay of a warning display screen 
information screen.
warning display
Refer to “Information screen (With ignition Odometer/trip odometer .
switch or operation mode in OFF)” on page
5-85. Type 2 Odometer
Refer to “Information screen (With ignition
switch or operation mode in ON)” on page Shows the total distance traveled.
5-89.
When there is no
Trip odometer
warning display

Information screen (With igni- Shows the distance traveled between two
points.
tion switch or operation mode
in OFF) When there is a Usage examples for trip odometer , trip
N00555301180
warning display odometer
Each time you lightly press the multi-infor- It is possible to measure two currently
mation meter switch, the display screen traveled distances, from home using trip
switches in the following order. odometer and from a particular point
1- Odometer (Type1)/Trip odometer
2- Odometer (Type1)/Trip odometer on the way using trip odometer .
3- Service reminder
4- Redisplay of a warning display screen
To reset the trip odometer

To return the display to 0, hold down the

multi-information meter switch for about 2

Features and controls 5-85

 [Link] 86 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Multi-information display
seconds or more. Only the currently dis- to the appropriate page and take the necessary
played value will be reset.
NOTE measures.
 If there is no warning display, the switching
When the cause of the warning display is
Example sequence is: odometer/trip odometer  eliminated, the warning display goes out
If trip odometer is displayed, only trip odometer/trip odometer  service automatically.
odometer will be reset. reminder  odometer/trip odometer . Refer to “Warning display list (With ignition
 Both trip odometers and can count switch or operation mode in OFF)” on page
5-105.
5 Type 1
up to 9999.9 miles/kilometers.
When a trip odometer goes past 9999.9
miles/kilometers, it returns to 0.0 miles/kilo- Type 1
meters.
 When disconnecting the battery terminal, the
memories of trip odometer displays and
are cleared, and their displays return to
“0.0 miles/kilometers”. Type 2

Type 2
Service reminder
N00555500042

Shows the distance and number of months 1- Information generated

until the next periodic inspection. 2- Cause eliminated
Refer to “Service reminder” on page 5-94.

Interrupt display screen (With Returning to the display screen

ignition switch or operation from before the warning display
mode in OFF) Even if the cause of the warning display is
N00559600201
not eliminated, you can return to the screen
When there is information to be announced, that was displayed before the warning dis-
such as a key reminder, the buzzer sounds and play.
switches to the warning display screen. Refer If you press the multi-information meter
switch, the display screen switches to the
5-86 Features and controls
[Link] 87 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Multi-information display
screen display from before the warning and switch a few times, the warning display
screen you switched from is redisplayed.
Information screen (With the
the warning (A) is displayed.
Refer to “Information screen (With ignition ignition switch is turned from
switch or operation mode in OFF)” on page the “OFF” position to the “ON”
Type 1 5-85. position or the operation mode
is changed from OFF to ON)
Door ajar warning display N00555800191

screen (With ignition switch or When the ignition switch is turned to the 5
operation mode in OFF) “ON” position or the operation mode changed
Type 2 N00559700156 to ON, the display screen switches in the fol-
If any of the doors or the liftgate is not com- lowing order.
pletely closed, this displays the open door or
liftgate. Type 1

Type 1

Type 2
NOTE
 Warning display screens with a “ ” or Type 2
“ ” mark displayed in the upper right of the
screen can be switched. If you want to switch
the display, press the multi-information 1- Screen when the ignition switch or oper-
meter switch as follows. ation mode is OFF)
“ ”: Press lightly. 1- Doors and liftgate are closed 2- System check screen
“ ”: Press for about 2 seconds or more. 2- Doors or liftgate is open 3- Screen when the ignition switch or oper-
ation mode is ON)
Redisplay of a warning display screen

When the warning is displayed, if you

lightly press the multi-information meter
Features and controls 5-87
 [Link] 88 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Multi-information display

System check screen Service reminder Warning display screen

(With ignition switch or opera-
When the ignition switch is turned to the When the time for periodic inspection arrives,
tion mode in ON)
“ON” position or the operation mode is the warning display is displayed for a few
N00555200182
changed to ON, the system check screen is seconds after the screen that is initially dis-
displayed for about 4 seconds. If there in no played when the ignition switch is turned This is displayed when you press the multi-
fault, the information screen is displayed. “ON” or the operation mode is changed to information meter switch and switch the
5 If there is a fault, the screen changes to warn- ON. warning display screen.
ing display. Refer to “Service reminder” on page 5-94. This mark is also displayed if there is another
Refer to “Warning display list (With ignition Type 1 warning other than the one displayed.
switch or operation mode in ON)” on page When the cause of the warning display is
5-107. eliminated, the warning goes out automat-
ically.
Type 1 Type 2
NOTE
Type 2  When the warning is displayed, the warn-
ing display screen can be redisplayed on the
information screen.
Refer to “Information screen (With ignition
switch or operation mode in OFF)” on page
5-85.
Refer to “Information screen (With ignition
switch or operation mode in ON)” on page
Drive mode indicator display 5-89.
NOTE screen (if so equipped)
N00555900020
 The system check screen display varies
depending on your equipment. Shows the 4WD drive status.
Refer to “Drive mode-selector” on page 5-56.

5-88 Features and controls

[Link] 89 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Multi-information display

“Active stability control (ASC) Type 1 1- Odometer (Type1)/Trip odometer

OFF” display screen (if so 2- Odometer (Type1)/Trip odometer
3- Service reminder
equipped)
Engine coolant temperature display
N00556100117 4-
(Type 1)
When there is no warning display 5- Driving range display (Type 1)
This is displayed when the Active stability
control (ASC) is turned “OFF” with the 6- Average speed display, average fuel
“ASC OFF” switch. consumption display, momentary fuel 5
Also, if an abnormal condition is occurred in consumption display (Type 1)
the ASC while driving, the “ASC OFF” dis- 7- Driving range display, momentary fuel
play illuminates. consumption display (Type 2)
Refer to “ASC OFF switch” on page 5-68. 8- Average fuel consumption display,
When there is a
momentary fuel consumption display
warning display
(Type 2)
Information screen (With igni- 9- Average speed display, momentary fuel
tion switch or operation mode consumption display (Type 2)
Type 2
in ON) 10- Function setting screen
N00556201245 11- Redisplay of a warning display screen
Each time you lightly press the multi-infor-
mation meter switch, the display screen
switches in the following order.
NOTE
When there is no warning display  While driving, the function setting screen is
not displayed even if you operate the multi-
information meter switch. Always park the
vehicle in a safe place before operating.
Refer to “Changing the function settings
(With ignition switch or operation mode in
ON)” on page 5-96.
When there is a
warning display

Features and controls 5-89

 [Link] 90 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Multi-information display

NOTE CAUTION NOTE

 When there is information to be announced,  If the engine is overheating, “ ” will blink.  The display setting can be changed to the
such as a system fault, the tone sounds and preferred units (miles or km).
In this case, the bar graph is on the red zone.
the screen display is switched. Refer to “Changing the function settings
Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place
Refer to “Interrupt display screen (With igni- (With ignition switch or operation mode in
and take the required measures. Refer to
tion switch or operation mode in ON)” on ON)” on page 5-96.
“Engine overheating” on page 8-4.
page 5-92.
5 Average speed display
Odometer/Trip odometer Driving range display
This displays the average speed from the last
The operation method is the same as when Shows the approximate driving range (how reset to the present.
the ignition switch or the operation mode is in many more miles or kilometers you can There are 2 types of mode settings as follows.
OFF. drive). When this driving range falls below For details on how to change the average
For further details, refer to “Odometer/Trip 30 miles (50 km), “---” is displayed. speed display setting, refer to “Changing the
odometer” on page 5-85. Refuel as soon as possible. function settings (With ignition switch or
operation mode in ON)” on page 5-96.
Service reminder NOTE
 The driving range is determined based on the Manual reset mode
Shows the distance and number of months fuel consumption data. This may vary
 When the average speed is being dis-
until the next periodic inspection. depending on the driving conditions and hab-
its. Treat the distance displayed as just a played, if you hold down the multi-infor-
Refer to “Service reminder” on page 5-94.
rough guideline. mation meter switch, these calculations
 When you refuel, the driving range display is will be reset to zero.
Engine coolant temperature dis- updated.  When the following operation is per-
play However, if you only add a small amount of formed, the mode setting changes auto-
fuel, the correct value will not be displayed. matically from manual to auto.
Fill to a full tank whenever possible.
Shows the engine coolant temperature.
 When your vehicle is stopped on an [Except for vehicles equipped with the
If the coolant becomes hot, “ ” will blink. extremely steep hill, the driving range value F.A.S.T.-key]
Pay careful attention to the engine coolant may, change. This is due to the movement of Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” posi-
temperature display while you are driving. fuel in the tank and does not indicate any tion from the “ACC” or “OFF” position.
breakdown.

5-90 Features and controls

[Link] 91 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Multi-information display
[For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-
key]
NOTE Manual reset mode
 “---” is displayed when the average speed
Change the operation mode to ON from  When the average fuel consumption is
cannot be measured.
ACC or OFF. being displayed, if you hold down the
 The initial (default) setting is “Auto reset
mode”. multi-information meter switch, these cal-
Auto reset mode  The display setting can be changed to the culations will be reset to zero.
preferred units (mph or km/h).  When the following operation is per-
 When the average speed is being dis-
played, if you hold down the multi-infor-
Refer to “Changing the function settings
(With ignition switch or operation mode in
formed, the mode setting changes auto-
matically from manual to auto.
5
mation meter switch, these calculations ON)” on page 5-96.
will be reset to zero.  Disconnecting the battery cable will erase [Except for vehicles equipped with the
 When the engine switch or the operation from memory the manual reset mode or auto F.A.S.T.-key]
mode is in the following conditions, the reset mode setting for the average speed dis- Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” posi-
average speed display will automatically play. tion from the “ACC” or “OFF” position.
reset.
Average fuel consumption display [For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-
[Except for vehicles equipped with the key]
F.A.S.T.-key] Change the operation mode to ON from
This displays the average fuel consumption ACC or OFF.
The ignition switch has been set to the
from the last reset to the present.
“ACC” or “OFF” position for about 4
There are 2 types of mode settings as follows.
hours or more. Auto reset mode
For details on how to change the average fuel
[For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.- consumption display setting, refer to “Chang-
 When the average fuel consumption is
key] ing the function settings (With ignition switch
being displayed, if you hold down the
The operation mode has been set to ACC or operation mode in ON)” on page 5-96.
multi-information meter switch, these cal-
or OFF for about 4 hours or more. The “ ” mark in the momentary fuel gauge culations will be reset to zero.
shows the average fuel consumption. (Type  When the engine switch or the operation
NOTE 2) mode is in the following conditions, the
 The average speed display and the average average fuel consumption display will
fuel consumption display can be reset sepa- automatically reset.
rately in both auto reset mode and manual
reset mode. [Except for vehicles equipped with the
F.A.S.T.-key]

Features and controls 5-91

 [Link] 92 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Multi-information display
The ignition switch has been set to the
Momentary fuel consumption dis- Function setting screen
“ACC” or “OFF” position for about 4
hours or more. play
The “Display language”, “Temperature unit”,
[For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.- While driving, the momentary fuel consump- “Fuel consumption unit”, and “Average fuel
key] tion is shown with a bar graph. consumption and speed reset method” set-
The operation mode has been set to ACC When the momentary fuel consumption sur- tings can be modified as desired.
or OFF for about 4 hours or more. passes the average fuel consumption, the For further details, refer to “Changing the
5 momentary fuel consumption is displayed function settings (With ignition switch or
with a green bar graph. (Type 2) operation mode in ON)” on page 5-96.
NOTE
Be conscious of maintaining the momentary
 The average speed display and the average
fuel consumption display can be reset sepa- fuel consumption above the average fuel con- Interrupt display screen (With
sumption, it can help you drive with the better
rately in both auto reset mode and manual
fuel consumption.
ignition switch or operation
reset mode.
 “---” is displayed when the average fuel con- mode in ON)
sumption cannot be measured. NOTE N00556300180

 The initial (default) setting is “Auto reset  When the momentary fuel consumption can-
mode”. not be measured, a bar graph is not shown. Warning display
 Average fuel consumption may vary depend  The display setting can be changed to the
on the driving conditions (road conditions, preferred units {mpg(US), mpg(UK), When there is information to be announced,
how you drive, etc.) The actual fuel con- L/100km or km/L}. such as a system fault, a tone sounds and the
sumption may differ from the fuel consump- Refer to “Changing the function settings
tion displayed, so treat the fuel consumption
information screen is switched to the warning
(With ignition switch or operation mode in display screen.
displayed as just a rough guideline. ON)” on page 5-96.
 Disconnecting the battery cable will erase Refer to the warning list and take the neces-
 It is possible to cancel the green bar graph.
from memory the manual reset mode or auto sary measures. Refer to “Warning display list
Refer to “Changing the function settings
reset mode setting for the average fuel con- (With ignition switch or operation mode in
(With ignition switch or operation mode in
sumption display. ON)” on page 5-96. ON)” on page 5-107.
 The display setting can be changed to the When the cause of the warning display is
preferred units {mpg(US), mpg(UK), eliminated, the warning display goes out
L/100km or km/L}. automatically.
Refer to “Changing the function settings
(With ignition switch or operation mode in
ON)” on page 5-96.

5-92 Features and controls

[Link] 93 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Multi-information display

Returning to the display screen from NOTE Selector lever position display
before the warning display screen (if so equipped)
 Warning display screens with a “ ” or
Even if the cause of the warning display is “ ” mark displayed in the upper right of the
N00556400064

not eliminated, you can return to the screen screen can be switched. If you want to switch Shows the position of the selector lever.
that was displayed before the warning dis- the display, press the multi-information Refer to “Selector lever operation” on page
play. meter switch as follows.
5-49.
If you press the multi-information meter
“ ”: Press lightly. 5
switch, the display screen switches to the “ ”: Press for about 2 seconds or more. Outside temperature display
screen display from before the warning and screen
the warning (A) is displayed. N00556500065
Redisplay of a warning display
Shows the temperature outside the vehicle.
screen
Type 1
NOTE
When the warning is displayed, if you  The display setting can be changed to the
lightly press the multi-information meter preferred units (°F or °C).
switch a few times, the warning display Refer to “Changing the function settings
screen you switched from is redisplayed. (With ignition switch or operation mode in
Type 2 ON)” on page 5-96.
 Depending on factors such as the driving
Other interrupt displays
conditions, the displayed temperature may
vary from the actual outside temperature.
The operation status of each system is dis-
played on the information screen.
For further details, refer to the appropriate ECO mode indicator (if so
page in the warning display list.
Refer to “Other interrupt displays” on page equipped)
5-113. N00568700019

This indicator will be displayed when fuel-

efficient driving is achieved.

Features and controls 5-93

 [Link] 94 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Multi-information display

Fuel remaining display screen Fuel tank filler door mark NOTE
N00556600170  On hills or curves, the display may be incor-
Shows the amount of fuel remaining. The arrow (A) indicates that the fuel tank rect due to the movement of fuel in the tank.
filler door is located on the left side of the
vehicle. (Refer to “Filling the fuel tank” on
Type 1 Type 2
page 3-3.) Service reminder
5
N00556700214

Fuel remaining warning display Displays the approximate time until the next
recommended periodic inspection. “---” is
When the fuel level runs low, the information displayed when the inspection time has
screen switches to the interrupt display of the arrived.
fuel remaining warning display and the mark
(B) on the fuel remaining display flashes. If NOTE
the warning display appears, refuel as soon as  The service reminder time can be modified
possible. by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer,
CAUTION to adjust for severe usage, etc. Refer to
 Running out of gas could damage the cata- “Severe maintenance schedule” in your vehi-
Type 1 cle’s Warranty and Maintenance Manual. For
lytic converter. If the warning display
appears, refuel as soon as possible. further information, please contact your
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

NOTE Type 1
 It may take several seconds to stabilize the Type 2
display after refilling the tank.
 If fuel is added with the ignition switch or
operation mode in ON, the remaining fuel
display may incorrectly indicate the fuel Type 2
level.

5-94 Features and controls

[Link] 95 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Multi-information display
1. Shows the time until the next periodic 3. After your vehicle is inspected at an
Type 1
inspection. authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer, it
displays the time until the next periodic
NOTE inspection.
 Shows the distance in units of 100 miles (100
km) and the time in units of 1 month. To reset
Type 2
2. This informs you that a periodic inspec- The “---” display can be reset while the igni- 5
tion is due. Contact an authorized tion switch or the operation mode is in OFF.
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facil- When the display is reset, the time until the
ity of your choice to have the system next periodic inspection is displayed and the
checked. warning display is no longer displayed when
the ignition switch is switched from the
At that time, when the ignition switch is “OFF” position to the “ON” position or the
switched from the “OFF” position to the operation mode is changed from OFF to ON.
“ON” position or the operation mode is 2. Press and hold the multi-information
changed from OFF to ON, the warning 1. When you lightly press the multi-informa- meter switch (for about 2 seconds or
display is displayed for a few seconds on tion meter switch, the information screen
the information screen. more) to display “ ” and make it flash.
switches to the service reminder display
(If there is no operation for about 10 sec-
screen.
Type 1 onds with this indicator flashing, the dis-
play returns to the previous screen.)

3. With this indicator flashing, if you lightly

press the multi-information meter switch,
the screen switches from “---” to
Type 2 “CLEAR”. After that, the time until the
next periodic inspection is shown.

Features and controls 5-95

 [Link] 96 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Multi-information display

Type 1 NOTE CAUTION

 If you accidentally reset the display, consult  Always make sure that the warning display
an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for goes out before beginning to drive.
assistance.

Door ajar warning display Changing the function settings

Type 2 screen (With ignition switch or (With ignition switch or opera-
5
operation mode is in ON) tion mode is in ON)
N00555700132 N00556801212

Type 1 1. Park your vehicle in a safe place.

Fully apply the parking brake and move
the gearshift lever into the “N” (Neutral)
position (Manual transaxle) or the selector
lever into the “P” (PARK) position
CAUTION (CVT).
 The customer is responsible for making sure 2. When you lightly press the multi-informa-
that regular inspections and maintenance and Type 2 tion meter switch, the information screen
periodic inspections and maintenance are switches to the function setting screen.
performed. Refer to “Information screen (With igni-
Inspections and maintenance must be per- tion switch or operation mode in ON)” on
formed to prevent accidents and malfunc- page 5-89.
tions.
Type 1 Type 2
If any of the doors or the liftgate is not com-
NOTE pletely closed, this displays the open door or
 The “---” display cannot be reset while the liftgate.
ignition switch or the operation mode is in If the speed increases to about 5 mph (8
ON. km/h) or higher with a door ajar, a tone will
 When “---” is displayed, after a certain dis- sound 4 times to inform you that a door is
tance and a certain period of time, the dis- ajar.
play is reset and the time until the next
periodic inspection is displayed.

5-96 Features and controls

[Link] 97 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Multi-information display

CAUTION NOTE Changing the reset mode for aver-

 For safety, stop the vehicle before operating.  If no operations are made within about 15 age fuel consumption and average
While driving, even if you operate the multi- seconds of the menu screen being displayed, speed
information meter switch, the function set- the display returns to the function setting N00557000227
ting screen is not displayed. screen.
You can change the mode condition for the
4. Select the item to change on the menu average fuel consumption and average speed
3. Press and hold the multi-information
meter switch (for about 2 seconds or
screen and change to the desired setting.
For further details on the operation meth-
display to “Auto reset” or “Manual reset.”
5
more) to switch from the setting mode 1. Press and hold the multi-information
ods, refer to the following sections.
screen to the menu screen. meter switch (for about 2 seconds or
Refer to “Changing the reset mode for more) to switch from the setting mode
Type 1
average fuel consumption and average screen to the menu screen.
speed” on page 5-97. Refer to “Changing the function settings
Refer to “Changing the fuel consumption (With ignition switch or operation mode is
display unit” on page 5-98. in ON)” on page 5-96.
Refer to “Changing the temperature unit” 2. Lightly press the multi-information meter
Type 2 on page 5-99. switch to select “AVG” (average fuel con-
Refer to “Changing the display language” sumption and average speed setting).
on page 5-100. Type 1
Refer to “Operation sound setting” on
page 5-100.
Refer to “Changing the time until “REST
REMINDER” is displayed” on page
5-101.
Refer to “Changing the turn signal sound” Type 2
NOTE on page 5-101.
 To return the menu screen to the function set- Refer to “Changing the momentary fuel
ting screen, press and hold the multi-infor- consumption display (Type 2)” on page
mation meter switch (for about 2 seconds or 5-102.
more). Refer to “Returning to the factory set-
tings” on page 5-102.

Features and controls 5-97

 [Link] 98 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Multi-information display
3. Press and hold the multi-information
Auto reset mode Changing the fuel consumption
meter switch (for about 2 seconds or
more) to switch in sequence from A or 1 display unit
 When the average fuel consumption and
(Auto reset)  M, 2 or P (Manual reset) average speed are being displayed, if you
N00557100143

 A or 1 (Auto reset). hold down the multi-information meter The fuel consumption display unit can be
The setting is changed to the selected switch, these calculations will be reset to changed. The distance, speed, and amount
reset condition. zero. units are also changed to match the selected
fuel consumption unit.
5  When the engine switch or the operation
mode is in the following conditions, the
Manual reset mode 1. Press and hold the multi-information
average fuel consumption display and the
meter switch (for about 2 seconds or
 If you press and hold the multi-informa- average speed display will automatically
more) to change from the setting mode
tion meter switch when the average fuel reset.
screen to the menu screen.
consumption and average speed are dis-
[Except for vehicles equipped with the Refer to “Changing the function settings
played, these calculations will be reset to
F.A.S.T.-key] (With ignition switch or operation mode is
zero.
The ignition switch has been set to the in ON)” on page 5-96.
 When the following operation is per-
“ACC” or “OFF” position for about 4 2. Lightly press the multi-information meter
formed, the mode setting changes auto-
hours or more. switch to select “AVG UNIT” (fuel con-
matically from manual to auto.
sumption display unit setting).
[Except for vehicles equipped with the [For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-
Type 1
F.A.S.T.-key] key]
Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” posi- The operation mode has been in ACC or
tion from the “ACC” or “OFF” position. OFF for about 4 hours or more.

[For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-

key]
NOTE
 Disconnecting the battery cable will erase Type 2
Change the operation mode to ON from
from memory the manual reset mode or auto
ACC or OFF.
reset mode setting for the average speed dis-
play and average fuel consumption display.
 The initial (default) setting is “Auto reset
mode”.

5-98 Features and controls

[Link] 99 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Multi-information display
3. Press and hold the multi-information 1. Press and hold the multi-information
meter switch (for about 2 seconds or
NOTE meter switch (for about 2 seconds or
 The display units for the driving range, the
more) to display “AVG UNIT” (fuel con- more) to switch from the setting mode
average fuel consumption, the average speed
sumption display unit setting). screen to the menu screen.
and the momentary fuel consumption are
4. Lightly press the multi-information meter changed, but the units for the indicating nee- Refer to “Changing the function settings
switch to switch in sequence from km/L dle (speedometer), the odometer and the trip (With ignition switch or operation mode is
 L/100 km  mpg (US)  mpg (UK) odometer will remain unchanged. in ON)” on page 5-96.
 RETURN  km/L. 2. Lightly press the multi-information meter
 If the battery is disconnected, the memory of
the unit setting is erased and is automatically
5
switch to select “ ” (temperature unit
set to {mpg (US) or L/100 km}. setting).
Type 1 Type 2 Type 1
The distance and speed units are also changed
in the following combinations to match the
selected fuel consumption unit.

Distance Speed
Fuel
(driving (average
economy Type 2
range) speed)
mpg (US) mile (s) mph
mpg (UK) mile (s) mph
km / L km km / h
5. Press and hold the multi-information L / 100 km km km / h
meter switch (for about 2 seconds or
more) to change the setting to the selected 3. Press and hold the multi-information
unit. Changing the temperature unit
N00557200115
meter switch (for about 2 seconds or
more) to change in sequence from °F 
The temperature display unit can be switched. °C  °F.
The setting is changed to the selected tem-
perature unit.

Features and controls 5-99

 [Link] 100 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Multi-information display

NOTE Type 1 Operation sound setting

 If the battery is disconnected, the memory of N00557400117

the unit setting is erased and is automatically You can turn off the operation sounds of the
set to °F (°C). multi-information meter switch and rheostat
meter illumination button.

Changing the display language Type 2 1. Press and hold the multi-information
5 N00557300161 meter switch (for about 2 seconds or
The language of the multi-information dis- more) to switch from the setting mode
play can be changed. screen to the menu screen.
Refer to “Changing the function settings
1. Press and hold the multi-information (With ignition switch or operation mode is
meter switch (for about 2 seconds or in ON)” on page 5-96.
more) to change from the setting mode 2. Lightly press the multi-information meter
screen to the menu screen. 3. Press and hold the multi-information switch to select “ ” (operation sound
Refer to “Changing the function settings meter switch (for about 2 seconds or setting).
(With ignition switch or operation mode is more) to display “LANGUAGE” (lan-
in ON)” on page 5-96. guage setting). Type 1
2. Lightly press the multi-information meter 4. Lightly press the multi-information meter
switch to select “LANGUAGE” (lan- switch to select the desired language.
guage setting). 5. Press and hold the multi-information
meter switch (for about 2 seconds or
more) to change the setting to the selected
language. Type 2

NOTE
 If the battery is disconnected, the memory of
the language setting is erased and is automat-
ically set to ENGLISH.
 If “---” is selected in the language setting, a
warning message is not displayed when there
is a warning display or interrupt display.

5-100 Features and controls

[Link] 101 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Multi-information display
3. Press and hold the multi-information 2. Lightly press the multi-information meter 4. Lightly press the multi-information meter
meter switch (for about 2 seconds or switch to select “ALARM” (rest time set- switch to select the time until the display
more) to switch in sequence from ON ting). appears.
(operation sound on)  OFF (operation 5. Press and hold the multi-information
Type 1
sound off)  ON (operation sound on). meter switch (for about 2 seconds or
The setting is changed to the selected con- more) to change the setting to the selected
dition. time.

NOTE NOTE 5
 If the battery is disconnected, the memory of  If the battery is disconnected, the memory of
the operation sound setting is erased and is Type 2 the unit setting is erased and is automatically
automatically set to “ON” (operation sound set to the “OFF”.
on).  The drive time is reset when the ignition
 The operation sound setting only deactivates switch is in the “OFF” position or the opera-
the operation sound of the multi-information tion mode is in OFF.
meter switch and rheostat meter illumination
button. The warning display and other
sounds cannot be deactivated. Changing the turn signal sound
3. Press and hold the multi-information N00563500041

meter switch (for about 2 seconds or It is possible to change the turn signal sound.
Changing the time until “REST more) to display “ALARM” (rest time
REMINDER” is displayed setting). 1. Press and hold the multi-information
N00557500134 meter switch for about 2 seconds or more
The time until the display appears can be to switch from the setting mode screen to
changed. Type 1 Type 2 the menu screen.
Refer to “Changing the function settings
1. Press and hold the multi-information (With ignition switch or operation mode is
meter switch (for about 2 seconds or in ON)” on page 5-96.
more) to switch from the setting mode 2. Lightly press the multi-information meter
screen to the menu screen. switch to select . (changing the turn
Refer to “Changing the function settings
signal sound)
(With ignition switch or operation mode is
in ON)” on page 5-96.
Features and controls 5-101
 [Link] 102 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Multi-information display
1. Press and hold the multi-information
Type 1 Returning to the factory settings
meter switch for about 2 seconds or more
N00557600151
to switch from the setting mode screen to
the menu screen. All of the function settings can be returned to
Refer to “Changing the function settings their factory settings.
(With ignition switch or operation mode is
1. Press and hold the multi-information
in ON)” on page 5-96.
Type 2 meter switch (for about 2 seconds or
2. Lightly press the multi-information meter
5 more) to switch from the setting mode
switch to select . (changing the screen to the menu screen.
momentary fuel consumption display) Refer to “Changing the function settings
(With ignition switch or operation mode is
in ON)” on page 5-96.
2. Lightly press the multi-information meter
switch to select “RESET” (return to the
3. Press and hold the multi-information factory settings).
meter switch for about 2 seconds or more Type 1
to switch in sequence from 1 (turn signal
sound 1)  2 (turn signal sound 2)  1
(turn signal sound 1).
The setting changes to the selected turn-
signal sound.
3. Press and hold the multi-information
Type 2
meter switch for about 2 seconds or more
Changing the momentary fuel con- to switch in sequence from ON (with the
sumption display (Type 2) green bar graph)  OFF (without the
N00563600039 green bar graph)  ON (with the green
It is possible to change the bar graph setting bar graph).
of the momentary fuel consumption display. The setting changes to the selected bar
graph setting.

5-102 Features and controls

[Link] 103 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Indicator light, warning light, and information screen display list

3. Press and hold the multi-information
meter switch (for about 5 seconds or
NOTE NOTE
• Average fuel consumption and average • Operation sounds: ON (Operation sound
more), the buzzer sounds and all of the
speed reset mode: A (Auto reset) on)
function settings are returned to the fac-
• Fuel consumption display unit: mpg (US) • “REST REMINDER” display: OFF
tory settings.
or (L/100 km) • Turn signal sound: Turn signal sound 1
• Temperature unit: °F (Fahrenheit) or °C • Momentary fuel consumption with the
NOTE (Celsius) green bar graph (Type 2): ON
 The factory settings are as follows. • Display language: ENGLISH 5
• Cooperative language setting: A

Indicator light, warning light, and information screen display list

N00557700048

Indicator and warning light list

N00557800267

Type A Type B

Features and controls 5-103

 [Link] 104 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Indicator light, warning light, and information screen display list

1- Position indicator  P.5-116 8- Brake warning light  P.5-116 14- Active stability control (ASC) OFF
2- High beam indicator  P.5-116 9- Cruise control indicator (if so indicator (if so equipped)  P.5-69
3- Charging system warning light  equipped)  P.5-71 15- Active stability control (ASC) indicator
P.5-117 10- Seat belt reminder/warning light   P.5-69
4- Turn signal indicator/hazard warning P.4-15 16- Information screen display list 
light  P.5-115 11- Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) P.5-104
5- Front fog light indicator (if so warning light
 P.4-32
5 equipped)  P.5-116
12- ECO mode indicator (if so equipped)
6- Anti-lock braking system warning light
 P.5-65  P.5-116
7- Tire pressure monitoring system warn- 13- Engine malfunction indicator (“SER-
ing light  P.5-76 VICE ENGINE SOON” or “Check
engine light”)  P.5-116

Information screen display list

N00557900082

When there is information to be announced, such as light reminder, the tone sounds and the screen switches to the displays shown below. Refer to
the appropriate page and take the necessary measures.
When the cause of the warning display is eliminated, the warning display goes out automatically.
Refer to “Warning display list (With ignition switch or operation mode is in OFF)” on page 5-105.
Refer to “Warning display list (With ignition switch or operation mode is in ON)” on page 5-107.
Refer to “Other interrupt displays” on page 5-113.

NOTE
 In the following cases, a warning may be displayed on the information screen and the buzzer may sound for a few seconds, at times.
This is caused by the system picking up interference such as strong electromagnetic waves or noise, and is not a functional problem.
• An extremely strong electromagnetic wave is received from a source such as an illegal radio set, a spark from a wire, or a radar station.
• Abnormal voltage or a static electricity discharge is generated by the operation of your vehicle’s electronics (including after-market parts).

5-104 Features and controls

[Link] 105 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Indicator light, warning light, and information screen display list

NOTE
If the warning display has occurred a number of times, take your vehicle to an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice and
have the system checked.

Warning display list (With ignition switch or operation mode is in OFF)

N00558000224

Screen type 1 Screen type 2 Cause Do this (Reference) 5

 You have forgotten to remove the key from  Remove the key.
the ignition switch. Refer to “Key reminder system” on page
5-29.

 You have forgotten to turn off the lights. Refer to “Light auto-cutout function (head-
lights and other lights)” on page 5-121.

 The theft-alarm system is operating. Refer to “Theft-alarm system” on page 5-33.

 Immobilizer is registered. Refer to “Customer key programming (Except

for vehicles sold in Canada)” on page 5-6.
Refer to “Customer F.A.S.T.-key program-
ming (Except for vehicles sold in Canada)” on
page 5-23.

Features and controls 5-105

 [Link] 106 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Indicator light, warning light, and information screen display list

Screen type 1 Screen type 2 Cause Do this (Reference)
 There is a fault in the F. A. S. T. -key. Refer to “Free-hand Advanced Security Trans-
mitter (F.A.S.T.-key)” on page 5-11.

 There is a fault in the electronic immobi-  Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors

lizer. (Anti-theft starting system). dealer or a repair facility of your choice to
— have the system checked.

5-106 Features and controls

[Link] 107 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Indicator light, warning light, and information screen display list

Screen type 1 Screen type 2 Cause Do this (Reference)
 The F. A. S. T. -key is not detected.  Insert the F. A. S. T. -key into the key slot
in the glove compartment. Refer to “If the
— F. A. S. T. -key is not operating properly”
on page 5-21.

 You have forgotten to remove the F. A. S.  Remove the F. A. S. T. -key from the key
T. -key from the key slot in the glove com- slot in the glove compartment. 5
— partment.

 The engine switch is pressed to stop the  On vehicles with CVT, place the selector
engine and the selector lever is in a posi- lever in the “P” (PARK) position to put the
— tion other than the “P” (PARK) position. operation mode in OFF.

 There is a fault in the electrical system.  Park your vehicle in a safe place as soon as
possible and contact an authorized
— Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facil-
ity of your choice to have the system
checked.

Warning display list (With ignition switch or operation mode is in ON)

N00558101310

Screen type 1 Screen type 2 Cause Do this (Reference)

 There is a fault in the EPS.  Have the vehicle inspected by an autho-
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair
facility of your choice as soon as possible.
Refer to “Electric power steering system
(EPS)” on page 5-67.

Features and controls 5-107

 [Link] 108 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Indicator light, warning light, and information screen display list

Screen type 1 Screen type 2 Cause Do this (Reference)
 There is a fault in the F.A.S.T.-key. Refer to “Free-hand Advanced Security Trans-
mitter (F.A.S.T.-key)” on page 5-11.

 Immobilizer is registered. Refer to “Customer key programming (Except

for vehicles sold in Canada)” on page 5-6.
Refer to “Customer F.A.S.T.-key program-
ming (Except for vehicles sold in Canada)” on
page 5-23.

5-108 Features and controls

[Link] 109 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Indicator light, warning light, and information screen display list

Screen type 1 Screen type 2 Cause Do this (Reference)
 The brake fluid level is low.  Park the vehicle in a safe place and inspect
 There is a fault in the brake system. it.
 If the light still illuminates after the inspec-
tion, contact an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer or a repair facility of your
choice for assistance.
Refer to “Brake warning display” on page 5
5-117.
 There is a fault in the Anti-lock braking  Avoid sudden braking and high-speed driv-
system. ing, park the vehicle in a safe place, and
take corrective measures. Refer to “Anti-
lock braking system warning” on page
5-65.

 The tire pressure in one of the tires (except Refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System”
spare tire) is low. on page 5-76.

 There is a fault in the Tire Pressure Moni- Refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System”
toring System. on page 5-76.

 One of the doors or the liftgate is not com-  Close the door or liftgate.
pletely closed. Refer to “Door ajar warning display screen
The open door is displayed. (With ignition switch or operation mode is
in ON)” on page 5-96.

Features and controls 5-109

 [Link] 110 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Indicator light, warning light, and information screen display list

Screen type 1 Screen type 2 Cause Do this (Reference)
 The engine hood is open.  Close the engine hood.
Refer to “Engine hood” on page 9-3.

 There is a fault in the electronic immobi-  Put the operation mode in OFF, and then
5 lizer (Anti-theft starting system). start the engine again.
— If the warning is not cancelled, please con-
tact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer or a repair facility of your choice.
 The driver’s door is open when the opera-  Put the operation mode in OFF.
tion mode is in any mode other than OFF. Refer to “Changing the operation mode”
— on page 5-17.

 There is a fault in the electrical system.  Park your vehicle in a safe place as soon as
possible and contact an authorized
— Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facil-
ity of your choice to have the system
checked.
 The engine is overheated.  Park the vehicle in a safe place and take
corrective measures.
Refer to “Engine overheating” on page 8-4.

 The CVT fluid temperature is increased.  Park the vehicle in a safe place and take
corrective measures.
Refer to “Continuously variable transmis-
sion (CVT)” on page 5-49.

5-110 Features and controls

[Link] 111 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Indicator light, warning light, and information screen display list

Screen type 1 Screen type 2 Cause Do this (Reference)
 The seat belt is not fastened when the igni-  Wear your seat belt properly.
tion switch or operation mode is in ON. Refer to “Seat belt warning” on page 4-15.

 There is a fault in the fuel system.  Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors

dealer or a repair facility of your choice to 5
have the system checked.

 The vehicle is being driven with the park-  Release the parking brake. Refer to “Brake
ing brake still applied. warning display” on page 5-117.

 There is a fault in the engine oil circulation  Park your vehicle in a safe place as soon as
system. possible and contact an authorized
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facil-
ity of your choice to have the system
checked.
Refer to “Oil pressure warning display” on
page 5-119.
 There is a fault in the charging system.  Park your vehicle in a safe place as soon as
possible and contact an authorized
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facil-
ity of your choice for assistance.
Refer to “Charging system warning light”
on page 5-117.

Features and controls 5-111

 [Link] 112 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Indicator light, warning light, and information screen display list

Screen type 1 Screen type 2 Cause Do this (Reference)
 There is a fault in the SRS airbag or the  Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
pre-tensioner system. dealer or a repair facility of your choice to
have the system checked, immediately.
Refer to “SRS airbag/Pre-tensioner system
warning” on page 4-32.
 There is a fault in the Active stability con-  Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
5 trol (ASC). dealer or a repair facility of your choice to
have the system checked.
Refer to “Active stability control (ASC)”
on page 5-68.
 There is a fault in the Hill start assist.  Have the vehicle checked at an authorized
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facil-
ity of your choice.
Refer to “Hill start assist” on page 5-63.
 There is a fault in the electronically con-  Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
trolled 4WD system. dealer or a repair facility of your choice to
have the system checked.
Refer to “Electronically controlled 4WD
system” on page 5-56.
 There is a fault in the CVT.  Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer or a repair facility of your choice to
have the system checked.
Refer to “Continuously variable transmis-
sion (CVT)” on page 5-49.
 The electronically controlled 4WD system Refer to “Electronically controlled 4WD sys-
is hot. tem” on page 5-56.

5-112 Features and controls

[Link] 113 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Indicator light, warning light, and information screen display list

Screen type 1 Screen type 2 Cause Do this (Reference)
 The fuel is running low.  Refuel as soon as possible.
Refer to “Fuel remaining display screen”
on page 5-94.

 The outside temperature is 37 °F (3 °C) or  Be careful driving on frozen ground.

less.  The ground may be frozen even when this 5
warning is not displayed, so drive care-
fully.

Other interrupt displays

N00558200242

Screen type 1 Screen type 2 System operation status Reference

 When starting the engine, you pressed the  On vehicles with manual transaxle, place
engine switch without depressing the the gearshift lever in the “N” (Neutral)
clutch pedal (manual transaxle). position, fully depress the clutch pedal,
depress and hold the brake pedal with the
—
right foot, and then press the engine switch
to start the engine.
Refer to “Starting and stopping the engine”
on page 5-19.
 When starting the engine, the selector lever  On vehicles with CVT, place the selector
is in a position other than the “P” (PARK) lever in the “P” (PARK) position, depress
or the “N” (NEUTRAL) position, or you and hold the brake pedal with the right
— pressed the engine switch without depress- foot, and then press the engine switch to
ing the brake pedal (CVT). start the engine.
Refer to “Starting and stopping the engine”
on page 5-19.

Features and controls 5-113

 [Link] 114 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Indicator light, warning light, and information screen display list

The operation status of each system is displayed on the information screen. For further details, refer to the appropriate page for each system.

Screen type 1 Screen type 2 System operation status Reference

 When “2WD” drive mode is selected with Refer to “Electronically controlled 4WD sys-
the drive mode selector. tem” on page 5-56.

5
 When “4WD AUTO” mode is selected
with the drive mode selector.

 When “4WD LOCK” mode is selected

with the drive mode selector.

 When the Active stability control (ASC) is Refer to “Active stability control (ASC) ” on
operating. page 5-68.

5-114 Features and controls

[Link] 115 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Indicators
This informs you that a periodic inspection is due.

Screen type 1 Screen type 2 Do this

Have an inspection made by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. For further details, refer
to “Service reminder” on page 5-94.

5
The rest time can be set.

Screen type 1 Screen type 2 Do this

Park the vehicle in a safe place, turn off the engine, and take a rest.
Use this display as rough guide for taking rests during a long drive.
The interval from the start of your trip until this message is displayed can be set.
Refer to “Changing the function settings (With the ignition switch or operation mode is in
ON)” on page 5-96.
The display and buzzer alert the driver when the set time is reached. If you continue to drive
without having a rest, the buzzer sounds about every 5 minutes to encourage you to take a rest.
 In the following cases, the time driven is reset and the display returns to the previous dis-
play screen. After this, when the set time is reached again, the display and buzzer encour-
age you to take a rest.
• The buzzer sounds 3 times.
• The ignition switch is turned to the “OFF” position or the operation mode is put in OFF.
• The multi-information meter switch is held (for about 2 seconds or more).

signal lever is used.

Indicators Turn signal indicators/Hazard
N00519900127 warning lights Both arrows will flash when the hazard warn-
N00520000216 ing flasher switch is pressed.
The arrows will flash in time with the corre-
sponding exterior turn signals when the turn
Features and controls 5-115
 [Link] 116 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Warning lights

NOTE Warning lights CAUTION

 If the indicator flashes faster than usual or if N00520300147 • When the brake warning light does not go
the indicator stays on without flashing, check out even when the parking brake is
for a malfunctioning turn signal light bulb or released.
turn signal connection.
Brake warning light • When the brake warning light stays on
N00520400470
while driving.
This light comes on when the ignition switch • If the above occurs, avoid sudden braking
5 High beam indicator is turned to the “ON” position (engine off) or and high-speed driving. Park the vehicle in
N00520100086
the operation mode is put in ON. a safe place, and contact an authorized
When the engine is started, the light should Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility
A blue light comes on when the headlights of your choice as soon as possible.
go off a few seconds later. A warning is also
are on high beam.  The vehicle should be brought to a halt in the
displayed in the multi-information display.
The warning light also illuminates after start- following manner when brake performance
is deteriorated.
Front fog light indicator (if so ing the engine under the following condi-
• Confirm that the vehicle slows down when
equipped) tions.
you press down on the brake pedal harder
N00520200175 than usual. In some cases, the brake pedal
 When the parking brake is still applied.
may go all the way to the floor.
This indicator comes on while the front fog  When the brake fluid level is low.
• Should the brakes fail, use engine braking
lights are on.  When the brake system circuit is not
to reduce your speed and slowly apply the
working properly. parking brake.
Depress the brake pedal to illuminate the
Position indicator Before driving, be sure that the parking brake stop lights to alert the vehicles behind you.
N00551300026 is fully released and brake warning light is
This indicator light illuminates while the off.
position lights are on. Engine malfunction indicator
CAUTION (“SERVICE ENGINE SOON”
ECO mode indicator (if so  If the brake warning light and the Anti-lock or “Check engine light”)
braking system warning light are illuminated N00520500804
equipped)
at the same time, the braking force distribu- This indicator is a part of the onboard diag-
N00568800023
tion function will not operate, so the vehicle
nostic (OBD) system which monitors the
may be destabilized during sudden braking
This indicator will be displayed when fuel- emissions, engine control system or continu-
under the following conditions.
efficient driving is achieved. ously variable transmission (CVT) control

5-116 Features and controls

[Link] 117 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Information screen display

system. If a problem is detected in one of tion switch is turned to the “ON” position
these systems, this indicator illuminates or
CAUTION (engine off) or the operation mode is put in
 If the engine malfunction indicator comes on
flashes. When the ignition switch is turned to ON. A warning is also displayed in the multi-
while the engine is running, avoid driving at
the “ON” position or the operation mode is information display. When the engine is
high speeds.
put in ON, this indicator normally comes on During vehicle operation with the indicator started, the light should go out. Check to
and goes off after the engine has started. on, the vehicle may not accelerate when you make sure that the light has gone out before
depress the accelerator pedal. driving.
This indicator will come on if the fuel tank
filler cap is not properly tightened. If this
When the vehicle is stationary with the indi-
cator on, you must depress the brake pedal
5
indicator comes on and stays on after refuel-
CAUTION
more firmly than usual since the engine
 If the warning light stays on while the engine
ing, stop the engine and check that the cap is idling speed is higher than usual and a vehi-
is running, park your vehicle in a safe place
properly tightened. (Turn the cap clockwise cle with a CVT has a stronger tendency to
as soon as possible and contact an authorized
until you hear clicking sounds.) creep forward.
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility
If this indicator does not go off after several of your choice to have the system checked.
seconds or lights up while driving, have the
system checked as soon as possible at an NOTE
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a  Do not disconnect the battery cable when the
repair facility of your choice. engine malfunction indicator (“SERVICE Information screen display
ENGINE SOON” or “Check engine light”) is N00558300038

on.
CAUTION The engine electronic control module stores
Brake warning display
 Driving for a long time with the engine mal- critical OBD information (especially exhaust
N00558400143
function indicator on may cause more dam- emission data), which may be lost if the bat-
age to the emission control system. This tery cable is disconnected while the engine Type 1
could also affect fuel economy and drivabil- malfunction indicator is on. This will make it
ity. difficult to diagnose the cause of future prob-
 If this indicator does not come on when the lems.
ignition switch is turned to the “ON” posi-
tion or the operation mode is put in ON, have
the system checked at an authorized Charging system warning light
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility
N00520600300
of your choice.
This light comes on in the event of a malfunc-
tion in the charging system or when the igni-

Features and controls 5-117

 [Link] 118 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Information screen display

Type 2 When the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position or the operation mode is put in
CAUTION
• Should the brakes fail, use engine braking
ON, if the brake fluid is low, this warning is
to reduce your speed and slowly apply the
displayed.
parking brake.
The warning light in the instrument cluster Depress the brake pedal to illuminate the
also illuminates. stop lights to alert the vehicles behind you.
This warning is displayed if the vehicle is
5 being driven with the parking brake still CAUTION Charging system warning dis-
applied. The warning light in the instrument  If this warning stays on and does not go out
while driving, there is a danger of ineffective play
cluster only comes on when the parking brake
braking. If this happens, park the vehicle in a N00558600103
is applied. Type 1
safe place, and contact an authorized
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility
CAUTION of your choice.
 If a vehicle is driven without releasing the  If the brake warning display, brake warning
parking brake, the brakes will overheat, light, and the Anti-lock braking system
resulting in ineffective braking and possible warning light are illuminated at the same
brake failure. time, the braking force distribution function
If this warning is displayed, release the park- will not operate, so the vehicle may be desta- Type 2
ing brake. bilized during sudden braking. Avoid sudden
braking and high-speed driving. Park the
Type 1 vehicle in a safe place, and contact an autho-
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair
facility of your choice.
 The vehicle should be brought to a halt in the
following manner when brake performance If there is a fault in the charging system, the
is deteriorated. warning display warning is displayed on the
• Confirm that the vehicle slows down when information screen in the multi-information
Type 2 you press down on the brake pedal harder display. The warning light in the instrument
than usual. In some cases, the brake pedal
cluster also illuminates.
may go all the way to the floor.

5-118 Features and controls

[Link] 119 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Combination headlights and dimmer switch

CAUTION CAUTION NOTE

 If warnings are displayed while the engine is  If the vehicle is driven while the engine oil is  When it rains, or when the vehicle has been
running, park your vehicle in a safe place as low, or the oil level is normal but the warn- washed, the inside of the lens sometimes
soon as possible and contact an authorized ing is displayed, the engine may overheat becomes foggy. This is the same as when
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility and damage may result. window glass mists up on a humid day, and
of your choice to have the system checked.  If the warning is displayed while the engine does not indicate a problem. When the light
is running, park your vehicle in a safe place is switched on, the heat will dry out the fog.
as soon as possible and check the engine oil
level.
However, if water collects inside the light,
have it checked by an authorized Mitsubishi
5
Oil pressure warning display Motors dealer or a repair facility of your
 If this warning display comes on when the
N00558700090
engine oil level is proper, have your vehicle choice.
Type 1
checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer or a repair facility of your choice. Type 1

Rotate the switch to operate the lights.

NOTE
 The oil pressure warning display does not
Type 2 show the amount of oil. The oil level must be
checked using the dipstick.

Combination headlights and

dimmer switch
If the engine oil pressure drops while the N00522501821

engine is running, the warning display is dis-

played on the information screen in the multi- Headlights
information display.
The combinations of switch operations and
NOTE illuminated lights differ in accordance with
 Do not leave the headlights and other lights the following conditions.
on for a long period of time when the engine
is not running. The battery will run down.

Features and controls 5-119

 [Link] 120 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Combination headlights and dimmer switch

Except for vehicles equipped with day- NOTE

time running lights  Once the daytime running light come on,
they do not go out until the ignition switch is
OFF All lights off turned to the “OFF” or “ACC” position or
the operation mode is changed to OFF or
Parking, tail, front and rear side-
ACC.
marker lights, license plate and
instrument panel lights on
5 Headlights and other lights on
[When the engine is not running, or when the
engine is running but the parking brake is not
released]
Vehicles equipped with daytime running The combinations of switch operations and
The engine starts when the lights are off.
lights illuminated lights differ in accordance with
OFF All lights off the following conditions.
[When the engine is started, and the parking
brake is released] Parking, tail, front and rear side- Except for vehicles equipped with day-
marker lights, license plate and time running lights
The daytime running lights illumi- instrument panel lights on
OFF
nated OFF All lights off
Headlights and other lights on
The daytime running lights illumi- Headlights and other lights turn on
nated AUTO and off automatically in accordance
Tail, front and rear side-marker Type 2 with outside light level.
lights, license plate and instrument
Parking, tail, front and rear side-
panel lights on Rotate the switch to operate the lights. marker lights, license plate and
Headlights and other lights on instrument panel lights on
Headlights and other lights on

5-120 Features and controls

[Link] 121 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Combination headlights and dimmer switch

[When the engine is not running, or when the
Vehicles equipped with daytime running
engine is running but the parking brake is not
NOTE
lights  Do not cover the sensor (A) for the automatic
released]
on/off control by affixing a sticker or label to
[When the engine is started, and the parking the windshield.
The engine starts when the lights are off.
brake is released]

The daytime running lights illumi- OFF All lights off

OFF
nated Headlights and other lights turn on
AUTO and off automatically in accordance
5
The daytime running lights illumi-
nated (when it is light outside the with outside light level.
vehicle) Parking, tail, front and rear side-
AUTO
Headlights and other lights turn on marker lights, license plate and
and off automatically in accordance instrument panel lights on  If the lights do not turn on or off with the
with outside light level. Headlights and other lights on switch in the “AUTO” position, manually
operate the switch. Have the system checked
The daytime running lights illumi-
by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or
nated a repair facility of your choice.
Tail, front and rear side-marker NOTE
lights, license plate and instrument  The sensitivity of the automatic on/off con-
panel lights on trol can be adjusted. Light auto-cutout function
Headlights and other lights on
For further information, please contact your (headlights and other lights)
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a N00532601593
repair facility of your choice.
 If the following operation is performed
NOTE with the combination headlights and dim-
 Once the daytime running light come on, mer switch in the “ ” or “ ” position,
they do not go out until the ignition switch is the lights automatically turn off.
turned to the “OFF” or “ACC” position or
the operation mode is changed to OFF or [Except for vehicles equipped with the
ACC. F.A.S.T.-key]
The ignition switch is turned to the “OFF”
or “ACC” position or the key is removed
from the ignition switch and the driver’s
door is opened.
Features and controls 5-121
 [Link] 122 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Combination headlights and dimmer switch

[For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.- [Except for vehicles equipped with the
key] F.A.S.T.-key]
NOTE
 When the engine is started using the key, if
The operation mode is changed to OFF or The ignition switch is turned to the “OFF”
the driver’s door is opened and the key is
ACC and the driver’s door is opened. or “ACC” position or the key is removed
removed, the headlight reminder buzzer
from the ignition switch and the driver’s intermittently emits a high-pitched sound. If
When using a key to start the engine door is not opened. the key is still in the ignition switch the key
• If the driver’s door is opened after the reminder buzzer intermittently emits a low-
key is removed from the ignition switch, [For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-
5 a high-pitched constant tone will sound key]
pitched sound.
The buzzer stops when the driver’s door is
to remind you to turn off the lights. The operation mode is changed to OFF or closed. (A warning is also displayed in the
• If the driver’s door is opened with the ACC and the driver’s door is not opened. multi-information display.)
key in the ignition switch, a low-pitched  When the engine is started using the
beep will sound to remind you to remove F.A.S.T.-key, if the driver’s door is opened
NOTE and the operation mode is put in OFF, the
the key.  The light auto-cutout function can be deacti- headlight reminder buzzer intermittently
vated. emits a high-pitched sound. If the operation
When using the F.A.S.T.-key to start See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors mode is in any mode other than OFF, the
the engine dealer for details. operation mode on reminder buzzer intermit-
• If the operation mode is put in OFF and tently emits a low-pitched sound.
the driver’s door is opened, a high- The buzzer stops when the driver’s door is
pitched constant buzzer will sound to When you want to keep the lights closed. (A warning is also displayed in the
remind you to turn off the lights. multi-information display.)
on:
• If the operation mode is changed to any
mode other than OFF and the driver’s
If the combination headlights and dimmer
door is opened, a low-pitched constant Headlight reminder buzzer
buzzer will sound to remind you to put switch is turned to the “ ” or “ ” posi- N00549800226
the operation mode in OFF. tion again after the engine is turned off, the
about 3-minute auto-cutout function [When using a key to start the engine]
 If the following operation is performed described above will not work. The lights (the If the driver’s door is opened with the key in
with the combination headlights and dim- parking lights, tail lights and license plate the “OFF” or “ACC” position or removed
lights) will stay on and will not turn off auto- from the ignition switch while the lights are
mer switch in the “ ” or “ ” position,
matically. on, the tone will sound to remind you to turn
the lights automatically turn off after
off the lights.
about 3 minutes.

5-122 Features and controls

[Link] 123 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Combination headlights and dimmer switch

[When using the F.A.S.T.-key to start the
engine]
Welcome light
N00563201120
If the driver’s door is opened with the opera-
tion mode is put in OFF or ACC, or if the This function turns on the front side-marker
operation mode is changed to OFF while the and parking lights for about 30 seconds after
lights are on, the tone will sound to remind the UNLOCK button (A) on the remote con-
you to turn off the lights. trol transmitter is pressed when the combina-
tion headlights and dimmer switch is in the
In either case, the lights will turn off automat- “OFF” or “AUTO” position (for vehicles 5
ically and so will the tone. Or you can turn equipped with the automatic light control).
the light switch to the “OFF” position to stop On vehicles equipped with the automatic light
the tone. control, the welcome light function will oper-
ate only when it is dark outside the vehicle.
Headlight flasher
Dimmer (high/low beam N00550000185

change) You can flash the high beams by pulling the

N00549900142 lever gently toward you (2). The lights will
To change the headlights from high beam to go back to normal when you let go. While the
low beam and vice versa, pull the turn signal high beam is on, you will see a blue light on
lever to (1). Switch the headlights to low the instrument panel.
beam as a courtesy whenever there are
oncoming vehicles, or when there is traffic NOTE
moving ahead of you. An illuminated blue  You can flash the high beams by pulling the
light in the instrument cluster indicates when lever toward you, even if the light switch is
the headlights are on high beam. off.
 If you turn the lights off with the head lights NOTE
set to high-beam illumination, the headlights
 While the welcome light function is operat-
are automatically returned to their low-beam
ing, perform one of the following operations
setting when the light switch is next turned
to cancel the function.
to the “ ” position.

Features and controls 5-123

 [Link] 124 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Combination headlights and dimmer switch

1. Turn the combination headlights and dim- 4. The headlights will come on in the low
NOTE mer switch to the “OFF” or “AUTO” beam setting for about 30 seconds. After
• Push the LOCK button (B) on the remote
position (for vehicles equipped with the the headlights go off, the headlights can
control transmitter.
automatic light control). be turned on again in the low beam setting
2. Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF” for about 30 seconds by pulling the turn
position or put the operation mode in signal lever toward you within 60 seconds
OFF. Also, if a key was used to start the of turning the ignition switch to the
engine, remove the key from the ignition “OFF” position or putting the operation
5 switch. mode in OFF. To turn on the headlights
3. Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition again after 60 seconds of turning the igni-
switch to the “OFF” position or putting tion switch to the “OFF” position or put-
the operation mode in OFF, pull the turn ting the operation mode in OFF, repeat the
• Turn the combination headlights and dim- signal lever toward you. process from step 1.
mer switch to the “ ” or “ ” position.
• Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” posi-
tion or put the operation mode in ON. NOTE
 It is possible to modify functions as follows:  While the coming home light function is
• The headlights can be set to come on in the operating, perform one of the following
low beam setting. operations to cancel the function.
• The welcome light function can be deacti- • Pull the turn signal lever toward you.
vated. • Turn the combination headlights and dim-
For details, consult a Mitsubishi Motors mer switch to the “ ” or “ ” position
dealer. or put the operation mode in ON.
• Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” posi-
tion or put the operation mode in ON.
Coming home light  It is possible to modify functions as follows:
N00547301123
• The time that the headlights remain on can
This function turns on the headlights in the be changed.
low beam setting for about 30 seconds after • The coming home light function can be
the ignition switch is turned to the “OFF” deactivated.
position or the operation mode is put in OFF. For details, consult a Mitsubishi Motors
dealer.

5-124 Features and controls

[Link] 125 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Headlight leveling switch (if so equipped)

indicator light in the instrument cluster will
Headlight leveling switch (if WARNING flash three times.
 To avoid distraction while driving, always
so equipped)
perform headlight adjustments before
N00537100105
vehicle operation.
The direction of the headlight beam (the
direction in which the light shines) alters
according to the number of people and the NOTE
load in the vehicle. Lower the headlight angle  Start adjusting when the knob is at the “0” 5
if it is too high due to the number of people position (when the beam is at its highest).
and/or the load in the vehicle so that the head-  Keep the knob in the “0” position except
when using the knob to lower the headlight
lights’ glare does not distract the drivers of
beam angle.
approaching vehicles. First set the light
 Always return the knob to the “0” position
switch to the “ ” position, then turn the when the load is removed and the people
headlight leveling switch knob to lower the have left the vehicle.
beam. The greater the number on the head-
NOTE
light leveling switch knob, the lower the  A light in the instrument panel flashes to
show when the front and rear turn signal
beam will point. Turn signal lever lights are working properly.
Set the switch to the appropriate position so If this light flashes faster than usual, check
N00522601532
that the headlight beam is level with the road. for a burned out turn signal light bulb or mal-
When changing lanes, or to making a gradual
functioning connection in the signal.
turn, hold the lever in the “lane change” posi-
If the panel light does not come on when the
tion (1). It will return to the neutral position lever is moved, check for a blown fuse or a
when you let go. Use the full position (2) burned out bulb in the panel.
when making a normal turn. The lever will Have the system inspected by your autho-
return to the neutral position when the turn is rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair
complete. There may be times when the lever facility of your choice.
does not return to the neutral position. This  It is possible to modify functions as follows:
usually happens when the steering wheel is • Deactivate the turn signal light 3-flash
turned only slightly. You can easily return the function for lane changes.
lever by hand.
Also, when you move the lever to (1) slightly
then release it, the turn signal lights and the

Features and controls 5-125

 [Link] 126 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Hazard warning flasher switch

NOTE NOTE NOTE

• Adjust the time required to operate the  If the flashers are used for several hours, the  If the headlights are switched to high beam,
lever for the 3-flash function. battery will run down. This could make it the front fog lights will go out; they will illu-
See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors difficult or impossible to restart your vehicle. minate again when the headlights are
dealer for details. switched back to low beam.
 If the light switch is rotated to the “OFF” or

Hazard warning flasher Front fog light switch (if so “ ” position while the front fog lights are
5 illuminated, they will automatically turn off.
switch equipped) They can be turned back on again by rotating
N00522700275 N00522800393 the combination headlights and dimmer
switch back to “ ” position, and turning
The front fog lights illuminate only when the the knob in the direction of the “ON” posi-
headlights are on low beam. tion.
Turning the knob in the direction of the “ON”  Do not use fog lights except in conditions of
position turns on the front fog lights as well fog, otherwise excessive light glare may
as the indicator in the instrument cluster. To temporarily blind oncoming vehicle drivers.
turn them off, turn the knob in the direction of
the “OFF” position.
The knob will return to the neutral position Wiper and washer switch
when it is released.
N00523001719

If you press the flasher switch, the front and CAUTION

rear turn signals will flash intermittently, and  If the washer is used in cold weather, the
so will the hazard warning lights. This is an washer fluid sprayed against the glass may
emergency warning system and should not be freeze, which may hinder visibility. Warm
used when the vehicle is in motion, except for the glass with the defroster before using the
emergencies. washer.
If you need to leave your vehicle, the flashers
will keep working after the ignition switch is
removed or the operation mode is put in OFF.

5-126 Features and controls

[Link] 127 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Wiper and washer switch

Windshield wipers

NOTE
 To ensure a clear rearward view, the rear
window wiper will automatically perform
several continuous operations if the gearshift
lever or the selector lever is put in the “R”
position while the windshield wipers are
5
operating.
Refer to “Rear window wiper and washer”
on page 5-130. MIST- Misting function 1- Fast
The wipers will operate once. 2- Slow
OFF- Off
Except for vehicle with rain sensor INT- Intermittent (Speed sensitive)
LO- Slow NOTE
HI- Fast  The speed-sensitive-operation function of
The windshield wiper and washer can be the windshield wipers can be deactivated.
operated with the ignition switch or the oper- For further information, please contact your
ation mode is in ON or ACC. To adjust intermittent intervals authorized MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer
If the blades are frozen to the windshield, do or a repair facility of your choice.
not operate the wipers until the ice has melted With the lever in the “INT” (speed sensitive
and the blades are freed, otherwise the wiper intermittent operation) position, the intermit- Misting function
motor may be damaged. tent intervals can be adjusted by turning the
knob (A). The misting function can be used when the
ignition switch or the operation mode is in
ON or ACC.
The wipers will operate once if the wiper
lever is raised to the “MIST” position and
released. This operation is useful when it is
drizzling, etc. The wipers will continue to
operate while the lever is held in the “MIST”
position.

Features and controls 5-127

 [Link] 128 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Wiper and washer switch

Wiper operation under these conditions can
scratch the windshield and damage the wip-
ers.

MIST- Misting function

The wipers will operate once.
Vehicle with rain sensor OFF- Off
INT- Auto-wiper control
The windshield wipers can be operated with Rain sensor
the ignition switch or the operation mode is in The wipers will automatically oper- CAUTION
ON or ACC. ate depending on the degree of wet-  With the ignition switch or the operation
If the blades are frozen to the windshield or ness on the windshield. mode in ON and the lever in the “AUTO”
LO- Slow position, the wipers may automatically oper-
rear window, do not operate the wipers until
HI- Fast ate in the situations described below.
the ice has melted and the blades are freed,
• When cleaning the outside surface of the
otherwise the wiper motor may be damaged.
windshield, if you touch the rain sensor.
Rain sensor (if so equipped) • When cleaning the outside surface of the
windshield, if you wipe with a cloth the rain
Can only be used when the ignition switch or sensor.
the operation mode is in ON. • When using an automatic car wash.
If the lever is put in the “AUTO” position, the • A physical shock is applied to the wind-
rain sensor (A) will detect the extent of rain shield.
(or snow, other moisture, dust, etc.) and the • A physical shock is applied to the rain sen-
wipers will operate automatically. sor.
Keep the lever in the “OFF” position if the
windshield is dirty and the weather is dry.

5-128 Features and controls

[Link] 129 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Wiper and washer switch

CAUTION NOTE
If your hands get trapped, you could suffer  The wipers may automatically operate when
injuries or the wipers could malfunction. Be things such as insects or foreign objects are
sure to turn the ignition switch to the “OFF” affixed to the windshield on top of the rain
position or put the operation mode in OFF, or sensor or when the windshield is frozen.
move the lever to the “OFF” position to Objects affixed to the windshield will stop
deactivate the rain sensor. the wipers when the wipers cannot remove
them. To operate the wipers again, move the
lever to the “LO” or “HI” position.
5
NOTE Also, the wipers may operate automatically
 To protect the rubber parts of the wipers, this due to strong direct sunlight or electromag-
netic wave. To stop the wipers, move the “+”- Higher sensitivity to rain
operation of the wipers does not take place
when the vehicle is stationary and the ambi- lever to the “OFF” position. “-”- Lower sensitivity to rain
ent temperature is about 32 °F (0 °C) or  Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
lower, even if the lever is put in the “AUTO” dealer or a repair facility of your choice
position. when replacing the windshield glass. NOTE
 Do not cover the sensor by affixing a sticker  Automatic wiper operation (rain sensitive)
or label to the windshield. Also, do not put To adjust the sensitivity of the rain sensor can be changed to intermittent operation,
any water-repellent coating on the wind- either vehicle speed sensitive or not vehicle
shield. The rain sensor would not be able to With the lever in the “AUTO” (rain sensor) speed sensitive.
detect the extent of rain, and the wipers position, it is possible to adjust the sensitivity For further information, please contact your
might stop working normally. of the rain sensor by turning the knob (B). authorized MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer
 In the following cases, the rain sensor may or a repair facility of your choice.
be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle checked
at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or Misting function
a repair facility of your choice.
• When the wipers operate at a constant inter- Move the lever in the direction of the arrow
val despite changes in the extent of rain. and release, to operate the wipers once.
• When the wipers do not operate even Use this function when you are driving in
though it is raining. mist or drizzle.
The wipers will operate once if the lever is
raised to the “MIST” position and released
when the ignition switch or the operation
mode is in ON or ACC. The wipers will con-
Features and controls 5-129
 [Link] 130 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Wiper and washer switch

tinue to operate while the lever is held in the
“MIST” position.
Windshield washer NOTE
N00504601312 • Intelligent washer can be deactivated.
The windshield washer can be operated with • The wipers can be set to operate again after
the ignition switch or the operation mode is in about 6 seconds.
ON or ACC. For details, consult a Mitsubishi Motors
dealer.
The washer fluid will be sprayed onto the
windshield by pulling the lever toward you.
5 When the wipers are not in operation or in Rear window wiper and washer
intermittent operation, by pulling the lever N00523201421

toward you, the wipers will operate several The rear window wiper and washer can be
times while the washer fluid is being sprayed. operated when the ignition switch or the
Also, by releasing the lever soon after pulling operation mode is in ON or ACC.
it toward you, the washer fluid will be
The wipers will operate once if the lever is sprayed several times while the wipers are Turn the knob to operate the rear window
moved to the “AUTO” position and the knob operating several times. (Intelligent washer) wiper.
(C) is turned in the “+” direction when the Intelligent washer will stop operating with
ignition switch or the operation mode is in any operation of the lever.
ON.

OFF- Off
INT- The wiper operates continuously for
several seconds then operates inter-
NOTE mittently at intervals of about 8 sec-
onds.
 It is possible to modify functions as follows:

5-130 Features and controls

[Link] 131 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Electric rear window defogger switch

- Washer fluid will be sprayed onto the
rear window glass while the knob is
NOTE NOTE
 The wiper intermittent operation time can be  If the wipers become blocked by ice or other
turned fully in either direction.
adjusted. deposits on the glass, the motor may still
When the washer fluid is sprayed, the See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors burn out even if the wiper switch is OFF. If
wiper will automatically operate 2 or dealer for details. deposits form on the windshield, park your
3 times.  The washer fluid reservoir is located in the vehicle in a safe place, turn off the engine,
engine compartment. and clean the glass so that the wipers can
NOTE Check the fluid level regularly and refill if
necessary. (Refer to “Washer fluid” on page
operate smoothly.
 Avoid using the washer for more than 20 sec-
5
 The rear window wiper will automatically
perform several continuous operations if the 9-11.) onds at a time. Do not operate the washer
gearshift lever or the selector lever is put in when the washer fluid reservoir is empty or
the “R” position while the windshield wipers the pump may fail.
Precautions to observe when  During cold weather, add a recommended
or the rear window wiper is operating.(auto-
matic operation mode) using wipers and washers washer solution that will not freeze in the
After the automatic operation, the rear win- N00523500195 washer fluid reservoir. Otherwise the washer
dow wiper will stop operating if the knob is may not work or may be damaged.
in the “OFF” position. If the knob is in the CAUTION  Replace the wiper blades when they are
“INT” position, the rear window wiper will  If the washer is used in cold weather, the worn. Use the proper size replacement
return to the intermittent operation. washer fluid sprayed onto the glass might blades. For further information, please con-
It is possible to set the rear window wiper to freeze, blocking your view. Heat the glass tact your authorized Mitsubishi Motors
perform the automatic operation only if the with the defroster before using the washer. dealer.
gearshift lever or the selector lever is put in
the “R” position while the rear window
Electric rear window defog-
wiper is operating with the knob in the NOTE
“INT” position.
 Do not use the wipers when the windshield is ger switch
See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dry. This could scratch the glass and wear the N00523700373
dealer for details.
wiper blades prematurely. The rear window defogger can be used when
 If the knob is in the “OFF” position, turn the
 Before using the wipers in cold weather, the engine is running.
knob to the “INT” position twice quickly to
check to be sure that the wiper blades are not The indicator light (A) will come on when
operate the rear window wiper continuously.
frozen to the windshield or rear window. you press the electric rear window defogger
(continuous operation mode)
Using the wipers while the blades are frozen
Turn the knob to the “OFF” position to stop switch. Electric current will flow through the
could cause the wiper motor to burn out.
the rear window wiper continuous operation. heating wires on the rear window to help
clear away moisture or frost.

Features and controls 5-131

 [Link] 132 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Horn switch

CAUTION Link System (if so equipped)

 Do not place stickers, tape, or other items N00563701082
that are attached with adhesive over the grid
wires on the rear window. The Link System takes overall control of the
 When cleaning the inside rear window, use a devices connected via the USB input terminal
soft cloth and wipe lightly over the grid or the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface allowing the
wires. connected devices to be operated by using the
5 switches in the vehicle or voice commands.
See the following section for details on how
NOTE to operate.
 As your vehicle is equipped with heated mir-
After about 20 minutes of operation, the sys- rors, mist can also be removed from the out-
Refer to “Bluetooth® 2.0 interface” on page
tem will shut off automatically. side rearview mirrors when the rear window
defogger switch is pressed. (Refer to “Door 5-133.
To switch the defogger OFF before 20 min-
mirror heater” on page 5-43.) Refer to “USB input terminal” on page 5-153.
utes have passed, press the switch again. The
Refer to “Listen to Audio Files on a USB
indicator light will go out and the defogger
Device” on page 7-45.
will turn off.
Refer to “Listen to Bluetooth Audio” on page
If you need the defogger for more than 20 Horn switch 7-48.
minutes, press the switch again. This will add N00523801209

20 more minutes. To honk the horn, press around the “ ” mark Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of
on the steering wheel. BLUETOOTH SIG, INC.
CAUTION
 The rear window defogger is not designed to
melt snow. Remove any snow manually
Link System End User License
before using the rear window defogger. Agreement
 Use the rear window defogger only after the N00563800015

engine has started and is running. Be sure to You have acquired a device that includes soft-
turn the defogger switch off immediately
ware licensed by Mitsubishi Motors Corpora-
after the window is clear to save on battery
tion from JOHNSON CONTROLS Inc (the
power.
automotive experience business unit), and
their subsequent 3rd party suppliers. For a
complete list of these 3rd party products and

5-132 Features and controls

[Link] 133 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped)

their end user license agreements, please go Bluetooth® device” on page 5-139.
to the following website.
NOTE
 Hands-free calls will not be possible if your
[Link] Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of phone does not have service available.
[Link] BLUETOOTH SIG, INC.
 If you place the Bluetooth® device in the
luggage compartment, you may not be able
Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if WARNING to use the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.
so equipped)  Although the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface  Some Bluetooth® devices are not compatible
N00563901273
allows you to make hands-free calls, if you with the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.
5
choose to use the cellular phone while
 You can confirm the Link System software
The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface allows for mak- driving, you must not allow yourself to be
version by pressing the HANG-UP button 3
ing/receiving hands-free calls in the vehicle distracted from the safe operation of your
times (press and hold 2 times and then press
using a Bluetooth® compatible cellular phone vehicle. Anything, including cellular
briefly) within 10 seconds.
phone usage, that distracts you from the
based on the wireless communication tech-  For detail of the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface,
safe operation of your vehicle increases
nology commonly known as Bluetooth®. It your risk of an accident. refer to the following web site:
also allows the user to play music, saved in a  Refer to and comply with all state and [For vehicles sold in U.S.A.]
You can see to access the MITSUBISHI
Bluetooth® music player, from the vehicle’s local laws in your area regarding cellular
phone usage while driving. MOTORS NORTH AMERICA web site.
speakers. [For vehicles sold in Canada and MEXICO]
The system is equipped with a voice recogni- You can see to access via the MITSUBISHI
tion function, which allows you to make MOTORS web site.
hands-free calls with simple switch opera- NOTE Please read and agree to the “Warning about
tions and voice command operations using a  If the ignition switch or the operation mode Links to the Web Sites of Other Companies”.
defined voice tree. is left in ACC, the accessory power will The websites mentioned above may connect
automatically turn off after a certain period you to websites other than the MITSUBISHI
of time and you will no longer be able to use
The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface can be used MOTORS web site.
when the ignition switch or the operation the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. The accessory [Link]
power comes on again if the ignition switch ucts/[Link]
mode is set to ON or ACC.
or the engine switch is operated. Refer to  Software updates by cellular phone/digital
“ACC power auto-cutout function” on page audio device manufacturers may
Before you can use the Bluetooth® 2.0 inter- 5-44. change/alter device connectivity.
face, you must pair the Bluetooth® device  The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface cannot be used
and Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. Refer to “Con- Steering control switch and microphone 
if the Bluetooth® device has a dead battery
P.5-134
necting the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface and or the device power is turned off.

Features and controls 5-133

 [Link] 134 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped)

Voice recognition function  P.5-135 4- PICK-UP button  If you press the button briefly while in
Useful voice commands  P.5-136 5- HANG-UP button voice recognition mode, it will interrupt
Speaker enrollment function  P.5-138 6- Microphone prompting and allow voice command
Connecting the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface and input.
Volume up button Pressing the button longer will deactivate
the Bluetooth® device  P.5-139
the voice recognition mode.
Operating a music player connected via Blue-
 Pressing this button briefly during a call
tooth®  P.5-143 Press this button to increase the volume. will enable voice recognition and allow
5 How to make or receive hands-free calls  voice command input.
P.5-143 Volume down button
Phonebook function  P.5-146
PICK-UP button
Press this button to decrease the volume.
Steering control switch and  Press this button when an incoming call is
microphone SPEECH button received to answer the telephone.
N00564001167

 Press this button to activate voice recogni- NOTE

tion mode.  When not receiving incoming calls, pressing
While the system is in voice recognition the PICK-UP button on vehicles equipped
mode, “Listening” will appear on the with the Mitsubishi Multi-Communication
System, will activate the voice recognition of
audio display.
the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.
NOTE
 On vehicles equipped with the Mitsubishi  When another call is received during a
Multi-Communication System, pressing the call, press this button to put the first caller
SPEECH button will activate the voice rec- on hold and talk to the new caller.
ognition mode (a beep will sound when suc- • In such circumstances, you can press the
cessfully activated). To use the voice button briefly to switch between callers.
recognition of the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface, You will switch to the first caller and the
press the PICK-UP button. other caller will be put on hold.
1- Volume up button
2- Volume down button
3- SPEECH button

5-134 Features and controls

[Link] 135 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped)

• To establish a three-way call in such situ- American Spanish, Canadian French and Jap-
ations, press the SPEECH button to enter
NOTE anese. The factory setting is “English.”
 Call waiting and three-way calls can be used
voice recognition mode and then say
“Join calls.” by the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface, only if it is
possible to use those services with your cel- NOTE
lular phone.  If the voice command that you say differs
HANG-UP button from the predefined command or cannot be
recognized due to ambient noise or some
Microphone
 Press this button when an incoming call is
received to refuse the call.
other reason, the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface 5
will ask you for the voice command again up
 Press this button during a call to end the Your voice will be recognized by a micro- to 3 times.
current call. phone in the overhead console, allowing you  For best performance and further reduction
When another call is on hold, you will to make hands-free calls with voice com- of ambient noise, the vehicle windows
switch to that call. mands. should be closed before pressing the
 If this button is pressed in the voice recog- SPEECH button (except for vehicles with
nition mode, the voice recognition mode Mitsubishi Multi-Communication System)
NOTE or PICK-UP button (for vehicles with Mit-
will be deactivated.  If a cellular phone is within close proximity subishi Multi-Communication System) while
of the microphone, it may distort the sound engaging the voice recognition function.
NOTE quality. In this case, place the cellular phone  Some voice commands have alternative
as far as possible from the microphone. commands.
 When you press the SPEECH button (except
for vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-  Depending on the selected language, some
nication System) or PICK-UP button (for functions may not be available.
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Communica- Voice recognition function
tion System) to enter voice recognition mode N00564101155
with a cellular phone paired to the system, Selecting the language
current information on the cellular phone, The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface is equipped
such as “remaining battery life,” “signal with a voice recognition function. 1. Press the SPEECH button (except for
strength” or “roaming,” will be displayed on Simply say voice commands and you can per- vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
the audio display.* form various operations and make or receive nication System) or PICK-UP button (for
*: Some cellular phones will not send this hands-free calls. vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
information to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. nication System).
With the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface, voice rec- 2. Say “Setup.”
ognition is possible for US English, North 3. Say “Language.”

Features and controls 5-135

 [Link] 136 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped)

4. The voice guide will say “Select a lan- allows you to decrease the possibility that a
guage: English, Spanish, French or Japa-
Useful voice commands setting is accidentally changed.
N00564200016
nese.” Say the desired language. The confirmation function can be turned on
(Example: “English”) or off by following the steps below.
5. The voice guide will say “English (Span- Help function
ish, French or Japanese) selected. Is this N00564301030 1. Press the SPEECH button (except for
correct?” Say “Yes.” The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface is equipped vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
If you say “No,” the system will return to nication System) or PICK-UP button (for
5 Step 4.
with a help function.
If you say “Help” when the system is waiting vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
for a voice command input, the system will nication System).
NOTE tell you a list of the commands that can be 2. Say “Setup.”
 The voice guide will repeat the same mes- used under the existing circumstances. 3. Say “Confirmation prompts.”
sage twice. The first message is in the cur- 4. The voice guide will say “Confirmation
rent language, and the second message is in prompts are <on/off>. Would you like to
the selected language. Canceling turn confirmation prompts <off/on>.”
 If many entries are registered in the vehicle N00564400018
Answer “Yes” to change the setting or
phonebook, changing the language will take There are 2 cancel functions. answer “No” to keep the current setting.
a longer time. If you are at the main menu, say “Cancel” to 5. The voice guide will say “Confirmation
 Changing the language deletes the mobile exit from the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. prompts are <off/on>” and then the sys-
phonebook imported to the Bluetooth® 2.0 If you are anywhere else within the system, tem will return to the main menu.
interface. If you wish to use it, you will have say “Cancel” to return to the main menu.
to import it again.
Security function
Confirmation function setting N00564601150
6. When the voice guide says “English N00564501045 It is possible to use a passcode as a security
(Spanish, French or Japanese) selected,” function by setting a passcode of your choice
the language change process will be com- The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface is equipped
with a confirmation function. for the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.
pleted and the system will return to the
With the confirmation function activated, you When the security function is turned on, it is
main menu.
are given more opportunities than normal to necessary to make a voice input of a 4-digit
confirm a command when making various passcode in order to use all functions of the
settings to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. This Bluetooth® 2.0 interface, except when receiv-
ing calls.

5-136 Features and controls

[Link] 137 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped)

Setting the passcode NOTE NOTE

 Passcode will be required to access the sys-  You can reenter the passcode as many times
Use the following procedure to turn on the tem after the next ignition cycle. as you want.
security function by setting a passcode.  It is required for a little time after engine  If you have forgotten your passcode, say
stop that the entered passcode is actually “Cancel” to quit the voice input mode and
1. Press the SPEECH button (except for recorded in the system. then check with an authorized Mitsubishi
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- If the ignition switch or the operation mode Motors dealer.
nication System) or PICK-UP button (for
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
is made to ACC or ON or the engine is
started immediately after engine stop, there
5
Disabling the passcode
nication System). is a case when the entered passcode is not
2. Say “Setup.” recorded in the system. At this time, please Use the following procedure to turn off the
3. Say “Passcode.” try to enter the passcode again. security function by disabling the passcode.
4. The voice guide will say “Passcode is dis-
abled. Would you like to enable it?” Entering the passcode
NOTE
Answer “Yes.”
If a passcode has been set and the security  System must be unlocked to disable the pass-
Answer “No” to cancel the setting of the
function is enabled, the voice guide will say code.
passcode and return to the main menu.
5. The voice guide will say “Please say a 4- “Hands-free system is locked. State the pass-
digit passcode. Remember this passcode. code to continue” when the SPEECH button 1. Press the SPEECH button (except for
It will be required to use this system.” (except for vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi- vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
Say a 4-digit number which you want to Communication System) or PICK-UP button nication System) or PICK-UP button (for
set as a passcode. (for vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
6. For confirmation purposes, the voice nication System) is pressed to enter voice rec- nication System).
guide will say “Passcode <4-digit pass- ognition mode. Say the 4-digit passcode 2. Say “Setup.”
code>. Is this correct?” Answer “Yes.” number to enter the passcode. 3. Say “Passcode.”
Answer “No” to return to the passcode If the entered passcode is wrong, the voice 4. The voice guide will say “Passcode is
input in Step 5. guide will say “<4-digit passcode>, Incorrect enabled. Would you like to disable it?”
7. When the registration of the passcode is passcode. Please try again.” Enter the correct Answer “Yes.”
completed, the voice guide will say “Pass- passcode. Answer “No” to cancel the disabling of
code is enabled” and the system will the passcode and return to the main menu.
return to the main menu.

Features and controls 5-137

 [Link] 138 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped)

5. When the disabling of the passcode is 1. Stop your vehicle in a safe area, put the
completed, the voice guide will say “Pass- gearshift lever in the “N” (Neutral) posi-
NOTE
 If you do not start the speaker enrollment
code is disabled” and the system will tion (manual transaxle), or the selector
process within 3 minutes after pressing the
return to the main menu. lever in the “P” (PARK) position (contin-
SPEECH button, the speaker enrollment
uously variable transmission (CVT)), and function will time out.
pull the parking brake lever.
Speaker enrollment function The voice guide will say “Speaker enroll-
ment has timed out.” The system will then
N00564701021
NOTE
5 The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface can use the  Speaker enrollment is not possible unless the
beep and the voice recognition mode will be
deactivated.
speaker enrollment function to create a voice vehicle is parked. Make sure you park the
model for one person per language. vehicle in a safe area before attempting
speaker enrollment. 5. The voice guide will prompt for phrase 1.
This makes it easier for the Bluetooth® 2.0 Repeat the corresponding phrase listed in
interface to recognize voice commands said table “Enrollment commands” on page
by you. 2. Press the SPEECH button (except for 5-153.
You can turn a voice model registered with vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- The system will register your voice and
the speaker enrollment function on and off nication System) or PICK-UP button (for then move on to the registration of the
whenever you want. vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- next command. Continue the process until
nication System). all phrases have been registered.
Speaker enrollment 3. Say “Voice training.”
N00564801123
4. The voice guide will say “This operation NOTE
must be performed in a quiet environment  To repeat the most recent voice training com-
It takes about 2 to 3 minutes to complete the
while the vehicle is stopped. See the mand, press and release the SPEECH button.
speaker enrollment process.
owner’s manual for the list of required  If you press the HANG-UP button anytime
To ensure the best results, run through the
training phrases. Press and release the during the process, the system will beep and
process while in the driver’s seat, in an envi-
SPEECH button when you are ready to stop the speaker enrollment process.
ronment that is as quiet as possible (when
begin. Press the HANG-UP button to can-
there is no rain or strong winds and the vehi-
cel at any time.” 6. When all enrollment commands have
cle windows are closed). Please turn off your
Press the SPEECH button to start the been read out, the voice guide will say
phone while in speaker enrollment to prevent
speaker enrollment process. “Speaker enrollment is complete.” The
interruption of the process.
Use the following procedure for speaker system will then end the speaker enroll-
enrollment. ment process and return to the main
menu.

5-138 Features and controls

[Link] 139 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped)

4. When enrollment is “enabled,” the voice If multiple paired Bluetooth® devices are
NOTE model is on; when enrollment is “dis- available in the vehicle, the cellular phone or
 Completing the speaker enrollment process
abled,” the voice model is off. Say the music player most recently connected is auto-
will turn on the voice model automatically.
command that fits your needs.
 The commands “Help” and “Cancel” will not matically connected to the Bluetooth® 2.0
Say “Retrain” to start the speaker enroll-
work in this mode. interface.
ment process and recreate a new voice
model. (Refer to “Speaker enrollment” on
You can also change a Bluetooth® device to
page 5-138.)
Enabling and disabling the voice be connected. 5
model and retraining
N00564901081 Connecting the Bluetooth® 2.0 To pair
You can turn a voice model registered with interface and Bluetooth® device
the speaker enrollment function on and off N00565001249
To pair a Bluetooth® device with the Blue-
whenever you want. Before you can make or receive hands-free
tooth® 2.0 interface, follow the steps below.
You can also retrain the system. calls or play music using the Bluetooth® 2.0
Use the following procedure to perform these interface function, you must pair the Blue- 1. Stop your vehicle in a safe area, put the
actions. gearshift lever in the “N” (Neutral) posi-
tooth® device and Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.
tion (manual transaxle), or the selector
1. Press the SPEECH button (except for
lever in the “P” (PARK) position (contin-
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- NOTE uously variable transmission (CVT)), and
nication System) or PICK-UP button (for  Pairing is required only when the device is
pull the parking brake lever.
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- used for the first time. Once the device has
nication System). been paired with the Bluetooth® 2.0 inter-
2. Say “Voice training.” face, all you need is to bring the device into
NOTE
3. If you have completed a speaker enroll- the vehicle next time and the device will  You cannot pair any Bluetooth® device with
ment process once already, the voice connect to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface auto- the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface unless the vehi-
guide will say either “Enrollment is matically (if supported by the device). The cle is parked. Before pairing a Bluetooth®
enabled. Would you like to disable or device must have Bluetooth® turned ON to device with the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface,
retrain?” or “Enrollment is disabled. connect. confirm that the vehicle is parked in a safe
Would you like to enable or retrain?” location.

Up to 7 Bluetooth® devices can be paired

with the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.

Features and controls 5-139

 [Link] 140 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped)

2. Press the SPEECH button (except for
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
NOTE NOTE
nication System) or PICK-UP button (for  Some Bluetooth® devices require a specific  If the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface cannot recog-
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- pairing code. Please refer to the device man- nize the Bluetooth® device, the voice guide
nication System). ual for pairing code requirements. will say “Pairing has timed out” and the pair-
3. Say “Setup.”  The pairing code entered here is only used ing process will be cancelled.
4. Say “Pairing Options.” for the Bluetooth® connection certification. Confirm that the device you are pairing sup-
5. The voice guide will say “Select one of It is any 4-digit number the user would like ports Bluetooth®, and try pairing it again.
5 the following: pair, edit, delete, or list.”
to select.  If you enter the wrong number, the voice
Remember the pairing code as it needs to be guide will say “Pairing failed” and the pair-
Say “Pair.”
keyed into the Bluetooth® device later in the ing process will be cancelled.
pairing process. Confirm the number is right, and try pairing
NOTE Depending on the connection settings of the it again.
 If 7 devices have already been paired, the
Bluetooth® device, this code may have to be
voice guide will say “Maximum devices 8. The voice guide will say “Please say the
entered each time you connect the Blue-
paired” and then the system will end the name of the device after the beep.” You
pairing process. To register a new device, tooth® device to the Bluetooth® 2.0 inter-
face. For the default connection settings, can assign a desired name for the Blue-
delete one device and then repeat the pairing
process. refer to the instructions for the device. tooth® device and register it as a device
(Refer to “Selecting a device: Deleting a tag. Say the name you want to register
device” on page 5-141.) after the beep.
7. The voice guide will say “Start pairing
procedure on the device. See the device
6. The voice guide will say “Please say a 4- manual for instructions.” Enter in the
NOTE
digit pairing code.” Say a 4-digit number.  When the confirmation function is on, after
Bluetooth® device the 4-digit number you repeating the device tag you have said, the
When the confirmation function is on, the have registered in Step 6. voice guide will ask “Is this correct?”
system will confirm whether the number
Answer “Yes.”
said is acceptable. Answer “Yes.” NOTE To change the device tag, answer “No” and
Answer “No” to return to the pairing code then say the device tag again.
 Depending on the Bluetooth® device, it may
selection.
take a few minutes to pair it with the Blue-
tooth® 2.0 interface. 9. The voice guide will say “Pairing com-
plete,” and the pairing process will end.

5-140 Features and controls

[Link] 141 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped)

When the confirmation function is on, the 4. After the voice guide says “Please say,”
Selecting a device
system will ask you again whether the the numbers of the music players and
N00565101110
phone that you want to connect to is cor- device tags of corresponding music play-
If multiple paired Bluetooth® devices are rect. Answer “Yes” to continue and con- ers will be read out in order, starting with
available in the vehicle, the cellular phone or nect to the cellular phone. the music player that has been most
music player most recently connected is auto- Answer “No,” and the voice guide will recently connected.
matically connected to the Bluetooth® 2.0 say “Please say.” Say the number of the Say the number of the music player that
phone that you want to connect to. you want to connect to.
interface.
You can connect to the other paired cellular When the confirmation function is on, the
5
phone or music player by following the set- NOTE system will ask you again whether the
ting change procedures.  You can connect to a phone at any time by music player that you want to connect to
pressing the SPEECH button and saying the is correct. Answer “Yes” to continue and
number, even before all of the paired num- connect to the music player.
To select a cellular phone
bers and device tags of corresponding cellu- Answer “No,” and the voice guide will
1. Press the SPEECH button (except for lar phones are read out by the system. say “Please say.” Say the number of the
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- music player that you want to connect to.
nication System) or PICK-UP button (for 5. The selected phone will be connected to
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. The voice NOTE
nication System). guide will say “<device tag> selected”  You can connect to a music player at any
2. Say “Setup.” and then the system will return to the time by pressing the SPEECH button and
3. Say “Select phone.” main menu. saying the number, even before all of the
4. After the voice guide says “Please say,” paired numbers and device tags of corre-
the numbers of the cellular phones and sponding music players are read out by the
To select a music player system.
device tags of corresponding cellular
phones will be read out in order, starting 1. Press the SPEECH button (except for
with the cellular phone that has been most vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- 5. The selected music player will be con-
recently connected. nication System) or PICK-UP button (for nected to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.
Say the number of the cellular phone that vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- The voice guide will say “<device tag>
you want to connect to. nication System). selected” and then the system will return
2. Say “Setup.” to the main menu.
3. Say “Select music player.”

Features and controls 5-141

 [Link] 142 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped)

Answer “No,” the system will return to 5. The voice guide will read out device tags
Deleting a device
Step 4. of corresponding devices in order, starting
Use the following procedure to delete a 7. The voice guide will say “Deleted,” and with the Bluetooth® device that has been
paired Bluetooth® device from the Blue- then the system will end the device dele- most recently connected.
tion process. 6. After the device tags of all paired Blue-
tooth® 2.0 interface.
tooth® devices have been read, the system
1. Press the SPEECH button (except for NOTE will say “End of list, would you like to
5 vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-  If the device deletion process fails for some
reason, the voice guide will say “Delete
start from the beginning?”
nication System) or PICK-UP button (for To hear the list again from the beginning,
failed” and then the system will cancel delet-
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- answer “Yes.”
ing the device.
nication System). When you are done, answer “No” to
2. Say “Setup.” return to the main menu.
3. Say “Pairing Options.”
To check a paired Bluetooth®
4. The voice guide will say “Select one of
the following: pair, edit, delete, or list.” device NOTE
N00565201049  If you press and release the SPEECH button
Say “Delete.”
and say “Continue” or “Previous” while the
5. After the voice guide says “Please say,” You can check a paired Bluetooth® device by list is being read, the system will advance or
the numbers of the devices and device following the steps below. rewind the list.
tags of corresponding devices will be read Say “Continue” to proceed to the device with
out in order, starting with the device that 1. Press the SPEECH button (except for the next highest number or “Previous” to
has been most recently connected. After it vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- return to the phone with the previous num-
completes reading all pairs, the voice nication System) or PICK-UP button (for ber.
guide will say “or all.” vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-  You can change the device tag by pressing
Say the number of the device that you nication System). and releasing the SPEECH button and then
want to delete from the system. 2. Say “Setup.” saying “Edit” while the list is being read.
If you want to delete all paired phones 3. Say “Pairing Options.”  You can change the phone to be connected
from the system, say “All.” 4. The voice guide will say “Select one of by pressing and releasing the SPEECH but-
the following: pair, edit, delete, or list.” ton and then saying “Select phone” while the
6. For confirmation purposes, the voice
list is being read.
guide will say “Deleting <device tag> Say “List.”
 You can change the music player to be con-
<number>. Is this correct?” or “Deleting nected by pressing and releasing the
all devices. Is this correct?” SPEECH button and then saying “Select
Answer “Yes” to delete the device(s). music player” while the list is being read.

5-142 Features and controls

[Link] 143 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped)

Changing a device tag NOTE How to make or receive hands-

N00565301040  You can press and release the SPEECH but- free calls
You can change the device tag of a paired cel- ton while the list is being read, and immedi- N00565500087
lular phone or music player. ately say the number of the device tag you
want to change. You can make or receive hands-free calls
Follow the steps below to change a device
tag. using a Bluetooth® compatible cellular phone
6. The voice guide will say “New name, connected to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.
1. Press the SPEECH button (except for please.” Say the name you want to regis- You can also use the phonebooks in the Blue- 5
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- ter as a new device tag. tooth® 2.0 interface to make calls without
nication System) or PICK-UP button (for When the confirmation function is on, the dialing telephone numbers.
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- voice guide will say “<New device tag>.
nication System). Is this correct?” Answer “Yes.” To make a call P.5-143
2. Say “Setup.” Answer “No,” you can say the new device Send function P.5-145
3. Say “Pairing Options.” tag you want to register again. Receiving calls P.5-145
4. The voice guide will say “Select one of 7. The device tag is changed. Mute function P.5-146
the following: pair, edit, delete, or list.” When the change is complete, the voice Switching between hands-free mode and pri-
Say “Edit.” guide will say “New name saved” and vate mode P.5-146
5. The voice guide will say “Please say,” and then the system will return to the main
read out the numbers of the Bluetooth® menu. NOTE
devices and device tags of corresponding  Hands-free calls may not operate correctly
devices in order, starting with the Blue- when you place or receive the call directly
Operating a music player con-
tooth® that has been most recently con- from your cellular phone, instead of using
nected. nected via Bluetooth® the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.
After all paired device tags have been N00565401067

read, the voice guide will say “Which For the operation of a music player connected
device, please?” Say the number of the via Bluetooth®, refer to “Listen to Bluetooth To make a call
device tag you want to change. Audio” on page 7-48. N00565601128

You can make a call in the following 3 ways

using the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface:
- By saying a telephone number

Features and controls 5-143

 [Link] 144 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped)

- By using the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface’s NOTE NOTE
phonebook
 In the case of English, the system will recog-  If you say “Call” when the vehicle phone-
- By redialing a telephone number nize both “zero” and “oh” (Letter “o”) for book and the mobile phonebook are empty,
the number “0.” the voice guide will say “The vehicle phone-
Making a call by using the telephone
 The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface supports num- book is empty. Would you like to add a new
number entry now?”
bers (0 to 9) and characters (+, # and *).
Answer “Yes,” and the voice guide will say
You can make a call by saying the telephone  The maximum supported telephone number
5 number. length is as follows:
“Entering the phonebook - new entry menu.”
You can now create data in the vehicle
• International telephone number: + and tele-
phonebook.
1. Press the SPEECH button (except for phone numbers (to 18 digits).
Answer “No,” the system will return to the
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- • Except for international telephone number: main menu.
nication System) or PICK-UP button (for telephone numbers (to 19 digits).
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
nication System). Making a call using a phonebook 3. After the voice guide says “Name please,”
2. Say “Dial.” say the name you want to call, from those
3. After the voice guide says “Number You can make calls using the vehicle phone- registered in the phonebook.
please,” say the telephone number. book or mobile phonebook of the Bluetooth® 4. If there is only 1 match, the system will
4. The voice guide will say “Dialing <num- 2.0 interface. proceed to Step 5.
ber recognized>.” For details on the phonebooks, refer to If there are 2 or more matches, the voice
“Phonebook function” on page 5-146. guide will say “More than one match was
The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface will then
found, would you like to call <returned
make the call. 1. Press the SPEECH button (except for name>.” If that person is the one you want
When the confirmation function is on, the vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- to call, answer “Yes.”
system will confirm the telephone number nication System) or PICK-UP button (for Answer “No,” the name of the next
again. To continue with that number, vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- matching person will be uttered by the
answer “Yes.” nication System). voice guide.
To change the telephone number, answer 2. Say “Call.”
“No.” The system will say “Number
please” then say the telephone number
NOTE
 If you say “No” to all names read by the sys-
again.
tem, the voice guide will say “Name not
found, returning to main menu” and the sys-
tem will return to the main menu.

5-144 Features and controls

[Link] 145 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped)

5. If only 1 telephone number is registered 6. The voice guide will say “Calling <name> “<numbers> SEND” to generate DTMF
under the name you just said, the voice <location>” and then the system will dial tones.
guide will proceed to Step 6. the telephone number. For example, if during a call you need to sim-
If 2 or more telephone numbers are regis- ulate the pressing of a phone button as a
tered that match the name you just said, NOTE response to an automated system, press the
the voice guide will say “Would you like  When the confirmation function is on, the SPEECH button and speak “1 2 3 4 pound
to call <name> at [home], [work], system will check if the name and location of send” and the 1234# will be sent via your cel-
[mobile], or [other]?” Select the location the receiver are correct. If the name is cor- lular phone.
to call. rect, answer “Yes.” 5
To change the name or location to call,
answer “No.” The system will return to Step Receiving calls
NOTE 3. N00565801058
 If the name you selected has matching data
in the vehicle phonebook but no telephone
If an incoming phone call is received while
number is registered under the selected loca- the ignition switch is in the “ACC” or “ON”
Redialing position, the audio system will be automati-
tion, the voice guide will say
“{home/work/mobile/other} not found for You can redial the last number called, based cally turned on and switched to the incoming
<name>. Would you like to add location or on the history of dialed calls in the paired cel- call, even when the audio system was origi-
try again?”
lular phone. nally off.
Say “Try again,” and the system will return The voice guide announcement for the
to Step 3.
Use the following procedure to redial.
incoming call will be emitted from the front
Say “Add location” and you can register an passenger’s seat speaker.
1. Press the SPEECH button (except for
additional telephone number under the
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- If the CD player or radio was playing when
selected location.
nication System) or PICK-UP button (for the incoming call was received, the audio sys-
 If the name you selected has matching data
in the mobile phonebook but no telephone vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- tem will mute the sound from the CD player
number is registered under the selected loca- nication System). or radio and emit only the incoming call.
tion, the voice guide will say 2. Say “Redial.” To receive the call, press the PICK-UP button
“{home/work/mobile/other} not found for on the steering wheel control switch.
<name>. Would you like to try again?” When the call is over, the audio system will
Send function
Answer “Yes,” and the system will return to return to its previous state.
N00565700018
Step 3.
Answer “No,” and the call will be cancelled. During a call, press the SPEECH button to
Start over again from Step 1. enter voice recognition mode, then say

Features and controls 5-145

 [Link] 146 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped)

are the vehicle phonebook and the mobile  To register a telephone number in
Mute function
phonebook.
N00565900010 the vehicle phonebook
These phonebooks are used to register tele- N00580500062
At any time during a call, you can mute the phone numbers and make calls to desired
vehicle microphone. You can register a telephone number in the
numbers via voice recognition function.
Pressing the SPEECH button and then saying vehicle phonebook in the following 2 ways:
“Mute” during a call will turn ON the mute Reading out a telephone number, and select-
function and mute the microphone. NOTE ing and transferring 1 phonebook entry from
5 Saying “Mute off” in the same way will turn  Disconnecting the battery cable will not the phonebook of the cellular phone.
delete information registered in the phone-
off the mute function and cancel the mute on
book.
the microphone.  To register by reading out a tele-
phone number
Switching between hands-free Vehicle phonebook
N00580600092

1. Press the SPEECH button (except for

mode and private mode N00566101146
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
N00566600014
This phonebook is used when making calls nication System) or PICK-UP button (for
The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface can switch with the voice recognition function. vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
between hands-free mode (hands-free calls) Up to 32 names can be registered in the vehi- nication System).
and private mode (calls using cellular phone). cle phonebook per language. 2. Say “Phonebook.”
If you press the SPEECH button and say Also, each entry has 4 locations associated 3. The voice guide will say “Select one of
“Transfer call” during a hands-free call, you with: home, work, mobile and other. You can the following: new entry, edit number,
can stop the hands-free mode and talk in pri- register one telephone number for each loca- edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or
vate mode. tion. import contact.” Say “New entry.”
To return to hands-free mode, press the 4. The voice guide will say “Name please.”
SPEECH button again and say “Transfer You can register a desired name as a name for Say your preferred name to register it.
call.” any phonebook entry registered in the vehicle
phonebook.
Names and telephone numbers can be
Phonebook function changed later on.
N00566000018
The vehicle phonebook can be used with all
The Bluetooth®2.0 interface has 2 types of
paired cellular phones.
unique phonebooks that are different from the
phonebook stored in the cellular phone. They

5-146 Features and controls

[Link] 147 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped)

NOTE NOTE  To select and transfer one phone-

 If the maximum number of entries are  In the case of English, the system will recog- book entry from the phonebook of
already registered, the voice guide will say nize both “zero” and “oh” (Letter “o”) for the cellular phone
“The phonebook is full. Would you like to the number “0.” N00580700077

delete a name?” Say “Yes” if you want to You can select 1 phonebook entry from the
delete a registered name. phonebook of the cellular phone and register
If you say “No,” the system will return to the 7. The voice guide will repeat the telephone
number you have just read, and then reg- it in the vehicle phonebook.
main menu.
ister the number. 5
5. When the name has been registered, the
When the telephone number has been reg- NOTE
istered, the voice guide will say “Number  Transfer is not permitted unless the vehicle is
voice guide will say “home, work,
saved. Would you like to add another parked. Before transferring, make sure that
mobile, or other?” Say the location for
number for this entry?” the vehicle is parked in a safe location.
which you want to register a telephone
To add another telephone number for a  All or part of data may not be transferred,
number. even when the cellular phone supports Blue-
new location for the current entry, answer
“Yes.” The system will return to location tooth®, depending on the compatibility of
NOTE the device.
selection in Step 5.
 When the confirmation function is on, the  The maximum supported telephone number
voice guide will say “<Location>. Is this cor-
Answer “No” to end the registration pro-
cess and return to the main menu. length is 19 digits. Any telephone number of
rect?” Answer “Yes.” 20 digits or more will be truncated to the first
If a telephone number has been registered for 19 digits.
the selected location, the voice guide will say NOTE  If telephone numbers contain characters
“The current number is <telephone number>,  When the confirmation function is on, after other than 0 to 9, *, # or +, these characters
number please.” repeating the telephone number you have are deleted before the transfer.
If you do not want to change the telephone read, the voice guide will ask “Is this cor-
 For the connection settings on the cellular
number, say “cancel” or say the original rect?” Answer “Yes.”
phone side, refer to the instructions for the
number to keep it registered. Answer “No” to return to telephone number
cellular phone.
registration in step 6.

6. The voice guide will say “Number

1. Press the SPEECH button (except for
please.” Say the telephone number to reg-
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
ister it.
nication System) or PICK-UP button (for
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
nication System).

Features and controls 5-147

 [Link] 148 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped)

2. Say “Phonebook.” 6. Operate the Bluetooth® compatible cellu- 8. The voice guide will say “Adding
3. The voice guide will say “Select one of lar phone to set it up so that the phone- <name>.”
the following: new entry, edit number, book entry you want to register in the When the confirmation function is on, the
edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or vehicle phonebook can be transferred to system will ask if the name is correct.
import contact.” Say “Import contact.” Answer “Yes.”
the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.
4. The voice guide will say “Would you like Answer “No,” the voice guide will say
to import a single entry or all contacts?” “Name please.” Register a different name.
NOTE
Say “Single entry.” 9. The voice guide will say “Numbers
5 The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface will become
 If the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface cannot recog- saved.”
nize the Bluetooth® compatible cellular 10. The voice guide will say “Would you like
ready to receive transferred phonebook
phone or the connection takes too much to import another contact?”
data.
time, the voice guide will say “Import con-
Answer “Yes” if you want to continue
tact has timed out” and then the system will
NOTE cancel the registration. In such case, start
with the registration. You can continue to
 If the maximum number of entries are over again from Step 1.
register a new phonebook entry from Step
already registered, the voice guide will say  Pressing the HANG-UP button or pressing
5.
“The phonebook is full. Would you like to and holding the SPEECH button will cancel Answer “No,” the system will return to
delete a name?” Say “Yes” if you want to the registration. the main menu.
delete a registered name.
If you say “No,” the system will return to the
7. When the reception is complete, the voice  To change the content registered in
main menu.
guide will say “<Number of telephone the vehicle phonebook
numbers that had been registered in the N00579800052

5. After the voice guide says “Ready to import source> numbers have been You can change or delete a name or telephone
receive a contact from the phone. Only a imported. What name would you like to number registered in the vehicle phonebook.
home, a work, and a mobile number can use for these numbers?” You can also listen to the list of names regis-
be imported,” the Bluetooth® 2.0 inter- Say the name you want to register for this tered in the vehicle phonebook.
face will receive the phonebook data from phonebook entry.
the Bluetooth® compatible cellular phone. NOTE
NOTE  The system must have at least one entry.
 If the entered name is already used for
another phonebook entry or similar to a
name used for another phonebook entry, that
name cannot be registered.

5-148 Features and controls

[Link] 149 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped)

 Editing a telephone number Answer “No,” the system will return to  Editing a name
N00579900066 Step 3. N00580100068

1. Press the SPEECH button (except for 6. The voice guide will say “Number, 1. Press the SPEECH button (except for
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- please.” Say the telephone number you vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
nication System) or PICK-UP button (for want to register. nication System) or PICK-UP button (for
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
nication System). NOTE nication System).
2. Say “Phonebook.” 2. Say “Phonebook.”
3. The voice guide will say “Select one of
 If the telephone number is already registered
in the selected location, the voice guide will 3. The voice guide will say “Select one of
5
the following: new entry, edit number, say “The current number is <current num- the following: new entry, edit number,
edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or ber>. New number, please.” Say a new tele- edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or
import contact”. Say “Edit number.” phone number to change the current number. import contact.” Say “Edit name.”
4. The voice guide will say “Please say the 4. The voice guide will say “Please say the
name of the entry you would like to edit, 7. The voice guide will repeat the telephone name of the entry you would like to edit,
or say list names.” Say the name of the number. or say list names.” Say the name you want
phonebook entry you want to edit. When the confirmation function is on, the to edit.
system will ask if the number is correct.
NOTE Answer “Yes.” NOTE
 Say “List names,” and the names registered Answer “No,” the system will return to  Say “List names,” and the names registered
in the phonebook will be read out in order. the Step 3. in the phonebook are read out in order. Refer
Refer to “Listening to the list of registered 8. Once the telephone number is registered, to “Listening to the list of registered names”
names” on page 5-150. on page 5-150.
the voice guide will say “Number saved”
and then the system will return to the
5. The voice guide will say “Home, work, main menu. 5. The voice guide will say “Changing
mobile or other?” Select and say the loca- <name>.”
tion where the telephone number you NOTE When the confirmation function is on, the
want to change or add is registered.  If the location where a telephone number system will check if the name is correct.
When the confirmation function is on, the was already registered has been overwritten Answer “Yes” if you want to continue
system will check the target name and with a new number, the voice guide will say with the editing based on this information.
location again. Answer “Yes” if you want “Number changed” and then the system will Answer “No,” the system will return to
return to the main menu.
to continue with the editing. Step 4.

Features and controls 5-149

 [Link] 150 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped)

6. The voice guide will say “Name please.” 4. The voice guide will say “Please say the
Say the new name you want to register.
NOTE name of the entry you would like to
 You can call, edit or delete a name that is
7. The registered name will be changed. delete, or say list names.” Say the name of
being read out.
When the change is complete, the system the phonebook entry in which the tele-
Press the SPEECH button and say “Call” to
will return to the main menu. call the name, “Edit name” to edit it, or phone number you want to delete is regis-
“Delete” to delete it. tered.
 Listening to the list of registered names The system will beep and then execute your
NOTE
5 command.
N00580200056

1. Press the SPEECH button (except for  If you press the SPEECH button and say  Say “List names,” and the names registered
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- “Continue” or “Previous” while the list is in the phonebook are read out in order. Refer
nication System) or PICK-UP button (for being read, the system will advance or to “Listening to the list of registered names”
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- rewind the list. Say “Continue” to proceed to on page 5-150.
nication System). the next entry or “Previous” to return to the
2. Say “Phonebook.” previous entry.
5. If only one telephone number is registered
3. The voice guide will say “Select one of in the selected phonebook entry, the voice
the following: new entry, edit number, guide will say “Deleting <name> <loca-
edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or  Deleting a telephone number
N00580300086 tion>.”
import contact.” Say “List names.” 1. Press the SPEECH button (except for If multiple telephone numbers are regis-
4. Bluetooth® 2.0 interface will read out the vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- tered in the selected phonebook entry, the
entries in the phonebook in order. nication System) or PICK-UP button (for voice guide will say “Would you like to
5. When the voice guide is done reading the vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- delete [home], [work], [mobile], [other],
list, it will say “End of list, would you like nication System). or all?”
to start from the beginning?” When you 2. Say “Phonebook.” Select the location to delete, and the voice
want to check the list again from the 3. The voice guide will say “Select one of guide will say “Deleting <name> <loca-
beginning, answer “Yes.” the following: new entry, edit number, tion>.”
When you are done, answer “No” to edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or
return to the previous or main menu. import contact.” Say “Delete.” NOTE
 To delete the telephone numbers from all
locations, say “All.”

5-150 Features and controls

[Link] 151 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped)

6. The system will ask if you really want to 3. The voice guide will say “Select one of Up to 7 mobile phonebooks, each containing
delete the selected telephone number(s). the following: new entry, edit number, up to 1,000 names, can be registered.
To go ahead with the deletion, answer edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or
“Yes.” import contact.” Say “Erase all.” The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface automatically
Answer “No,” the system will cancel 4. For confirmation purposes, the voice converts from text to voice the names regis-
deleting the telephone number(s) and then guide will ask “Are you sure you want to tered in the transferred phonebook entries,
return to Step 4. erase everything from your hands-free and creates names.
7. When the telephone number deletion is system phonebook?” Answer “Yes.”
complete, the voice guide will say Answer “No” to cancel the deletion of all
5
NOTE
“<name> <location> deleted” and then registered information in the phonebook  Only the mobile phonebook transferred from
the system will return to the main menu. and return to the main menu. the connected cellular phone can be used
If all locations are deleted, the system will 5. The voice guide will say “You are about with that cellular phone.
say “<name> and all locations deleted” to delete everything from your hands-free  You cannot change the names and telephone
and the name will be removed from the system phonebook. Do you want to con- numbers in the phonebook entries registered
phonebook. If numbers still remain under tinue?” Answer “Yes” to continue. in the mobile phonebook. You cannot select
the entry, the name will retain the other Answer “No” to cancel the deletion of all and delete specific phonebook entries, either.
associated numbers. registered information in the phonebook To change or delete any of the above, change
and return to the main menu. the applicable information in the source
6. The voice guide will say “Please wait, phonebook of the cellular phone and then
 Erasing the phonebook transfer the phonebook again.
N00580400058 erasing the hands-free system phone-
You can delete all registered information book” and then the system will delete all
data in the phonebook. To import a devices phonebook
from the vehicle phonebook.
When the deletion is complete, the voice Follow the steps below to transfer to the
1. Press the SPEECH button (except for guide will say “Hands-free system phone- mobile phonebook the phonebook stored in
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- book erased” and then the system will the cellular phone.
nication System) or PICK-UP button (for return to the main menu.
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
nication System). NOTE
Mobile phonebook  Transfer should be completed while the vehi-
2. Say “Phonebook.” N00566201091
cle is parked. Before transferring, make sure
All entries in the phonebook stored in the cel- that the vehicle is parked in a safe location.
lular phone can be transferred in a batch and
registered in the mobile phonebook.

Features and controls 5-151

 [Link] 152 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped)

4. The voice guide will say “Would you like 6. When the transfer is complete, the voice
NOTE to import a single entry or all contacts?” guide will say “Import complete” and
 The already stored phonebook in the mobile
Say “All contacts.” then the system will return to the main
phonebook is overwritten by the stored
5. The voice guide will say “Importing the menu.
phonebook in the cellular phone.
contact list from the mobile phonebook.
 All or part of data may not be transferred,
This may take several minutes to com-
even when the cellular phone supports Blue-
plete. Would you like to continue?”
General information
tooth®, depending on the compatibility of N00566301089
Answer “Yes,” transferring to the mobile
5 the device.
phonebook the phonebook stored in the MODEL: MMC FCC ID: CB2MDGMY10
 Only a home, a work, and a mobile number IC: 279B-MDGMY10
can be imported. cellular phone will start.
 The maximum supported telephone number Answer “No,” the system will return to Your Bluetooth® 2.0 interface operates on a
length is 19 digits. Any telephone number of the main menu. radio frequency subject to Federal Communi-
20 digits or more will be truncated to the first cations Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehi-
19 digits. NOTE cles sold in U.S.A.) and Industry Canada
 If telephone numbers contain characters  The transfer may take some time to complete Rules (For vehicles sold in Canada). This
other than 0 to 9, *, # or +, these characters depending on the number of contacts. device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
are deleted before the transfer. Rules and RSS-210 of the Industry Canada
 If the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface could not be
 For the connection settings on the cellular Rules. Operation is subject to the following
connected to the Bluetooth® compatible cel-
phone side, refer to the instructions for the two conditions:
lular phone, the voice guide will say “Unable
cellular phone.
to transfer contact list from phone” and then
the system will return to the main menu.  This device may not cause harmful inter-
1. Press the SPEECH button (except for ference.
 If you press the HANG-UP button or press
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-  This device must accept any interference
and hold the SPEECH button during the data
nication System) or PICK-UP button (for received, including interference that may
transfer, the transfer will be cancelled and
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- the system will return to the main menu. cause undesired operation.
nication System).  If an error occurs during the data transfer, all
2. Say “Phonebook.” transfers will be cancelled and the voice
3. The voice guide will say “Select one of guide will say “Unable to complete the
CAUTION
the following: new entry, edit number, phonebook import” and then the system will  Changes or modifications made to this
edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or return to the main menu. equipment not expressly approved by the
import contact.” Say “Import contact.”  If there are no contacts in the phonebook, the manufacturer may void the FCC authoriza-
voice guide will say “There are no contacts tion to operate this equipment.
on the connected phone.”

5-152 Features and controls

[Link] 153 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

USB input terminal (if so equipped)

The term “IC:” before the radio certification  Connect the equipment into an outlet on a Refer to the following sections for details on
number only signifies that Industry Canada circuit different from that to which the how to play music files:
technical specifications were met. receiver is connected. Refer to “Listen to Audio Files on a USB
The antenna used for this transmitter must not  Consult the dealer or an experienced Device” on page 7-45.
be co-located or operating in conjunction radio/TV technician for help.
with any other antenna or transmitter. End- *: “iPod” is a registered trademark of Apple
users and installers must be provided with ICES Notice: This Class B digital apparatus Inc. in the United States and other countries.
installation instructions and transmitter oper- complies with Canadian ICES-003.
5
ating conditions for satisfying RF exposure How to connect a USB memory
compliance. Enrollment Commands
FCC Notice: This equipment has been tested
device
N00566401107 N00566800090
and found to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of 1. Park your vehicle in a safe place and turn
the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to the ignition switch to the “OFF” position
provide reasonable protection against harmful or put the operation mode in OFF.
interference in a residential installation. 2. Open the USB input terminal cover (A) in
This equipment generates, uses and can radi- the floor console box.
ate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference
to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interfer-
ence will not occur in a particular installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interfer- USB input terminal (if so
ence to radio or television reception, which equipped)
can be determined by turning the equipment N00566701067
off and on, the user is encouraged to try to
correct the interference by one or more of the You can connect your USB memory device or
following measures: iPod* to play music files stored in the USB
3. Connect a commercially available USB
memory device or iPod.
connector cable (C) to the USB memory
 Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. The following explains how to connect and
device (B).
 Increase the separation between the remove a USB memory device or iPod.
equipment and receiver.
Features and controls 5-153
 [Link] 154 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

USB input terminal (if so equipped)

3. Connect the Dock connector (C) to the
NOTE iPod (B).
 Do not connect the USB memory device to
the USB input terminal directly.
The USB memory device may be damaged.
 When closing the floor console box, be care-
ful not to trap the USB connector cable.

5 5. To remove the USB connector cable, turn

the ignition switch to the “OFF” position
or put the operation mode in OFF first and
4. Connect the USB connector cable (C) to perform the installation steps in reverse.
the USB input terminal (D).
How to connect an iPod NOTE
N00566900088
 Use a genuine Dock connector from Apple
1. Park your vehicle in a safe place and turn Inc.
the ignition switch to the “OFF” position
or put the operation mode in OFF. 4. Connect the Dock connector (C) to the
2. Open the USB input terminal cover (A) in USB input terminal (D).
the floor console box.

CAUTION
 Keep the lid of the floor console box closed
while driving the vehicle. A lid or the con-
tents of the floor console box could other-
wise cause injuries.

5-154 Features and controls

[Link] 155 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

USB input terminal (if so equipped)

CAUTION Model name Condition NOTE

 Keep the lid of the floor console box closed F/W Ver.1.1.1 or  Do not keep your USB memory device or
iPod touch*
while driving the vehicle. A lid or the con- later iPod in your vehicle.
tents of the floor console box could other-  It is recommended that you back up the files
iPod classic* F/W Ver.1.0 or later
wise cause injuries. in case of data damage.
iPod (fifth genera- F/W Ver.1.2.2 or  Do not connect to the USB input terminal
tion)* later any device (hard disk, card reader, memory
NOTE iPod nano (fifth gen-
F/W Ver.1.2 or later
reader, etc.) other than the connectable
devices specified in the previous section.
5
 When closing the floor console box, be care- eration)*
ful not to trap the connector cable. The device and/or data may be damaged. If
iPod nano (second F/W Ver.1.1.2 or any of these devices was connected by mis-
generation)* later take, remove it after turning the ignition
5. To remove the Dock connector, turn the switch to the “OFF” position or putting the
Models other than Digital audio player
ignition switch to the “OFF” position or operation mode in OFF.
USB memory supporting mass
put the operation mode in OFF first and
devices and iPods storage class
perform the installation steps in reverse. File specifications
*: “iPod touch,” “iPod classic,” “iPod” and N00567200017

Types of connectable devices “iPod nano” are registered trademarks of You can play music files of the following
and supported file specifica- Apple Inc. in the United States and other specifications that are saved in a USB mem-
countries. ory device or other device supporting mass
tions storage class.
N00567000015
NOTE
 Depending on the type of the USB memory Item Condition
Device types
device or other device connected, the con- MP3, WMA, AAC,
N00567100090
nected device may not function properly or File format
WAV
Devices of the following types can be con- the available functions may be limited.
nected.  It is recommended to use an iPod with firm-
Maximum number of
ware updated to the lastest version. levels Level 8
Model name Condition  You can charge your iPod by connecting it to (including the root)
the USB input terminal when the ignition Number of folders 700
Storage capacity of
USB memory device switch or the operation mode is in ON or
256 Mbytes or more Number of files 65,535
ACC.

Features and controls 5-155

 [Link] 156 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Sun visors

Sun visors Vanity mirror Type 2

N00524601376
A vanity mirror is fitted to the back of the sun
Pull the sun visor downward (1) to reduce
visor.
front glare while driving. To reduce side Type 1
glare, turn the visor to the side (2).
A vanity mirror is fitted to the back of the sun
visor.
5 Operating the lid of the vanity mirror will
automatically turn on the mirror light (A).

Card holder
Cards can be slipped into the holder (B) on
the sun visor.

CAUTION
 If the lid of vanity mirror with light is kept
open for prolonged periods of time, the vehi-
cle’s battery will be discharged.

5-156 Features and controls

[Link] 157 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

12 V power outlets

12 V power outlets Type 1 Floor console box

N00525000598

Accessories can be operated while the igni-

CAUTION tion switch or the operation mode is in ON or
 Be sure to use a “plug-in” type accessory ACC.
operating at 12 V and at 120 W or less.
When using more than one socket at the
same time, make sure the total power con-
sumption of the electrical accessories does
Floor console
5
not exceed 120 W at 12 V.
 Also be aware that using electronic equip-
ment with the engine off may run the battery
down.
 When the power outlet is not in use, be sure Interior lights
to close the power outlet cover or replace the N00525300562

cap. This will prevent the power outlet from

becoming clogged and short circuiting. NOTE
 Be aware that leaving the light illuminated
To use a “plug-in” type accessory, open the with the engine off may run the battery
WARNING down.
cover or remove the cap, and insert the plug
 The hole next to the power outlet in the Never leave the vehicle without checking
in the power outlet.
floor console is not a cup holder. This hole that the light is off.
can be used as a personal compartment,
NOTE but should never be used as a cup holder.
 If your vehicle is equipped with two 12V Spilling beverages onto the power outlet
power outlets, they can be used simultane- could cause a short-circuit or an electric
ously. shock.

Type 2

Accessories can be operated in all ignition

switch positions or all operation modes.

Features and controls 5-157

 [Link] 158 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Interior lights
• When the remote control transmitter of
Dome light (front)/Reading the keyless entry system or the F.A.S.T.-
lights key is used to lock the vehicle.
N00525401472 • If the vehicle is equipped with the
F.A.S.T.-key, when the F.A.S.T.-key is
Dome light (front) used to lock the vehicle.

NOTE
5  When the doors other than the driver’s door
and liftgate are closed if the driver’s door is
closed while its lock knob is in the lock posi-
1- Cargo room light  P.5-159 tion, the light goes off immediately.
2- Dome light (Rear) (if so equipped)   When the key was used to start the engine, if
P.5-159 the key is removed while the doors and lift-
3- Dome light (Front)/Reading lights  gate are closed, the light is illuminated and
P.5-158 after approximately 30 seconds it goes off.
Sunshade illumination dimming control  When the F.A.S.T.-key was used to start the
switch engine, if the operation mode is put in OFF
(if so equipped)  P.5-160 while the doors and liftgate are closed, the
1- (DOOR) light illuminates and after approximately 30
The light illuminates when a door or the seconds it goes off.
liftgate is opened. It goes off approxi-  The time until the light goes off can be
mately 30 seconds after the door or lift- adjusted. See your authorized Mitsubishi
gate is closed. Motors dealer for details.
However, the light goes off immediately
in the following cases:
2-
• When the ignition switch is turned to the
The light goes off regardless of whether a
“ON” position or the operation mode is
door or the liftgate is open or closed.
put in ON.
• When the power door lock function is
used to lock the vehicle.

5-158 Features and controls

[Link] 159 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Interior lights

Reading lights 1- ( ) NOTE

The light illuminates regardless of
N00537600155  When the F.A.S.T.-key was used to start the
whether a door or the liftgate is open or engine, if the operation mode is put in OFF
Regardless of the position of the dome light
closed. while the doors and liftgate are closed, the
switch, when the lens is pressed, the light on
2- () light illuminates and after approximately 30
the side that was pressed will illuminate.
The light illuminates when a door or the seconds it goes off.
Press the lens again to turn off the light.
liftgate is opened. It goes off approxi-  The time until the light goes off can be
mately 30 seconds after the door or lift-
gate is closed.
adjusted. See your authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer for details.
5
However, the light goes off immediately
in the following cases: 3- ( )
• When the ignition switch is turned to the The light goes off regardless of whether a
“ON” position or the operation mode is door or the liftgate is open or closed.
put in ON.
• When the power door lock function is
Cargo room light
used to lock the vehicle.
N00526100163
• When the remote control transmitter of
the keyless entry system or the F.A.S.T.-
key is used to lock the vehicle.
• If the vehicle is equipped with the
Dome light (rear) (if so equipped) F.A.S.T.-key, when the F.A.S.T.-key is
N00525801258 used to lock the vehicle.

NOTE
 When the doors other than the driver’s door
and liftgate are closed if the driver’s door is
closed while its lock knob is in the lock posi-
tion, the light goes off immediately.
 When the key was used to start the engine, if The light illuminates when the liftgate is
the key is removed while the doors and lift- opened, and goes out when the liftgate is
gate are closed, the light is illuminated and closed.
after approximately 30 seconds it goes off.

Features and controls 5-159

 [Link] 160 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Interior lights
 When the key was used to start the
Sunshade illumination dim- Sunshade illumination (if so engine, the key is removed while all doors
ming control switch (if so equipped) equipped) and the liftgate remain closed.
N00568500020 N00568601031  For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-
key, the operation mode is put in OFF
while the engine is running and the doors
and the liftgate are closed.
5
NOTE
 The time until the sunshade illumination
goes off can be adjusted. If it is adjusted, the
time until the dome light go off is also
adjusted automatically at the same time.
See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer for details.
The brightness of the sunshade illumination The sunshade illumination turns on when the
can be adjusted to 3 different levels when the ignition switch or the operation mode is in The sunshade illumination also turns on when
ignition switch or the operation mode is in ON or ACC. a door or the liftgate is opened, and goes off
ON or ACC. 30 seconds after the door or the liftgate is
Each time you press the switch, the bright- NOTE closed, even when the engine switch is in the
ness switches in sequence from high  mid-  The sunshade illumination does not turn on if “OFF” position or the operation mode is in
dle  low  off  high. the sunshade illumination dimming control OFF.
switch is off. However, the sunshade illumination immedi-
NOTE Refer to “Sunshade illumination dimming ately goes off in the following cases.
 The brightness can be adjusted even when control switch” on page 5-160.
the ignition switch is in the “OFF” position  When the power door lock function is
or the operation mode is in OFF, provided used to lock the vehicle.
When the sunshade illumination is turned on,
that the sunshade illumination is turned on.  When the remote control transmitter of
it will go off approximately 30 seconds after
the keyless entry system or the F.A.S.T.-
the following operation is performed.
key is used to lock the vehicle.

5-160 Features and controls

[Link] 161 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Storage spaces
 If the vehicle is equipped with the  The lights will illuminate again after they
F.A.S.T.-key, when the F.A.S.T.-key is automatically go off if the ignition switch
NOTE
 Do not leave valuables in any storage space
used to lock the vehicle. or the engine switch is operated, or if the
when leaving the vehicle.
keyless entry system or the F.A.S.T.-key
is operated.
NOTE
 When the doors other than the driver’s door
and liftgate are closed if the driver’s door is NOTE
closed while its lock knob is in the lock posi-  The interior light auto-cutout function can be 5
tion, the light goes off immediately. deactivated.
 The sunshade illumination does not turn on if The time until the lights automatically go off
the sunshade illumination dimming control can be adjusted. See your authorized
switch is off. Mitsubishi Motors dealer for details.
 The time until the sunshade illumination
goes off can be adjusted. If it is adjusted, the
time until the dome light go off is also
adjusted automatically at the same time. See
Storage spaces
your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for N00526400469 1- Floor console box
details. 2- Glove compartment
CAUTION
 Never leave lighters, carbonated drink cans,
Interior light auto-cutout func- or spectacles in the cabin when parking the Glove compartment
vehicle in hot sunshine. The cabin will N00551500204
tion (dome light and other become extremely hot, so lighters and other
lights) flammable items may catch fire and WARNING
unopened drink cans (including beer cans)
N00526301452  An open glove compartment door can
may rupture. The heat may also deform or
 If any of the interior lights are left crack plastic spectacle lenses and other spec-
cause a serious injury or death to the front
switched on with the ignition switch is in passenger in an accident, even if the pas-
tacle parts that are made of plastic.
the “OFF” position or the operation mode senger is wearing his/her seat belt. Always
 Keep the lids of storage spaces closed while keep the glove compartment door closed
is in OFF, it goes off automatically after driving the vehicle. A lid or the contents of a when driving.
approximately 30 minutes. storage space could otherwise cause injuries
during a sudden stop.
To open, pull the lever (A).

Features and controls 5-161

 [Link] 162 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Storage spaces

NOTE NOTE
 When the lights are illuminated with the  There is a limit to the size of pens that can be Floor console box
light switch in the “ ”, “ ”, or “AUTO” stored in the holder. Forcing large pens into N00551601257

position (vehicles with automatic light con- the holder could cause damage.
trol), the glove conpartment light illumi- Type1
nates.
Card holder To open the console box, lift the release lever
(A) and raise the lid.
Pen holder There is a card holder inside the glove com-
partment.
There is a pen holder inside the glove com-
partment.

5-162 Features and controls

[Link] 163 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Cup holders

Type2 Upper box Tissue holder

To open the upper box, lift the right release The tissue holder (D) is located on the under-
Upper and lower boxes are located inside the
lever (B) and raise the lid. side of the floor console box lid.
floor console box.

Type 1 Type 2
NOTE
 The floor console box can also be used as an
arm rest.
5
Refer to the “Arm rest” section on page 4-6.

1 2

Lower box
Cup holders
To open the lower box, lift the left release N00527300322

lever (C) and raise the lid. The cup holder is designed for holding cups
or drink-cans securely in its holes.
1- Upper box
2- Lower box WARNING
 The hole next to the power outlet in the
floor console is not and should not be used
NOTE as a cup holder. Spilling beverages onto
 The USB input terminal is located in the the adjacent power outlet could cause a
floor console box (if so equipped). For short-circuit or electrical failure.
details, refer to “USB input terminal” on
page 5-153.

Features and controls 5-163

 [Link] 164 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Bottle holders

For the rear seat (if so equipped)

N00537001198

In order to use the cup holder, allow the arm

rest (A) to drop down.

NOTE
For the front seat  Make sure all lids are tightly closed when
storing beverages that are in plastic bottles,
The cup holder is located in front of the floor etc.
console.  Some beverages may not be stored, depend-
ing on the size and shape of the plastic bot-
tles, etc.
Bottle holders
N00527300377
Cargo area cover (if so
CAUTION equipped)
 Drink beverages while driving your vehicle
N00528300130
is distracting and can cause an accident.
 Vibration and shaking while driving may
cause beverages to spill. Be very careful, as CAUTION
spilling hot beverages could cause burns.  Do not place luggage or other items on the
cargo area cover. Any items on the cargo
area cover would obstruct your rearward
There are bottle holders located on the front
view, and they could fly forward and cause
doors. injuries or other mishap in the event of hard
braking.

5-164 Features and controls

[Link] 165 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Assist grips

To install
1. Insert the concave portion (A) on the
underside of the cargo area cover into the
inside protruding portion (B) of the lift-
gate.

CAUTION
To remove  Do not use the assist grips when getting into
or out of the vehicle. The assist grips could
Follow this procedure in reverse to remove. detach causing you to fall.

Assist grips Coat hook

CAUTION N00559000061
 Lightly push the cargo area cover to make N00553600153

sure that the concave portion (A) is set The assist grips (located above the doors on
There is a coat hook on the rear seat assist
firmly in the protruding portion (B) of the the headliner) are not designed to support
grip of the driver’s side.
liftgate. If the cargo area cover is not body weight. They are intended for use only
securely locked in place, it could unhook while seated in the vehicle.
while driving and cause injuries.

2. Hang the strap (C) of the cargo area cover

on the hook (D).

Features and controls 5-165

 [Link] 166 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Luggage hooks

Luggage hooks
N00528500259

There are hooks on the sides of the luggage

compartment for use in securing luggage.

WARNING
 Do not put a hanger or any heavy or
pointed object on the coat hook. If the cur-
tain airbag was activated, any such item
could be propelled away with great force
and could prevent the curtain airbag from
inflating correctly. Hang clothes directly CAUTION
on the coat hook (without using a hanger).  Do not load the luggage higher than the top
Make sure there are no heavy or sharp of the seatback.
objects in the pockets of clothes that you Be sure that luggage is firmly secured.
hang on the coat hook. Restricted rear vision or flying objects enter-
ing the passenger compartment during sud-
den braking could result in a serious
accident.

5-166 Features and controls

[Link] 1 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Driving safety

Driving precaution ...........................................................................6-2

Fuel economy ...................................................................................6-2
Driving, alcohol and drugs ..............................................................6-2
Floor mat ..........................................................................................6-3
Vehicle preparation before driving ..................................................6-4 6
Safe driving techniques ....................................................................6-4
Driving during cold weather ............................................................6-5
Braking ............................................................................................6-5
Parking .............................................................................................6-6
Loading information ........................................................................6-7
Cargo loads ....................................................................................6-10
Trailer towing ................................................................................6-12
 [Link] 2 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Driving precaution
cle, always make certain that you and all your  Always keep your vehicle well main-
Driving precaution passengers are properly wearing their seat tained. A poorly maintained engine
N00629300053
belts (with children in the rear seat, in appro- wastes fuel and costs money.
priate restraints).  Never overload your vehicle.
WARNING
 Utility vehicles have a significantly higher
rollover rate than other types of vehicles. Fuel economy Driving, alcohol and drugs
Avoid abrupt maneuvers and excessive N00628800152 N00628900049
speed. Always buckle up.
Fuel economy is dependent on many factors. Drunk driving is one of the most frequent
6 Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance
Your personal driving habits can have a sig-
nificant effect on your fuel use. Several rec-
causes of accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired
and a narrower track, which enables them to ommendations for achieving the greatest fuel even with blood alcohol levels far below the
perform in a wide variety of off-road situa- economy are listed below. legal minimum. If you have been drinking,
tions. Because of the higher ground clear- don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-
ance, these vehicles have a higher center of  Whenever accelerating from a stop, drinking driver, call a cab or a friend, or use
gravity, which makes them handle differently always accelerate slowly and smoothly. public transportation. Drinking coffee or tak-
than ordinary vehicles when driving on pave-  When parked for even a short period, do ing a cold shower will not make you sober.
ment. They are not designed to maneuver or not idle the engine. Shut it off. Similarly, prescription and nonprescription
corner at the same speed on pavement as con-  Plan your trips to avoid unnecessary drugs affect your alertness, perception and
ventional 2-wheel drive passenger cars any stops. reaction time. Consult with your doctor or
more than low-slung sports cars are designed  Keep your tires inflated to the recom- pharmacist before driving while under the
to perform satisfactorily in off-road condi- mended pressures. influence of any of these medications.
tions.  When you drive on highways or dry
Always drive safely and steer the vehicle improved roads, set the drive mode-selec-
carefully. Avoid operating the vehicle in a tor “2WD” or “4WD AUTO” position (if
WARNING
manner that might require sharp turns or  NEVER DRINK AND DRIVE.
so equipped).
Your perceptions are less accurate, your
abrupt maneuvers. As with other vehicles of  For freeway driving, maintain a speed of
reflexes are slower and your judgment is
this type, failure to operate this vehicle cor- approximately 50 mph (80 km/h) when impaired.
rectly can result in loss of control or vehicle traffic, roadway and weather conditions
rollover. safely permit.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is sig-  Keep your air filter clean and your vehicle
nificantly more likely to die than a person lubricated according to the recommenda-
wearing a seat belt. Before starting the vehi- tions in this manual.

6-2 Driving safety

[Link] 3 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Floor mat

Floor mat WARNING

N00628600046  Never install a second mat over or under
an existing floor mat.
The original equipment floor mat provided
 Do not use a floor mat designed for
with your vehicle was specifically designed
another model vehicle even if it is a
for your vehicle. Always properly position Mitsubishi genuine floor mat.
the floor mat and assure it does not interfere  Before driving, be sure to check the fol-
with operation of the pedals. Always use the lowing:
retaining clip on the driver’s floorboard to • Periodically check that the floor mat is
secure the floor mat. When used, this clip will
help prevent the floor mat from moving for-
properly secured with the retaining clips. 6
If you remove the floor mat while clean-
ward and possibly interfering with the opera- ing the inside of your vehicle or for any
tion of the pedals. To prevent the floor mat NOTE other reason, always check the condition
from moving forward and possibly interfering of the floor mat after it has been rein-
 The shape of the mat and the number of
with the operation of the pedals, Mitsubishi stalled.
retaining clips may vary depending on the
genuine floor mats are recommended. • While the vehicle is stopped with the
vehicle model.
engine off, check that the floor mat is not
interfering with the pedals by depressing
To install the floor mat the pedals fully.
N00628700047
WARNING
1. Place the floor mat to fit the shape of the  If a floor mat is the wrong size or is not
floorboard. properly installed, it can interfere with the
operation of the pedals. Interference with
2. Align the floor mat with the installation
the pedals can cause unintended accelera-
holes over the retaining clips. tion and/or increased stopping distances
3. Secure the floor mat with retaining clips. resulting in a crash and injury. Always
make sure the floor mat does not interfere
with the accelerator or brake pedal.
 Always use the retaining clip on the
driver’s floorboard to secure the floor
mat.
 Always install the mat with the correct
side facing down.

Driving safety 6-3

 [Link] 4 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Vehicle preparation before driving

Vehicle preparation before Defrosters Lights

driving
N00629000669
Check these by selecting the defroster mode, Have someone watch while you turn all the
and set the blower switch on high. You should exterior lights on and off. Also check the turn
For a safer and more enjoyable trip, always
be able to feel the air blowing against the signal indicators and high-beam indicators on
check for the following:
windshield. the instrument panel.
Refer to “Defrosting or defogging (wind-
Seat belts and seats shield, door windows)” on page 7-8, 7-13,
Fluid leaks
6  Before starting the vehicle, make certain
7-18, 7-23.

that you and all passengers are seated and Check the ground under the vehicle after
wearing their seat belts properly (with Tires parking overnight, for fuel, water, oil, or
children in the rear seat, in appropriate other leaks. Make sure all the fluid levels are
restraints), and that all the doors and lift- Check all the tires for heavy tread wear or correct. Also, if you can smell fuel, you need
gate are locked. uneven wear patterns. Look for stones, nails, to find out why immediately and have it
 Move the driver’s seat as far backward as glass, or other objects stuck in the tread. Look fixed.
possible, while still keeping good visibil- for any tread cuts or sidewall cracks. Check
ity, and good control of the steering the wheel nuts for tightness, and the tires
wheel, brakes, accelerator, and controls. (including spare tire) for proper pressure.
Safe driving techniques
N00629200094
Check the instrument panel indicators and Replace your tires before they are heavily
multi-information display for any possible worn out. Even this vehicle’s safety equipment, and
problem. As your vehicle is equipped with a tire pres- your safest driving, cannot guarantee that you
 In the same way, the front passenger seat sure monitoring system, there is a risk of can avoid an accident or injury. However, if
should also be moved as far back as possi- damage to the tire inflation pressure sensors you give extra attention to the following
ble. when the tire is replaced on the rim. Tire areas, you can better protect yourself and
 Make sure that infants and small children replacement should, therefore, be performed your passengers:
are properly restrained in accordance with only by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
all laws and regulations. dealer.  Drive defensively. Be aware of traffic,
road and weather conditions. Leave plenty
of stopping distance between your vehicle
and the vehicle ahead.

6-4 Driving safety

[Link] 5 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Driving during cold weather

 Before changing lanes, check your mir-
rors and use your turn-signal light.
WARNING WARNING
 The battery gives off explosive hydrogen  Never open the radiator cap when the
 While driving, watch the behavior of
gas. Any spark or flame can cause the bat- radiator is hot. You could be seriously
other drivers, bicyclists, and pedestrians.
tery to explode, which could cause serious burned.
 Always obey applicable laws and regula- injury or death.
tions. Be a polite and alert driver. Always Always wear protective clothes and a face
leave room for unexpected events, such as mask when working with your battery, or
sudden braking. let a skilled mechanic do it.
Braking
 If you plan to drive in another country, N00629500491

obey their vehicle registration laws and  Warm the engine sufficiently. After start- All the parts of the brake system are critical 6
make sure you will be able to get the right ing the engine, allow a short warm-up to safety. Have the vehicle serviced by an
fuel. time to distribute oil to all cylinders. Then authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
drive your vehicle slowly. repair facility of your choice at regular inter-
vals according to the “WARRANTY AND
Driving during cold weather  Stay at low speeds at first so that the
MAINTENANCE MANUAL”.
N00629400461
transaxle, transfer case and rear axle oil
 Check the battery. At the same time, have time to spread to all the lubrication
check the terminals and wiring. During points. When brakes are wet
extremely cold weather, the battery will  Manual transaxle can be harder to shift in
not be as strong. Also, the battery power cold weather conditions. This is normal
Check the brake system while driving at a
level may drop because more power is and shifting will get easier as the transaxle
low speed immediately after starting, espe-
used for cold starting and driving. warms up.
cially when the brakes are wet, to confirm
Before driving the vehicle, check to see if  Check the engine antifreeze.
they work normally.
the engine runs at the proper speed and if If there is not enough coolant because of a
A film of water can be formed on the brake
the headlights are as bright as normally. leak or from engine overheating, add
discs and prevent normal braking after driv-
Charge or replace the battery if necessary. Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Super Long
ing in heavy rain or through large puddles, or
During extreme cold weather, it is possi- Life Coolant Premium or equivalent.
after the vehicle is washed. If this occurs, dry
ble that a very low battery could freeze. Please read this section in conjunction
the brakes out by driving slowly while lightly
with the “Engine coolant” on page 9-7.
depressing the brake pedal.

Driving safety 6-5

 [Link] 6 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Parking

When driving in cold weather For vehicles equipped with man- WARNING
ual transaxle  Leaving the engine running risks injury or
On snowy roads, ice can form on the braking death from accidentally moving the gear-
shift lever (manual transaxle) or the selec-
system, making the brakes less effective. Place the gearshift lever into the “R”
tor lever (CVT) or from the accumulation
While driving in such conditions, pay close (Reverse) position when parking on a down- of toxic exhaust fumes in the passenger
attention to preceding and following vehicles hill slope, into the 1st position when parking compartment.
and to the condition of the road surface. From on an uphill slope.
time to time, lightly depress the brake pedal
6 and check how effective the brakes are. For vehicles equipped with contin- Where you park
uously variable transmission
When driving downhill (CVT) Your front bumper can be damaged if you
scrape it over curbs or parking stop blocks.
It is important to take advantage of the engine Be sure that the parking brake is firmly set Be careful when traveling up or down steep
braking by downshifting while driving on when parked and that the selector lever is in slopes where your bumper can scrape the
steep downhill roads in order to prevent the the “P” (PARK) position. road.
brakes from overheating. When parking on a hill, it is important to set
the parking brake before moving the selector WARNING
Parking lever to the “P” (PARK) position. This pre-  Do not park your vehicle in areas where
N00629600304
vents loading the parking brake against the combustible materials such as dry grass or
transaxle. When this happens, it is difficult to leaves can come in contact with a hot
move the selector lever out of the “P” exhaust, since a fire could occur.
Parking on a hill (PARK) position.

When parking on a hill, set the parking brake,

Parking with the engine run- Do not keep the steering wheel
and turn the front wheels toward the curb on a
downhill, or away from the curb on an uphill. ning fully turned for a long time
If necessary, apply chocks to wheels.
Never leave the engine running while you More effort could be required to turn the
take a short sleep or rest. Also, never leave steering wheel.
the engine running in a closed or poorly ven- Refer to “Electric power steering system
tilated place. (EPS)” on page 5-67.

6-6 Driving safety

[Link] 7 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Loading information
 Vehicle maximum load on the tire: load  Production options weight: the combined
When leaving the vehicle on an individual tire that is determined by weight of those installed regular produc-
distributing to each axle its share of the tion options weighing over 5 lbs (2.3 kg)
Always remove the key from the ignition maximum loaded vehicle weight and in excess of those standard items which
switch and lock all doors and the liftgate dividing by two. they replace, not previously considered in
when leaving the vehicle unattended.  Vehicle normal load on the tire: load on an curb weight or accessory weight, includ-
Always try to park your vehicle in a well lit individual tire that is determined by dis- ing heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof
area. tributing to each axle its share of the curb rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim.
weight, accessory weight, and normal  Normal occupant weight: 150 lbs
Loading information occupant weight and dividing by two. (68 kg) * times the number of specified 6
 Maximum loaded vehicle weight: the sum occupants. (In your vehicle the number is
N00629900408
of - 3)
It is very important to know how much (a) Curb weight;  Occupant distribution: Occupant distribu-
weight your vehicle can carry. This weight is (b) Accessory weight; tion within the passenger compartment (In
called the vehicle capacity weight and (c) Vehicle capacity weight; and your vehicle the distribution is 2 in front,
includes the weight of all occupants, cargo (d) Production options weight. 1 in second row seat)
(including the roof load), non-factory-  Curb weight: the weight of a motor vehi-
installed options, if any, being towed. The tire *:150 lbs (68 kg) is the weight of one per-
cle with standard equipment including the
and loading information placard located on son as defined by U.S.A. and Canadian
maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and cool-
the driver’s door sill of your vehicle will regulations.
ant.
show how much weight it may properly carry.  Accessory weight: the combined weight
(in excess of those standard items which
WARNING may be replaced) of automatic transmis- Tire and loading information
 Never overload your vehicle. Overloading sion, power steering, power brakes, power placard
can damage your vehicle, adversely affect windows, power seats, radio, and heater, N00630100383
vehicle performance, including handling to the extent that these items are available
and braking, cause tire failure, and result as factory- installed equipment (whether The tire and loading information placard is
in an accident. installed or not). located on the inside sill of the driver’s door.
 Vehicle capacity weight: the rated cargo
It is important to familiarize yourself with the and luggage load plus 150 lbs (68 kg) *
following terms before loading your vehicle: times the vehicle’s designated seating
capacity.

Driving safety 6-7

 [Link] 8 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Loading information
4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For exam-
ple, if the “XXX” amount equals
1400 lbs. and there will be five
150 lbs. passengers in your vehi-
cle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650
6 lbs. (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) =650
This placard shows the maximum number of
lbs.)
occupants permitted to ride in your vehicle as 5. Determine the combined weight
well as “the combined weight of occupants
Steps for Determining Correct of luggage and cargo being loaded
and cargo” (A), which is called the vehicle Load Limit on the vehicle. That weight may
capacity weight. The weight of roof load is N00630201251
not safely exceed the available
included in the definition of “cargo” when 1. Locate the statement “The com-
cargo and luggage load capacity
determining the vehicle capacity weight. This bined weight of occupants and
placard also tells you the size and recom- calculated in Step 4.
cargo should never exceed XXX
mended inflation pressure for the original 6. If your vehicle will be towing a
kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s
equipment tires on your vehicle. For more trailer, load from your trailer will
information, refer to “Tires” on page 9-13.
placard.
be transferred to your vehicle.
2. Determine the combined weight
Consult this manual to determine
of the driver and passengers that
how this reduces the available
will be riding in your vehicle.
cargo and luggage load capacity
3. Subtract the combined weight of
of your vehicle.
the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lbs.

6-8 Driving safety

[Link] 9 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Loading information

NOTE
 The above steps for determining
correct load limit were written in
accordance with U.S.A. regula-
tions.
Your vehicle cannot tow a
trailer, so step 6 is irrelevant.
6

Driving safety 6-9

 [Link] 10 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Cargo loads

NOTE
 The following table shows examples on how to calculate total cargo/load capacity of your vehicle with varying
seating configurations and number and size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes only and may not
be accurate for the seating and load capacity of your vehicle.
 For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).

 Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross axle weight ratings (GAWR’s) for the front and rear axles
must not be exceeded. For further information on GAWR’s, vehicle loading, see the “Specifications” section of
this manual.
To determine the cargo load capacity for your
Cargo loads Cargo load precautions vehicle, subtract the weight of all vehicle
N00629700435 N00630300040

6-10 Driving safety

[Link] 11 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Cargo loads
occupants from the vehicle capacity weight.
For additional information, if needed, refer to
WARNING WARNING
 Do not load cargo or luggage higher than  The total weight of all occupants and lug-
“Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit”
the top of the seatback. Be sure that your gage, including your roof load, must not
on page 6-8.
cargo or luggage cannot move when your exceed the vehicle capacity weight. For
DO NOT USE the Gross Vehicle Weight Rat- vehicle is in motion. more information, refer to “Tire and load-
ing and Gross Axle Weight Rating numbers Having either the rear view blocked, or ing information placard” on page 11-2
listed on the safety certification label (A) your cargo being thrown inside the cabin  Roof load is determined by adding the
located on the inside sill of the driver’s door if you suddenly have to brake can cause a weight of the roof carrier and the weight
as the guide for passengers and/or cargo serious accident or injury or death. of the luggage placed on the roof carrier.
weight.  Put cargo or luggage in the cargo area of
your vehicle. Try to spread the weight
 For additional information, refer to 6
“Maximum roof load” on page 11-3.
evenly.

Loading cargo on the roof CAUTION

N00630400100
 Do not load luggage directly onto the roof.
Use a roof carrier that properly fits your
WARNING vehicle.
For installation, refer to the instruction man-
 Weight placed on the roof of the vehicle
ual provided with the roof carrier.
will raise the vehicle’s center of gravity
 Place the luggage on the carrier so that its
and adversely affect its handling charac-
weight is distributed evenly with the heaviest
teristics. As a result, driving errors or
items on the bottom. Do not load items that
emergency maneuvers could lead to a loss
are wider than the roof carrier.
of control and result in an accident. Drive
WARNING slowly and avoid excessive maneuvers  When attaching/removing the roof carrier
such as sudden braking or quick turning. and loading/removing luggage, do not apply
 To reduce the risk of serious injury or
excessive pressure on a single point.
death, the combined weights of the driver,  Make sure that the weight of luggage and
Depending on how and where the force is
passengers and cargo and must never the roof carrier do not exceed the maxi-
applied, this may cause dents on the vehicle
exceed the vehicle capacity weight. mum roof load, 176 lb (80 kg). If the maxi-
roof.
 Exceeding the vehicle capacity weight will mum roof load is exceeded, this could
adversely affect vehicle performance, cause damage to the vehicle or result in an
including handling and braking, and may accident.
cause an accident.

Driving safety 6-11

 [Link] 12 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Trailer towing

CAUTION Refitting the covers

 Before driving and after traveling a short dis-
tance, always check the load to make sure it 1. With each cover, put the tabs (C) on the
is securely fastened to the roof carrier. cover in the holes (D) in the roof.
Stop the vehicle periodically and check that 2. Slide the cover (B) toward the rear of the
the load remains secure. If the load is not vehicle to install it.
secure, it could fall from the vehicle and
damage your vehicle, another vehicle or cre-
ate a road hazard.
6
NOTE
 To prevent wind noise or reduction in gas
mileage, remove the roof carrier when not in Attaching the roof carrier
use.
 Before using an automatic car wash, check Slide each cover (B) toward the front of the
with the attendant to determine if the roof vehicle to remove it.
carrier should be removed.
 Be sure that adequate clearance is main-
tained for raising the liftgate when installing
a roof carrier.
Trailer towing
N00629800306

Roof carrier mounting brackets

(if so equipped)
N00630600085

When installing the roof carrier, use the

brackets (A).
The brackets (A) are located under each cover
(B).

6-12 Driving safety

[Link] 13 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Trailer towing

WARNING
 Do not use this vehicle for trailer towing.
It may not be possible to maintain control
or adequate braking.

Driving safety 6-13

[Link] 14 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分
[Link] 1 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Comfort controls

Vents ................................................................................................7-2
Manual air conditioning-Type 1 (if so equipped) ............................7-4
Manual air conditioning-Type 2 (if so equipped) ............................7-9
Automatic air conditioning-Type1 (if so equipped) ......................7-14
Automatic air conditioning-Type2 (if so equipped) ......................7-19
Important air conditioning operating tips ......................................7-24
Air purifier .....................................................................................7-25
7
AM/FM radio/CD player (if so equipped).....................................7-25
Handling of Discs ..........................................................................7-28
Audio Files (MP3/WMA/AAC) ....................................................7-30
Important Points on Safety for the Customer ................................7-34
Operation Keys ..............................................................................7-34
Listen to Radio ...............................................................................7-37
Listen to Satellite Radio (if so equipped) .......................................7-39
Listen to CDs .................................................................................7-41
Listen to MP3s ...............................................................................7-42
Listen to an iPod ............................................................................7-43
Listen to Audio Files on a USB Device .........................................7-45
Listen to Bluetooth Audio (if so equipped) ....................................7-48
Display Indicator ...........................................................................7-50
Audio Quality and Volume Balance Adjustment ...........................7-51
System Settings ..............................................................................7-52
Troubleshooting .............................................................................7-56
Antenna ..........................................................................................7-58
Clock (if so equipped) ....................................................................7-58
General information about your radio ...........................................7-59
 [Link] 2 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Vents
2- Open
Vents
NOTE
N00729900249

 On rare occasions, air from the vents of an

air-conditioned vehicle may be foggy. This is
only moist air cooling suddenly and does not
indicate a problem.
 Do not let drinks or other liquids get into the
vents as they could prevent the air condition-
ing from operating normally.

7 1- Close
2- Open
Changing the mode selection
A- Center vents N00736400552

B- Side vents Side vents To change the position and amount of air
flowing from the vents, turn the mode selec-
tion dial. Refer to “Mode selection dial” on
Move the knob (A) to make adjustments.
Air flow and direction adjust- To close the vent, move the knob (A) to the
page7-5, 7-10, 7-16, 7-21.
ments These symbols are used in the next several
outside as far as possible.
N00730200327
illustrations to demonstrate the quantity of air
coming from the vents.
Left Right : Small amount of air from the vents
Center vents
: Medium amount of air from the vents
Move the knob (A) to make adjustments. : Large amount of air from the vents
To close the vent, move the knob (A) to the
inside as far as possible. Face position

Air flows only to the upper part of the passen-

ger compartment.

1- Close

7-2 Comfort controls

[Link] 3 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Vents

NOTE
 With the mode selection dial between the
“ ” and “ ” positions, air flows mainly
to the upper part of the passenger compart-
ment. With the mode selection dial between
the “ ” and “ ” positions, air flows
mainly to the leg area.

Foot position
7
Air flows mainly to the leg area. NOTE
Foot/Face position  With the mode selection dial between the
“ ” and “ ” positions, air flows mainly
Air flows to the upper part of the passenger to the leg area. With the mode selection dial
compartment, and flows to the leg area. between the “ ”and “ ” positions, air
flows mainly to the windshield and the door
windows.

Defroster position

Air flows mainly to the windshield and the

door windows.

Foot/Defroster position

Air flows to the leg area, the windshield and

the door windows.

Comfort controls 7-3

 [Link] 4 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Manual air conditioning-Type 1 (if so equipped)

C- Blower speed selection dial Temperature control dial
D- Air conditioning switch N00736600222
E- Mode selection dial
Electric rear window defogger Turn the temperature control dial clockwise
F- to make the air warmer. Turn it counterclock-
switch P.5-131
wise to make the air cooler.

Blower speed selection dial

N00736500175

When the ignition switch or the operation

mode is in ON, select the blower speed by
7 turning the blower speed selection dial.
Turning the dial clockwise will increase the
Manual air conditioning- blower speed; turning the dial counterclock-
wise will decrease it. When the dial is set to
Type 1 (if so equipped) the “OFF” position, all fan-driven airflow
N00730300331
will stop.

Control panel NOTE

N00730500258
 While the engine coolant temperature is low,
the temperature of the air from the heater
will be cool/cold until the engine warms up,
even if you have selected warm air with the
dial.
 For instructions on how to use the “MAX
A/C” position (A), refer to “For quick cool-
ing” on page7-7.

A- Temperature control dial

B- Air selection switch

7-4 Comfort controls

[Link] 5 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Manual air conditioning-Type 1 (if so equipped)

If the outside air is dusty or contaminated in
Mode selection dial
some way, use the recirculation position.
N00736700151
Switch to the outside air position every now
To change the amount of air flowing from the and then to keep the windows from fogging
vents, turn the mode selection dial. Refer to up.
“Changing the mode selection” on page 7-2.

CAUTION
 Using recirculated air for a long time may
cause the windows to fog up.

When the air conditioning turns on, the air NOTE 7

selection is controlled automatically.  While the mode selection dial is set between
When the air conditioning turns off, the air “ ” and “ ” position, the air condition-
selection automatically goes back to the out- ing compressor will run automatically. The
side air position. outside air position will also be selected
The air selection indicator light (A) shows the automatically. (In this case, the air condition-
selected position. ing indicator will not change.)
 When the temperature control dial is set to
Air selection switch the “MAX A/C” position, the air selection
N00736800383
NOTE will be automatically set to the recirculation
 When the air conditioning operates with the position.
Normally, use the outside air position to keep air selection switch in the outside air posi-  When the temperature control dial is in the
the windshield and side windows clear and to tion, the system automatically determines “MAX A/C” position, if it is set to a position
quickly remove fog or frost from the wind- whether to continue using outside air or to other than “MAX A/C”, the setting for the
shield. perform recirculation. air selection switch is selected as described
If the outside temperature is high, the system below. The selection of recirculated air or
To change the air selection, simply press the selects recirculation to achieve rapid cooling outside air depends on the setting before
air selection switch. A sound will be made and causes the air selection indicator in the “MAX A/C” was used.
every time you push the switch. switch to illuminate. When the air condition-
• If automatic control was set:
ing turns off or the blower speed selection
Automatic control is continued
 Outside air {Indicator light (A) OFF} dial is set to the “OFF” position, the air
• If recirculated air was selected:
 Recirculated air {Indicator light (A) ON} selection automatically goes back to the out-
Recirculated air is selected
side air position.

Comfort controls 7-5

 [Link] 6 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Manual air conditioning-Type 1 (if so equipped)

• When the setting has changed from dis-
NOTE abled to enabled, the system will beep
• If outside air was selected:
two times and the indicator light will
Outside air is continued
flash three times.

Personalizing the air selection

NOTE
(Changing the function setting)
 The factory setting is “Enable automatic air
N00702101067
control”.
You can change the following functions to  While the mode selection dial is set between
match your preference. “ ” and “ ” position, the air selection

7  Enable automatic air control:

will automatically change to the outside air
position, even if the system is set to “Disable Push the switch again and the air condition-
When the air conditioning operates, the automatic air control”, in order to prevent ing compressor will stop and the indicator
air selection switch will be automatically windows from fogging up. light (A) goes off.
controlled.

 Disable automatic air control: CAUTION

Air conditioning switch  Using the air conditioning slightly increases
Even when the air conditioning operates,
N00731000377
the air selection switch will not be auto- the engine idle speed. Therefore, make sure
matically controlled. Push the switch, and the air conditioning your foot is firmly on the brake pedal when
compressor will turn on. The air conditioning shifting the transaxle into drive.
 Changing the settings indicator light (A) will come on.
Press the air selection switch for about 10 A sound will be made every time you push
seconds or longer. the switch. NOTE
When the setting has changed, the system  If a problem is detected in the air condition-
will beep and the indicator light will flash. ing compressor, the air conditioning indica-
tor light (A) blinks. Press the air
• When the setting has changed from
conditioning switch once to turn it off, then
enabled to disabled, the system will beep
once more to turn it back on. If the air condi-
three times and the indicator will flash tioning indicator light (A) does not blink,
three times. there is no problem. If it does blink, have it
checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer or a repair facility of your choice.

7-6 Comfort controls

[Link] 7 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Manual air conditioning-Type 1 (if so equipped)

NOTE Cooling
 Sometimes, for example after using a high- N00731201350

pressure car wash, the condenser can get wet, For ordinary cooling
and the air conditioning indicator light (A)
blinks temporarily. Wait for a while, press
the air conditioning switch once to turn the
system off, then once more to turn it back on.
Once the water evaporates, the blinking will
stop.

Operating the air conditioning

system
7
N00731101287
NOTE
 For quick heating, set the blower speed
selection dial to the position shown in the
Heating illustration. 1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ”
position.
Set the mode selection dial to the “ ” posi- 2. Push the air selection switch (A) to set it
tion and set the air selection switch (A) to the to the outside air position.
outside air position. 3. Push the air conditioning switch (B).
Turn the temperature control dial clockwise 4. Change the temperature by turning the
or counterclockwise to the desired tempera- control dial clockwise or counterclock-
ture. Select the best speed to fit your needs. wise.
5. Set the desired blower speed.

NOTE
 If the outside air is dusty or contaminated in
some way, push the air selection switch (A)
to set it to the recirculation position. Let in
some outside air from time to time for good
ventilation.

Comfort controls 7-7

 [Link] 8 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Manual air conditioning-Type 1 (if so equipped)

NOTE NOTE
 To cool the leg areas, set the mode selection  When the temperature control dial is set to a
dial to the “ ” position. position other than “MAX A/C”, the air
selection will automatically change to out-
For quick cooling side air. The air conditioning will revert to
the previous condition in which the “MAX
A/C” position was not selected.

Combination of unheated air and

heated air
7 N00731300253

Set the mode selection dial to the positions

shown in the illustration and set the air selec- Defrosting or defogging (wind-
tion switch (A) to the outside air position. shield, door windows)
N00731401570

The air flow will be directed to the leg area

1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ” and the upper part of the passenger compart- CAUTION
position. ment. Set the desired blower speed.  For safety, make sure you have a clear view
2. Set the temperature control dial to the Warm air flows to the leg area and unheated through all the windows.
“MAX A/C” position. or slightly warm air (depending upon the
3. Set the blower speed to the highest posi- position of the temperature control dial) flows Set the mode selection dial (between “ ”
tion. to the upper part of the passenger compart-
and “ ”) to remove frost or mist from the
ment.
windshield and door window.
NOTE
 When the temperature control dial is set to  For ordinary defrosting
the “MAX A/C” position, the air condition-
ing compressor will run automatically and Use this setting to keep the windshield and
the light will come on. The recirculation door windows clear of mist, and to keep the
position will be selected automatically. In leg area heated (when driving in rain or
this case, you cannot turn the air condition- snow).
ing off or select the outside air position.

7-8 Comfort controls

[Link] 9 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Manual air conditioning-Type 2 (if so equipped)

1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ”
position.
Manual air conditioning-
2. Set your blower to the maximum speed. Type 2 (if so equipped)
3. Set the temperature to the highest posi- N00730300298

tion.
Control panel
NOTE N00730500261

 While the mode selection dial is set between

“ ” and “ ” position, the air condition-
ing compressor will run automatically. The

1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ”

outside air position will also be automati-
cally selected. (In this case, the air condition-
7
position. ing indicator will not change.)
2. Select your desired blower speed by turn-  While the between “ ” and “ ” position
ing the blower speed selection dial. is selected, you cannot turn the air condition-
3. Select your desired temperature by turn- ing off or select the recirculation position.
ing the temperature control dial. This prevents the windows from fogging up.
 To defog quickly, direct the air flow from the
 For quick defrosting side vents toward the door windows. A- Temperature control dial
 When defrosting, do not set the temperature B- Air selection switch
control dial near the “MAX A/C” cool posi- C- Blower speed selection dial
tion. This would blow cool air on the win- D- Air conditioning switch
dow glass and fog it up. E- Mode selection dial
F- Electric rear window defogger switch
P.5-131

Blower speed selection dial

N00736500188

When the ignition switch or the operation

mode is in ON, select the blower speed by
turning the blower speed selection dial.

Comfort controls 7-9

 [Link] 10 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Manual air conditioning-Type 2 (if so equipped)

Turning the dial clockwise will increase the
blower speed; turning the dial counterclock-
wise will decrease it. When the dial is set to
the “OFF” position, all fan-driven airflow
will stop.

7
NOTE
 While the engine coolant temperature is low, Air selection switch
the temperature of the air from the heater N00736800396

will be cool/cold until the engine warms up, Normally, use the outside air position to keep
even if you have selected warm air with the the windshield and side windows clear and to
dial. quickly remove fog or frost from the wind-
shield.
Temperature control dial
N00736600176 Mode selection dial To change the air selection, simply press the
Turn the temperature control dial clockwise N00736700207 air selection switch. A sound will be made
to make the air warmer. Turn it counterclock- To change the amount of air flowing from the every time you push the switch.
wise to make the air cooler. vents, turn the mode selection dial. Refer to
 Outside air {Indicator light (A) OFF}
“Changing the mode selection” on page 7-2.
 Recirculated air {Indicator light (A) ON}

7-10 Comfort controls

[Link] 11 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Manual air conditioning-Type 2 (if so equipped)

and then to keep the windows from fogging  Changing the settings
up. Press the air selection switch for about 10
seconds or longer.
CAUTION When the setting has changed, the system
 Using recirculated air for a long time may
will beep and the indicator light will flash.
cause the windows to fog up. • When the setting has changed from
enabled to disabled,
the system will beep three times and the
NOTE indicator will flash three times.
 While the mode selection dial is set to the
• When the setting has changed from dis-
abled to enabled,
When the air conditioning turns on, the air
“ ” position, the air conditioning com-
pressor will run automatically. The outside
the system will beep two times and the 7
selection is controlled automatically. air position will also be selected automati- indicator light will flash three times.
The air selection indicator light (A) shows the cally.
selected position. NOTE
 The factory setting is “Enable automatic air
NOTE Personalizing the air selection control”.
 When the air conditioning operates with the (Changing the function setting)  While the mode selection dial is set to the
air selection switch in the outside air posi- N00702100044 “ ” position, the air selection will auto-
tion, the system automatically determines You can change the following functions to matically change to the outside air position,
whether to continue using outside air or to match your preference. even if the system is set to “Disable auto-
perform recirculation. matic air control”, in order to prevent win-
If the outside temperature is high, the system  Enable automatic air control: dows from fogging up.
selects recirculation to achieve rapid cooling
When the air conditioning operates, the
and causes the air selection indicator in the
air selection switch will be automatically
switch to illuminate. Press the air selection
controlled. Air conditioning switch
switch to return to outside air.
N00731000364

 Disable automatic air control: Push the switch, and the air conditioning
If the outside air is dusty or contaminated in Even when the air conditioning operates, compressor will turn on. The air conditioning
some way, use the recirculation position. the air selection switch will not be auto- indicator light (A) will come on.
Switch to the outside air position every now matically controlled. A sound will be made every time you push
the switch.

Comfort controls 7-11

 [Link] 12 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Manual air conditioning-Type 2 (if so equipped)

NOTE
 Sometimes, for example after using a high-
pressure car wash, the condenser can get wet,
and the air conditioning indicator light (A)
blinks temporarily. Wait for a while, press
the air conditioning switch once to turn the
system off, then once more to turn it back on.
Once the water evaporates, the blinking will
stop.

Operating the air conditioning

7 Push the switch again and the air condition-
system
ing compressor will stop and the indicator
N00731101274
NOTE
light (A) goes off.  For quick heating, set the blower speed
selection dial to the position shown in the
Heating illustration.
CAUTION
 Using the air conditioning slightly increases
the engine idle speed. Therefore, make sure Set the mode selection dial to the “ ” posi-
your foot is firmly on the brake pedal when tion and set the air selection switch (A) to the
shifting the transaxle into drive. outside air position.
Turn the temperature control dial clockwise
or counterclockwise to the desired tempera-
NOTE ture. Select the best speed to fit your needs.
 If a problem is detected in the air condition-
ing compressor, the air conditioning indica-
tor light (A) blinks. Press the air
conditioning switch once to turn it off, then
once more to turn it back on. If the air condi-
tioning indicator light (A) does not blink,
there is no problem. If it does blink, have it
checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer or a repair facility of your choice.

7-12 Comfort controls

[Link] 13 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Manual air conditioning-Type 2 (if so equipped)

Cooling Combination of unheated air and Defrosting or defogging (wind-

N00731200311 heated air shield, door windows)
N00731300266 N00731401583

Set the mode selection dial to the positions

shown in the illustration and set the air selec- CAUTION
tion switch (A) to the outside air position.  For safety, make sure you have a clear view
through all the windows.
The air flow will be directed to the leg area
and the upper part of the passenger compart-
Set the mode selection dial (between “ ”
ment. Set the desired blower speed.
Warm air flows to the leg area and unheated and “ ”) to remove frost or mist from the
or slightly warm air (depending upon the windshield and door window. 7
position of the temperature control dial) flows
to the upper part of the passenger compart-  For ordinary defrosting
1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ”
ment.
position. Use this setting to keep the windshield and
2. Push the air selection switch (A) to set it door windows clear of mist, and to keep the
to the outside air position. leg area heated (when driving in rain or
3. Push the air conditioning switch (B). snow).
4. Change the temperature by turning the
control dial clockwise or counterclock-
wise.
5. Set the desired blower speed.

NOTE
 If the outside air is dusty or contaminated in
some way, push the air selection switch (A)
to set it to the recirculation position. Let in
some outside air from time to time for good
ventilation.
 To cool the leg areas, set the mode selection
dial to the “ ” position.

Comfort controls 7-13

 [Link] 14 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Automatic air conditioning-Type1 (if so equipped)

1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ” NOTE
position.
Automatic air conditioning-
2. Select your desired blower speed by turn-
 While the mode selection dial is set to the
Type1 (if so equipped)
“ ” position, the air conditioning com-
ing the blower speed selection dial. N00731500268
pressor will run automatically. The outside
3. Select your desired temperature by turn- air position will also be automatically
ing the temperature control dial. selected. Control panel
 While the “ ” position is selected, you N00711801608
 For quick defrosting cannot turn the air conditioning off or select
the recirculation position.
This prevents the windows from fogging up.
 To defog quickly, direct the air flow from the
7 side vents toward the door windows.
 When defrosting, do not set the temperature
control dial near the maximum cool position.
This would blow cool air on the window
glass and fog it up.

A- Temperature control dial

B- Air selection switch
1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ” C- Blower speed selection dial
position. D- Air conditioning switch
2. Set your blower to the maximum speed. E- Mode selection dial
3. Set the temperature to the highest posi- F- Electric rear window defogger switch
tion. P.5-131

7-14 Comfort controls

[Link] 15 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Automatic air conditioning-Type1 (if so equipped)

NOTE NOTE
 There is an interior air temperature sensor  While the engine coolant temperature is low,
(G) in the illustrated position. the temperature of the air from the heater
Never place anything over the sensor, since will be cool/cold until the engine warms up,
doing so will prevent it from functioning even if you have selected warm air with the
properly. dial.
 When the temperature is set to the highest or
the lowest setting under the AUTO opera-
tion, the air selection and the air conditioning
will be automatically changed as follows.
• Quick Heating (When the temperature is set
to the highest setting) 7
Outside air will be introduced and the air
Temperature control dial conditioning will stop. In this case, manual
N00737001347 operation is possible.
Use this dial to adjust the temperature in the • Quick Cooling (When the temperature is set
passenger compartment. Turn the temperature to the lowest setting)
Blower speed selection dial control dial clockwise to make the air Inside air will be recirculated and the air
N00736900153 conditioning will operate. In this case, you
warmer. Turn it counterclockwise to make the
cannot select outside air and turn the air
When the ignition switch or the operation air cooler. conditioning off.
mode is in ON, select the blower speed by
turning the blower speed selection dial.
Turning the dial clockwise will increase the The above indicates the factory settings. You
blower speed; turning the dial counterclock- can personalize the air selection switch and
wise will decrease it. When the dial is set to air conditioning switch to match your per-
the “OFF” position, all fan-driven airflow sonal preferences.
will stop. Contact your Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
repair facility of your choice for assistance.
Refer to “Personalizing the air conditioning
switch (Changing the function setting)” on
page7-17.
Refer to “Personalizing the air selection
(Changing the function setting)” on

Comfort controls 7-15

 [Link] 16 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Automatic air conditioning-Type1 (if so equipped)

page7-16. Outside air is introduced into the passen-
ger compartment.
NOTE
 If the mode selection dial is set between
Mode selection dial  Recirculated air {Indicator light (A) ON}
Air is recirculated inside the passenger “ ” and “ ”, you cannot turn the air con-
N00737100093
compartment. ditioning off or select the recirculation posi-
To change the amount of air flowing from the tion.
vents, turn the mode selection dial. Refer to This prevents the windows from fogging up.
“Changing the mode selection” on page 7-2.  When the mode selection dial or the blower
speed selection dial is set to the “AUTO”
position again after manual operation, the air
selection switch will also be automatically
controlled.
7
Personalizing the air selection
(Changing the function setting)
N00760001103

You can change the following functions to

When the air conditioning turns on, the air
match your preference.
selection is controlled automatically. When
the air conditioning turns off, the air selection  Enable automatic air control:
automatically goes back to the outside air When the mode selection dial or the
Air selection switch position. blower speed selection dial is set to the
N00737200339 If high cooling performance is desired, or if “AUTO” position, the air selection switch
Normally, use the outside air position to keep the outside air is dusty or contaminated in will also be automatically controlled.
the windshield and side windows clear and to some way, use the recirculation position.
quickly remove fog or frost from the wind- Switch to the outside air position every now  Disable automatic air control:
shield. and then to keep the windows from fogging Even when the mode selection dial or the
up. blower speed selection dial is set to the
To change the air selection, simply press the “AUTO” position, the air selection switch
air selection switch. A sound will be made will not be automatically controlled.
every time you press the switch.
CAUTION
 Using recirculated air for a long time may
 Changing the settings
 Outside air {Indicator light (A) OFF} cause the windows to fog up.

7-16 Comfort controls

[Link] 17 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Automatic air conditioning-Type1 (if so equipped)

Press the air selection switch for about 10
seconds or longer.
NOTE
 Sometimes, for example after using a high-
When the setting has changed, the system
pressure car wash, the condenser can get wet,
will beep and the indicator light will flash.
and the air conditioning indicator light (A)
• When the setting has changed from blinks temporarily. Wait for a while, press
enabled to disabled, the system will beep the air conditioning switch once to turn the
three times and the indicator will flash system off, then once more to turn it back on.
three times. Once the water evaporates, the blinking will
• When the setting has changed from dis- stop.
abled to enabled, the system will beep
two times and the indicator light will Personalizing the air conditioning
flash three times. Push the switch again and the air condition- switch (Changing the function set- 7
ing compressor will stop and the indicator
ting)
NOTE light (A) goes off.
N00759800045
 The factory setting is “Enable automatic air
You can change the following functions to
control”. CAUTION match your preference.
 While the mode selection dial is set between  Using the air conditioning slightly increases
“ ” and “ ” position, the air selection the engine idle speed. Therefore, make sure  Enable automatic air conditioning control:
will automatically change to the outside air your foot is firmly on the brake pedal when When the mode selection dial or blower
position, even if the system is set to “Disable shifting the transaxle into drive. speed selection dial has been set to the
automatic air control”, in order to prevent
“AUTO” position or when the tempera-
windows from fogging up.
ture control dial has been set to the mini-
NOTE mum temperature, the air conditioning
 If a problem is detected in the air condition- switch is automatically controlled.
Air conditioning switch ing compressor, the air conditioning indica-
N00737300200 tor light (A) blinks. Press the air  Disable automatic air conditioning con-
conditioning switch once to turn it off, then trol:
Push the switch, and the air conditioning
once more to turn it back on. If the air condi-
compressor will turn on. The air conditioning The air conditioning switch is not auto-
tioning indicator light does not blink there is
indicator light (A) will come on. no problem. If it does blink, have it checked
matically controlled, unless the air condi-
A sound will be made every time you push at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or tioning switch is used.
the switch. a repair facility of your choice.
 Changing the settings

Comfort controls 7-17

 [Link] 18 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Automatic air conditioning-Type1 (if so equipped)

Press the air conditioning switch for about
10 seconds or longer.
Operating the air conditioning NOTE
When the setting has changed, the system system (automatic mode)  Set the temperature at about 75 under normal
conditions.
will beep and the indicator light will flash. N00731700260
 While the engine coolant temperature is low,
• When the setting has changed from
the temperature of the air from the heater
enabled to disabled, will be cool/cold until the engine warms up,
the system will beep three times and the even if you have selected warm air with the
indicator will flash three times. dial. To prevent the windshield and windows
• When the setting has changed from dis- from fogging up, the vent mode will be
abled to enabled, changed to “ ” or “ ” and the blower
the system will beep two times and the speed will be reduced.
7 indicator light will flash three times.

NOTE Operating the air conditioning

 The factory setting is “Enable automatic air
In normal conditions, use the system in the
system (manual mode)
conditioning control”. N00731800072
AUTO mode and follow these procedures:
 While the mode selection dial is set between Blower speed and vent mode may be con-
“ ” and “ ” position, the air condition- 1. Set the blower speed selection dial to the trolled manually by setting the blower speed
ing will run automatically, even if the system “AUTO” position. selection dial and the mode selection dial to
is set to “Disable automatic air conditioning
2. Select the temperature control dial to the the desired positions. To return to automatic
control”, in order to prevent windows from
fogging up.
desired temperature. The temperature can operation, set the dials to the “AUTO” posi-
be set within a range of around 61 to 89. tion.
The temperature will increase as the dial
is turned to the right. Defrosting or defogging (wind-
3. Set the mode selection dial to the
“AUTO” position.
shield, door windows)
N00732401492

The vents (except between “ ” and “ ”), CAUTION

recirculation/outside air, blower speed, and  For safety, make sure you have a clear view
ON/OFF of air conditioning will be con- through all the windows.
trolled automatically.

7-18 Comfort controls

[Link] 19 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Automatic air conditioning-Type2 (if so equipped)

To remove frost or mist from the windshield  For quick defrosting
and door windows, use the mode selection
NOTE
 When defrosting, do not set the temperature
dial (“ ” or “ ”). control dial to the maximum cool position.
This will blow cool air on the window glass
 For ordinary defrosting and fog it up.

Use this setting to keep the windshield and

door windows clear of mist, and to keep the Automatic air conditioning-
leg area heated (when driving in rain or Type2 (if so equipped)
snow). N00731500271

7
Control panel
1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ” N00711801611
position.
2. Set your blower to the maximum speed.
3. Set the temperature to the highest posi-
tion.

NOTE
 While the mode selection dial is set between
1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ” “ ” and “ ” position, the air condition-
position. ing compressor will run automatically. The
outside air position will also be selected
2. Select your desired blower speed by turn-
automatically. A- Temperature control dial
ing the blower speed selection dial.
 If the mode selection dial is set between B- Air selection switch
3. Select your desired temperature by turn-
ing the temperature control dial. “ ” and “ ” you cannot turn the air con- C- Blower speed selection dial
ditioning off or select the recirculation posi- D- Air conditioning switch
tion. This prevents the windows from
E- Mode selection dial
fogging up.
F- Electric rear window defogger switch
 To defog quickly, direct the air flow from the
P.5-131
side vents toward the door windows.

Comfort controls 7-19

 [Link] 20 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Automatic air conditioning-Type2 (if so equipped)

NOTE NOTE
 There is an interior air temperature sensor  While the engine coolant temperature is low,
(G) in the illustrated position. the temperature of the air from the heater
Never place anything over the sensor, since will be cool/cold until the engine warms up,
doing so will prevent it from functioning even if you have selected warm air with the
properly. dial.
 When the temperature is set to the highest or
the lowest setting under the AUTO opera-
tion, the air selection and the air conditioning
will be automatically changed as follows.
Also, if the air selection is operated manually
7 after an automatic changeover, manual oper-
ation will be selected.
Temperature control dial • Quick Heating (When the temperature is set
N00737000308 to the highest setting)
Use this dial to adjust the temperature in the Outside air will be introduced and the air
passenger compartment. Turn the temperature conditioning will stop.
Blower speed selection dial control dial clockwise to make the air • Quick Cooling (When the temperature is set
N00736900166 to the lowest setting)
warmer. Turn it counterclockwise to make the
Inside air will be recirculated and the air
When the ignition switch or the operation air cooler. conditioning will operate.
mode is in ON, select the blower speed by
turning the blower speed selection dial.
Turning the dial clockwise will increase the The above indicates the factory settings. You
blower speed; turning the dial counterclock- can personalize the air selection switch and
wise will decrease it. When the dial is set to air conditioning switch to match your per-
the “OFF” position, all fan-driven airflow sonal preferences.
will stop. Contact your Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
repair facility of your choice for assistance.
Refer to “Personalizing the air conditioning
switch (Changing the function setting)” on
page7-22.
Refer to “Personalizing the air selection
(Changing the function setting)” on

7-20 Comfort controls

[Link] 21 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Automatic air conditioning-Type2 (if so equipped)

page7-21. Outside air is introduced into the passen-
Personalizing the air selection
ger compartment.
 Recirculated air {Indicator light (A) ON} (Changing the function setting)
Mode selection dial N00760000021
N00737100136
Air is recirculated inside the passenger
compartment. You can change the following functions to
To change the amount of air flowing from the match your preference.
vents, turn the mode selection dial. Refer to
“Changing the mode selection” on page 7-2.  Enable automatic air control:
When the mode selection dial or the
blower speed selection dial is set to the
“AUTO” position, the air selection switch
will also be automatically controlled.
7
 Disable automatic air control:
Even when the mode selection dial or the
blower speed selection dial is set to the
“AUTO” position, the air selection switch
will not be automatically controlled.
When the air conditioning turns on, the air
selection is controlled automatically. When  Changing the settings
the air conditioning turns off, the air selection Press the air selection switch for about 10
automatically goes back to the outside air seconds or longer.
Air selection switch position. When the setting has changed, the system
N00737200342 If high cooling performance is desired, or if will beep and the indicator light will flash.
Normally, use the outside air position to keep the outside air air is dusty or contaminated in • When the setting has changed from
the windshield and side windows clear and to some way, use the recirculation position. enabled to disabled,
quickly remove fog or frost from the wind- Switch to the outside air position every now the system will beep three times and the
shield. and then to keep the windows from fogging indicator will flash three times.
up. • When the setting has changed from dis-
To change the air selection, simply press the abled to enabled,
air selection switch. A sound will be made the system will beep two times and the
every time you press the switch.
CAUTION
 Using recirculated air for a long time may indicator light will flash three times.
 Outside air {Indicator light (A) OFF} cause the windows to fog up.

Comfort controls 7-21

 [Link] 22 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Automatic air conditioning-Type2 (if so equipped)

Push the switch again and the air condition-
NOTE Personalizing the air conditioning
ing compressor will stop and the indicator
 The factory setting is “Enable automatic air
light (A) goes off. switch (Changing the function set-
control”. ting)
 While the mode selection dial is set to the
“ ” position, the air selection will auto- CAUTION N00759800029

 Using the air conditioning slightly increases You can change the following functions to
matically change to the outside air position,
the engine idle speed. Therefore, make sure match your preference.
even if the system is set to “Disable auto-
matic air control”, in order to prevent win- your foot is firmly on the brake pedal when
shifting the transaxle into drive.  Enable automatic air conditioning control:
dows from fogging up.
When the mode selection dial or blower
speed selection dial has been set to the
7 Air conditioning switch NOTE “AUTO” position or when the tempera-
 If a problem is detected in the air condition-
ture control dial has been set to the mini-
N00737300239
ing compressor, the air conditioning indica- mum temperature, the air conditioning
Push the switch, and the air conditioning switch is automatically controlled.
tor light (A) blinks. Press the air
compressor will turn on. The air conditioning conditioning switch once to turn it off, then
indicator light (A) will come on. once more to turn it back on. If the air condi-  Disable automatic air conditioning con-
A sound will be made every time you push tioning indicator light does not blink there is trol:
the switch. no problem. If it does blink, have it checked The air conditioning switch is not auto-
at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or matically controlled, unless the air condi-
a repair facility of your choice. tioning switch is used.
 Sometimes, for example after using a high-
pressure car wash, the condenser can get wet,  Changing the settings
and the air conditioning indicator light (A) Press the air conditioning switch for about
blinks temporarily. Wait for a while, press 10 seconds or longer.
the air conditioning switch once to turn the When the setting has changed, the system
system off, then once more to turn it back on. will beep and the indicator light will flash.
Once the water evaporates, the blinking will
• When the setting has changed from
stop.
enabled to disabled, the system will beep
three times and the indicator will flash
three times.

7-22 Comfort controls

[Link] 23 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Automatic air conditioning-Type2 (if so equipped)

• When the setting has changed from dis- 1. Set the blower speed selection dial to the selection dial and the mode selection dial to
abled to enabled, the system will beep “AUTO” position. the desired positions. To return to automatic
two times and the indicator light will 2. Select the temperature control dial to the operation, set the dials to the “AUTO” posi-
flash three times. desired temperature. The temperature can tion.
be set within a range of around 18 to 32.
NOTE The temperature will increase as the dial Defrosting or defogging (wind-
 The factory setting is “Enable automatic air is turned to the right.
conditioning control”. 3. Set the mode selection dial to the
shield, door windows)
N00732401489
 While the mode selection dial is set to the “AUTO” position.
“ ” position, the air conditioning will run CAUTION
automatically, even if the system is set to The vents (except “ ”), recirculation/out-  For safety, make sure you have a clear view
“Disable automatic air conditioning control”, side air, blower speed, and ON/OFF of air through all the windows. 7
in order to prevent windows from fogging conditioning will be controlled automatically.
up.
To remove frost or mist from the windshield
NOTE and door windows, use the mode selection
 Set the temperature at about 25 under normal
Operating the air conditioning conditions.
dial (“ ” or “ ”).
system (automatic mode)  While the engine coolant temperature is low,
N00731700286 the temperature of the air from the heater
will be cool/cold until the engine warms up,
even if you have selected warm air with the
dial. To prevent the windshield and windows
from fogging up, the vent mode will be
changed to “ ” or “ ” and the blower
speed will be reduced.

Operating the air conditioning

system (manual mode)
N00731800098

In normal conditions, use the system in the Blower speed and vent mode may be con-
AUTO mode and follow these procedures: trolled manually by setting the blower speed

Comfort controls 7-23

 [Link] 24 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Important air conditioning operating tips

 For ordinary defrosting  For quick defrosting NOTE

Use this setting to keep the windshield and  When defrosting, do not set the temperature
control dial to the maximum cool position.
door windows clear of mist, and to keep the
This will blow cool air on the window glass
leg area heated (when driving in rain or
and fog it up.
snow).

Important air conditioning

operating tips
N00733700280

1. Park the vehicle in the shade whenever

7 possible. Parking in the hot sun makes the
vehicle interior extremely hot which then
1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ”
requires more time to cool. If it is neces-
position.
sary to park in the sun, open the windows
2. Set your blower to the maximum speed.
for the first few minutes of air condition-
3. Set the temperature to the highest posi-
ing to expel the hot air.
tion.
1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ” 2. Afterwards, keep the windows closed
position. when the air conditioning is in use. The
2. Select your desired blower speed by turn- NOTE entry of outside air through open windows
ing the blower speed selection dial.  While the mode selection dial is set to the will reduce cooling efficiency.
3. Select your desired temperature by turn- “ ” position, the air conditioning com- 3. When running the air conditioning, make
ing the temperature control dial. pressor will run automatically. The outside sure the air intake, which is located in
air position will also be selected automati- front of the windshield, is free of obstruc-
cally. tions such as leaves. Leaves collected in
 While the “ ” position is selected, you the air-intake chamber may reduce air
cannot turn the air conditioning off or select flow and plug the water drains.
the recirculation position. This prevents the
windows from fogging up.
 To defog quickly, direct the air flow from the
side vents toward the door windows.

7-24 Comfort controls

[Link] 25 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Air purifier

Air conditioning system refrig- During a long period of disuse AM/FM radio/CD player (if
erant and lubricant recommen- so equipped)
dations The air conditioning should be operated for at N00734302115
least five minutes each week, even in cold
weather. This includes the quick defrosting The audio system can only be used when the
If the air conditioning seems less effective ignition switch or the operation mode is in
mode. Operating the air condition system
than usual, the cause might be a refrigerant ON or ACC.
weekly maintains lubrication of the compres-
leak.
sor internal parts to keep the air conditioning
Have the system inspected by your authorized
in the best operating condition. NOTE
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility
of your choice.  To listen to the audio system while the
Air purifier engine is not running, turn the ignition 7
switch to the “ACC” position or put the oper-
CAUTION N00733800151
ation mode in ACC.
 The air conditioning system in your vehicle The air conditioning system is equipped with If the ignition switch or the operation mode
must be charged with the refrigerant HFC- an air filter to remove pollen and dust. is left in ACC, the accessory power will
134a and the lubricant SUN-PAG56. The air filter’s ability to collect pollen and automatically turn off after a certain period
Use of any other refrigerant or lubricant will dirt is reduced as it becomes dirty, so replace of time and you will no longer be able to use
cause severe damage and may require replac- it periodically. For the maintenance interval, the audio system. The accessory power
ing your vehicle’s entire air conditioning comes on again if the ignition switch or the
refer to the “WARRANTY AND MAINTE-
system. engine switch is operated with it in the
NANCE MANUAL”.
The release of refrigerant into the atmo- “ACC” position. Refer to “ACC power auto-
sphere is not recommended. cutout function” on page 5-17 and 5-44.
The new refrigerant HFC-134a in your vehi- NOTE  If a cellular phone is used inside the vehicle,
cle is designed not to harm the earth’s ozone  Operation in certain conditions such as driv- it may create noise in the audio equipment.
layer. However, it may contribute slightly to ing on a dusty road and frequent use of the This does not mean that anything is wrong
global warming. air conditioning can lead to reduction of ser- with your audio equipment. In such a case,
It is recommended that the old refrigerant be vice life of the filter. When you feel that the use the cellular phone at a place as far away
saved and recycled for future use. air flow is lower than normal or when the as possible from the audio equipment.
windshield or windows start to fog up easily,
replace the air filter.
Contact your Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
repair facility of your choice for assistance.

Comfort controls 7-25

 [Link] 26 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

AM/FM radio/CD player (if so equipped)

 Please be aware that depending on the “Made for iPod”, “Made for iPhone”
NOTE iPod/iPhone model or version, operation mean that an electronic accessory has
 If foreign objects or water get into the audio
may differ. been designed to connect specifically to
equipment, or if smoke or a strange odor
iPod or iPhone, respectively, and has been
comes from it, immediately turn off the
certified by the developer to meet Apple
audio system and have it checked at an How to Clean performance standards.
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a N00715200023
repair facility of your choice. Never try to iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano, and
 If the product becomes dirty, wipe with a
repair it yourself. Avoid using the audio sys- iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc.,
soft cloth.
tem until it is inspected by a qualified per- registered in the U.S. and other countries.
 If very dirty, use a soft cloth dipped in
son. Apple is not responsible for the operation
neutral detergent diluted in water, and
 If the audio system is damaged by foreign of this device or its compliance with
then wrung out. Do not use benzene, thin-
7 objects, water, or fire, have the system
ners, or other chemical wipes. This may
safety and regulatory standards.
checked by a qualified Mitsubishi Motors
technician. harm the surface.
 The audio amplifier (if so equipped) is NOTE
located under the front right seat.  iPod and iTunes licensing allows individual
Do not subject the amplifier to a strong
Trademarks users to privately reproduce and play back
N00715300040
impact. non- copyrighted material as well as material
It could damage the amplifier or malfunc-  Product names and other proper names that may be legally copied and reproduced.
tioning could result. are the trademarks or registered trade- Infringement of copyright is prohibited.
marks of their respective owners.  Please refer to your vehicle’s user manual
 Furthermore, even if there is no specific regarding the iPod/iPhone that can be used
Important Points on Usage denotation of trademarks or registered with vehicles equipped with a Bluetooth®
N00715000021
trademarks, these are to be observed in 2.0 interface.
their entirety.
iPod/iPhone Playback Function (if
so equipped)

 This product supports audio playback

from iPod/iPhone devices, however dif-
fering versions mean that playback cannot
be guaranteed.

7-26 Comfort controls

[Link] 27 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

AM/FM radio/CD player (if so equipped)

5th generation 5th generation 160GB (2009) 160GB (2007) 80GB

(video) (video)
60GB 80GB 30GB
7

6th generation 5th generation 4th generation (video)

8GB 16GB (video camera) 8GB 16GB
8GB 16GB

3rd generation 2nd generation 1st generation

(video) (aluminum) 1GB 2GB 4GB
4GB 8GB 2GB 4GB 8GB

Comfort controls 7-27

 [Link] 28 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Handling of Discs

4th generation 3rd generation 2nd generation 1st generation

8GB 32GB 64GB 32GB 64GB 8GB 16GB 32GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
7

16GB 32GB 64GB 16GB 32GB 8GB 16GB 32GB 8GB 16GB

N00715400025
handling of discs.
Handling of Discs This explains care that should be taken in the

7-28 Comfort controls

[Link] 29 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Handling of Discs
 If discs are not going to be used for a long Maxi-
Important Points on Handling
period of time, remove these from the mum Com-
product. Type Size
 Fingerprints or other marks on the read playback ments
surface of the disc may result in its con- time
tent being more difficult to read. When Disc Playback Environment CD-DA 5 inches 74 minutes —
holding the disc, grip both edges, or one (12 cm)
edge and the center hole, in order that the In cold environments such as in mid-winter
read surface is not touched. when the interior of the vehicle is cold, turn-
 Do not affix paper or stickers, or other- ing the heater on and immediately trying to CD-TEXT 5 inches 74 minutes —
wise damage the disc. use the product may cause condensation (12 cm)
 Do not forcefully insert a disc if another is (water droplets) to form on the disc and inter-
already within the device. This can result nal optical components, and this may prevent 7
in damage to discs, or malfunction. the product from operating correctly. CD-R/RW 5 inches — •Disc
(12 cm) contain-
In these conditions, remove the disc, and wait ing MP3
Cleaning a short time before use. files
 Periodically clean the read surface of the Copyright
disc. When cleaning, do not wipe in a cir-
cular motion. Instead, wipe gently out- Actions such as unauthorized reproduction,
wards from the center of the disc to the broadcast, public performance, or rental of
outer edge. discs that comprise other than personal use Discs That May Not Be Played Back
 New discs may have burring around the are prohibited by law.
outer edge or in the hole in the center.  Playback of discs other than those
Ensure you check for these. If there are described in “Types of Disc That Can Be
burrs, these may lead to faulty operation,
Types of Disc That Can Be Played Back” is not guaranteed.
therefore ensure these are removed. Played Back  3 inches (8 cm) discs may not be used.
N00715500039  Do not insert irregularly-shaped discs (for
The following marks are printed on the disc example, heart-shaped), as these may
Important Points on Storage
label, package, or jacket. result in malfunction. Additionally, discs
 When not using discs, ensure these are that have transparent portions may not be
kept in cases, and stored out of direct sun- played back.
light.

Comfort controls 7-29

 [Link] 30 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Audio Files (MP3/WMA/AAC)

 Discs that have not been finalized cannot  When playing back non standard CDs, the
be played back. following may occur.
CAUTION
 CD-ROM and CD-R/RW media can only
 Even if recorded using the correct format • There may be noise during playback.
play back MP3 format audio files.
on a recorder or computer, application • There may be skipping in the audio.
 Actions such as copying audio CDs or files
software settings and environments; disc • The disc may not be recognized.
and either distributing these to others for free
peculiarities such as damage or marking, • The first track may not be played back. or for charge, or uploading files via the Inter-
or dirt or condensation on the lens inside • It may take longer than usual to start net or other means to servers is an infringe-
the product may render the disc unplay- playback of tracks. ment of the law.
able. • Playback may start from any point  Do not append the file extensions “.mp3”,
 Depending on the disc, some functions within the track. “.wma”, or “.m4a”, to other than
may not be used, or the disc may not play • Some parts may not be played back. MP3/WMA/AAC format files. Playing back
7 back. • Tracks may freeze during playback. discs with these types of files recorded upon
 Do not use discs with cracks or warps. • Tracks may be displayed erroneously. them may cause the files to be incorrectly
 If the disc has stickers affixed, residue identified for playback, which may lead to
loud noise, resulting in speaker damage or
from removed stickers, or affixed adhe-
sive, then do not use the disc.
Audio Files accident.

 Discs that have decorative labels or stick- (MP3/WMA/AAC)

ers may not be used. N00715600027
NOTE
This product can play back MP3/WMA/AAC  Depending on the condition of the disc
Nonstandard CDs format audio files recorded on CD-ROM, recorder or recording software used, correct
CD-R/RW, and USB devices. playback may not be possible. In these cases,
This product will play back audio CDs, how- refer to the user manual for your product or
ever please be aware of the following points There are limitations on the files and media software.
regarding CD standards. that can be used, therefore read the following  Depending on your computer’s operating
prior to recording MP3/WMA/AAC format system, version, software, or settings, files
 Ensure that you use discs with on the audio files on discs or USB devices. may not have a file extension appended. In
label surface. Additionally, ensure you read the user manu- these cases, append the file extensions
 Playback of other than standard CDs is als for your CD-R/RW drive and the writing “.mp3”, “.wma”, or “.m4a” when copying
software, and ensure these are used correctly. the files.
not guaranteed. Even if the audio can be
If the MP3/WMA/AAC format audio files  Files larger than 2GB in size cannot be
played back, the audio quality cannot be
includes title information or other data, then played back.
guaranteed.
this can be displayed.

7-30 Comfort controls

[Link] 31 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Audio Files (MP3/WMA/AAC)

Data Formats That Can Be Speci-

ROOT Name fica- Explanation
Played Back Folder
tion
N00715700031
Audio file
Format ISO96 Level 1 Maximum 8
Data formats that can be played on discs
specifica- 60 character file
(CD-ROM, CD-R/RW) and USB devices dif-
tions name, and 3
fer.
character file
extension.
Data format DISC USB device
(single-byte
MP3 alphanumeric

WMA X
capital letters,
numerals, “_”
7
1 level 2 level 3 level 4 level 5 level
AAC X may be used)
ISO96 Joliet Files names up
60 to a maximum
=Compatible exten- 64 characters
X =Non-compatible sion can be used.
Multises- Not supported (only first session
sion supported)
Folder Structure Maxi- 8 levels (if the root is the 1st
N00715800045 mum level)
Up to 8 folder levels can be recognized. number
You can create a folder structure as in Genre - of levels
Artist - Album - Track (MP3/WMA/AAC Maxi- 700 folders (including root)
format audio files) for management of tracks. mum
folder
number

Comfort controls 7-31

 [Link] 32 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Audio Files (MP3/WMA/AAC)

Speci- What Is MP3? Item Details
Name fica- Explanation N00715900033 Specification MPEG-1 AUDIO LAYER3
tion
MP3 is an abbreviation of “MPEG-1 Audio MPEG-2 AUDIO LAYER3
Maxi- 65,535 files (total number on Layer 3”. MPEG is an abbreviation of
mum file media. Other than MP3, WMA, Sampling MPEG-1: 32/44.1/48
“Motion Picture Experts Group”, and this is a
num- and AAC files not included) frequency MPEG-2: 16/22.05/24
video compression standard used in video
[kHz]
ber*1 CDs, etc.
MP3 is one of the audio compression meth- Bit rate MPEG-1: 32 to 320
File Maximum 64 bytes (for Uni-
ods contained in the MPEG audio standard, [kbps] MPEG-2: 8 to 160
name and code, 32 characters), files/ fold-
folder ers with file/ folder names and reduces the quality of sounds that are
VBR (vari- Support
7 name longer than this will not be dis- beyond the auditory resolution of the human
able bit rate)
restric- played or played back. ear and that are hidden by louder sounds, thus
creating high-quality data with a lower data Channel Stereo/ Joint stereo/ Dual
tions
size. mode channel/ Mono
USB sup- The recommended file system is Because this can compress CD audio to File exten- mp3
ported FAT32. approximately 1/10 its original data size with- sion
formats 1 partition only out perceptible loss, approximately 10 CDs
Supported ID3 tag Ver. 1.0, Ver. 1.1,
can be written to a single CD-R/RW disc.
tag informa- Ver. 2.2, Ver. 2.3, Ver. 2.4
*1:Do not include other than
MP3/WMA/AAC files. However, if stor- tion (ISO-8859-1, UTF-16 (Uni-
ing many tracks within the same folder, CAUTION code)), Titles, Artist name,
these may not be recognized even if less  MP3 files different to the standards at right Album name
may not play back correctly, or file/folder
than the maximum number of tracks. In Maximum 64 characters
names may not be displayed correctly.
these cases, divide the tracks up into mul- number of
tiple folders. characters
that can be
Standards for MP3 Files That Can
indicated on
NOTE Be Played Back the display
 The order in which folders and audio files
are displayed on this product may be differ- Specifications for MP3 files that can be
ent than how they are displayed on a com- played are as below.
puter.

7-32 Comfort controls

[Link] 33 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Audio Files (MP3/WMA/AAC)

What Is WMA? Item Details CAUTION

N00716000031 Specification Windows Media Audio  AAC supports digital rights management
WMA is an abbreviation of Windows Media Version7.0/8.0/9.0 (DRM). This product cannot play back AAC
files protected using this system.
Audio, and this is an audio compression for- Sampling fre- 32/44.1/48
 AAC files different to the standards at right
mat from Microsoft. This is a compression quency [kHz]
may not play back correctly, or file/folder
format that has a higher compression ratio
Bit rate [kbps] 48 to 320 names may not be displayed correctly.
than MP3.
VBR Support
(variable bit rate)
NOTE Standards for AAC Files That Can
 Microsoft, Windows Media, and Windows Channel mode Stereo/Mono
Be Played Back
are registered trademarks of Microsoft Cor- File extension wma 7
poration (USA) and in other countries.
Supported tag WMA tags Specifications for AAC files that can be
information Title name, Artist name, played are as below.
Album name
CAUTION
 WMA supports digital rights management Maximum num- 64 characters Item Details
(DRM). This product cannot play back ber of characters Specification Advanced Audio
WMA files protected using this system. that can be indi- Coding
 WMA files different to the standards at right cated on the dis- MPEG4/AAC-LC
may not play back correctly, or file/folder play MPEG2/AAC-LC
names may not be displayed correctly.
 “Pro”, “Lossless”, and “Voice” are not sup- Sampling MPEG4 8/11.025/12/16/22.05/
ported. What Is AAC? fre- 24/32/44.1/48
N00716100032
quency MPEG2 8/11.025/12/16/22.05/
[kHz] 24/32/44.1/48
AAC is an abbreviation of Advanced Audio
Standards for WMA Files That Coding, and this is an audio compression Bit rate MPEG4 8 to 320
Can Be Played Back standard used in “MPEG-2” and “MPEG-4”. [kbps] MPEG2 8 to 320
This features 1.4x the compression of MP3,
Specifications for WMA files that can be with comparable audio quality. VBR Support
played are as below. (variable bit rate)
Channel mode Stereo/Mono

Comfort controls 7-33

 [Link] 34 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Important Points on Safety for the Customer

Item Details WARNING WARNING
File extension m4a  The driver should not perform compli-  During thunderstorms, do not touch the
cated operations while driving. antenna or the front panel.
Supported tag AAC tags or ID3 tags
Performing complicated operations while This may lead to electrical shock from
information Title, Artist name,
driving may prevent the driver looking lightning.
Album name where they are going, and cause an acci-
Maximum number 64 characters dent.
of characters that Therefore stop the vehicle in a safe loca- CAUTION
can be indicated on tion before performing such operations.  Do not block ventilation holes or heat sinks
the display  Do not use during malfunctions, such as on the product.
when no sound is audible. Blocking ventilation holes or heat sinks may
7 This may lead to accident, fire, or electric prevent heat from escaping from within the
Important Points on Safety shock. product, leading to fire or malfunction.
 Ensure water or other foreign objects do
for the Customer not enter the product.
 Do not turn the volume up to the extent that
you cannot hear sounds from outside the
N00716200020 This may lead to smoking, fire, electric vehicle while driving.
This product features a number of pictorial shock, or malfunction. Driving without being able to hear sounds
indications as well as points concerning han-  Do not insert foreign objects into the disc from outside the vehicle may result in an
dling so that you can use the product cor- slot. accident.
rectly and in a safe manner, as well as prevent This may lead to fire, electric shock, or  Do not insert your hand or fingers into the
malfunction. disc slot.
injury or damage to yourself, other users, or
 In the event of abnormalities occurring This may result in injury.
property.
when foreign objects or water enter the
product, resulting in smoke or a strange
WARNING smell, immediately stop using the product,
 The driver should not pay close attention and consult an authorized Mitsubishi Operation Keys
to the display while driving. Motors dealer or a repair facility of your N00716300021

This may prevent the driver looking choice.

where they are going, and cause an acci- Continuing to use the product may result Turn the Power ON/ OFF
dent. in accident, fire, or electric shock.
N00716400035
 Do not disassemble or modify the product.
1. Press the PWR/VOL key.
This may lead to malfunction, fire, or elec-
tric shock.

7-34 Comfort controls

[Link] 35 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Operation Keys

Disc slot

Disc
*Label side
AFA109400 AFA109413

Turn the power on, and resume playback Turn the PWR/VOL key clockwise to Push the disc in a certain amount, and the 7
from the previous status. increase, and counter- clockwise to product will pull the disc in, and playback
2. Press the PWR/VOL key. decrease the volume. will start.
Turn the power OFF. 2. Press the key.
NOTE This will eject the disc from the product,
NOTE  The maximum value for volume is 45, and
so remove the disc.
 Hold down the steering MODE key to also
the minimum is 0.
turn the audio function ON/OFF.
 The initial setting for volume is “17”. CAUTION
 When replacing discs, first ensure that the
vehicle is stopped in an area in which stop-
Adjust Volume Insert/Eject Discs ping is permitted.
N00716500036
N00716600024  Do not insert your hand, fingers, or foreign
1. Turn the PWR/VOL key to adjust the vol- objects into the disc slot. This may lead to
1. Insert the disc into the disc slot with the
ume. injury, smoking, or fire.
label surface up.
 3 inches (8 cm) CDs are not supported.

Comfort controls 7-35

 [Link] 36 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Operation Keys

Explanation of Buttons
N00716700067

This explains names and functions of each part.

Type 1 Type 2

1- key 5- RADIO key 9- PTY key (Type 1), CAT key (Type 2)
Use to eject a disc. Switch the radio and the band. CAT (category content) searches and
6- PWR/VOL key scans can be performed while receiving
2- 3 key/4 key
Adjust the volume, and turn the power radio RBDS broadcasts.
For audio, rewind/fast forward.
ON/OFF. Search channels in the satellite radio*1.
For radio, use as preset keys 3 and 4.
7- MEDIA key 10- SCAN key
3- 2RDM key
Switch between CD and other sources. For audio, play scan playback; for
For audio, play random playback; for
Hold down the key to switch to AUX. radio, scan for stations.
radio, use as preset key 2.
8- DISP key (Type 1), INFO key (Type 2) 11- Disc slot
4- 1RPT key
Switch the content of the display. 12- PAGE key
For audio, play repeat playback; for
radio, use as preset key 1. Display indicator page advance.

7-36 Comfort controls

[Link] 37 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Listen to Radio
13- 5 key Steering wheel audio remote
Play/Pause Bluetooth Audio*2, and use control switch CD or MP3
as preset key 5 for radio. N00716800068 iPod*1 or USB device
14- 6 key
Bluetooth Audio*2
Return during audio track search, and
AM
stop Bluetooth Audio*2.
For radio, use as preset key 6. FM1, 2
15- key/ key SIR1, 2, 3, 4*3
For audio, select audio track/file; for
radio, perform automatic station selec-
tion. *1: An iPod cable (available separately) is
required.
7
Select channels in the satellite radio*1.
* : Requires a separately-purchased Blue-
2
16- MENU key tooth-capable audio device (vehicles
Switch to Menu mode. 1- Vol + key, - key with a Bluetooth® 2.0 interface).
17- /SEL key Adjust audio functions and the mobile
phone function volume. *3: Requires a satellite tuner connection.
Adjust audio quality and select items.
For radio, manually select stations. 2- CH key, key
Select channels in the satellite radio*1. Select CD and other audio source tracks
1 and radio stations.
Listen to Radio
* : Requires a satellite tuner connection. N00716900056
Hold down to skip up and down through
*2: Requires a separately-purchased Blue- This explains how to listen to AM and FM
tooth-capable audio device in equip- tracks.
Hold down to switch the satellite radio radio broadcasts.
ment by type (vehicles with a
band during satellite radio reception.
Bluetooth® 2.0 interface).
3- MODE key To Listen to the Radio
Hold down to turn the audio function
ON/OFF. Additionally, each time this is
Press the RADIO key to switch the band.
pressed, this switches the audio source.
The order of switching is as shown Switch between AM and FM bands.
below. The selected band is indicated on the display.
If devices are not connected, then these
are skipped, and the next source selected.
Comfort controls 7-37
 [Link] 38 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Listen to Radio
Press the SCAN key.
NOTE CAT Search
 Bands switch in the order AM, FM1, FM2, When a station is received, this is played for 5
SIR1*, SIR2*, SIR3*, and SIR4*. seconds, then the product searches for the During RBDS broadcast reception, select
 If no signal is received, bands will not be next station. CAT (category content), and automatically
switched to SIR2, SIR3, or SIR4.
scan for stations.
NOTE 1. During FM reception, press the PTY key
*: When a satellite tuner is connected  Press this button again while receiving the
(Type 1) or CAT key (Type 2).
station to cancel scan searching.
This switches to the CAT selection mode.
2. Press the PTY key (Type 1) or CAT key
Manual/Seek Station Selection
7 Preset Memory
(Type 2) to select CAT.
3. Press the key or key.
Turn the /SEL key to the frequency to lis- The CAT (category content) indicator will
ten to. Register the broadcast station in advance, and flash, and station selection will automati-
select this at a later time. cally start.
/SEL key Reduces the frequency When a station is received, the frequency
1. Tune in to the frequency to register.
(counter- being received. is displayed.
2. Hold down any of the keys from the 1RPT
clockwise) key to the 6 key.
/SEL key Increases the frequency NOTE
(clockwise) being received. A “Beep” sounds, and the preset key is  This receives the station detected first.
registered.  10 seconds after reception, CAT search mode
key Release the button to start will be cancelled.
(hold down) seek station selection, and
when a station is received, NOTE  To receive a different station, press the
key  The preset memory can register a maximum key or key again.
scanning stops.
(hold down) of 6 stations for each band.
 If a preset key that already has a station reg-
istered is selected, the new station will be
Scan Station Selection registered.
 Pressing the preset key will select the previ-
Collective search for stations that can be ously registered frequency.
received.
7-38 Comfort controls
[Link] 39 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Listen to Satellite Radio (if so equipped)

CAT Scan NOTE Select a Station

 A subscription is required to listen to satel-
During RBDS broadcast reception, select lite radio. Once the free trial period has
Press the key or key to select the sta-
expired, satellite radio can only be received
CAT (category content) to perform a collec- tion.
with a valid subscription.
tive search for stations.
 If no subscription has been made when the
free trial period expires, the display will Go down one step from the
1. During FM reception, press the PTY key key
alternate between “CALL” and “888-539- channel being received.
(Type 1) or CAT key (Type 2).
SIRI”. Go up one step from the
This switches to the CAT selection mode. key
2. Press the PTY key (Type 1) or CAT key channel being received.
(Type 2) to select CAT.
3. Press the SCAN key. To listen to Satellite Radio key
While the key is held down,
it will cycle down through
7
When a broadcast station is received, this (Hold down)
the channels being received.
is played for 5 seconds, then the product Press the RADIO key to switch the band.
While the key is held down,
searches for the next station. key
Switches between SIR1, SIR2, SIR3, and it will cycle up through the
(Hold down)
SIR4 bands. channels being received.
NOTE The selected band is indicated on the display.
 Press the SCAN key again while receiving
the station to cancel scan searching. NOTE
NOTE  When cycling up/down through channels, the
 Bands switch in the order AM, FM1, FM2, channel number display in the upper level of
SIR1, SIR2*, SIR3*, and SIR4*. the display changes.
Listen to Satellite Radio (if so  Switch satellite radio bands by holding down  When channel number “000” is selected, the
equipped) the key or key on the steering remote SIRIUS ID (12 digits) is displayed.
N00717000041 control switch.

This section explains how to listen to satellite Scan Station Selection

radio. *:If no signal is received, bands will not be
switched.
Channels are received in order and take 10
seconds each.

Comfort controls 7-39

 [Link] 40 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Listen to Satellite Radio (if so equipped)

1. Press the PTY key (Type 1) or CAT key
Scan All Channels NOTE (Type 2).
 Turning the /SET key will also cancel Switches to the category search mode,
Press the SCAN key. scan searching. and the category name is indicated on the
display.
All of the channels are scanned.
Preset Memory 2. Turn the /SEL key to select the cate-
gory.
NOTE
Register the channel in advance, and select 3. Press the /SEL key.
 Press this key again while receiving the
channel to cancel scan searching. this at a later time. Switches to channel search mode.
 Selecting a channel will also cancel scan 4. Turn the /SEL key to select the chan-
1. Tune in to the channel to register.
7 searching.
2. Hold down any of the keys from the 1RPT
nel.
5. Press the /SEL key.
key to the 6 key.
A “Beep” sounds, and the selected chan-
Scan Category Channels A “Beep” sounds, and the preset key is
nel is received. (Channel preliminary set-
registered.
ting mode)
1. Press the PTY key (Type 1) or CAT key The channel name shown on the display
(Type 2). NOTE flashes.
Switches to the category search mode,
 The preset memory can register a maximum Press the /SEL key again to cancel the
and the category name is indicated on the of 6 stations per band. search mode and return to normal recep-
display.  If a preset key that already has a channel reg- tion.
2. Turn the /SEL key to select the cate- istered is selected, the new channel will be
6. To continue the search, turn the /SEL
gory. registered.
key to select the channel.
3. Press the SCAN key.  Pressing the preset key will select the previ-
ously registered channel. The selected channel is received.
The channels in the selected category are
scanned. The preset channels on the display are shown 7. Press the /SEL key.
as “P1” though “P6”. Cancels the search mode and returns to
normal reception.
NOTE
 Press the SCAN key or PTY key (Type 1) or Channel Search
CAT key (Type 2) again while receiving the
channel to return to cancel scan searching.
Other channels can be selected while listen-
ing to a channel.
7-40 Comfort controls
[Link] 41 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Listen to CDs

NOTE Listen to CDs Switch Playback Mode

 After making preliminary settings in the N00717100039
channel search mode, this will switch to the Repeat playback, random playback, and scan
This explains how to listen to audio CDs
channel being received.
(CD-DA/CD-TEXT). playback are possible.
 Channel number “000” is for the SIRUS ID
display, so it cannot be searched.
 If the “PTY ALL” or “CAT ALL” category Play CDs Repeat Playback (RPT)
is selected, all channels can be searched in
the channel search mode. Press the 1RPT key.
Insert the disc.
 In the category mode, press the PTY key
(Type 1) or CAT key (Type 2) to cancel Repeat playback of the track currently being
Insert a disc to automatically start playback.
search mode.
 “Insert/Eject Discs” (P.7-35) played. 7
 In the channel search mode, press the 6 If a disc is already within the product, press
key to return to the category search mode. the MEDIA key to switch to CD as the NOTE
 In the channel preliminary setting mode, source.  Pressing again will cancel.
press the 6 key to return to the category  Selecting a track, ejecting, fast forwarding,
search mode without returning to the previ- or rewinding will cancel.
ous channel search mode. Select the Track
 If there is no operation for 10 seconds, the
search mode will be cancelled.
Press the key or key to select the Random Playback (RDM)
track.

Initialize the CODE (Passcode) This enables selection of the next or previous Press the 2RDM key.
track.
Play the tracks on the disc in a random order.
The CODE required for changing the LOCK
settings in the satellite settings is initialized. Fast Forward or Rewind NOTE
(The factory setting is “1111”.)
 Pressing again will cancel.
When the power is off, press the PWR/VOL Hold down the 3 key or the 4 key.  Ejecting will cancel this.
key while holding down the /SEL key.
Fast forward/rewind is possible.
 “Turn the Power ON/OFF” (P7-34)

Comfort controls 7-41

 [Link] 42 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Listen to MP3s
If a disc is already within the product, press
Scan Playback (SCAN) Repeat Playback (RPT)
the MEDIA key to switch to CD as the
source.
Press the SCAN key. Press the 1RPT key.

Play the first 10 seconds of each track on the NOTE Repeat playback of the track currently being
disc in order.  Depending on the file structure, it may take played.
some time to read the contents of the disc.

NOTE NOTE
 Press this button again during playback if  Pressing again will cancel.
you wish to hear that track, and that track Select the Track (File)  Selecting a file, ejecting, fast forwarding, or
7 will play normally. rewinding will cancel.
Press the key or key to select the
track.
Listen to MP3s Folder Repeat Playback
N00717200030
This enables selection of the next or previous
track. Hold down the 1RPT key.
This explains how to listen to audio files on a
disc.
Fast Forward or Rewind Repeat playback of the tracks within the
folder currently being played.
CAUTION
 CD-ROM and CD-R/RW media can only Hold down the 3 key or the 4 key.
play back MP3 format audio files.
NOTE
Fast forward/rewind is possible.  Pressing again will cancel.
 Even if the file is selected, folder repeat
playback will not be cancelled.
To Listen to MP3s Switch Playback Mode
Insert the disc. Repeat playback, random playback, and scan Random Playback (RDM)
playback are possible.
Insert a disc to automatically start playback.
 “Insert/Eject Discs” (P.7-35) Press the 2RDM key.

7-42 Comfort controls

[Link] 43 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Listen to an iPod
Play the tracks in the folder in a random
order.
Search Tracks Listen to an iPod
N00717300031

Search folders and files, and select a track. By connecting commercially-available

NOTE
iPod/iPhone devices to this product, you can
 Pressing again will cancel.
1. Turn the /SEL key to select the folder. play back tracks on these through the product.
2. Press the /SEL key.
Folder Random Playback Files within the selected folder are dis-
CAUTION
 Do not leave the iPod/iPhone unattended in
played.
the vehicle.
Hold down the 2RDM key. 3. Turn the /SEL key to select the file.  Never hold these devices in your hand to
Play all tracks in folders on the disc in a ran- 4. Press the /SEL key. operate while driving, as this is dangerous. 7
dom order.  No indemnification for data loss resulting
This plays the selected file (track). when the iPod/iPhone is connected to the
product will be possible.
NOTE  Depending on how the devices are handled,
 Pressing again will cancel.
NOTE audio files being damaged or lost, therefore
 While the folder is selected, press the 6 it is recommended that data be backed up.
key to cancel track search mode.
Scan Playback (SCAN)  If there is no operation for 10 seconds after
selecting the folder, then track search mode NOTE
will be cancelled.
Press the SCAN key.  Depending on the generation, model, or soft-
 Select the folder, and hold down the /SEL ware version of the iPod/iPhone, playback
Play the first 10 seconds of each track in the key to start playback from the first track in on this product may not be possible.
that folder. (P.7-26) Additionally, playback as
folder currently being played in order.
 While the file is selected, press the 6 key explained in this document may not be possi-
to return to the previous operation. ble.
NOTE  While the file is selected, hold down the
 Press this button again during playback if
6 key to cancel track search mode.
you wish to hear that track, and that track
 If there is no operation for five seconds after
will play normally.
selecting the file, that file is played back.
 Disc operations such as selecting a track will
cancel track search mode.

Comfort controls 7-43

 [Link] 44 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Listen to an iPod

NOTE NOTE Fast Forward or Rewind

 Regarding details such as types of  Data containing copyright information may
iPod/iPhone that can be connected to equip- not play back.
Hold down the 3 key or the 4 key.
ment by type (vehicles with a Bluetooth® 2.0  It is recommended that the iPod/iPhone
interface), and types of files that can be equalizer settings be set to flat. Fast forward/rewind is possible.
played back, refer to “Types of connectable  Operate the iPod/iPhone while connected to
devices and supported file specifications” on this product.
page 5-155.  If the iPod/iPhone is connected via Bluetooth Switch Playback Mode
 Regarding how to connect the iPod/iPhone, as a Bluetooth-capable audio device, then do
refer to “How to connect an iPod” on page not connect the iPod/iPhone using an iPod Repeat playback and shuffle playback are
5-154. cable. Connection using both methods will
possible.
7  When connecting the iPod/iPhone, use a result in erroneous operation.
commercially-available iPod connection  If an iPod/iPhone does not operate correctly,
cable. then remove the iPod/iPhone from the prod- Repeat Playback (RPT)
 Set up the device in order that no unsafe uct, reset, then reconnect.
actions, such as plugging in the connection Press the 1RPT key.
cable are taken while driving.
 When inserting and removing the
Play iPod
Repeat playback of the track currently being
iPod/iPhone, for safety’s sake first stop the played.
vehicle. Press the MEDIA key to set the iPod as the
 Depending on the status of the iPod/iPhone, source.
it may take some time until the device is rec- NOTE
ognized, or playback starts. The selected source is indicated on the dis-  Pressing again will cancel.
 Buttons on the product will not operate while play.
the iPod/iPhone is connected.
 iPod/iPhone specifications and settings may
Select the Track (File) Shuffle Playback (RDM)
mean that a connection is not possible, or
result in differences in operation or display.
Press the 2RDM key.
 Depending on audio data in the iPod/iPhone, Press the key or key to select the
track information may not be displayed cor- track. Play tracks in the category currently being
rectly.
played in a random order.
 Depending on the status of the vehicle and This enables selection of the next or previous
device, the iPod/iPhone may not play back track.
after starting the engine.

7-44 Comfort controls

[Link] 45 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Listen to Audio Files on a USB Device

NOTE Select the track, and press the /SEL CAUTION

key to play.
 Pressing again will cancel.  Do not leave the USB device unattended in
the vehicle.
NOTE  Never hold these devices in your hand to
Album Shuffle Playback  While the category (1st level) is selected, operate while driving, as this is dangerous.
 Do not use hard discs, card readers, or mem-
press the 6 key to cancel track search
ory readers, as damage may occur to these or
Hold down the 2RDM key. mode.
to the data contained therein. If these are
 If there is no operation for 10 seconds after
erroneously connected, then turn the ignition
Play back the album in a random order selecting the category, then track search
switch to the “LOCK” position or put the
(tracks in any order on the album). mode will be cancelled.
operation mode in OFF, then remove.
 Select the category, and hold down the
 Because of the risk of data loss, it is recom- 7
NOTE /SEL key to start playback from the first mended that files be backed up.
track in that category.  No guarantee is made as regards damage to
 Pressing again will cancel.
 While the track is selected, press the 6 the USB device, nor regarding loss or dam-
key to return to the previous operation. age to data contained therein.
 While the track is selected, hold down the  Depending on how the devices are handled,
Search Tracks audio files being damaged or lost, therefore
6 key to cancel track search mode.
it is recommended that data be backed up.
 If there is no operation for five seconds after
Search categories or track names, and select a selecting the track, that file is played back.
track.  iPod operations such as selecting a track will
cancel track search mode. NOTE
1. Turn the /SEL key to select the cate-  Regarding details such as types of USB
gory. devices that can be connected, and USB
input ports, refer to “Device types” on page
2. Press the /SEL key. Categories or Listen to Audio Files on a 5-155.
tracks within the selected category are
displayed. USB Device  Regarding details of types of files that can be
N00717400058 played back in equipment by type (vehicles
3. Turn the /SEL key to select the cate- with a Bluetooth® 2.0 interface), refer to
gory or track. By connecting commercially-available USB
“File specifications” on page 5-155.
devices such as USB memory to this product,
4. Press the /SEL key.  Regarding how to connect USB devices,
you can play back audio files through the
Repeat steps 1 to 4, and search for tracks. refer to “How to connect a USB memory
product.
device” on page 5-153.

Comfort controls 7-45

 [Link] 46 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Listen to Audio Files on a USB Device

NOTE NOTE Fast Forward or Rewind

 When connecting a USB device, use a con-  Depending on the type of USB device, usage
nection cable. Failure to use a connection may not be possible, or functions that can be
Hold down the 3 key or the 4 key.
cable when connecting may place undue load used may be restricted.
on, or damage the USB connector.  The recommended file system for USB Fast forward/rewind is possible.
 Set up the device in order that no unsafe memory is FAT32.
actions, such as plugging in the connection  The maximum supported capacity for USB
cable are taken while driving. memory is 32GB. Switch Playback Mode
 When inserting and removing the USB  Operate the USB device containing recorded
device, for safety’s sake first stop the vehi- audio files while connected to this product. Repeat playback, random playback, and scan
cle.
playback are possible.
7  Do not insert non audio devices into the USB
Play Back of Audio Files on a
port. Damage to the device or equipment
may result. USB Device Repeat Playback (RPT)
 Depending on the status of the USB device,
it may take some time until the device is rec-
Press the MEDIA key to set USB as the Press the 1RPT key.
ognized, or playback starts.
source.
 Depending on USB devices, buttons on the Repeat playback of the track currently being
product will not operate while the USB played.
The selected source is indicated on the dis-
device is connected.
play.
 USB device specifications and settings may
mean that connection is not possible, or NOTE
result in differences in operation or display. Select the Track (File)  Pressing again will cancel.
 Depending on the audio data in the USB  Selecting a file will cancel this.
device, track information may not be dis- However, it will not be cancelled in vehicles
played correctly. Press the key or key to select the
with a Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.
 Depending on the status of the vehicle and track.
device, the iPod/iPhone may not play back
after starting the engine. This enables selection of the next or previous
track. Folder Repeat Playback
 Data containing copyright information may
not play back.
 This product can play back MP3, WMA, and Hold down the 1RPT key.
AAC format audio files.

7-46 Comfort controls

[Link] 47 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Listen to Audio Files on a USB Device

Repeat playback of the tracks within the Play the tracks in all folders in a random
folder currently being played. order.
NOTE
 Press this button again during playback if
you wish to hear that track, and that track
NOTE NOTE will play normally.
 Pressing again will cancel.  Pressing again will cancel.
 Selecting a folder will cancel this.  Selecting a folder will cancel this.
 Cycling up/down through files will cancel  Cycling up/down through files will cancel Search Tracks
this. this.
 Even if the file is selected, folder repeat  Even if the file is selected, all folder random
playback will not be cancelled. playback will not be cancelled. Search folders and files, and select a track.

1. Turn the /SEL key to select the folder. 7

Folder Random Playback (RDM) Scan Playback (SCAN) 2. Press the /SEL key.

Files within the selected folder are dis-

Press the 2RDM key. Press the SCAN key. played.
Play tracks in the folder currently being Play the first 10 seconds of each track on the 3. Turn the /SEL key to select the file.
played in a random order. USB device in order. 4. Press the /SEL key.

This plays the selected file (track).

NOTE NOTE
 Pressing again will cancel.  Press this button again during playback if
 Selecting a folder will cancel this. you wish to hear that track, and that track NOTE
 Cycling up/down through files will cancel will play normally.  While the folder is selected, press the 6
this. key to cancel track search mode.
 Even if the file is selected, folder random  If there is no operation for 10 seconds after
playback will not be cancelled. Folder Scan Playback selecting the folder, then track search mode
will be cancelled.
Hold down the SCAN key.  Select the folder, and hold down the /SEL
All Folder Random Playback key to start playback from the first track in
Play the first 10 seconds of the first track in that folder.
Hold down the 2RDM key. each folder on the USB device in order.  While the file is selected, press the 6 key
to return to the previous operation.

Comfort controls 7-47

 [Link] 48 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Listen to Bluetooth Audio (if so equipped)

Operation methods below describe situations
NOTE NOTE once connection has been completed.
 While the file is selected, hold down the  Confirm together with the user manuals for
6 key to cancel track search mode. the commercially-available Bluetooth-capa-
 If there is no operation for five seconds after ble audio devices. NOTE
selecting the file, that file is played back.  Depending on the type of Bluetooth-capable  If the iPod/iPhone is connected via Bluetooth
 Operations such as selecting a track will can- audio devices, volume levels may differ. as a Bluetooth-capable audio device, then do
cel track search mode. There is the danger of loud volumes, so prior not connect the iPod/iPhone using an iPod
to use, it is recommended that you turn the cable. Connection using both methods will
volume down. result in erroneous operation.
Listen to Bluetooth Audio (if  “Adjust Volume” (P.7-35)
 Depending on the status of the Bluetooth
so equipped)
7 audio device, it may take some time until the Play Bluetooth Audio
N00717500033 device is recognized, or playback starts.
 Bluetooth audio device specifications and 1. Press the MEDIA key to set Bluetooth
This product can play back tracks on com-
settings may mean that connection is not Audio as the source.
mercially-available Bluetooth-capable audio
possible, or result in differences in operation
devices. or display. The selected source is indicated on the
 Depending on audio data in the Bluetooth display.
CAUTION audio device, track information may not be
 Never hold these devices in your hand to displayed correctly.
2. Press the 5 key. Bluetooth Audio play-
operate while driving, as this is dangerous.  Depending on the status of the vehicle and
back starts.
 Do not leave the Bluetooth audio device device, the iPod/iPhone may not play back
unattended in the vehicle. after starting the engine.
 Depending on how the devices are handled, NOTE
audio files being damaged or lost, therefore Connect a Bluetooth-capable  Hold down the 5 key to pause.
it is recommended that data be backed up.
Audio Device  Press the 6 key to stop.

NOTE Regarding how to connect your Bluetooth

 Depending on the type of Bluetooth-capable device, refer to “Connecting the Bluetooth®
Select the Track (File)
audio devices, usage may not be possible, or 2.0 interface and Bluetooth device” on page
functions that can be used may be restricted. 5-139. Press the key or key to select the
track.

7-48 Comfort controls

[Link] 49 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Listen to Bluetooth Audio (if so equipped)

This enables selection of the next or previous Play the tracks in the Bluetooth Audio device
track. in a random order.

Fast Forward or Rewind NOTE

 Pressing again will cancel.

Hold down the 3 key or the 4 key.

Fast forward/rewind is possible. Scan Playback (SCAN)

Press the SCAN key.

Switch Playback Mode
Play the first 10 seconds of each track on the 7
Repeat playback, random playback, and scan Bluetooth Audio device in order.
playback are possible.
NOTE
Repeat Playback (RPT)  Press this button again during playback if
you wish to hear that track, and that track
Press the 1RPT key. will play normally.

Repeat playback of the track currently being

played.

NOTE
 Each time the 1RPT key is pressed, this
switches in the order Repeat OFF, 1 track
repeat, All track repeat, and Repeat OFF.

Random Playback (RDM)

Press the 2RDM key.

Comfort controls 7-49

 [Link] 50 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Display Indicator

Display Indicator
N00717700022

This explains content of the display indicator.

Change the Display Mode CAUTION During FM Reception

N00717800049  The operation of changing display contents
You can change the content of the display may impede safe driving, therefore check This switches in the order “Frequency”, “Sta-
safety before operation. tion name”, and “Radio text”.
indicator.
Press the DISP key (Type 1) or INFO key
(Type 2) to switch the display content.
NOTE NOTE
 Radio text has a maximum display of 64
Each time the DISP key (Type 1) or INFO  Up to 11 characters may be displayed at one
characters.
key (Type 2) is pressed, the display content time. To display 12 or more characters, press
the PAGE key, and subsequent characters  If there is no text information to display, then
changes. “NO MESSAGE” is displayed.
will be displayed.

7-50 Comfort controls

[Link] 51 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Audio Quality and Volume Balance Adjustment

During Satellite Radio Reception NOTE During iPod Playback

(if so equipped)  If there is no text information to display, then N00718200024

“NO TITLE” is displayed. This switches in the order “Albums”, “Track

This switches in the order “Channel name”, name”, “Artist name”, “Genre name”, and
“Category name”, “Artist name”, “Track “Operating status”.
name”, and “Composer name”.
Display the ID3tag
NOTE
Hold down the DISP key (Type 1) or INFO
NOTE key (Type 2).
 If there is no text information to display, then
“NO TITLE” is displayed.
 The channel and category have a maximum
 Displayed genre name in equipment by type
display of 8 characters. The other items have
a maximum display of 36 characters.
This switches the ID3tag display.
Each time DISP key (Type 1) or INFO key
(vehicles with a Bluetooth® 2.0 interface). 7
 The genre name display may not be possible.
(Type 2) is pressed, this switches in the order
“Album name”, “Track name”, “Artist
During CD-DA playback name”, “Genre name”*, and “Operating sta-
tus”.
During Bluetooth® 2.0 Audio Play-
This switches in the order “Disc title”, “Track back (if so equipped)
title”, and “Operating status”. *:Displayed when playing back audio N00718300025

files on a USB device (vehicles with a

Operating details are the same as in “During
NOTE Bluetooth® 2.0 interface). iPod Playback” (P.7-51).
 If there is no text information to display, then
“NO TITLE” is displayed.
NOTE Audio Quality and Volume
 During display of the ID3tag, hold down the Balance Adjustment
During MP3/WMA/AAC Play- DISP key (Type 1) or INFO key (Type 2) to N00718400039
switch to the folder title display.
back Change audio quality settings.
 The genre name display may not be possible.

This switches in the order “Folder title”, “File

title”, and “Operating status”.

Comfort controls 7-51

 [Link] 52 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

System Settings

Adjust Audio Quality and Vol- Adjust-

Turn counter-
ment Turn clockwise
ume Balance items
clockwise

1. Press the /SEL key to select settings SCV OFF, LOW MID, HIGH
items. (Low vehicle (High vehicle
compensated compensated
Each time the /SEL key is pressed, this volume effect) volume effect)
switches in the order BASS, TREBLE,
FADER, BALANCE, SCV, and Cancel. System Settings
2. Turn the /SEL key to adjust.
7
N00718500069

Change system settings such as product time.

Adjust-
Turn counter-
ment Turn clockwise 1. Press the MENU key.
clockwise
items 2. Press the /SEL key to select settings
BASS -6 to 0 0 to +6 items.
(low low-pass (high low-pass
volume) volume) Each time the /SEL key is pressed, this
TRE- -6 to 0 0 to +6 switches in the order Satellite radio set-
BLE (Low high-pass (High high-pass tings*1, Gracenote DB*2, PHONE set-
volume) volume) tings, Adjust time, and Cancel.
FADER CENTER to FRONT 11 to 3. Turn the /SEL key to set.
REAR 11 CENTER 4. Press the /SEL key to input changes
(emphasize (emphasize and proceed to the next setting.
REAR) FRONT)
BAL- LEFT 11 to CENTER to *1: Displayed when a satellite tuner is con-
ANCE CENTER RIGHT 11 nected.
(emphasize (emphasize * :Displayed when playing back audio files
2

LEFT) RIGHT) (vehicles with a Bluetooth® 2.0 interface).

7-52 Comfort controls

[Link] 53 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

System Settings

Satellite Radio Settings (if so equipped)

Change each satellite radio setting.

Settings
Settings name Settings item Settings content
value
SIRIUS ID — — This displays the SIRIUS ID.
SKIP SETTING SKIP SETTING ON SKIP can be set for each channel. Channels for which SKIP is set are excluded
SELECT CH*1 OFF from the search during up/down channel selecting and scanning.
They can be received when selecting channels using the preset keys or searching
for a station.
7
SKIP SETTING — When “YES” is selected, the SKIP settings for all channels are turned off.
ALL RESET
LOCK SETTING LOCK SETTING ON LOCK can be set for each channel. Channels for which LOCK is set are
SELECT CH*2 OFF excluded from the search during up/down channel selecting and scanning.
If a channel for which LOCK is set is selected when selecting channels using the
preset keys or searching for a station, “CH LCKED” is displayed within about 2
seconds after the channel text is displayed. The sound is muted.
LOCK SETTING — When “YES” is selected and the CODE for settings is entered, the LOCK set-
ALL RESET tings for all channels are turned off.
LOCK SETTING — The CODE required for the LOCK settings is changed. (The factory setting is
EDIT CODE “1111”.)
If the input code is incorrect, “LOCK SETTING WRG LC” is displayed.

*1:Each time the /SET key is pressed, this switches in the order Settings channel select, Change SKIP settings, and Complete settings.
To return to “each channel SKIP setting”, press the 6 key.

Comfort controls 7-53

 [Link] 54 ページ ２０１４年１０月８日 水曜日 午後５時１４分

System Settings
*2:Once the CODE (passcode) of your choice is entered, each time the /SET key is pressed, this switches in the order Settings channel select,
Change LOCK settings, and Complete settings.
To return to “each channel LOCK setting”, press the 6 key. Input the CODE from the 1 RPT key to the 6 key.

M - “Minutes” setting
Time Setting NOTE Press this key to fast-forward the
 In order to finish adjusting the time, hold
“minutes”.
Set the time manually. down the /SEL key until the seconds are
3. Press the /SEL key.
reset to “00”.
This completes the adjustment.
Type 1
7 Type 2 NOTE
 In order to finish adjusting the time, hold
down the /SEL key until the seconds are
reset to “00”.
 The time can also be set using another proce-
H M dure.
/SEL Refer to “CLOCK” on page 7-58.
/SEL

PHONE Settings

1. Select “YES” at the “Adjust time” screen, Change the mobile phone voice cut- in set-
and press the /SEL key. tings and the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface lan-
1. Select “YES” at the “Adjust time” screen,
guage.
The hour can be adjusted. Press the and press the /SEL key. Depending on the vehicle, PHONE settings
2. Press the various keys to adjust. may not be possible.
/SEL key again to adjust the minutes.
2. Turn the /SEL key to adjust the time. H - “Hour” setting
3. Press the /SEL key. Press this key to fast-forward the NOTE
“hours”.  Cancel functions such as the mobile phone
This completes the adjustment. “dial lock”, and connect while on the
standby screen.

7-54 Comfort controls

[Link] 55 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

System Settings

NOTE Vehicles without a Bluetooth® 2.0 Inter- Vehicles with a Bluetooth® 2.0 Interface
 While connected, mobile phone (receiving face
calls, etc.) operations may not function cor- (“Set value” bold typeface indicates factory
rectly. A hands-free kit (available separately) is default settings.)
 Depending on the distance between the prod- required.
uct and the mobile phone, the conditions (“Set value” bold typeface indicates factory Settings Settings
within the vehicle, and types of screening, Settings content
default settings.) name value
connection may not be possible. In these
cases, situate the mobile phone as close as HFM ENG- Change the hands
Settings voice lan- LISH free module voice
possible to the product. Settings content
value guage set- FRENCH language.
 Even though a Bluetooth-capable mobile
phone, characteristics and specifications may PHONE Do not use mobile phone voice tings
SPANISH 7
mean that correct operation may not be pos- OFF cut-in.
sible.
PHONE During mobile phone voice cut- JAPA-
 For safety’s sake, do not operate the mobile
MUTE in, mute the audio. NESE
phone while driving. When operating the
mobile phone, first stop the vehicle in a safe PHONE During mobile phone voice cut-
location. ATT in, output audio from all speak- Gracenote DB (Vehicles with a
 Even though a mobile phone is Bluetooth
capable, phone specifications and settings
ers.
Bluetooth® 2.0 interface)
PHONE During mobile phone voice cut-
may result in differences in display, or pre-
IN-L in, output sound from the left The version number can be confirmed.
vent correct operation.
front speaker.
 Some models may not be confirmed as con-
nected, or may not connect. PHONE During mobile phone voice cut- 1. Select “Gracenote DB” and press the
IN-R in, output sound from the right /SEL key.
Supported profiles
front speaker. 2. Turn the /SEL key and select “DB Ver-
Hands-free HFP(v1.5)
During mobile phone voice cut- sion”.
Phonebook PHONE
OPP(v1.1), PBAP(v1.0) in, output sound from the left 3. Press the /SEL key.
transfer IN-LR
and right front speakers. The DB Version is displayed.

Comfort controls 7-55

 [Link] 56 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting
N00718600057

Please check these items if a message appears on the display, or if you think something is not working properly.

If This Message Appears...

A message is displayed on this product according to the situation.

Mode Message Cause Response

7 CD CHECK DISC The disc is inserted upside down. Insert with the label side up.
The disc has condensation on it. Wait a while before inserting again.
DISC ERROR The disc is damaged. Clean the read surface of the disc.
The disc is dirty.
INTERNAL E The drive has malfunctioned for some reason. Check that there is no problem with the disc, and
insert the disc again. If the problem persists, con-
sult an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
repair facility of your choice.
HEAT ERROR The temperature inside the product is high. Remove the disc, and wait for the internal tempera-
ture to return to normal.

7-56 Comfort controls

[Link] 57 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Troubleshooting
Mode Message Cause Response
USB FILE ERROR Files that cannot be played are selected. Select files that can be played.
 “Audio Files (MP3/WMA/AAC)” (P.7-30)
USB BUS PWR There is high or low electrical current or voltage. Turn the power OFF and wait a short while. If the
LSI ERROR There is an internal malfunction for some reason. problem persists, consult an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.
UNSUPPORTED Unsupported audio files have been played. Confirm audio files that can be played.
FORMAT  “Audio Files (MP3/WMA/AAC)” (P.7-30)
UNSUPPORTED An unsupported USB device has been connected. Please connect a USB memory device.
DEVICE
7
iPod NO SONG An iPod/iPhone not containing any tracks has been Connect an iPod/iPhone containing tracks.
connected.
VER ERROR This iPod/iPhone software version is not supported. Please change to a supported software version.
Other ERROR DC An abnormal direct voltage has been sent to the Turn the power OFF and wait a short while. If the
speakers. problem persists, consult an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.

If You Think Something Is Not Working Properly...

Here is a list of symptoms, causes and responses if you think something is not working properly.

Symptoms Cause Response

There is no sound or quiet The volume is turned to its minimum. Adjust the volume.
sound.  “Adjust Volume” (P.7-35)
The balance or fader is turned to one side. Adjust the balance or fader.
 “Adjust Audio Quality and Volume Balance” (P.7-51)

Comfort controls 7-57

 [Link] 58 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Antenna
Symptoms Cause Response
The disc cannot be A disc is already in the product. Eject the disc.
inserted.  “Insert/Eject Discs” (P.7-35)
There is no disc in the product, but the prod- Press the eject button once.
uct says it is loading.  “Insert/Eject Discs” (P.7-35)
The disc cannot be played. The disc is inserted upside down. Insert with the label side up.
The disc has condensation on it. Wait a while before inserting.
The disc is dirty. Clean the read surface of the disc.
The sound skips in the The disc is damaged or dirty. Check the disc.
7 same place.
There is no sound, even if Damage to or dirt on the disc means that its Check the disc. Additionally, if using CD-R/RW discs, their charac-
the disc is inserted. data cannot be read. teristics may render them unable to be played.

Antenna NOTE
N00734200439 • When covering your vehicle with a car
cover
• When driving into a structure that has a low
To remove ceiling.

Turn the pole (A) counterclockwise.

Clock (if so equipped)
To install
N00755001147

The time is displayed when the ignition

Screw the pole (A) clockwise into the base switch or the operation mode is in ON or
(B) until it is securely retained. NOTE ACC.
 Be sure to remove the roof antenna in the
following cases: NOTE
• When using an automatic car wash
 Reset the time after the battery terminals are
disconnected and reconnected.

7-58 Comfort controls

[Link] 5 ページ ２０１４年１０月８日 水曜日 午後５時 ５分

General information about your radio

Time Setting Type 2 NOTE

 The time can also be set using another proce-
dure.
Type 1 Refer to “System Settings” on page 7-52.

H M PAGE
General information about
/SEL
your radio
N00733901511

Your vehicle’s radio receives both AM and

FM stations.
The quality of your reception is affected by
7
distance, obstacles, and signal interference.
1. Press and hold the PAGE key until the
clock display flashes. This radio complies with Part 15 of Federal
2. Press the various keys to adjust. Communications Commission (FCC) Rules
(for vehicles sold in U.S.A.). Operation is
NOTE H - “Hour” setting
subject to the following conditions:
 To set the time for the Type 1 clock, refer to Press this key to fast-forward the
“System Settings” on page 7-52. “hours”.  The device may not cause harmful inter-
M - “Minutes” setting ference.
Press this key to fast-forward the  This device must accept any interference
“minutes”. received, including interference that may
cause undesirable operation.
3. Press the PAGE key to finish adjusting the
time. When the adjustment is complete,
the clock display stops flashing. CAUTION
 Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party meeting the above
NOTE conditions could void the user’s authority to
 If the PAGE key is pressed and held when operate the equipment.
the time adjustment is finished, the seconds
will be reset to “00”.

Comfort controls 7-59

 [Link] 60 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

General information about your radio

Signal transmission Reflection Cross modulation

FM signals do not follow the earth surface The reason why one can hear FM but not AM If one listens to a weak station and is in the
nor are they reflected by the upper atmo- in parking garages, under bridges etc., is that vicinity of another strong station, both sta-
sphere. For this reason, FM broadcasts cannot FM signals, unlike AM signals, are reflected tions might be received simultaneously.
be received over long distances. AM signals by solid objects such as buildings, etc.
follow the earth’s surface and are reflected by Because FM signals are easily reflected by
the upper atmosphere. For this reason, AM buildings, this can also cause reception dis-
broadcasts can be received over longer dis- turbances.
tances. The direct signal from the broadcast station
7 reaches the antenna slightly before the
FM AM
reflected signal. This time difference may
cause some reception disturbance or flutter.
This problem occurs primarily in urban areas.

25 to 40 mile radius 100 mile radius FM stereo reception

(40 to 64 km) (160 km)
Stereo reception requires a high quality
broadcast signal. This means that types of
disturbances mentioned previously become
Weak reception (fading) more marked and the reception range is
somewhat diminished during stereo recep-
Because of the limited range of FM signals tion.
and the way FM waves transmit, you may
experience weak or fading FM reception.
When the broadcast is blocked by mountains
or similar obstructions, reception can be dis-
turbed.

7-60 Comfort controls

[Link] 61 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

General information about your radio

Causes of disturbances

FM reception is affected by the electrical sys-

tems of vehicles in the vicinity, especially
those without an electronic noise suppression
device. The disturbance is even greater if the
station is weak or poorly tuned.
FM reception is not as sensitive to electrical
disturbances as AM. AM reception is sensi-
tive to electrical disturbances such as power
lines, lightning and other types of similar 7
electrical phenomena.

Comfort controls 7-61

[Link] 62 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分
[Link] 1 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

For emergencies

If the vehicle breaks down ...............................................................8-2

Jump-starting the engine ..................................................................8-2
Engine overheating ..........................................................................8-4
Jack and tools ...................................................................................8-5
How to change a tire ........................................................................8-5
Towing ...........................................................................................8-12
Operation under adverse driving conditions ..................................8-13
Fuel Pump Shut-off System ...........................................................8-14 8
 [Link] 2 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

If the vehicle breaks down

If the vehicle breaks down Jump-starting the engine CAUTION

N00836300187 N00836401781  Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-
volt battery. If the other system isn’t 12-volt,
If your vehicle breaks down on the road, If the engine cannot be started because the
both systems can be damaged.
move to the shoulder and turn on the hazard battery is weak or dead, you can start it with
warning flashers. If there is no shoulder, or the battery from another vehicle using jumper
the shoulder is not safe, drive in the right lane cables. 3. You could be injured if the vehicles move.
slowly, with the hazard lights flashing, until Set the parking brake firmly on each vehi-
you come to a safe stopping place. Keep the cle. Put an automatic transaxle or CVT in
WARNING “P” (PARK) or a manual transaxle in “N”
flashers flashing.  When using jumper cables to start a vehi- (Neutral).
cle, follow the procedures and be very cau-
4. Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF”
If the engine stops/fails tious.
position or put the operation mode in
8  If the electrolyte fluid looks frozen, DO
NOT ATTEMPT JUMP STARTING!!
OFF.
If the engine stops, there will be no power The battery might split open or explode if
assist to the steering and brakes, making these the temperature is below the freezing WARNING
difficult to use. point.  Perform step 4 on both vehicles before-
hand. Make sure that the cables or your
 The brake booster will not work, so the clothes cannot be caught by the fan or
brakes will not grip well. The brake pedal CAUTION drive belt. Personal injury could result.
will be harder to press than usual.
 Do not try to start your vehicle by pushing or
 Since there is no power steering assist, the towing. Vehicles with automatic transaxles
steering wheel will be hard to turn. cannot be started this way. Also, there is NOTE
more risk of an accident when a vehicle is  Turn off all lights, heater, and other electrical
being pushed or towed. loads. This will avoid sparks and help save
When the engine fails at the both batteries.
intersection
1. Take off any metal jewelry such as watch
bands or bracelets that might make an 5. Connect one end of one jumper cable to
Get help from your passengers, bystanders, accidental electrical contact. the positive (+) terminal of the discharged
etc. to push the vehicle and move it to a safe 2. Position the vehicles close enough battery (A), and the other end to the posi-
zone. together so that the jumper cables can tive (+) terminal of the booster battery
reach, but be sure the vehicles aren’t (B).
touching each other.
8-2 For emergencies
[Link] 3 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Jump-starting the engine

WARNING WARNING
 Be sure to follow the proper order when  Charging your battery while it is still in
connecting the batteries, of: your vehicle might cause the battery to
   catch fire and explode. If you have to
charge it while in the vehicle, disconnect
 Make sure that the connection is made
the negative (-) terminal.
to the engine properly. If the connection is
 Keep sparks, cigarettes, and flames away
directly made to the negative terminal of
from the battery because the battery could
the battery, the flammable gases from
explode.
inside the battery might catch fire and
explode, causing personal injury.  Keep your work area well vented when
charging or using the battery in an
 When connecting the jumper cable, do not
enclosed space.
connect the positive (+) cable to the nega-
NOTE  Remove all the caps before charging the
 Open the terminal cover before connecting
tive (-) terminal. Otherwise sparks can
make the battery explode. battery. 8
the jumper cable to the positive terminal of  Electrolyte (battery acid) is made of corro-
the battery. sive diluted sulfuric acid. If electrolyte
(Refer to “Battery” on page 9-12.) comes in contact with your hands, eyes,
 Use the proper cables suitable for the battery
CAUTION clothes, or the painted surface of your
size.  Make sure that the jumper cable will not be vehicle, thoroughly flush with water. If
Otherwise heat damage to the cables could caught in the cooling fan or other moving electrolyte gets in your eyes, flush them
result. parts in the engine compartment. immediately and thoroughly with water,
 Check the jumper cables for damage and cor- and get prompt medical attention.
rosion before use. 7. Start the engine in the vehicle providing  Always wear protective clothing and gog-
the boost. Let the engine idle a few min- gles when working near the battery.
6. Connect one end of the other jumper cable utes, then start the engine in the vehicle  Keep the battery out of the reach of chil-
with the low battery. dren.
to the negative (-) terminal of the booster
battery (B), and the other end to the 8. After the engine is started, disconnect the
engine block of the vehicle with the low cables in the reverse order from the way
battery (A) at the point farthest from the you connected them. As your vehicle has anti-lock
battery. brakes

If you drive your vehicle with a low battery

charge after the engine has been started by
For emergencies 8-3
 [Link] 4 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Engine overheating
using jumper cables, the engine may misfire. 4. If you see steam or spray coming from 8. If the engine coolant reserve tank needs
This can cause the anti-lock braking system under the hood, turn off the engine. coolant, you will probably also need to
warning light to blink on and off. This is only 5. If you do not see steam or spray coming add coolant to the radiator. Do not loosen
due to the low battery voltage. It is not a from under the hood, leave the engine on or remove the radiator cap until the engine
problem with the brake system. If this hap- until the bar graph for the engine coolant has cooled down.
pens, fully charge the battery and ensure the temperature warning display on the multi-
charging system is operating properly. information display goes down. When it WARNING
is in the middle of the normal zone, you  Removing the radiator cap could scald
can start driving again. If the bar graph you with escaping hot water or steam.
Engine overheating stays in the red zone, turn off the engine. When checking the radiator level, cover
N00836500352 the cap with a cloth before trying to
When the engine is overheating, the informa- WARNING remove it. Turn it slowly counterclock-
tion screen in the multi-information display wise, without pressing down, to the first
 Before raising the engine hood, check to
8 will be interrupted and the engine coolant see if there is steam or spray coming from
notch. The pressure in the system will then
be let out. When the pressure is COM-
temperature warning display will appear. under the hood. Steam or spray coming
PLETELY LET OUT, press down and
Also “ ” blink. If this happens: from an overheated engine could seriously
keep turning the cap counterclockwise
scald you.
until it comes off.
1. Stop the vehicle in a safe place. Turn on Do not open the hood until there is no
steam or spray.
the hazard warning flashers.
9. Start the engine, and slowly add coolant,
2. With the engine still running, carefully
6. When you do not see any more steam or up to the bottom of the filler neck. Use
raise the engine hood to vent the engine
spray, open the hood. Look for obvious plain water if you have to (and replace it
compartment.
leaks, such as a split radiator hose. Be with the right coolant as soon as possible).
3. Check that the cooling fan is running. If
careful as components will be hot. Any 10. Replace the radiator cap and tighten it
the fan is not turning, stop the engine
leak source must be repaired. fully. Check the engine coolant tempera-
immediately and contact an authorized
7. If there is no obvious leak source, check ture display on the multi-information dis-
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facil-
the coolant level in the engine coolant play. You can start driving again when
ity of your choice for assistance.
reserve tank. If there is none, or if it is too the bar graph for the engine coolant tem-
perature display returns to the normal
WARNING low, slowly add coolant.
zone.
 To avoid personal injury, keep hands, hair, 11. Have the system inspected by your autho-
jewelry and clothes away from the cooling
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair
fan. The cooling fan can start at any time.
facility of your choice.

8-4 For emergencies

[Link] 5 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Jack and tools

Jack and tools Tools How to change a tire

N00836600337 N00836901832

Storage WARNING
 The jack should not be used for any pur-
pose other than to change a tire.
The tools and jack are stowed in the luggage  Never get under the vehicle or put any
compartment. portion of your body under the vehicle
while it is supported by the jack.

Before changing a tire, first stop your vehicle

in a safe, flat location.
1- Bar 1. Park the vehicle on level and stable
8
2- Wheel nut wrench ground.
2. Set the parking brake firmly.
3. On vehicles equipped with manual trans-
Jack axle, stop the engine and move the gear-
shift lever to the “R” (Reverse) position.
1- Tools
Before removing the jack, lift up the luggage On vehicles equipped with continuously
2- Jack
floor board. variable transmission (CVT), move the
selector lever to the “P” (PARK) position,
and stop the engine.
4. Turn on the hazard flashers and set up a
warning triangle, flashing signal light,
etc., at an adequate distance from the
vehicle, and have all your passengers
leave the vehicle.

For emergencies 8-5

 [Link] 6 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

How to change a tire

5. To prevent the vehicle from rolling when 6. Get the jack, bar and wheel nut wrench
it is raised on the jack, place chocks or ready.
CAUTION
 Driving with an improperly inflated tire can
blocks (A) in front of and behind the tire (Refer to “Jack and tools” on page 8-5.)
cause an accident. If you have no choice but
that is diagonally opposite from the tire
to drive with an under-inflated tire, keep
(B) you are changing.
Spare tire information your speed down and avoid sudden steering
N00849600331 or braking, if possible. Inflate the tire to the
correct pressure as soon as possible. Refer to
“Tire inflation pressures” on page 9-17.
Compact spare tire  The compact spare tire should be used only
temporarily. While the compact spare tire is
The compact spare tire is stowed beneath the being used, the tire pressure monitoring sys-
luggage floor board of the luggage compart- tem will not function properly. Have the tire
ment. It is designed to save space in the lug- replaced or repaired at an authorized
8 gage compartment. Its lighter weight makes it Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility
easier to use if a flat tire occurs. of your choice as soon as possible.
 Do not go over 50 mph (80 km/h) when driv-
ing with the compact spare tire.
WARNING
WARNING  Tires, including spare tire, degrade over
 Avoid sudden starting and braking when
driving with the compact spare tire.
 Be sure to apply chocks or blocks to the time with age even when they are not  Do not drive through automatic car washes
correct tire when jacking up the vehicle. If being used. It is recommended that tires and over obstacles that could possibly dam-
the vehicle moves while jacked up, the over 6 years generally be replaced even if age the underside of your vehicle. Because
jack could slip out of position, leading to damage is not obvious. the compact spare tire is smaller than the
an accident.
original tire, there is less clearance between
the ground and your vehicle.
CAUTION  Because the compact spare tire is designed
NOTE  While the compact spare tire is stowed, the only for your vehicle, do not use it on any
 The chocks shown in the illustration do not inflation pressure should be checked at least other vehicle.
come with your vehicle. It is recommended once a month to assure that it remains at the  Do not put the compact spare tire on a differ-
that you purchase chocks or blocks and keep recommended inflation pressure. See the tire ent wheel, and do not put standard tires,
them in the vehicle for use if needed. and loading information placard attached to snow tires, wheel covers or trim rings on the
 If chocks or blocks are not available, use the driver’s door sill. Refer to “Tire and load- compact spare wheel. Otherwise, you could
stones or any other objects that are large ing information placard” on page 11-2. damage these parts or other parts on your
enough to hold the wheel in position. vehicle.

8-6 For emergencies

[Link] 7 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

How to change a tire

CAUTION To change a tire

 Do not use tire chains with your compact N00849801460

spare tire. Using a chain could cause damage 1. On vehicles with wheel covers, first
to your vehicle and loss of the chains. remove the covers (refer to “Wheel cov-
ers” on page 8-11). Then, loosen the
To remove the spare tire wheel nuts with the wheel nut wrench. Do
N00849700273
not remove the wheel nuts yet.
1. Lift up the luggage floor board.
2. To remove the spare tire, remove the
installation clamp (A) by turning it coun-
terclockwise.
WARNING
 Set the jack only at the positions shown 8
here. If the jack is set at a wrong position,
it could dent your vehicle or the jack
might fall over and cause personal injury.
 Do not use the jack on a tilted or soft sur-
face.
Otherwise, the jack might slip and cause
2. Place the jack under one of the jacking
personal injury. Always use the jack on a
points (A) shown in the illustration. Use
flat, hard surface. Before setting the jack,
the jacking point closest to the tire you make sure there are no sand or pebbles
wish to change. under the jack base.

NOTE
 The clamp cannot be used for a normal size NOTE
tire. Store a normal size tire under the lug-
 Put the spare wheel under the vehicle body
gage floor board.
near the jack. This makes it safer if the jack
slips out of position.

For emergencies 8-7

 [Link] 8 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

How to change a tire

5. Remove the wheel nuts with the wheel nut
wrench, then take the wheel off.

CAUTION
 Handle the wheel carefully when changing
the tire, to avoid scratching the wheel sur-
face.

6. Clean out any mud, etc. on the hub sur-

face (F), hub bolts (G) or in the installa-
tion holes (H) in the wheel, and then
3. Rotate the jack by hand until the flange mount the spare tire.
portion (B) fits in the groove (C) at the top
WARNING
8 of the jack.  Stop jacking up the vehicle as soon as the
tire is raised off the ground. It is danger-
ous to raise the vehicle any higher.
 Do not get under your vehicle while using
the jack.
 Do not bump the raised vehicle or leave it
sitting on the jack for a long time. Both
are very dangerous.
 Do not use a jack except the one that came
with your vehicle.
 The jack should not be used for any pur-
pose other than to change a tire.
 No one should be in your vehicle when WARNING
using the jack.  Mount the spare wheel with the valve stem
4. Insert the bar (D) into the wheel nut
 Do not start or run the engine while your (I) facing outward. If you cannot see the
wrench (E). Then put the end of the bar valve stem (I), you have installed the
vehicle is on the jack.
into the shaft’s jack end, as shown in the wheel backwards.
 Do not turn the raised wheel. The tires
illustration. Operating the vehicle with the spare wheel
that are still on the ground could turn and
Slowly rotate the wheel nut wrench until installed backwards can cause vehicle
make your vehicle fall off the jack.
the tire is raised slightly off the ground damage and result in an accident.
surface.

8-8 For emergencies

[Link] 9 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

How to change a tire

NOTE
 Flange nuts can be temporarily used on the
compact spare or steel wheel, but return
them to the original wheel and tire as soon as
possible.
 If all 4 wheels are changed to steel wheels,
use tapered nuts.

8. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire

touches the ground, by rotating the wheel
nut wrench counterclockwise.
7. [Vehicle with the tapered nuts] • Steel wheel
Install the wheel nuts with their tapered Install the wheel nuts with their tapered
ends facing inward, then tighten by hand ends facing inward, then tighten by hand 8
until the wheel is no longer loose. until the wheel is no longer loose.

9. Tighten the nuts in the order shown in the

illustration until each nut has been tight-
ened to the torque listed here.
65 to 80 ft-lb (88 to 108 N•m)
[Vehicle with the flange nuts]
• Aluminium wheel
CAUTION
 Never apply oil to either the wheel bolts or
Temporarily tighten the wheel nuts until
the nuts or they will tighten too much.
their flange section comes in contact
with the wheel and it is no longer loose.

For emergencies 8-9

 [Link] 10 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

How to change a tire

To store the flat tire or spare

tire, jack, bar and wheel nut
wrench
N00850000162

Reverse the removing procedure when stor-

ing the flat tire or spare tire, jack, bar and
wheel nut wrench.
Refer to “To remove the spare tire” on page
8-7 and “Jack and tools” on page 8-5.

CAUTION CAUTION
8  Never use your foot or a pipe extension to  Driving with an improperly inflated tire can
apply added force to the wheel nut wrench cause an accident. If you have no choice but
when tightening the wheel nuts. If you do so, to drive with an under-inflated tire, keep
you can over-tighten the wheel nuts and your speed down and avoid sudden steering
damage the wheel, wheel nuts and hub bolts. or braking, if possible. Inflate the tire to the
correct pressure as soon as possible. Refer to
“Tire inflation pressures” on page 9-17.
10. Lower the jack all the way and remove it.
 After changing the tire and driving the vehi-
11. Check the tire inflation pressure. The rec-
cle about 620 miles (1,000 km), retighten the
ommended tire pressure for your vehicle wheel nuts to make sure that they have not
is listed on the tire and loading informa- come loose.
tion placard attached to the driver’s door  If the steering wheel vibrates when driving
sill as shown in the illustration. Refer to after changing the tire, have the tire checked
“Tire inflation pressures” on page 9-17. for balance at an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer or a repair facility of your
choice.
 Do not mix one type of tire with another or
use a different size from the one listed. This
would cause early wear and poor handling.

8-10 For emergencies

[Link] 11 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

How to change a tire

Wheel cover (if so equipped) CAUTION

N00849400195  Trying to remove the wheel cover with only
your bare hands can seriously injure your
fingers.
To remove
Wrap the tip of the bar with a cloth, insert it
deeply into the notch provided in the wheel
To install
cover, and pry the cover away from the
wheel. CAUTION
Using the same procedure at the other wheel
 Before installing the wheel cover to the
cover notches, work the wheel cover away wheel, make sure that the tabs (A) on the
from the wheel to remove it completely. NOTE
back of the wheel cover correctly engage the
ring (B) to prevent the wheel cover from  Full wheel covers have a symbol mark (E) 8
coming off. Do not install a wheel cover that provided on the reverse side to show the air
has broken tabs. valve location.
Before installing the wheel cover to the
wheel, make sure that the opening with the
symbol mark is correctly aligned with the air
valve.

2. Push the bottom (F) of the wheel cover

into the wheel.
3. Gently push in both sides (G) of the wheel
cover and hold them in place with both
knees.
NOTE 4. Gently tap around the circumference of
 The wheel cover is made of plastic. Be care- the wheel cover at the top (H), then push
ful when prying it off. the wheel cover into place.
1. Align the tire air valve (C) and the wheel
cover notch (D).

For emergencies 8-11

 [Link] 12 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Towing

NOTE
 Do not use the tie-down hooks for towing.
These hooks are provided only for the pur-
pose of transporting the vehicle itself.
 Your vehicle cannot tow any other vehicle.

There may be local regulations concerning

towing in your area.
Obey the regulations of the area where you Do not tow all-wheel drive vehicles or CVT
are driving your vehicle. vehicles with this style.

8 Towing
N00837001928

If your vehicle needs to be Do not tow all-wheel drive vehicles with this style.

towed

If towing is necessary, we recommend you to

have it done by a commercial tow truck ser-
vice.
When towing is required, transport the vehi-
cle using a tow truck.
Incorect towing equipment could damage
your vehicle.

CAUTION
 Do not attempt to be towed by another vehi-
cle with a rope.

8-12 For emergencies

[Link] 13 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Operation under adverse driving conditions

Towing the vehicle by a tow CAUTION Towing a front-wheel drive vehi-

truck  [For front-wheel drive vehicle equipped with cle with front wheels off the
the active stability control (ASC)] ground (Type C)
If the vehicle is towed with the ignition
CAUTION switch in the “ON” position or the operation
Release the parking brake.
mode in ON and only the front wheels or
 This vehicle must not be towed by a tow Place the gearshift lever in the “N” (Neutral)
only the rear wheels raised off the ground
truck using sling lift type equipment (Type
(Type B or C), the ASC may operate, result- position (manual transaxle) or the selector
A) as illustrated. Using a sling lift will dam-
age the bumper and front end.
ing in an accident. When towing the vehicle lever in the “N” (NEUTRAL) position
with the rear wheels raised, turn the ignition (CVT).
 Do not tow all-wheel drive vehicles with the
switch to “OFF” or “ACC” position or put
front or rear wheels on the ground (Type B or
the operation mode in OFF or ACC. When
Type C) as illustrated. This could result in towing the vehicle with the front wheels Operation under adverse
the driving system damage or vehicle may
jump at the carriage.
raised, keep the ignition switch or the opera-
driving conditions 8
tion mode as follows.
If you tow all-wheel drive vehicles, use only N00837200675
[Except for vehicles equipped with the
Type D or E equipment.
F.A.S.T.-key]
All-wheel-drive vehicles cannot be towed
with only the front or rear tires on the ground
The ignition switch is in “OFF” or “ACC” If your vehicle becomes stuck in
position.
even if it is in “2WD” drive mode.
[Vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key]
sand, mud or snow
 Do not tow continuously variable transmis- The operation mode is in OFF or ACC.
sion (CVT) vehicles with the driving wheels If your vehicle becomes stuck in snow, sand,
on the ground (Type B) as illustrated. If the
Towing with rear wheels off the or mud, it can often be moved by a rocking
vehicle is towed like this, the continuously
motion. Rock your vehicle back and forth to
variable transmission (CVT) fluid may not ground (Type B) free it.
reach all parts of the transmission, thus dam-
aging it. Do not rev the engine or spin the wheels.
If you tow CVT vehicles, use Type C, D or E Set the gearshift lever to the “N” (Neutral) Constant efforts to free a stuck vehicle can
equipment. position. cause overheating and transaxle failure. Let
 If the manual transaxle is malfunctioning or Secure the steering wheel in a straight-ahead the engine idle for a few minutes to cool the
damaged, transport the vehicle with the driv- position with a rope or tie-down strap. transaxle before trying again.
ing wheels on a carriage (Type C, D or E) as If your vehicle is still stuck after several rock-
illustrated. ing attempts, call for help.

For emergencies 8-13

 [Link] 14 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Fuel Pump Shut-off System

WARNING On snowy or icy roads CAUTION

 When trying to rock your vehicle out of a  Do not depress the accelerator pedal rapidly.
stuck position, make sure that there are no  When driving on a road covered with The vehicle could start moving when it
people nearby. The rocking motion can snow or ice, use snow tires. Tire chains breaks free from the ice, possibly resulting in
make your vehicle suddenly lurch forward cannot be used on your vehicle. There an accident.
or backward, and injure any bystanders. may be state or local regulations about
using snow tires. Always check the regu-
lations in your local area before using On a bumpy or rutted road
On wet roads them. Refer to “Snow tires” on page 9-20
and “Tire chains” on page 9-20.  Drive as slow as possible when driving on
 Drive slowly. Do not make sudden starts bumpy, rutted roads or over potholes.
CAUTION or stops, sharp turns, or slam on the
8  Avoid flooded roads. Water is often deeper
than it looks, and you could be seriously hurt
brakes.
 Allow extra distance between your vehi-
CAUTION
by driving into flood water.  Driving on bumpy, rutted roads or over pot-
cle and the vehicle in front of you, and
holes can damage the tires and wheels.
 When driving in rain, on water-covered avoid sudden braking. Wheels with low-profiles tires or under-
roads, or through a car wash, water could get  If a skid occurs when the accelerator inflated tires are especially at risk for dam-
into the brake discs and make them fail tem-
pedal is depressed, take your foot off the age.
porarily. In such cases, lightly press the
pedal. Steer gently in the direction of the
brake pedal to see if they are working prop-
erly. If they are not, press the pedal lightly skid.
several times while driving to dry the brake  Your vehicle is equipped with an anti-lock Fuel Pump Shut-off System
pads or linings, then check them again. braking system (ABS). Hold the brake
N00860600028
 When driving in rain, a layer of water may pedal down firmly and keep it depressed.
form between the tires and the road surface Do not pump the brake pedal which will WARNING
(hydroplaning). This loosens your tires’ grip result in reduced braking performance.  Before attempting to restart the engine
on the road, making it difficult to steer or  After parking on snowy or icy road, it after a collision, always inspect the ground
brake properly. When driving on a wet road: may be difficult to move your vehicle due under the vehicle for leaking fuel.
• Drive your vehicle at a safe speed. to freeze-up of the brake. Depress the If a fuel leak is found or a fuel odor is
• Do not drive on worn tires. accelerator pedal little by little to move detected, do not restart the engine.
• Always keep the tires at the correct infla- the vehicle after confirming safety of the  Mitsubishi Motors recommends that your
tion pressures. vehicle. vehicle be inspected by an authorized Mit-
subishi Motors dealer after any collision.

8-14 For emergencies

[Link] 15 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Fuel Pump Shut-off System

In the event of a collision causing frontal air-
bag deployment, the fuel pump shut-off sys-
tem will activate to stop fuel supply to the
engine.

For emergencies 8-15

[Link] 16 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分
[Link] 1 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Vehicle care and maintenance

Service precautions ..........................................................................9-2 Cleaning the outside of your vehicle .............................................9-40

Catalytic converter ...........................................................................9-2
Engine hood .....................................................................................9-3
View of the engine compartment .....................................................9-5
Engine oil and oil filter ....................................................................9-5
Engine coolant .................................................................................9-7
Air cleaner filter ...............................................................................9-8
Manual transaxle oil (if so equipped) ............................................9-10
Continuously variable transmission (CVT) fluid
(if so equipped) .........................................................................9-10 9
Transfer oil (All-wheel drive models) ...........................................9-11
Rear axle oil (All-wheel drive models) .........................................9-11
Washer fluid ...................................................................................9-11
Brake fluid/Clutch fluid (if so equipped).......................................9-11
Battery ............................................................................................9-12
Tires ...............................................................................................9-13
Clutch pedal free play (if so equipped)..........................................9-20
Brake pedal free play .....................................................................9-20
Parking brake .................................................................................9-21
Wiper blades ..................................................................................9-21
Emission-control system maintenance ..........................................9-21
General maintenance .....................................................................9-22
For cold and snowy weather ..........................................................9-24
Fusible links ...................................................................................9-24
Fuses ..............................................................................................9-24
Replacement of light bulbs ............................................................9-29
Vehicle care precautions ................................................................9-38
Cleaning the inside of your vehicle ...............................................9-39
 [Link] 2 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Service precautions

Service precautions WARNING

N00937301401  The fan can turn on automatically even if
the engine is not running. Turn the igni-
Taking regular care of your vehicle will pre-
tion switch to the “OFF” position or put
serve its value and appearance as long as pos- the operation mode in OFF to be safe
sible. while you work in the engine compart-
ment.
You can do some of the maintenance work
 Do not smoke or allow open flames around
yourself, and the rest should only be per- fuel or the battery. The fumes are flamma-
formed by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors ble.
dealer or a repair facility of your choice.  Be extremely careful when working
If you discover a malfunction or other prob- around the battery. It contains poisonous
lem, have it corrected by an authorized and corrosive sulfuric acid. Have you purchased the Mitsubishi Motors
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility  Do not get under your vehicle while it is on Diamond Care Protection Plan? The Plan
of your choice. a jack.
9 This section describes the maintenance Always use properly rated automotive
supplements your new vehicle warranties.
See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer
inspections that you can do yourself, if you so jack stands.
for details.
desire. Follow the instructions and precau-  Handling your vehicle’s parts and materi-
tions for each procedure. als in the wrong way can injure you. Ask
an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer Catalytic converter
or a repair facility of your choice if you
WARNING have questions.
N00937400447

 When checking or servicing the inside of The catalytic converter requires you to use
the engine compartment, be sure the unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will
engine is stopped and has had a chance to destroy the emission-control effectiveness of
cool down. the converter.
 If you need to work in the engine compart-
ment with the engine running, be espe- Normally, the catalytic converter does not
cially careful that your clothing, hair, etc. require maintenance. However, it is important
does not get caught in the fan, drive belts, to keep the engine properly tuned for the con-
or other moving parts. verter to continue to work properly.

9-2 Vehicle care and maintenance

[Link] 3 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Engine hood
 Do not idle the engine with any spark plug
CAUTION wires disconnected or removed, such as Engine hood
 Damage to the catalytic converter can result
when performing diagnostic tests. N00937500477
if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating
 Do not idle the engine for a long time if it
condition. If the engine malfunctions or mis-
fires, or if your vehicle performance suffers, is idling roughly or otherwise obviously To open
have it serviced promptly. Running your malfunctioning.
vehicle when it is overheated may result in  To prevent the catalytic converter from Use the engine hood release lever (located
damage to the converter and vehicle. being damaged from unburned gas, do not under the instrument panel near the driver’s
race the engine when stopping the engine. door) to unlock the engine hood.
 Stop driving the vehicle if you think the
WARNING performance is noticeably low, or the Pull the lever toward you to release the
 Do not park or run your vehicle in areas engine has a malfunction such as with the engine hood latch.
where combustible materials such as dry ignition, etc. If you are not able to stop
grass or leaves can come in contact with a driving immediately, slow down and drive
hot exhaust, since a fire could occur.
 Do not put undercoat paint on the cata-
for only a short time. Have your vehicle
checked at an authorized Mitsubishi
9
lytic converter. Motors dealer or a repair facility of your
choice as soon as possible.
To reduce the possibility of catalytic con-  In unusual situations involving major
verter damage: engine problems, a burning odor may
indicate severe and abnormal catalytic
 Use UNLEADED GASOLINE ONLY of converter overheating. If this occurs, stop
the type of recommended in “Fuel selec- in a safe place, shut the engine off and let
tion”. the vehicle cool. Once the engine is cool,
 Do not drive with an extremely low fuel immediately take your vehicle to a dealer
level. Running out of gas could damage or a repair facility of your choice for ser-
WARNING
the catalytic converter.  Never use the release lever to unlatch the
vice.
 Do not try to start the engine by pushing engine hood while the vehicle is in motion.
or towing the vehicle. If the battery is  Do not drive your vehicle unless the
engine hood is locked.
weak or run down, use jumper cables to
properly start the engine.

Vehicle care and maintenance 9-3

 [Link] 4 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Engine hood
Release the lever and lift the engine hood.
CAUTION CAUTION
 Always insert the support prop into the hole  Make sure the engine hood is firmly closed
specially made for it. Propping the engine before driving.
hood at any other place could cause the prop If you drive without the engine hood com-
to slip out and lead to an accident. pletely closed, it could open up while driv-
 The hood prop can fall out if the hood is ing.
lifted by a strong wind.

NOTE
To close  If this does not close the engine hood prop-
erly, drop it again from a slightly higher
Unlatch the prop from the engine hood and position.
put it back in its retainer.  Do not push down strongly on the engine
hood. Depending on how strongly or where
NOTE you push down, you could create a dent in
9  To prevent damage to the engine hood and the vehicle body.
wipers, make sure the wipers are at resting  If you drive with the engine hood left open,
position when you open the engine hood. warning display is displayed on the informa-
tion screen in the multi-information display.
Support the engine hood with the hood prop.
Insert the hood prop securely in the opening
under the hood marked with an arrow. Type 1 Type 2

Slowly lower the engine hood about 8 inches

(20 cm), then let it drop from its own weight.

CAUTION
 Be careful not to trap your hands or fingers
when closing the engine hood.

9-4 Vehicle care and maintenance

[Link] 5 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

View of the engine compartment

View of the engine compart- Engine oil and oil filter

ment N00937702053

N00937600625 Good
To check and refill engine oil

It is normal for an engine to use oil. You may

need to add oil between the recommended oil
change intervals. Before starting the engine,
check the engine oil level. Refill if necessary.

To check the oil level, remove the dipstick,

wipe it off, and gently reinsert it all the way. CAUTION
Slowly pull the dipstick straight out and  Overfilling will cause oil aeration and loss of
oil pressure, which could damage the engine.
1- Engine oil level dipstick
check the oil level by checking the upper sur-
face of the dipstick. The oil level must not go
9
2- Engine oil filler cap above the line on the dipstick.
3- Air cleaner filter WARNING
4- Brake fluid/Clutch fluid reservoir (if so  Used engine oil is poisonous, and can dam-
equipped) NOTE age your skin. Prolonged and repeated
5- Windshield and rear window washer  If it is difficult to verify the oil level, wipe contact may cause serious skin disorders,
fluid reservoir off the dipstick and reinsert it. Wait a including dermatitis and cancer. Do not let
moment and then recheck the oil level by used oil touch your skin and wash thor-
6- Engine coolant reserve tank
checking the upper surface of the dipstick. oughly after working with it.
7- Radiator cap
8- Battery  Keep used oil out of the reach of children.
If the level does not reach the line which
shows the smallest amount of oil required,
remove the oil filler cap on the engine valve NOTE
cover, and fill to within the “Good” range.  Engine oil consumption is greatly influenced
by payload, engine speed, etc.

Vehicle care and maintenance 9-5

 [Link] 6 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Engine oil and oil filter

This mark appears on the top of the oil con-
NOTE tainer and tells you two important things
 The engine oil will deteriorate rapidly if the
about the oil.
vehicle is subjected to severe conditions (for
example, repeated operation on rough roads,
in mountainous regions, on roads with many API service symbol
uphill and downhill gradients, or over short
distances). Consequently, the oil will require
earlier replacement in accordance with the
schedule in the “WARRANTY AND MAIN-
TENANCE MANUAL”.

Engine oil identification mark Mitsubishi Motors Genuine 0W-20 Synthetic

Engine Oil is recommended for optimum fuel
Mitsubishi Motors recommends using only economy and cold weather starting.
9 engine oils with the ILSAC certification sym- 1- The upper part indicates the quality of If Mitsubishi Motors Genuine 0W-20 Syn-
bol on the front of the container. the oil. thetic Engine Oil is not available, 5W-20
2- The center part indicates the SAE grade grade oils displaying the ILSAC certification
of the oil viscosity. can be used. However, Mitsubishi Motors
ILSAC certification symbol Genuine 0W-20 Synthetic Engine Oil should
be used at the next oil change to maintain
Recommended engine oil vis- optimum fuel economy and cold weather
starting.
cosity

Use engine oil with the proper thickness for To replace the oil filter
the outdoor temperatures where you will be
driving. The oil filter should be replaced at the time or
mileage specified in the “WARRANTY AND
MAINTENANCE MANUAL”.
If you cannot find oils with the ILSAC certi-
Only use high quality replacement filters on
fication symbol, use an API classification SN
this vehicle. The manufacturer’s specifica-
or higher oil with the following label.
tions for Genuine Mitsubishi oil filters

9-6 Vehicle care and maintenance

[Link] 7 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Engine coolant
require that the filter can withstand a pressure
of 256 psi (1.8 MPa). A Genuine Mitsubishi
To add coolant CAUTION
 The required concentration of anti-freeze dif-
oil filter is the best replacement filter.
fers depending on the expected ambient tem-
Follow the installation instructions printed on Use “Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Super Long
perature.
the filter. Life Coolant Premium” or equivalent*.
Above -31 °F (-35 °C) : 50 % concentration
*: similar high quality ethylene glycol based of anti-freeze
non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrate and
Engine coolant non-borate coolant with long life hybrid
Below -31 °F (-35 °C) : 60 % concentration
of anti-freeze
N00937800584
organic acid technology You can check the concentration level with a
gauge from an automotive supply store, or
To check the coolant level your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or
Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Coolant provides service station can check it for you.
The engine coolant reserve tank (A) lets you excellent protection against corrosion and  Do not use water to adjust the concentration
quickly see when you need to add coolant. rust formation on all metals, including alumi- of coolant.
When the engine is cold, the level of the cool- num, and prevents clogs in some parts of the  Do not top off the tank with plain water only.
ant in the reserve tank should be between the engine. Water by itself boils at a lower temperature 9
FULL and LOW marks. The radiator usually If you need to add coolant often, or if the and does not stop rust or freezing. If the
stays full so there is no reason to remove the water freezes, it will damage your cooling
level in the reserve tank does not drop when
system. Do not use tapwater. It can cause
radiator cap (B) except when you check the the engine cools, the cooling system should corrosion and rust.
coolant freeze point or replace the antifreeze be pressure-tested for leaks. Take your vehi-
coolant. cle to an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer
or a repair facility of your choice for testing. Radiator cap

CAUTION The radiator cap must be tight sealed to pre-

 Do not use alcohol or methanol antifreeze or vent losing coolant, which may result in
FULL engine damage. Only use a Genuine
any engine coolants that contain them. Using
the wrong antifreeze can corrode aluminum Mitsubishi Parts radiator cap, or an approved
parts. equivalent.
LOW

Vehicle care and maintenance 9-7

 [Link] 8 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Air cleaner filter

WARNING Air cleaner filter Type 1

 Wait for the engine to cool down before N00937901465
opening the radiator cap. Otherwise hot
The air cleaner filter will get dirty and dusty
steam or boiling coolant could spray up
from the radiator and scald you.
from use and not filter properly. Replace it
with a new filter using the schedule in the
“WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE
MANUAL”.
Points to remember
1. Remove the upper cover and duct. For
 Do not overfill the reserve tank. details, refer to “Removing and installing
 Your vehicle uses a special radiator cap the upper cover and duct” on page 9-9.
that stays sealed and lets the coolant flow 2. While holding down the tab (A), pull out Type 2
from the reserve tank back to the radiator the connector (B).
when the engine cools down. If you need
9 to change the cap, use the exact same
kind.
 Check the coolant freeze point in the radi-
ator with the proper gauge, and only when
it is safe. If you add antifreeze, the con-
tents of the reserve tank must be protected
against freezing.
 Keep the front of the radiator and con-
denser clean. 4. Replacing the air cleaner filter and put the
 If the engine coolant temperature does not cover back on in its original position.
rise after the engine is warmed-up, take
3. Unclamp the cover. Open up the top of the
your vehicle to an authorized Mitsubishi
cover and take out the air cleaner filter.
NOTE
Motors dealer or a repair facility of your  Genuine Mitsubishi Motors Parts are recom-
choice to have the thermostat checked, mended when replacing the air cleaner filter.
and replaced if necessary.  Make sure that the connector is properly
reconnected.

9-8 Vehicle care and maintenance

[Link] 9 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Air cleaner filter

NOTE WARNING
 After replacing the air cleaner filter, make  Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF”
sure that the hinges at the bottom of cover position or put the operation mode in
are firmly set. OFF.
Make sure that your clothes cannot be
caught by the fan or drive belt. Personal
injury could result.

To remove
1. Remove the clips (A), and then remove
the upper cover (B).
To install
CAUTION 1. Install the air duct (A), and then tighten 9
 Take care not to scratch the engine air flow the clips (B).
sensor when removing the air cleaner cover.

5. Put the duct and upper cover back on in its

original position. For details, refer to
“Removing and installing the upper cover
and duct” on page 9-9.

Removing and installing the

upper cover and duct
N00956000022

To replace the air cleaner filter, remove the 2. Remove the clips (C), and then remove 2. Turn the upper cover over. Squeeze the
upper cover and duct. the air duct (D). head of the moulding clip (C) with pliers
and remove the moulding.

Vehicle care and maintenance 9-9

 [Link] 10 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Manual transaxle oil (if so equipped)

Continuously variable
transmission (CVT) fluid (if
so equipped)
N00938101099

The continuously variable transmission

(CVT) should be maintained and serviced by
an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
repair facility of your choice to obtain the
best performance and longest life. It is impor-
3. Install the upper cover, and then attach the tant that the transmission fluid is kept at the
moulding (D). correct level.
Manual transaxle oil (if so
9 equipped)
Fluid type
N00938200178

Whenever the manual transaxle oil level is Use only “Mitsubishi Motors Genuine
checked, add oil to maintain the proper level, CVTF-J4” transmission fluid to ensure opti-
if necessary. mum transmission performance.
Refill or change the oil according to the table.
CAUTION
Oil type  Using the improper transmission fluid may
damage the transaxle.

NOTE Mitsubishi Motors Gen-

uine NEW MULTI
 Attach the moulding with the wide part Lubricant
GEAR OIL API Classi-
Special additives
toward the front of the vehicle.
fication GL-3
Do not use any fluid additives to the trans-
4. Install the clips (E). Viscosity range SAE 75W-80 mission.

9-10 Vehicle care and maintenance

[Link] 11 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Transfer oil (All-wheel drive models)

When freezing weather is anticipated, flush
Transfer oil (All-wheel drive Fluid type out the water in the reservoir by operating the
models) pump. Fill the reservoir with windshield anti-
N00938400271 Mitsubishi Motors Genuine freeze (not radiator antifreeze), and operate
Whenever the transfer oil level is checked, Lubricant Super Hypoid Gear Oil API the system for a few seconds to flush out the
add oil as necessary to maintain the proper classification GL-5 residual water.
level. Fill or change the oil according to the Viscosity
SAE 80
table. range Brake fluid/Clutch fluid (if
so equipped)
Fluid type
Washer fluid N00938700245

N00938600299
The brake fluid and the clutch fluid share the
Mitsubishi Motors Genuine The windshield and rear window washer fluid reservoir tank.
Lubricant Super Hypoid Gear Oil API reservoir is in the engine compartment.
classification GL-5 Check the washer fluid level at regular inter-
To check the fluid level
9
Viscosity vals and add washer fluid to reservoir if nec-
SAE 80
range essary.
Open the reservoir cap and check the fluid The fluid level must be between the “MAX”
level with the dipstick. and “MIN” marks on the reservoir.
Rear axle oil (All-wheel
drive models)
N00915200269

Whenever the oil level is checked, add oil as

necessary to maintain the proper level. MAX
FULL EMPTY
Fill or change oil according to the table.

MIN

Vehicle care and maintenance 9-11

 [Link] 12 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Battery
The fluid level falls slightly with wear of the especially one with a low charge, will have a
brake pads, but this does not indicate any
CAUTION hard time starting your vehicle.
 Keep the reservoir tank cap closed to keep
abnormality. It is recommended that you have your battery
the brake fluid from evaporating.
and charging system checked by an autho-
The fluid in the master cylinder should be rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair
checked when doing other work under the Battery facility of your choice before the start of cold
engine hood. The brake system should also be N00939100930 weather. If necessary, have it charged. This
checked for leaks at the same time. will guarantee more reliable starting, and lon-
If the fluid level falls markedly in a short The condition of the battery is very important
for quick starting and to keep the vehicle’s ger battery life.
length of time, it indicates leaks from the
brake system. electrical system working properly. Check the
If this occurs, have the vehicle checked by an battery regularly. Disconnection and connection
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a If battery performance is suspect, have the
N00901701101

repair facility of your choice. To disconnect the battery cable, stop the
battery and charging system tested by an
engine. Disconnect the negative (-) terminal
9 authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
first, then the positive (+) terminal. To recon-
Fluid type repair facility of your choice.
nect the battery, first connect the positive (+)
terminal and then the negative (-) terminal,
Use the brake fluid conforming to DOT 3 or NOTE before starting the vehicle.
DOT 4. The reservoir cap must be tightly  After replacing the battery, the electronic
sealed to keep dirt and water out. control system data for the automatic trans-
axle, etc., will be erased. NOTE
As a result, shifting may be rough.  Open the terminal cover (A) before discon-
CAUTION Shifting will become smoother after several necting or connecting the positive (+) termi-
 Do not let any petroleum-based fluid touch, changes in speed. nal of the battery.
mix with, or get into the brake fluid. This
will damage the seals.
 Be careful when handling brake fluid. It can
damage painted surfaces.
During cold weather
N00901600031
 Use only the listed brake fluid. Different
brands of brake fluid have different addi- The battery is weaker in cold temperatures.
tives, and these can cause a chemical reac- This has to do with its chemical and physical
tion. Do not mix brands of brake fluid. properties and is why a very cold battery,

9-12 Vehicle care and maintenance

[Link] 13 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Tires

NOTE WARNING NOTE

 Loosen the nut (B) and then disconnect the • If electrolyte gets on plastic parts or  Check to see that the battery is securely
battery cable from the positive (+) terminal. other nearby parts, wipe it off with a soft installed and cannot be moved. Also check
cloth or chamois soaked in a solution of each terminal for tightness.
water and neutral detergent then imme-  If you will not be driving your vehicle for a
diately rinse the affected parts with long period of time, remove the battery and
plenty of water. store it in a place where the battery fluid will
• If electrolyte gets on your hands or not freeze. The battery only should be stored
clothes, rinse thoroughly with water. If with a full charge.
electrolyte gets in your eyes, flush them  Before cleaning the battery, tighten all the
with water immediately and get immedi- filler port caps to keep dirt and moisture out.
ate medical attention.
 Open doors and windows in any closed
space where you may be charging or Tires
WARNING working with the battery. N00939201592

 Never disconnect the battery while the  Always wear protective clothing and gog- 9
engine is running, or you could damage gles when working with the battery, or WARNING
the vehicle’s electrical parts. have a skilled automobile technician do it.  Driving with tires that are worn, damaged
 Never short-circuit the battery. This could  If you are quick-charging your battery, or improperly inflated is dangerous.
cause it to overheat and be damaged. first disconnect the battery cables. These type tire conditions will adversely
 Keep sparks, cigarettes, and flames away  In order to prevent a short-circuit, be sure affect vehicle performance.
from the battery because the battery could to disconnect the negative (-) terminal These type tire conditions can also cause a
explode. first, and reconnect it last. tread separation or blowout which may
 Electrolyte (battery acid) is made of corro-  Battery posts, terminals and related acces- result in an accident causing serious
sive diluted sulfuric acid. If it spills on sories contain lead and lead compounds. injury or death.
nearby parts, it can crack, stain, or dis- Wash hands after handling.  Tires, including spare tire, degrade over
color them. And if it gets on your skin or time with age even when they are not
in your eyes, it can cause burns or blind- being used.
ness. Please observe the following han- NOTE It is recommended that tires over 6 years
dling instructions: generally be replaced even if damage is
 Check each battery terminal for corrosion.
not obvious.
You can stop more corrosion by washing
with a solution of baking soda and water.
Grease the posts and clamps after cleaning or It is important to familiarize yourself with the
tightening them. following terms:

Vehicle care and maintenance 9-13

 [Link] 14 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Tires
 Cold tire pressure:  Light truck (LT) tire: a tire designated by  Groove: the space between two adjacent
• The measured pressure after the vehicle its manufacturer as primarily intended for tread ribs.
has been parked for at least three hours, use on lightweight trucks or multipurpose
or passenger vehicles.
• The measured pressure when the vehicle  Tread: portion of a tire that comes into
Tire Markings
is driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after contact with the road.
having been parked for three hours.  Tread rib: a tread section running circum-
 Maximum pressure:the maximum permis- ferentially around a tire.
sible cold tire inflation pressure for this  Tread separation: pulling away of the
tire. tread from the tire carcass.
 Recommended inflation pressure: the  Carcass: the tire structure, except tread
inflation pressure for optimum tire perfor- and sidewall rubber which, when inflated,
mance. bears the load.
 Intended outboard sidewall:  Sidewall: portion of a tire between the
9 • The sidewall that contains a whitewall,
bears white lettering or bears manufac-
tread and bead.
 Section width: the linear distance between
turer, brand, and/or model name molding the exteriors of the sidewalls of an
that is higher or deeper than the same inflated tire, excluding elevations due to
molding on the other sidewall of the tire, labeling, decoration, or protective bands. Size Designation
or  Bead: the part of the tire that is made of
• The outward facing sidewall of an asym- steel wires, wrapped or reinforced by ply EXAMPLE: P215/65R15
metrical tire that has a particular side cords and that is shaped to fit the rim.
Passenger car tire size based
that must always face outward when  Ply: a layer of rubber-coated parallel P
mounted on a vehicle. cords. on U.S.A. design standards
 Passenger car tire: a tire intended for use  Cord: the strands forming the plies in the Section width in millimeters
on passenger cars, multipurpose passen- tire. 215
(mm)
ger vehicles, and trucks, that have a gross  Rim: a metal support for a tire or a tire
vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of 10,000 and tube assembly upon which the tire Aspect ratio in percent (%)
pounds or less. beads are seated. 65 Ratio of section height to sec-
 Rim diameter: nominal diameter of the tion width of tire.
bead seat.

9-14 Vehicle care and maintenance

[Link] 15 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Tires

Construction code NOTE Speed symbol

•“R” means radial construc-  LT (Light Truck) -metric tire A symbol indicating the
R tion. sizing is based on U.S.A. design range of speeds at which a
•“D” means diagonal or bias standards. The size designation tire can carry a load corre-
construction. for LT-metric tires is the same as sponding to its load index
15 Rim diameter in inches (in) for P-metric tires except for the under certain operating con-
letters “LT” that are molded into ditions.
H
the sidewall preceding the size The maximum speed corre-
NOTE
designation. Example: sponding to the speed symbol
 European/Japanese metric tire
LT235/85R16. should only be achieved
sizing is based on European/Jap-
 Temporary spare tires are high under specified operating
anese design standards. Tires
pressure compact spares conditions. (i.e. tire pressure,
designed to these standards have
designed for temporary emer- vehicle loading, road condi- 9
the tire size molded into the
gency use only. Tires designed tions and posted speed limits)
sidewall beginning with the sec-
tion width. The letter “P” is to this standard have the letter
“T” molded into the sidewall Maximum Load
absent from this tire size desig-
nation. Example: 215/65R15 preceding the size designation.
Example: T145/80D18 103M. Maximum load indicates the maxi-
96H.
mum load this tire is designed to
Service Description carry.

EXAMPLE: 95H
Load index
A numerical code associated
95
with the maximum load a tire
can carry.

Vehicle care and maintenance 9-15

 [Link] 16 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Tires
EXAMPLE: DOT MA L9 ABCD Treadwear, Traction and Temper-
WARNING 1504
 Overloading of your tire is ature Grades
Department of Transporta-
dangerous. Overloading can
tion
cause tire failure, affect vehi- Treadwear
This symbol certifies that the
cle handling, and increase
tire is in compliance with the The treadwear grade is a comparative
your stopping distance. Use DOT
U.S. Department of Trans- rating based on the wear rate of the
tires of the recommended load
portation tire safety stan- tire when tested under controlled
capacity for your vehicle.
dards, and is approved for conditions on a specified government
Never overload them.
highway use. test course. For example, a tire
Code representing the tire graded 150 would wear one and one-
Maximum Pressure MA manufacturing location. (2 half (11/2) times as well on the gov-
9 digits) ernment course as a tire graded 100.
Maximum Pressure indicates the Code representing the tire The relative performance of tires
maximum permissible cold tire infla- L9
size. (2 digits) depends upon the actual conditions
tion pressure for this tire. ABC
Code used by tire manufac- of their use, however, and may depart
D
turer. (1 to 4 digits) significantly from the norm due to
Tire Identification Number (TIN) variations in driving habits, service
Number representing the
15 week in which the tire was practices and differences in road
The TIN may be found on one or characteristics and climate.
both sides of the tire but the date manufactured. (2 digits)
code may only be on one side. Look Number representing the
Traction
for the TIN on the outboard side of 04 year in which the tire was
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the manufactured. (2 digits) The traction grades, from highest to
TIN is not found on the outboard side lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those
then you will find it on the inboard grades represent the tire’s ability to
side of the tire. stop on wet pavement as measured

9-16 Vehicle care and maintenance

[Link] 17 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Tires
under controlled conditions on speci- Tire inflation pressures
The tire pressure for your vehicle under nor-
fied government test surfaces of mal driving conditions is listed on the placard
N00939301955
attached to the driver’s door sill.
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked Proper tire inflation pressure is essential for (Refer to “Tire and loading information plac-
C may have poor traction perfor- the safe and satisfactory operation of your ard” on page 11-2.)
mance. vehicle. The wrong tire pressure will cause The recommended inflation pressures under
problems in three major areas: normal driving conditions should be used for
Temperature the tires listed below.
 Safety
Too little pressure increases flexing in the
The temperature grades are A (the tire and can cause tire failure. Too much
Item Tire size Front Rear
highest), B and C, representing the pressure can cause a tire to lose its ability 240 240
tire’s resistance to the generation of to cushion shock. Objects on the road and P215/70R16 kPa, kPa,
heat and its ability to dissipate heat potholes could then cause tire damage that Normal 35 psi 35 psi
when tested under controlled condi- may result in tire failure. tire 230 230
tions on a specified indoor laboratory  Economy P225/55R18 kPa, kPa, 9
The wrong tire pressure can cause uneven 33 psi 33 psi
test wheel. Sustained high tempera- wear patterns in the tire tread. These
Compact
ture can cause the material of the tire abnormal wear patterns will reduce the T155/90D16 420 kPa, 60 psi
spare wheel
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and tread life, and the tire will have to be
excessive temperature can lead to replaced sooner.
Too little pressure also makes it harder for Tire pressures should be checked, and
sudden tire failure. The grade C cor- adjusted if necessary, at least once a month.
the tire to roll, and this uses up more fuel.
responds to a level of performance  Ride comfort and vehicle stability Pressures should be checked more often
which all passenger car tires must The superior riding experience built into whenever weather temperatures change
meet under the Federal Motor Vehi- your vehicle partly depends on the correct severely, because tire pressures change with
outdoor temperatures. The pressures listed
cle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades tire pressure. Too much pressure gives an
uncomfortable and jarring ride. Too little are always “cold inflation pressure”.
B and A represent higher levels of Cold inflation pressure is measured after the
pressure feels as if your vehicle is slow to
performance on the laboratory test vehicle has been parked for at least three
respond.
wheel than the minimum required by Unequal tire pressures can make steering hours or is driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)
law. your vehicle uneven and unpredictable. after having been parked for three hours.

Vehicle care and maintenance 9-17

 [Link] 18 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Tires
Cold inflation pressure must not go above the  Check tire pressures regularly.
maximum values molded into the tire side-
Replacing tires and wheels  Have regular maintenance done on the
N00939600241
wall. After driving several miles, your tire wheel balance and front and rear suspen-
inflation pressure may increase 2 to 6 psi (14 CAUTION sion alignment.
to 41 kPa) from the cold inflation pressure.  Rotate your tires regularly as described in
 Avoid using different size tires from the one
Do not let air out of the tires to get back to the listed and the combined use of different the “Tire rotation” section on page 9-19.
specified cold pressure, or your tires will be types of tires, as this can affect driving
too low.
Check your tires each time you refuel. If one
safety. Tread wear indicator
Refer to “Tires and wheels” on page 11-5.
N00939800184
tire looks lower than the others, check the  On all-wheel drive vehicles, always use tires
pressure for all of them. of the same size, same type, and same brand,
You should also take the following safety pre- and which have no wear differences. Using
cautions: tires that differ in size, type, brand or the
degree of wear, will increase the differential
 Keep your tires inflated to the recom- oil temperature, resulting in possible damage
9 mended pressures. (See the tire and load- to the driving system. Further, the drive train
ing information placard attached to the will be subjected to excessive loading, possi-
bly leading to oil leakage, component sei-
driver’s door sill.)
zure, or other serious problems.
 Stay within the recommended load limits.
 Only Mitsubishi Motors Authorized wheels
 Make sure that the weight of any load in should be used, because your vehicle is
your vehicle is evenly distributed. equipped with a tire pressure monitoring sys- 1- Location of the tread wear indicator
 Drive at safe speeds. tem. 2- Tread wear indicator
 After filling your tires to the correct pres- Use of another type of wheel risks air leaks
sure, check them for damage and air and sensor damage, as it will not be possible
leaks. Be sure to reinstall the caps on the to install the tire pressure sensor properly. Tread wear indicators are built into the origi-
valve stems. nal equipment tires on your vehicle to help
you know when your tires should be replaced.
Many states have laws requiring that you
Tire maintenance
replace your tires at this point.
N00939700141
These indicators are molded into the bottom
The following maintenance steps are recom- of the tread grooves and will appear when the
mended: tire tread is worn down to 1/16 inch (1.6
mm).

9-18 Vehicle care and maintenance

[Link] 19 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Tires
When the bands appear next to one another in The first tire rotation is the most important
two or more places, replace your tires. one. It will allow all your tires to wear evenly.
CAUTION
 If the tires have arrows (A) indicating the
correct direction of rotation, swap the front
NOTE Tires that do not have arrows showing rotation and rear tires on the left-hand side of the
 Tire wear indicators can have different marks direction vehicle and the front and rear tires on the
and locations depending on the tire manufac- right-hand side of the vehicle separately.
turer. Keep each tire on its original side of the
vehicle. When installing the tires, make sure
Front
the arrows point in the direction in which the
wheels will turn when the vehicle moves for-
Tire rotation ward. Any tire whose arrow points in the
N00939901531
wrong direction will not perform to its full
To even out the wear on your tires and make potential.
them last longer, Mitsubishi Motors Corpora-
Tires that have arrows showing rotation direction
tion recommends that you rotate your tires at
the mileage listed in the “WARRANTY AND Front 9
MAINTENANCE MANUAL”.
However, the timing for tire rotation may Front
vary according to your vehicle condition,
road surface conditions, and your own per-
sonal driving habits. Any time you notice
unusual wear, rotate your tires as soon as pos-
sible.

When rotating tires, check for uneven wear,

damage, and wheel alignment. Abnormal CAUTION
wear is usually caused by a wrong tire pres-  A compact spare tire can be installed tempo- CAUTION
rarily in place of a tire that has been removed  Avoid the combined use of different types of
sure, wheels that are not aligned properly,
during the tire rotation. However, it must not tires. Using different types of tires can affect
wheels that are out-of-balance, or severe vehicle performance and safety.
be included in the regular tire rotation
braking. sequence.
Check with an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer or a repair facility of your choice to
find out the reason for uneven tread wear.

Vehicle care and maintenance 9-19

 [Link] 20 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Clutch pedal free play (if so equipped)

Snow tires Tire chains Brake pedal free play

N00940000320 N00940100116 N00940301346

In some areas of the country, snow tires are To check the brake pedal free play (A), turn
required for winter driving. If snow tires are
CAUTION off the engine and press the brake pedal sev-
 Tire chains cannot be used on your vehicle. eral times with your foot. Then press the
required in your area, you must choose snow
The clearance between the chains and the pedal down with your fingers until you first
tires of the same size and type as the original
body is not sufficient to allow proper clear-
tires provided with your vehicle. Snow tires feel resistance.
ance, and the vehicle body might be dam-
should also be installed on all four wheels. aged.
Otherwise your safety and vehicle handling Brake pedal free play:
can be reduced. .1 to .3 inch (3 to 8 mm)
Even where laws may permit it, snow tires
should not be operated at sustained speeds
Clutch pedal free play (if so
over 75 mph (120 km/h). equipped)

9
N00940201101

CAUTION To check the clutch pedal free play (A), turn

 Only Mitsubishi Motors Authorized wheels off the engine and press the pedal until you
should be used, because your vehicle is feel resistance.
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring sys-
tem. Clutch pedal free play:
Use of another type of wheel risks air leaks
.2 to .4 inch (4 to 9 mm)
and sensor damage, as it will not be possible
to install the tire pressure sensor properly. If the free play is not within these limits, take
your vehicle to an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer or a repair facility of your
choice for adjustment.

9-20 Vehicle care and maintenance

[Link] 21 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Parking brake
and Environment Canada. The emission-con-
Parking brake Wiper blades trol system is made of:
N00940400249 N00940700138

Check the wiper blades occasionally. Clean  a positive crankcase ventilation system
Parking brake lever stroke them regularly to remove deposits of salt and  an evaporative emission-control system
road film. Use a sponge or cloth and a mild  an exhaust emission-control system
Check the parking brake lever travel occa- detergent or non-abrasive cleaner to clean the
sionally. To check this, pull the lever up blades and glass areas. To be sure the emission-control system works
slowly and count the number of clicks of the Replace the blades if they continue to streak properly, have your vehicle inspected and
ratchet. You should feel the parking brake or smear. maintained by an authorized Mitsubishi
grab between 6 to 7 notches (clicks). Motors dealer or a repair facility of your
Also check to see if the lever stays gripped by choice. This should be done at the time or
the ratchet after pulling.
NOTE mileage specified in the “WARRANTY AND
 Do not run the wipers on dry glass for a long MAINTENANCE MANUAL”.
time. This wears out the rubber and can
These, and all the other “general” mainte-
scratch the glass.
nance services listed in this manual, need to 9
be performed to keep your vehicle running
properly and reliably.
During cold weather You should also have an inspection and ser-
vice any time you suspect a malfunction.
If the blades are frozen to the windshield or
rear window, do not operate the wipers until
the ice has melted and the blades are freed,
otherwise the wiper motor may be damaged.

WARNING Emission-control system

 Continued operation of the vehicle with maintenance
the parking brake lever out of adjustment N00940800328
may result in the vehicle moving when
unattended. Your vehicle is equipped with an emission-
control system that meets all the requirements
of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency

Vehicle care and maintenance 9-21

 [Link] 22 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

General maintenance
high heat sources such as the exhaust mani-
NOTE Fuel hoses fold.
 To meet government regulations and pro- N00941000040

mote cleaner air, your vehicle is equipped Check the hose surfaces for any heat and
with an onboard diagnostic system (OBD).
mechanical damage, hard and brittle rubber,
WARNING
The engine electronic control module that  If you see a fuel leak or if you smell fuel,
cracking, tears, cuts and abrasions. Pay spe-
controls OBD functions stores various data do not run the engine. Any spark (includ-
(especially about the exhaust emissions). cial attention to the hoses closest to high heat ing from the ignition), flame or smoking
This data will be erased if the battery cable is sources such as the exhaust manifold. Check material could cause an explosion or fire.
disconnected, which could make a rapid all the hose connections, such as clamps and Call an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
diagnosis difficult. Do not disconnect the couplings, to make sure they are secure and dealer or a repair facility of your choice
battery cable when the engine malfunction that there are no leaks. If you see any wear or for assistance.
indicator (“SERVICE ENGINE SOON” or damage, replace the hoses immediately.
“Check engine light”) is ON.

Intake valve clearance Evaporative emission control

9 Spark plugs N00950100050 system (except evaporative
N00940900228
Have the valve clearance checked at an emission canister)
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer at the N00941400187
Spark plugs must fire properly for good
mileage specified in the “WARRANTY AND If the fuel-vapor vent line is clogged or dam-
engine performance and emission-control.
MAINTENANCE MANUAL”. aged, the fuel-vapor mixture will escape, pol-
Do not reuse them by cleaning or regapping.
If the engine sounds abnormally loud, have luting the air.
Change them at the mileage listed in the
adjustments made by an authorized Have the system checked at an authorized
“WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE
Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Mitsubishi Motors dealer at the mileage spec-
MANUAL”.
ified in the “WARRANTY AND MAINTE-
NOTE Fuel system (tank, pipe line and NANCE MANUAL”.
 Use the spark plugs listed under “Engine connection, and fuel tank filler
specifications” on page 11-4 or plugs that are cap) General maintenance
exactly the same. Other plugs could cause N00941300173 N00941500247
engine damage, performance problems or
radio noise. Check these regularly for damage or leaks in The next pages list the maintenance service
the fuel lines and connections. Check the fuel recommended by Mitsubishi Motors Corpo-
tank filler cap for damage or looseness. Pay ration. In addition to the general maintenance
special attention to the fuel lines closest to that needs to be performed at the times listed,
9-22 Vehicle care and maintenance
[Link] 23 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

General maintenance
there are other parts which do not usually  The underside or rear of the vehicle is
need regular maintenance.
Ball joint, steering linkage seals damaged
But, if any of these parts stops working prop- and drive shaft boots
erly, your vehicle performance could suffer. N00941800077 Also check the exhaust system each time the
Have these items checked if you notice a Check the following parts for damage and vehicle is raised for lubrication, oil changes,
problem with them. grease leaks: or required service. Any open seams or loose
connections could let dangerous exhaust
See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer  Ball joint boots of the front suspension fumes seep into the luggage compartment and
for assistance, if you have any questions. and steering linkage passenger compartments.
 Bellows on both ends of the drive shaft
Disc brake pads Check for any of the following
N00941600059 Exhaust system conditions:
Good brakes are essential for safe driving. N00942200094

Check the brake pads for wear. For good  Check for holes or exhaust gas leaks
braking performance, replace the brake pads WARNING caused by corrosion or damage. 9
with the same type pads as the originals.  Carbon monoxide gas from your vehicle’s  Check the joints and connections for
exhaust is poisonous. Breathing these looseness or exhaust gas leaks.
fumes can cause unconsciousness or death.  Check the rubber hangers and brackets for
Brake hoses damage.
N00941700076
The best way to keep carbon monoxide gas
Brake hoses and tubing should be checked from entering inside your vehicle is to have
for:
Hood lock release mechanism
the engine exhaust system properly serviced.
Have a competent mechanic inspect the com- and safety catch
 Severe surface cracking, scuffing or worn plete exhaust system and nearby body areas N00942500101

spots. If the fabric casing of the hose is for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispo- The hood lock release mechanism and hood
showing through any cracks or worn spots sitioned parts if you notice any of the follow- safety catch should be checked, cleaned, and
in the rubber hose cover, the hose should ing: oiled when needed for easy movement and to
be replaced. The brakes can fail if the stop rust and wear. Use Multipurpose Grease
hose wears through.  A change in the sound of the exhaust sys- NLGI Grade 2 sparingly for all sliding parts
 Improper installation may cause twisting, tem of the hood latch and release lever. Work the
or wheel, tire or chassis interference.  The smell of exhaust fumes inside the grease into the hood lock mechanism until all
vehicle the movable surfaces are covered.

Vehicle care and maintenance 9-23

 [Link] 24 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

For cold and snowy weather

Also, put a light coat of the same grease on the windshield, side and rear window are also fuse blocks are located in the passenger com-
the safety catch wherever moving parts touch. useful. partment and in the engine compartment.

For cold and snowy weather Fusible links Passenger compartment

N00942600102 N00942700305

The fusible links will melt to prevent a fire if

Ventilation slots a large current attempts to flow through cer-
tain electrical systems.
The ventilation slots in front of the wind- In case of a melted fusible link, see your
shield should be brushed clear after a heavy authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
snowfall so that the operation of the heating repair facility of your choice for inspection
and ventilation systems will not be impaired. and replacement.
For the fusible links, please refer to “Fuse
load capacities” on page 9-25.
9 Weatherstripping
A- Main fuse block
WARNING B- Sub fuse block
To prevent freezing of the weatherstripping  Fusible links must not be replaced by any
on the doors, engine hood, etc., they should other device. Failing to fit the correct fus-
be treated with silicone grease. ible link may result in fire in the vehicle, The fuse blocks in the passenger compart-
property destruction and serious or fatal ment are located behind the fuse lid.
injuries at any time.
Additional equipment (For
regions where snow is encoun- Main fuse block
tered) Fuses 1. Insert a screwdriver into the notch of the
N00942800856 fuse lid and pry gently to remove it.
It is a good idea to carry a shovel or a short-
handled spade in the vehicle during the win- Fuse block location
ter so that you can clear away snow if you get
stranded. A small hand-brush for sweeping
snow off the vehicle and a plastic scraper for To prevent damage to the electrical system
from short-circuiting or overloading, each
individual circuit is equipped with a fuse. The
9-24 Vehicle care and maintenance
[Link] 25 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Fuses

Engine compartment Passenger compartment fuse loca-

tion table
In the engine compartment, the fuse block is
located as shown in the illustration. Passenger compartment fuse location

Main fuse block Sub fuse block

2. To put back the fuse lid, line up the fuse

lid hook (A) with the clamp (B) on the
instrument panel and push the lid back in.
9
1- Push the lock lever.
2- Remove the fuse block cover.

Fuse load capacities

N00954801300

This fuse list shows the names of the electri-

cal systems and their fuse capacities.
Sym- Capac-
There are spare fuses in the fuse block cover No. Electrical system
bol ity
in the engine compartment. Always replace a
blown fuse with one of the same capacity as 1 Heater 30 A*
the original. Stop lights
2 15 A
(Brake lights)
3 Rear fog light 10 A

Vehicle care and maintenance 9-25

 [Link] 26 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Fuses
Sym- Capac- Sym- Capac- Engine compartment fuse location
No. Electrical system No. Electrical system
bol ity bol ity table
4 Windshield wiper 30 A Power window con-
20 30 A*
trol
5 Optional 10 A Engine compartment fuse location
21 Defogger 30 A*
6 Door locks 20 A
22 Heated door mirror 7.5 A
7 Radio 15 A
Passenger’s power 25
8 Control unit relay 7.5 A 23
seat (20) A
Interior lights 25
9 15 A 24 Driver’s power seat
(Dome lights) (20) A
Hazard warning 25 Heated seats 30 A
10 15 A
flasher
9 11 Rear window wiper 15 A *: Fusible link
Behind the fuse block cover
12 Gauges 7.5 A  Some fuses may not be installed on your
Cigarette lighter vehicle, depending on the vehicle model
13 15 A or specifications.
/Accessory socket
 The table above shows the main equip-
Ignition ment corresponding to each fuse.
14 10 A
Switch
15 Sunroof 20 A
Outside rearview
16 10 A Sym- Capac-
mirrors No. Electrical system
bol ity
All-wheel drive sys-
17 10 A 1 Front fog lights 15 A
tem
18 Back-up lights 7.5 A 2 Engine 7.5 A

19 Accessory socket 15 A 3 Automatic transaxle 20 A

4 Horn 10 A

9-26 Vehicle care and maintenance

[Link] 27 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Fuses
Sym- Capac- Sym- Capac- Sym- Capac-
No. Electrical system No. Electrical system No. Electrical system
bol ity bol ity bol ity
5 Alternator 7.5 A Headlight 31 Audio amplifier 30 A
(low
6 Headlight washer 20 A 18 Halogen 10 A 32 Diesel 30 A
beam)
7 Air conditioning 10 A (left) 33 — Spare fuse 10 A
ETV/Oil cooler fan Headlight 34 — Spare fuse 15 A
8 15 A (low
(Twin Clutch SST) 19 Halogen 10 A 35 — Spare fuse 20 A
beam)
9 Security horn 20 A (right) *: Fusible link
10 Wiper deicer 15 A 20 ENG/POWER 10 A
 Some fuses may not be installed on your
11 — — — 21 Ignition coil 10 A vehicle, depending on the vehicle model
12 Power gate 30 A
ENG/POWER 20 A or specifications.
 The table above shows the main equip-
9
Daytime running 22
13 10 A Fuel line heater 25 A ment corresponding to each fuse.
lights
Headlight 23 Fuel pump 15 A There are no 7.5 A, 25 A or 30 A spare fuses.
14 10 A
(high beam) (left) If a fuse of one of these capacities blows,
24 Starter 30 A*
Headlight replace it temporarily by borrowing one of
15 10 A 25 — — —
(high beam) (right) the fuses indicated below.
Anti-lock braking 7.5 A: 10 A spare fuse
Headlight 26 40 A*
system 25 A: 20 A spare fuse
(low
16 Discharge 20 A Anti-lock braking 30 A: 30 A audio amplifier fuse
beam) 27 30 A*
(left) system Replace the borrowed fuse with a fuse that
has the correct capacity as soon as possible.
Headlight Air conditioning con-
28 30 A*
(low denser fan motor
17 Discharge 20 A
beam) 29 Radiator fan 40 A*
(right)
30 IOD IOD 30 A

Vehicle care and maintenance 9-27

 [Link] 28 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Fuses

Identification of fuse

Capacity Color
7.5 A Brown
10 A Red
15 A Blue
20 A Yellow
25 A Natural (white)
Green (fuse type) /Pink (fusible B- Fuse is OK
30 A 3. Clamp it on the fuse you wish to remove, C- Blown fuse
link type) and pull the fuse straight out from the fuse
40 A Green (fusible link type) block.
5. Insert a new fuse of the same capacity
9 securely into the appropriate slot.
Fuse replacement
N00954900128
CAUTION
1. Before replacing a fuse, always turn off  Never use a fuse with a capacity greater than
the electrical item concerned to the fuse the one listed or any substitute, such as wire,
and turn the ignition switch to the “OFF” foil etc. This would cause the circuit wiring
position or put the operation mode in to heat up and could cause a fire.
OFF.  If the replacement fuse blows again after a
2. There is a fuse remover (A) in the engine short time, have the electrical system
compartment fuse block. checked by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer or a repair facility of your choice to
4. Use the fuse location diagrams and the
find and correct the cause.
matching tables, to check the fuse that is
related to the problem. If the fuse is not
blown, something else must be causing
the problem. Have the system inspected
by your authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer or a repair facility of your choice.

9-28 Vehicle care and maintenance

[Link] 29 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Replacement of light bulbs

Replacement of light bulbs NOTE ANSI

 When it rains, or when the vehicle has been
Trade
N00942900310 Watt-
washed, the inside of the lens sometimes Description No. or
Before replacing the bulb, be sure the light is age
becomes temporarily foggy. This is the same Bulb
off. Do not touch the glass part of the new phenomenon as when window glass mists up type
bulb with your bare fingers; the oil from your on a humid day, and does not indicate a func-
skin will stay on the glass and dim or destroy 1 Front turn signal light 21 W WY21W
tional problem.
the bulb when it gets hot. When the light is switched on, the heat will 2 Headlight, high beam 60 W HB3
remove the fog. However, if water gathers 3 Front fog light* 55 W H11
inside the light, please have it checked by an
CAUTION authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a Daytime running
 Bulbs are extremely hot immediately after repair facility of your choice. 4 light* — —
being turned off. Parking light (type 2)*
When replacing the bulb, wait for it to cool
sufficiently before touching it. You could Bulb capacity Headlight, low beam
55 W H11
(Halogen bulb)
otherwise be burned. N00943000132
5 9
The bulb should only be replaced with a new Headlight, low beam
35 W —
bulb with the same rating and type. The type (Discharge bulb)
NOTE and rating are listed on the base of the bulb. Front side-marker
 If you are unsure of how to carry out the
work as required, it is recommended that
6 light 5W WY5W
these procedures be carried out by an autho- Outside Parking light (type 1)*
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair N00950301974 Side turn signal light
facility of your choice. 7 5W —
(on fender)*
 Be careful not to scratch the vehicle body Front
when removing a light and lens. Side turn signal light
8 (on outside rearview — —
mirror)*

*: If so equipped

Vehicle care and maintenance 9-29

 [Link] 30 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Replacement of light bulbs

WARNING Rear NOTE

 Check with an authorized Mitsubishi  The rear side-marker light, the tail and stop
Motors dealer or a repair facility of your light and the high-mounted stop light use an
choice when it is necessary to repair a high LED instead of the bulb. Check with an
intensity discharge headlight or to replace authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or
the bulb. repair facility of your choice when either
The power circuit, bulb and electrodes light needs to be repaired or replaced.
generate high voltages that may cause a
severe shock.

NOTE ANSI
 It is not possible to repair or replace only the
trade
bulb for the side turn signal light. Watt-
Check with an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
Item No. or
age
9 dealer or a repair facility of your choice bulb
when the light needs to be repaired or type
replaced. 8 High-mounted stop
 The daytime running light/parking light — —
light
(type 2) and side turn signal light (on outside
rearview mirror) use an LED instead of the 9 License plate light 5W W5W
bulb. 10 Back-up light 16 W W16W
Check with an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer or repair facility of your choice when 11 Rear turn signal light 21 W W21W
either light needs to be repaired or replaced. Rear side-marker
12 light, and tail and stop — —
light

9-30 Vehicle care and maintenance

[Link] 31 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Replacement of light bulbs

Compartment
N00950401672

*- Front of the vehicle

4. To install the bulb, perform the removal
steps in reverse.
2. Turn the bulb (B) counterclockwise to
Item Wattage remove it.
CAUTION 9
1 Dome light (rear)* 8W
 Handle halogen light bulb with care. The gas
2 Vanity mirror lights* 3W inside a halogen light bulb is highly pressur-
Dome light (front)/Reading ized, so dropping, knocking, or scratching a
3 8W halogen light bulb can cause it to shatter.
light
4 Cargo room light 5W
5 Glove compartment light 1.4 W

*: If so equipped

*- Front of the vehicle

Headlights (low beam, except
for vehicles equipped with high 3. While holding down the tab (C), pull out
intensity discharge headlights) the socket (D).
N00901801144

1. Turn the cap (A) counterclockwise to

remove it.
Vehicle care and maintenance 9-31
 [Link] 32 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Replacement of light bulbs

CAUTION
 Never hold the halogen light bulb with a bare
hand, dirty glove, etc.
The oil from your hand could cause the bulb
to break the next time the headlights are
used.
If the glass surface is dirty, clean it with
alcohol and let it dry completely before
installing the bulb.

*- Front of the vehicle

4. To install the bulb, perform the removal
steps in reverse.
2. Turn the bulb (B) counterclockwise to
remove it.
9 CAUTION
 Handle halogen light bulb with care. The gas
inside a halogen light bulb is highly pressur-
ized, so dropping, knocking, or scratching a
Headlights (high beam) halogen light bulb can cause it to shatter.
N00901901103

1. Turn the cap (A) counterclockwise to

remove it.

*- Front of the vehicle

3. While holding down the tab (C), pull out

the socket (D).

9-32 Vehicle care and maintenance

[Link] 33 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Replacement of light bulbs

CAUTION WARNING
 Never hold the halogen light bulb with a bare  A high voltage is present in the power cir-
hand, dirty glove, etc. cuit and in the bulbs and bulb terminals.
The oil from your hand could cause the bulb To avoid the risk of an electric shock, con-
to break the next time the headlights are tact an authorized Mitsubishi dealer
used. whenever repair or replacement is neces-
If the glass surface is dirty, clean it with sary.
alcohol and let it dry completely before
installing the bulb.
Adjustment of headlight aim
N00943200121 *- Front of the vehicle
The alignment of the headlights should be
checked by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors 2. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
dealer or a repair facility of your choice.
9
Front side-marker lights/park-
ing lights (type 1) (if so equipped)
Headlights (low beam, for vehi- N00917301607

cles equipped with high inten- 1. Turn the socket (A) counterclockwise to
remove it.
sity discharge headlights)
N00900300099

Do not attempt to disassemble or repair head-

lights, and do not attempt to replace their
bulbs.
3. To install the bulb, perform the removal
steps in reverse.

Vehicle care and maintenance 9-33

 [Link] 34 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Replacement of light bulbs

Front turn signal lights Side turn signal lights (on

N00943401393
fender) (if so equipped)
To remove N00943501150

1. Remove the upper cover. NOTE

For information regarding how to remove  It is not possible to repair or replace only the
the upper cover, refer to “Removing and bulb for the side turn signal light.
installing the upper cover and duct” on Check with an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
page 9-9. dealer or a repair facility of your choice
2. Turn the socket (A) counterclockwise to when the light needs to be repaired or
remove it. replaced.
To install

1. To install the bulb, perform the removal Side turn signal lights (on out-
9 steps in reverse.
side rearview mirror) (if so
2. Install the upper cover.
For information regarding how to install equipped)
the upper cover, refer to “Removing and N00943501163

installing the upper cover and duct” on

page 9-9. NOTE
 The side turn signal lights (on outside rear-
view mirror) uses an LED instead of the
*- Front of the vehicle bulb.
Check with an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket. dealer or a repair facility of your choice
when the light needs to be repaired or
replaced.

9-34 Vehicle care and maintenance

[Link] 35 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Replacement of light bulbs

Front fog lights (if so equipped)

N00943601816

1. Insert a straight blade (or minus) screw-

driver with a cloth over its tip into the
light cover (A) and pry gently to remove
it.

Type 1

4. Turn the bulb (F) counterclockwise to

NOTE remove it.
 When unfastening the screws, be careful not
to move the beam position adjustment screw
(C). 9

Type 2

5. To install the bulb, perform the removal

steps in reverse.

CAUTION
3. While holding down the tab (D), pull out  Handle halogen light bulb with care. The gas
2. Remove the screws (B) and remove the the socket (E). inside a halogen light bulb is highly pressur-
light unit. ized, so dropping, knocking, or scratching a
halogen light bulb can cause it to shatter.

Vehicle care and maintenance 9-35

 [Link] 36 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Replacement of light bulbs

CAUTION Rear combination lights NOTE

 Never hold the halogen light bulb with a bare N00943701530  The rear side-marker light, and the tail and
hand, dirty glove, etc. The oil from your 1. Remove the screws (A) that hold the light stop light uses an LED instead of the bulb.
hand could cause the bulb to break the next unit and remove the light unit. Check with an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
time the fog lights are used. dealer or a repair facility of your choice
If the glass surface is dirty, clean it with when the light needs to be repaired or
alcohol and let it dry completely before replaced.
installing the bulb.
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket.

9
2. Turn the socket and bulb assembly coun-
terclockwise to remove it.
Daytime running lights (if so
equipped)/parking lights (type
2) (if so equipped) 4. To install the bulb, perform the removal
N00902001071
steps in reverse.
NOTE
 The daytime running light/parking lights
(type 2) uses an LED instead of the bulb.
Check with an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer or a repair facility of your choice
when the light needs to be repaired or
replaced. B- Rear side-marker light, and tail and stop
light (LED)
- cannot be replaced
C- Rear turn signal light

9-36 Vehicle care and maintenance

[Link] 37 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Replacement of light bulbs

NOTE NOTE NOTE

 When mounting the light unit, align the  Wrap a cloth around the tip of the screw-  When installing the lid, align the tab on the
groove (D) on the light unit with the clip on driver to keep from scratching the cover. lid with the hole on the vehicle side.
the body and the pin (E) on the unit with the
hole in the body.
3. Turn the socket counterclockwise to
remove it.

License plate lights

N00944000386
9
Back-up lights 1. When removing the light unit (A), push it
N00929101077 toward the left side of the vehicle body.
1. Open the liftgate.
4. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
2. Insert a screwdriver into the notch of the
cover and pry gently to remove the cover.

5. To install the bulb, perform the removal

steps in reverse.

Vehicle care and maintenance 9-37

 [Link] 38 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Vehicle care precautions

2. Remove the socket (B) and bulb assembly 4. To install the bulb, perform the removal
by turning it counterclockwise. steps in reverse. Vehicle care precautions
N00945100166

NOTE In order to maintain the value of your vehicle,

 When mounting the light unit, insert tab (C) perform regular maintenance using the proper
first then align tab (D) with its hole. materials and procedures. Be sure to use only
those materials and procedures that meet your
local environmental pollution control regula-
tions. Choose the materials you will use care-
fully, to be sure that they do not contain
corrosives. If you are not sure, contact an
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for help
in choosing these materials.
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
9 CAUTION
 Cleaning products can be dangerous. Some
are poisonous and others are highly flamma-
ble. Some are dangerous if you breathe their
fumes in a closed space. When you use any-
thing in a container to clean your vehicle, be
High-mounted stop light sure to follow the instructions. Always open
N00943900102 your vehicle doors or windows when you’re
cleaning the inside. Never use the following
NOTE chemicals to clean your vehicle:
 The high-mounted stop light uses an LED • Gasoline
instead of the bulb. Check with an authorized • Carbon Tetrachloride
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility • Benzine
of your choice when the light needs to be • Kerosene
repaired or replaced. • Naphtha
• Acetone
• Turpentine
• Paint Thinner
• Lacquer Thinner

9-38 Vehicle care and maintenance

[Link] 39 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Cleaning the inside of your vehicle

Use a vacuum cleaner and brush to clean
CAUTION Plastic, vinyl leather, fabric and the seats. If stained, vinyl and synthetic
• Nail Polish Remover flocked parts leather should be cleaned with an appro-
These can all be dangerous, and they all can N00945300142 priate cleaner. Cloth fabrics can be
damage your vehicle. 1. Lightly wipe these off with a soft cloth cleaned with either upholstery cleaner or a
soaked in a 3% solution of gentle soap 3% solution of gentle soap in lukewarm
and water. water.
Cleaning the inside of your 2. To rinse, dip the cloth in fresh water, 2. Clean the carpeting with a vacuum
vehicle wring it out well, and wipe off all the cleaner and remove any stains with carpet
N00945200095
soap. cleaner. Oil and grease can be removed by
After washing the inside of your vehicle with lightly dabbing with a clean white cloth
any cleaner, wipe it dry in a shady, well venti- NOTE and spot remover.
lated area.  Do not use cleaners, conditioners, and pro-
tectants containing silicones or wax. NOTE
CAUTION Such products, when applied to the instru-
ment panels or other parts, may cause reflec-
 If fuzzing is difficult to remove from the seat 9
 Do not use organic substances (solvents, upholstery, draw a suitable defuzzing brush
tions on the windshield and obscure vision.
benzine, kerosene, alcohol, gasoline, etc.) or over the surface in one direction.
Also, if such products get on the switches of
alkaline or acidic solutions. the electrical accessories, it may lead to fail-
These chemicals can cause discoloring, ure of these accessories.
staining or cracking of the surface. Genuine leather (if so equipped)
If you use cleaners or polishing agents, make N00945600187
sure their ingredients do not include the sub-
stances mentioned above. Upholstery 1. To clean, lightly wipe the leather with a
N00945500128 soft cloth soaked in a 5% solution of gen-
1. To maintain the value of your new vehi- tle soap and water.
NOTE cle, maintain the upholstery carefully and 2. To rinse, dip the cloth in fresh water,
keep the interior clean. wring it out well, and wipe off all the
 Always read the instructions on the cleaner
label. soap.
3. To preserve and protect, use a leather pro-
tecting agent on the genuine leather sur-
face.

Vehicle care and maintenance 9-39

 [Link] 40 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Cleaning the outside of your vehicle

NOTE Foreign material CAUTION

 If genuine leather is wet with water, wipe it N00945800033  When washing the underside of your vehicle
with a dry, soft cloth. If left damp, mildew Industrial pollution, road tar, bird droppings, or the wheels, wear a pair of gloves to pro-
may grow. tect your hands.
tree sap, insect remains, sea water and other
 The genuine leather surface can be damaged  If your vehicle has rain sensor wipers, place
foreign matters can damage the finish on your
if brushed with a nylon or synthetic fiber the wiper switch lever in the “OFF” position
vehicle.
brush. to deactivate the rain sensor before washing
Generally, the longer any foreign material the vehicle. Otherwise, the wipers will oper-
 Organic solvents such as benzine, kerosene,
alcohol, gasoline, or acid or alkaline solvents stays on the finish, the worse the damage. ate in the presence of water spray on the
can discolor the genuine leather surface and Wash your vehicle as soon as possible when- windshield and may get damaged as a result.
should not be used. ever the finish gets soiled.  Never spray or splash water on the electrical
 Genuine leather can mildew if not kept parts in the engine compartment. This may
clean. Clean up any oil stains immediately. damage them. Be careful also when washing
Washing the underbody to ensure that water does not
 The genuine leather surface may harden and
N00945900597
shrink if it is exposed to the direct sunlight enter the engine compartment.
9 for long hours. When your vehicle is parked, Chemicals contained in the dirt and dust  Avoid automatic car washers that use rotat-
place it in the shade as much as possible. picked up from air, rain, snow, or road sur- ing brushes. These brushes may scratch the
 When the temperature of the vehicle interior faces can damage the paint and body of your paint surface and make it dull.
rises in summer, vinyl products left on the vehicle if left on. Scratches are more noticeable on darker col-
genuine leather seat may deteriorate and Frequent washing and waxing is the best way ored vehicles.
stick to the seat. to protect your vehicle from this damage.  Some hot water washing equipment uses
high pressure and heat to clean your vehicle.
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight.
Because hot water can damage plastics parts
Park the vehicle in the shade and spray it with
and seep inside your vehicle, make sure you
Cleaning the outside of your water to remove dust. Next, using plenty of do the following when using such equip-
clean water and a car washing mitt or sponge,
vehicle wash the vehicle from top to bottom.
ment:
N00945700058 • Keep the washing nozzle at least 28 inches
Use a mild car washing soap if necessary. (70 cm) away from the vehicle body.
To protect your vehicle’s finish, wash it often Rinse thoroughly and wipe dry with a cham- • When washing around the door glass, hold
and thoroughly. If desired, you may wax your ois or soft cloth. After washing the vehicle, the nozzle at a distance of more than 28
vehicle using a nonabrasive automobile wax. carefully clean the joints and flanges of the inches (70 cm) and at a right angle to the
doors, hood, etc., where dirt is likely to glass surface.
remain.

9-40 Vehicle care and maintenance

[Link] 41 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Cleaning the outside of your vehicle

CAUTION NOTE CAUTION

 Make sure to do the following when using an  When the door is frozen, opening it by force  Do not use gasoline, benzine, kerosene or
automatic car wash, with help from either may tear off or crack the rubber gasket paint thinners to remove road tar or other dirt
this manual or the car wash operator, to installed around the door. Pour warm water from the vehicle surface.
avoid damaging your vehicle: to melt the ice. Be sure to thoroughly wipe  Do not put wax on the areas having black
• Fold the outside rearview mirrors. off the water after opening the door. To pre- matte coating because it can cause uneven
• Remove the antenna. vent freezing of the weatherstripping on the discoloration, patches, blurs, etc. If these get
• Tape the wiper arm assembly. doors, hood, etc., treat with silicone lubri- wax on them, wipe the wax off right away
cant. with a soft cloth and warm water.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a rear
spoiler or roof rails, check with the car
wash operator before using the car wash. Polishing
• If your vehicle is equipped with the rain Waxing N00946100046
sensor wipers, place the wiper switch lever N00946000234
in the “OFF” position to deactivate the rain If painted surfaces have been severely dam-
Wax your vehicle once or twice a year, or aged and lost their original luster and color
sensor.
when water does not bead up on the paint. tone, polish the surface lightly with a fine 9
Use a soft cloth to put a small amount of wax polishing compound. Avoid limiting your
During cold weather on the painted surfaces. After the wax has polishing to the damaged surface only; polish
dried, polish with a dry soft cloth. a somewhat wider area, moving the polishing
Salt and other chemicals spread on winter Do not wax your vehicle in direct sunlight. cloth in one direction. After polishing, flush
roads in some geographical areas can have a You should wax when the painted surfaces the compound from the surface and apply a
detrimental effect on the vehicle underbody. are cool. coat of wax to regain a beautiful luster.
You should flush the underbody with a high
pressure hose every time you wash the out- CAUTION
side of your vehicle. Damaged paint
 Waxes containing high abrasive compounds
Take special care to remove mud or other should not be used. These waxes remove rust
N00946200047

debris which could trap and hold salt and and stain effectively from the paintwork, but Small cracks and scratches in the paint coat
moisture. are harmful to the finish of the paint, because should be touched up as soon as possible with
After washing your vehicle, wipe off all they also remove paint/clearcoat. touch-up paint to prevent corrosion.
waterdrops from the rubber parts around the They are also harmful to other glossy sur- Check body areas facing the road or the tires
doors to prevent the doors from freezing. faces such as the grille, trim, moldings, etc. carefully for damage to the paint caused by
flying stones, etc. The paint code number for
your vehicle can be found on the vehicle

Vehicle care and maintenance 9-41

 [Link] 42 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Cleaning the outside of your vehicle

information code plate in the engine compart-
ment.
Chrome parts Window glass
N00946400052 N00946600054

To prevent spots and corrosion of chrome The window glass can usually be cleaned
Cleaning plastic parts parts, wash with water, dry thoroughly, and using only a sponge and water. Glass cleaner
N00946300194
apply a nonabrasive automotive wax. If the can be used to remove wax, oil, grease, dead
Use a sponge or chamois to clean these parts. chrome is severely damaged or pitted, use a insects, etc. After washing the glass, wipe it
If a vehicle wax sticks to a gray or black commercially available chrome polish. dry with a clean, dry, soft cloth.
rough surface of the bumper, molding or
lights, the surface may appear white in color.
In this case, wipe it off using lukewarm water
Aluminum wheels (if so equipped) Wiper blades
N00946500183 N00946700068
and a soft cloth or chamois.
1. Remove dirt using a wet sponge. Use a soft cloth and glass cleaner to remove
2. Use a mild detergent on any dirt that can- grease, dead insects, etc., from the wiper
CAUTION not be removed easily with water. blades.
9  Do not use a scrubbing brush or other rough
scrubber as these may damage the plastic
Rinse off the detergent after washing the Replace the wiper blades when they no longer
surface.
wheel. clean the windshield and rear window prop-
 Do not use wax containing compounds (pol-
3. Dry the wheel thoroughly using a chamois erly.
ishing powder) which may damage the plas- leather or a soft cloth.
tic surface. Engine compartment
 Do not let plastic parts get soiled with gaso- CAUTION N00947000071
line, oil, brake fluids, engine oils, greases,
 Do not use a brush or other hard implement Never spray or splash water on the electrical
paint thinner, and sulfuric acid (battery elec-
on the wheels. accessories in the engine compartment. This
trolyte), as such substances will cause stains,
 Do not use any cleaner that contains an abra- puts the engine at risk of being damaged.
cracks, or discoloration.
sive substance or is acidic or alkaline. Doing
If any of these get on a plastic part, wipe Do not bring the circumferential parts, the
so could cause the coating on the wheels to
them up with a soft cloth or chamois and a plastic parts and so on into contact with sulfu-
peel or become discolored or stained.
mild solution of soap and water. Then rinse ric acid (battery electrolyte) which may
them immediately with water.  Do not directly apply hot water using a steam
cleaner or by any other means. crack, stain or discolor them.
 Contact with seawater or road salt used for If they are in contact, wipe off with soft cloth,
de-icing can cause corrosion. Rinse off such chamois or the like and an aqueous solution
substances as soon as possible. of neutral detergent then immediately rinse
the affected parts with plenty of water.

9-42 Vehicle care and maintenance

[Link] 1 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects

Consumer information (For vehicles sold in U.S.A.) ....................10-2

Reporting Safety Defects ...............................................................10-2
Important facts to know in case of an accident ..............................10-4

10
 [Link] 2 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Consumer information (For vehicles sold in U.S.A.)

their use, however, and may depart signifi- material of the tire to degenerate and reduce
Consumer information (For cantly from the norm due to variations in tire life, and excessive temperature can lead
vehicles sold in U.S.A.) driving habits, service practices and differ- to sudden tire failure. The grade C corre-
N01047100171 ences in road characteristics and climate. sponds to a level of performance which all
This information is provided in compliance passenger car tires must meet under the Fed-
eral Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
with the requirements of the National High- Traction AA, A, B, C Grades B and A represent higher levels of
way Traffic Safety Administration, Depart-
ment of Transportation. It provides the performance on the laboratory test wheel than
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, the minimum required by law.
purchasers and/or prospective purchasers
are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent
with information on reporting safety defects.
the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as
measured under controlled conditions on WARNING
 The temperature grade for this tire is
Uniform tire quality grading specified government test surfaces of asphalt
established for a tire that is properly
and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
inflated and not overloaded. Excessive
DOT quality grades - All passenger vehicle traction performance. speed, underinflation, or excessive load-
tires must conform to Federal Safety Require- ing, either separately or in combination,
10 ments in addition to these grades. The spe- WARNING can cause heat buildup and possible tire
failure.
cific grade rating in each grade category is  The traction grade assigned to this tire is
shown on the side wall of the tires on your based on straight-ahead braking traction
vehicle. tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction Reporting Safety Defects
characteristics.
Treadwear N01047201502

If you believe that your vehicle has a

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating Temperature A, B, C defect which could cause a crash or
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested could cause injury or death, you
under controlled conditions on a specified should immediately inform the
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B
government test course. For example, a tire
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the National Highway Traffic Safety
graded 150 would wear one and one-half
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate Administration (NHTSA) in addi-
(11/2) times as well on the government course heat when tested under controlled conditions
tion to notifying Mitsubishi Motors
as a tire graded 100. The relative performance on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
of tires depends upon the actual conditions of Sustained high temperature can cause the North America, Inc.

10-2 Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects

[Link] 3 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Reporting Safety Defects

If NHTSA receives similar com- For vehicles sold in U.S.A. To contact Mitsubishi Motor Sales of
plaints, it may open an investigation, Canada, Inc. call 1-888-576-4878 or
and if it finds that a safety defect To contact Mitsubishi Motors North write to:
exists in a group of vehicles, it may America, Inc. call 1-888-648-7820 or
order a recall and remedy campaign. Mitsubishi Motor Sales of Can-
write to: ada, Inc.
However, NHTSA cannot become
involved in individual problems Mitsubishi Motors North Amer- Customer Relations Department
between you, your dealer, or Mit- ica, Inc. P.O. Box 41009
subishi Motors North America, Inc. Customer Relations Department 4141 Dixie Road
P.O. Box 6400 Mississauga, ON L4W 5C9
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Cypress, CA 90630-0064
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-
888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424- For vehicles sold in Puerto Rico
9153); go to
For vehicles sold in Canada
[Link] or write to: To contact Mitsubishi Motor Sales of 10
If you live in Canada, and you Caribbean, Inc.
NHTSA Headquarters
believe that your vehicle has a safety call 1-787-251-8715 or write to:
1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE
West Building defect, you should immediately Mitsubishi Motor Sales of Carib-
Washington, DC 20590 notify Transport Canada, in addition bean, Inc.
to notifying Mitsubishi Motor Sales Customer Service Department
You can also obtain other informa- of Canada, Inc. You may write to: P.O. Box 192216
tion about motor vehicle safety from SAN JUAN PR 00919-2216
[Link] Transport Canada
330 Sparks Street
Tower C
Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5 For vehicles sold in Guam

To contact Triple J Enterprises Inc.

Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects 10-3
 [Link] 4 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Important facts to know in case of an accident

call (671)649-3673 or write to:  Ask for genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts.
Important facts to know in Many times, to save money, your insur-
Triple J Enterprises, Inc. case of an accident ance company will recommend imitation
P.O. Box 6066 N01047300098 parts that do not meet the original specifi-
We hope you will never be involved in an cations of fit, finish, corrosion resistance
TAMUNING or workmanship.
GUAM 96931 accident, but there is always that potential
danger. So, please be sure to buckle up and
drive safely. Mitsubishi Motors built-in pro-
tection
For vehicles sold in Saipan In the event of an accident
The strength and integrity built into your
To contact Triple J Motors  Remain calm. Mitsubishi vehicle is the result of a specific
call (670)234-7133 or write to:  Check for injuries. Report all injuries to design referred to as “Energy Management”.
the police, and, if necessary, call for an Individual body parts are designed to act as
Triple J Motors ambulance. one unit in the event of an accident. Shock
 Record all the details of the accident. This
10 P.O. Box 500487 will provide you with accurate records of
waves are absorbed by protective panels or
SAIPAN, MP96950-0487 are channeled around the passenger compart-
the accident for discussions with your ment. This important feature is possible
insurance company and other persons because high tensile steel is used in
who may be acting on your behalf. Mitsubishi panels and structural parts, some-
For vehicles sold in American thing that cannot be guaranteed by the manu-
Samoa Key information to discuss with facturers of imitation parts. All Genuine
your insurance company Mitsubishi body panels and support brackets
are designed and constructed as important
To contact Pacific Marketing Inc. protection features in the event of an acci-
 Understand your repair estimate before
call 684(699)9140 or write to: approving repairs. dent. By replacing body parts with imitations,
 Choosing the repair shop and the brands your vehicle may no longer meet original
Pacific Marketing, Inc. of parts that they use on your vehicle is equipment specifications.
P.O. Box 698 your decision.
PAGO PAGO,
AMERICAN SAMOA AS, 96799
10-4 Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects
[Link] 5 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Important facts to know in case of an accident

Remember to ask for genuine Mitsubishi
Consumer rights (For vehicles Motors parts.
sold in U.S.A.)

As a consumer requesting repair on your

vehicle, you have consumer rights. Across the
country, State Insurance Commissioners have
begun considering rules on the use of non-
OEM parts. This could mean that repair shops
will have to disclose to the consumer, when
they intend to use non-OEM parts. Since reg-
ulations are not consistent on this point,
remember you have a choice. So, if you want
genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts, you may
have to specifically request them. Make cer-
tain your insurance company understands
imitations are not to be used in the repair of 10
your vehicle. You deserve the best genuine
Mitsubishi Motors parts.

Genuine Mitsubishi Motors

parts

Genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts are built

with the high quality and durability standards
you expect. Genuine Mitsubishi Motors
replacements parts are your guarantee that
your vehicle will have all the technological
advantages and maintain the style and protec-
tion of a brand new Mitsubishi Motors.

Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects 10-5

[Link] 6 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分
[Link] 1 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Specifications

Vehicle labeling .............................................................................11-2

Vehicle dimensions ........................................................................11-3
Vehicle weights ..............................................................................11-3
Engine specifications .....................................................................11-4
Battery ............................................................................................11-4
Tires and wheels ............................................................................11-5
Capacity .........................................................................................11-5

11
 [Link] 2 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Vehicle labeling

Vehicle labeling 2 - Vehicle identification num- 4 - Vehicle information code

N01147401752 ber plate plate (For vehicles sold in Mex-
Keep a record of the chassis number and ico)
vehicle identification number. Such informa- The vehicle identification number is stamped
tion will assist police if your vehicle is stolen. on the plate riveted to the left front corner of The vehicle information code plate is located
the vehicle body. It is visible from outside of on the front passenger door sill.
the vehicle through the windshield.

Engine serial number

3 - Air conditioning label
The engine serial number is stamped on the
The air conditioning label is affixed on the cylinder block as shown in the illustration.
inside panel of the engine hood.

11
1 - Vehicle emission control
information label

The vehicle emission control information

label is affixed on the underside of the engine *- Front of the vehicle
hood.

Tire and loading information

placard
N01148100603

The tire and loading information placard is

located on the driver’s door sill.

11-2 Specifications
[Link] 3 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Vehicle dimensions

Certification label Overall width 69.7 in (1,770 mm)

N01148200167 Without
64.2 in (1,630 mm)
The certification label is located on the Overall roof rails
driver’s door sill. height With roof
64.6 in (1,640 mm)
rails
Wheel base 105.1 in (2,670 mm)

Vehicle dimensions 11
N01147500479

Overall length 169.1 in (4,295 mm)

Vehicle weights
N01147600858

Gross vehicle weight rating 4,343 lb (1,970 kg)

Front 2,271 lb (1,030 kg)
Gross axle weight rating
Rear 2,205 lb (1,000 kg)
Vehicle capacity weight 827 lb (375 kg)

Specifications 11-3
 [Link] 4 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Engine specifications
Maximum roof load 176 lb (80 kg)
Seating capacity 5 persons

NOTE
 Roof load is important because it affects the vehicle capacity weight. Refer to “Loading cargo on the roof” on page 6-11.

GVWR: maximum total weight (load) limit specified for the vehicle
GAWR: maximum weight (load) limit specified for the front or rear axle
Seating capacity: the maximum number of occupants

Engine specifications
N01147701537

Item 2.0 liter models 2.4 liter models

Engine model 4B11 4B12

11 Engine displacement 121.9 CID (1,998 cm³) 144.0 CID (2,360 cm³)
No. of cylinders and cylinder arrangement 4 in line
Bore 3.39 in (86.0 mm) 3.46 in (88.0 mm)
Stroke 3.39 in (86.0 mm) 3.82 in (97.0 mm)
Compression ratio 10.0 10.5
Thermostat valve opening temperature 189 °F (87 °C)
Spark plugs NGK DIFR6C11 DIFR5C11
Spark plug gap .040 to .043 in (1.0 to 1.1 mm)
Firing order 1-3-4-2

BCI Group No.35 (530CCA/118RC) Battery is a 12 volt type.

Battery
N01147800283

11-4 Specifications
[Link] 5 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Tires and wheels

PCD: Pitch Circle Diameter (installation
Tires and wheels holes)
N01147901773

Tire
P215/70R16 P225/55R18 NOTE
99H 97H  Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
Size 16 x 6 1/2J 18 x 7J dealer for details on the combination used on
your vehicle.
PCD 4.5 in (114.3 mm)  These tires satisfy vehicle loading conditions
Wheel
Off- described in this owner’s manual.
1.81 in (46 mm)
set

Capacity
N01148002156

Item Capacity Lubricants

Fuel Front-wheel drive vehicles 15.3 gal (58 L)
Refer to “Fuel selection” on page 3-2.
(approximate) All-wheel drive vehicles 15.8 gal (60 L)
Vehicles with Oil pan 4.2 qt (4.0 L) 11
manual trans-
axle Oil filter .32 qt (0.3 L) Engine oils displaying the ILSAC certification mark (“star-
burst” symbol) on the container.
Engine oil Vehicles with Oil pan 4.5 qt (4.3 L) If these oils are not available, API classification SN or higher
continuously can be used.
variable trans- Oil filter .32 qt (0.3 L)
mission (CVT)
Mitsubishi Motors Genuine NEW MULTI GEAR OIL API
Manual transaxle 2.6 qt (2.5 L)
classification GL-3 SAE 75W-80
Continuously 2.0 liter models 7.3 qt (6.9 L)
Refer to “Continuously variable transmission (CVT) fluid” on
variable trans-
2.4 liter models 7.5 qt (7.1 L) page 9-10.
mission (CVT)

Specifications 11-5
 [Link] 6 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Capacity
Item Capacity Lubricants
Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Super Hypoid Gear Oil API classi-
Transfer oil .53 qt (0.5 L)
fication GL-5 SAE 80
Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Super Hypoid Gear Oil API classi-
Differential Rear axle .42 qt (0.4 L)
fication GL-5 SAE 80
Brake/Clutch (if so equipped) As required Conforming to Brake fluid DOT3 or DOT4
Hood lock release mechanism and safety catch As required Multipurpose type grease NLGI Grade 2
Engine coolant Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Super Long Life Coolant Premium
7.9 qt (7.5 L)
{Includes .69 qt (0.65 L) in reserve tank} or equivalent*
Washer fluid 4.8 qt (4.5 L) —
Refer to the “Air con-
Refrigerant (air conditioning) ditioning label” on HFC-134a
page 11-2.

*: similar high quality ethylene glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrate and non-borate coolant with long life hybrid organic acid tech-
11 nology

11-6 Specifications
[Link] 1 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Alphabetical index
Automatic transaxle Break-in recommendations .................... 5-3
Numerics Fluid ............................................. 11-5 Bulb capacity...................................... 9-29
4-wheel drive operation ....................... 5-58
B C
A Back-up light California Perchlorate Materials
Accessory (installation) ......................... 3-6 Bulb capacity ................................. 9-29 Requirements ..................................... 3-6
Replacement .................................. 9-37
Active stability control (ASC) .............. 5-68 Capacities .......................................... 11-5
Ball joint, steering linkage seals and drive
Air bag .............................................. 4-26 Card holder ...................................... 5-156
shaft boots ....................................... 9-23
Air cleaner filter ................................... 9-8 Cargo area cover............................... 5-164
Battery .............................................. 9-12
Air conditioning Charging system warning light ....... 5-117 Cargo loads ........................................ 6-10
Automatic air conditioning ..... 7-14, 7-19 Disconnection and connection ......... 9-12 Cargo room light
Important air conditioning operating tips.. During cold weather ....................... 9-12 Bulb capacity ................................. 9-31
7-24 Specification.................................. 11-4 Catalytic converter ................................ 9-2
Manual air conditioning ............. 7-4, 7-9
Bluetooth 2.0 interface....................... 5-133 Cautions on the handling of all-wheel drive
Air purifier......................................... 7-25
Bottle holders.................................... 5-164 vehicles............................................ 5-61
Aluminum wheels ............................... 9-42
Brake CD player........................................... 7-25
AM/FM radio ..................................... 7-25 Fluid ............................................. 11-5
Antenna
Certification label ............................... 11-3 12
Brake assist system............................. 5-64 Charging system warning light ........... 5-117
Roof antenna .................................. 7-58
Braking ............................................... 6-5 Child restraint systems ........................ 4-18
Anti-lock braking system..................... 5-64 Anti-lock braking system ................ 5-64
Hose ............................................. 9-23 Child safety locks for rear door ............ 5-31
Arm rest............................................... 4-7
Pad wear alarm .............................. 5-62 Cleaning
Assist grip ........................................ 5-165
Parking brake................................. 5-39 Inside of your vehicle...................... 9-39
Audio Pedal............................................. 5-62 Outside of your vehicle ................... 9-40
AM/FM radio ................................. 7-25 Pedal free play ............................... 9-20 Clutch
CD player ...................................... 7-25 Power brakes ................................. 5-62 Pedal free play................................ 9-20
Troubleshooting ............................. 7-56 Service brake ................................. 5-62
Coat hook......................................... 5-165
Automatic air conditioning ......... 7-14, 7-19 Warning lights .............................. 5-116
Consumer information......................... 10-2

12-1
 [Link] 2 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Alphabetical index
Continuously variable transmission (CVT).... Power steering fluid ........................ 11-5
5-49 E Washer fluid ......................... 9-11, 11-5
Fluid .................................... 9-10, 11-5 Electric rear window defogger switch.. 5-131 Fluid capacities and lubricants ............. 11-5
Selector lever operation................... 5-49
Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting Free-hand advanced security transmitter
Selector lever positions ................... 5-52
system) ..................................... 5-4, 5-23 (F.A.S.T.-key) .................................. 5-11
Sports mode ................................... 5-53
Electronically controlled 4WD system .. 5-56 Front fog lights
Coolant (engine) .......................... 9-7, 11-5
Emission-control system maintenance ... 9-21 Bulb capacity ................................. 9-29
Cruise control..................................... 5-70 Indicators..................................... 5-116
Engine
Cup holder ....................................... 5-163 Replacement .................................. 9-35
Compartment................................... 9-5
Switch ......................................... 5-126
Coolant ................................... 9-7, 11-5
D Hood............................................... 9-3 Front seat adjustment ............................ 4-3
Daytime running lights Oil and oil filter ....................... 9-5, 11-5 Front side-marker lights
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-29 Overheating..................................... 8-4 Bulb capacity ................................. 9-29
Replacement .................................. 9-36 Serial number ................................. 11-2 Replacement .................................. 9-33
Specification................................... 11-4 Front turn signal light
Defogger (rear window) .................... 5-131
Engine coolant temperature display....... 5-90 Bulb capacity ................................. 9-29
Defrosting or defogging (windshield, door
Engine hood ........................................ 9-3 Replacement .................................. 9-34
windows) ................. 7-8, 7-13, 7-18, 7-23
Engine switch ..................................... 5-16 Fuel
12 Dimensions ........................................ 11-3
Filling the fuel tank........................... 3-3
Dimmer (high/low beam change) ....... 5-123 Exhaust system ................................... 9-23
Fuel economy................................... 6-2
Disc brake pads .................................. 9-23 Fuel hoses...................................... 9-22
Dome light F Fuel selection ................................... 3-2
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-31 Floor console box.............................. 5-162 Tank capacity................................. 11-5

Doors Floor mat............................................. 6-3 Fuses ................................................. 9-24

Lock.............................................. 5-28 Fluid Fusible links....................................... 9-24
Power door locks ............................ 5-30 Automatic transaxle fluid................. 11-5
Driving during cold weather .................. 6-5 Brake fluid ..................................... 11-5 G
Driving precaution ................................ 6-2 Continuously variable transmission (CVT)
General maintenance
fluid.................................... 9-10, 11-5
Driving, alcohol and drugs..................... 6-2 Maintenance................................... 9-22
Engine coolant ......................... 9-7, 11-5
12-2
[Link] 3 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Alphabetical index
General vehicle data............................ 11-3 Important facts to know in case of an accident Link System ..................................... 5-132
Genuine parts ....................................... 3-6 10-4 Loading information.............................. 6-7
Glove compartment........................... 5-161 Indicators ......................................... 5-115 Lubricants .......................................... 11-5
Information screen display .................. 5-81 Luggage hooks ................................. 5-166
H Inside rearview mirror......................... 5-41
Hazard warning flasher switch ........... 5-126 Inspection and maintenance following rough M
road operation .................................. 5-60
Hazard warning lights ....................... 5-115 Malfunction indicator light ................ 5-116
Instrument cluster............................... 5-83
Head restraints...................................... 4-7 Manual air conditioning.................. 7-4, 7-9
Interior lights .................................... 5-157
Headlight leveling switch .................. 5-125 Manual transaxle................................. 5-47
Headlights Oil................................................. 9-10
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-29 J Shift points (recommended speed).... 5-48
Dimmer ....................................... 5-123 Jack Modification of your vehicle .................. 3-5
Headlight flasher .......................... 5-123 Storage............................................ 8-5 Multi-information display .................... 5-81
Replacement ......................... 9-31, 9-32 Jump-starting the engine ....................... 8-2
Switch ......................................... 5-119
High beam indicator.......................... 5-116
O
K Octane rating ........................................ 3-2
High-mount stop light
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-29
Key slot............................................. 5-21 Oil 12
Keyless entry system .................... 5-7, 5-24 Engine oil ............................... 9-5, 11-5
Hill start assist .................................... 5-63
Keys ................................................... 5-3 Manual transaxle oil........................ 9-10
Hood lock release mechanism and safety Rear axle oil .......................... 9-11, 11-5
catch................................................ 9-23 Transfer oil ........................... 9-11, 11-5
Horn switch...................................... 5-132 L Operation mode .................................. 5-16
Labeling ............................................ 11-2
Operation under adverse driving conditions..
I License plate light 8-13
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-29
If the vehicle breaks down ..................... 8-2 Outside rearview mirrors ..................... 5-42
Replacement .................................. 9-37
Ignition switch.................................... 5-44 Overheating.......................................... 8-4
Liftgate ............................................. 5-31
Inside liftgate release ...................... 5-33

12-3
 [Link] 4 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Alphabetical index
Replacement................................... 9-36 Front seats ....................................... 4-3
P Rear side-marker lights Head restraints ................................. 4-7
Parking ................................................ 6-6 Bulb capacity.................................. 9-29 Heated seat ...................................... 4-6
Parking brake break-in .................... 9-21 Replacement................................... 9-36 Seats and restraint systems ................ 4-2
Parking brake lever stroke ............... 9-21 Rear turn signal light Service brake...................................... 5-62
Parking brake ..................................... 5-39 Bulb capacity.................................. 9-29 Service precautions ............................... 9-2
Parking lights (type 1) Replacement................................... 9-36 Side turn signal light
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-29 Rear-view camera ............................... 5-79 Bulb capacity ................................. 9-29
Replacement .................................. 9-33 Rearview mirror Replacement .................................. 9-34
Parking lights (type 2) Inside rearview mirror ..................... 5-41 Snow tires .......................................... 9-20
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-29 Outside rearview mirrors ................. 5-42 Spark plugs ........................................ 9-22
Replacement .................................. 9-36 Replacement of light bulbs................... 9-29 Starting the engine .............................. 5-45
Polishing............................................ 9-41 Replacing tires and wheels ................... 9-18 Steering
Power brakes...................................... 5-62 Reporting Safety Defects ..................... 10-2 Power steering fluid ........................ 11-5
Power outlet ..................................... 5-157 Steering wheel height and reach adjustment
5-41
Power steering S
Fluid ............................................. 11-5 Stop lights
Safe driving techniques......................... 6-4
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-29
12 Power windows .................................. 5-36
Seat belt ............................................. 4-11 Replacement .................................. 9-36
Puncture (Tire changing) ....................... 8-5 Adjustable seat belt shoulder anchor . 4-16
Storage spaces .................................. 5-161
Child restraint systems..................... 4-18
Sun visors ........................................ 5-156
R Front passenger seat belt warning light.....
4-16 Sunshade ........................................... 5-38
Radio
Maintenance and inspection ............. 4-25 Supplemental Restraint System ............ 4-26
General information about your radio 7-59
Seat belt extender............................ 4-17 How the Supplemental Restraint System
Reading lights Seat belt force limitter ..................... 4-18 works .......................................... 4-28
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-31 Seat belt pre-tensioners.................... 4-17 Maintenance service ....................... 4-41
Rear axle oil.............................. 9-11, 11-5 Seat belt use during pregnancy ......... 4-17
Rear combination lights Seats ................................................... 4-2
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-29 Arm rest .......................................... 4-7

12-4
[Link] 5 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Alphabetical index
Wheel
T U Covers ........................................... 8-11
Tail light USB input terminal............................ 5-153 Specification .................................. 11-5
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-29 How to connect an iPod ................. 5-154 Wiper
Replacement .................................. 9-36 USB input terminal device Rear window wiper ....................... 5-130
Tank capacity ..................................... 11-5 How to connect a USB memory...... 5-153 Switch ......................................... 5-127
Wiper blades .................................. 9-21
Theft-alarm system ............................. 5-33
Tire ................................................... 9-13 V
Inflation pressure ............................ 9-17 Vanity mirror .................................... 5-156
Maintenance................................... 9-18
Vanity mirror lights
Quality grading............................... 10-2
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-31
Replacing tires and wheels............... 9-18
Rotation ......................................... 9-19 Vehicle care precautions ..................... 9-38
Size (tire and wheel) ....................... 11-5 Vehicle dimensions ............................ 11-3
Snow tires ...................................... 9-20 Vehicle labeling ................................. 11-2
To change a tire ................................ 8-5
Tread wear indicator ....................... 9-18 Vehicle preparation before driving ......... 6-4
Tire pressure monitoring system........... 5-75 Vehicle weights.................................. 11-3
Tires Vents .................................................. 7-2
12
Tire and loading information placard 11-2
Tire chains ..................................... 9-20 W
Tools ................................................... 8-5 Warning lights .................................. 5-116
Storage ............................................ 8-5
Washer
Towing .............................................. 8-12 Fluid ..................................... 9-11, 11-5
Trailer towing..................................... 6-12 Rear window washer ..................... 5-130
Transfer oil ............................... 9-11, 11-5 Switch.......................................... 5-130
Turn signal light Washing ............................................ 9-40
Indicators ..................................... 5-115 Waxing ............................................. 9-41
Lever ........................................... 5-125 Weights ............................................. 11-3

12-5
 . 1 ページ ２０１４年１０月２日 曜日 午前１１時２ 分

How to calculate your gasoline mileage

You can calculate your miles-per-gallon or kilometers-per-litre 3. Refill the fuel tank. Record the odometer mileage again,
by using the following process: as well as the gallons/litres of fuel used.
4. Subtract the first mileage number from the second number
1. Fill your vehicle’s fuel tank and record the odometer mile- to know how many miles/kilometers were driven. Divide
age. the number of miles/kilometers driven by the number of
2. Drive your vehicle as you normally do. gallons/litres of fuel used. This is your approximate miles-
per-gallon or kilometers-per-litre.

Gas mileage record Gas mileage record

Gallons Cost Per Miles Per Gallon/Kilo- Gallons Cost Per Miles Per Gallon/Kilo-
Cost meters Per Litre Cost meters Per Litre
Date Odometer /Litres Gallon This Fill (Miles/Gals.)/(Kilome- Date Odometer /Litres Gallon This Fill (Miles/Gals.)/(Kilome-
This Fill /Litre This Fill /Litre
ters/Litres) ters/Litres)
[Link] 1 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

Introduction Throughout this manual the words WARNING and CAUTION

N09200102055 appear.
Thank you for buying a MITSUBISHI OUTLANDER SPORT/RVR. These are reminders to be especially careful. Failure to follow the
instructions could result in personal injury or damage to your vehi-
We are confident you will enjoy your vehicle. It has been engineered cle.
for optimum performance, durability and comfort. By thoroughly
reading this Owner’s Manual, you will gain an understanding of the
many features that are included in the OUTLANDER SPORT/RVR. Indicates a strong possibility of severe personal injury or death if
The Owner’s Manual contains descriptions and illustrations that will instructions are not followed.
assist in the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.

Your Authorized Mitsubishi Motors Dealer will be happy to assist you

with any further questions you may have regarding the operation of Points out hazards or unsafe practices that could cause minor
your vehicle. personal injury or damage to your vehicle.
Please note that this manual applies to all OUTLANDER SPORT/RVR You will see another important symbol:
models and explains all features including options. Some features NOTE Gives helpful information.
explained in this manual may not be installed on your vehicle.
As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle cor-
Please leave this Owner’s Manual in the vehicle at the time of resale. rectly may result in loss of control or an accident. Be sure to read
The next owner will appreciate having access to the information con- “on-pavement” and “off-road” driving guidelines in the “Driving
tained here. safety” and “Features and controls” sections.

This manual includes instructions for standard and optional equipment

available at the time of printing. Mitsubishi Motors Corporation WARNING
reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications and to  Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle compo-
make additions or improvements in its product without assuming any nents contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects and reproductive harm. In addition,
obligation to install these on previously manufactured products.
certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of compo-
nent wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of Califor-
nia to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.

This vehicle is manufactured by Mitsubishi Motors North America,

Inc. in U.S.A. under license from Mitsubishi Motors Corporation.

©2014 Mitsubishi Motors Corporation Printed in U.S.A

[Link] 1 ページ ２０１４年１０月３日 金曜日 午前９時２５分

N09348201058

NOTE
Name of Owner Date of Purchase

Address of Owner Model of Vehicle

Name and Address of Dealer Vehicle Identification Number

Maintenance record

Kilometers
Service Performed Date Inspection and Maintenance Item
Miles